Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

00.10.00 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2001 03.58.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.58.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 02.2002
01.01.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 02.2002 03.61.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.10.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.64.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.10.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.67.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.10.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.71.01 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
01.10.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.72.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.10.09 & 10 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.74.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.19.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 03.75.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.20.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 09.2001 03.77.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.20.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 09.2001 03.78.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.20.05 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 09.2001
01.50.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 04.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.50.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 04.05.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.50.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 04.05.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.50.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 04.10.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
01.50.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 04.10.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001

02.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 05.00.00 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000

02.01.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 05.20.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.01.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 05.20.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.01.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 05.20.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.01.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 05.20.07 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.01.09 & 10 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
02.01.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 09.2001 06.50.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 11.2000
02.02.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.61.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
02.02.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.61.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.02.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.61.05 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.03.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.62.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
02.03.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.62.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.03.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.62.05 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.03.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.63.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
02.05.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.63.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.05.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.63.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.05.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.64.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
02.06.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.64.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.06.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.64.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.06.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.65.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 09.2001
02.06.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.65.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.07.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.65.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
02.07.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.66.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
02.08.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.66.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000
02.08.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.66.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000
02.08.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.67.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.12.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.67.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.14.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.67.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.15.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.67.07 & 08 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.16.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 01.2001 06.67.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
02.18.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.67.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2000
06.67.13 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000
03.50.00 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 07.1998 06.68.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
03.51.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.68.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
03.52.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.68.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
03.54.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 06.68.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
03.55.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
03.57.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
03.57.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 02.2002

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

06.68.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 06.87.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 12.2001
06.68.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 06.87.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2001
06.68.13 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000 06.87.05 . . . . . . X ....... ..... 06.1998
06.69.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 06.87.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2001
06.69.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 06.87.14 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2001
06.69.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 02.2002 06.87.15 & 16 . . ........ X .... 12.2001
06.69.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 02.2002
06.69.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 10.2001 07.00.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 11.2001
06.71.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.05.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.05.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.05.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.07 & 08 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.06.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.06.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.06.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 12.2000
06.71.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.08.01 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 07.1998
06.75.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000 07.08.03 & 04 . . ........ ..... 10.1998
06.75.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000 07.08.05 & 06 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
06.75.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000 07.08.07 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 11.1998
06.75.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 11.2000 07.08.11 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 02.2002
06.75.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 11.2000 07.08.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 02.2002
06.75.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 11.2000 07.08.15 & 16 . . ........ X .... 02.2002
06.75.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 11.2000 07.10.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.75.15 & 16 . . ........ X .... 11.2000 07.10.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.75.17 & 18 . . ........ X .... 11.2000 07.10.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.11.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.11.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.11.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.11.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.09 & 10 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.12.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.11 & 12 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000 07.12.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 10.2000 07.12.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.77.15 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 03.2002 07.12.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
07.12.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.13.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 07.13.03 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.05 . . . . . . X ....... ..... 07.1998 07.14.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.14.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.14.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.14.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.15 . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.14.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
06.81.17 & 18 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.17.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 03.2002
07.17.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 03.2002
06.85.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.17.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 03.2002
06.85.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 07.17.07 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 03.2002
06.85.05 . . . . . . X ....... ..... 12.2001 07.18.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
06.85.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 12.2001 07.18.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
06.85.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.18.05 & 06 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
06.85.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.18.07 & 08 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
06.85.15 . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2001 07.18.09 & 10 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
06.85.17 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2001 07.19.01 & 02 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.19.03 & 04 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.19.05 & 06 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.19.07 & 08 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
Underlined pages are joined as A3 size at the 07.19.09 & 10 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
end of each group. 07.19.11 & 12 . . ........ ..... 07.1998

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.02

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

07.19.13 & 14 . . ........ ..... 10.1999 07.61.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.19.15 & 16 . . ........ ..... 07.1998 07.61.03 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.19.17 & 18 . . ........ ..... 07.1998 07.62.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.19.19 & 20 . . ........ ..... 07.1998 07.62.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.19.21 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 07.1998 07.62.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.62.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.20.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.63.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.21.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.63.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.21.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.63.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.21.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.64.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.21.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.65.01 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 09.1998
07.23.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001
07.23.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2000
07.23.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.03 & 04 . . ........ ..... 06.1999
07.23.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.05 & 06 . . ........ ..... 06.1999
07.23.11 & 12 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.66.07 & 08 . . ........ ..... 06.1999
07.23.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.66.09 & 10 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.23.15 & 16 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.66.11 & 12 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.23.17 & 18 . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.66.13 & 14 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.23.19 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 12.2000 07.66.15 & 16 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.25.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.17 & 18 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.25.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.19 & 20 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.25.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.66.21 & 22 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.28.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 07.66.23 & 24 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.28.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 07.66.25 & 26 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.28.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 12.2000 07.66.27 & 28 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.66.29 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.66.31 & 32 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.66.33 & 34 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.05 & 06 . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.66.35 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.07 & 08 . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.66.41 & 42 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.09 & 10 . . X ....... ..... 02.2002 07.66.43 & 44 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.30.11 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 02.2000 07.66.45 & 46 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.31.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 03.2001 07.66.47 & 48 . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.34.01 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 10.2001 07.66.49 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 11.2000
07.35.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.68.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.36.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.68.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.37.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.68.05 & 06 . . ........ ..... 06.1999
07.38.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.68.07 & 08 . . ........ ..... 06.1999
07.39.01 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 10.2001 07.72.01 & 02 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.72.03 & 04 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.42.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.72.05 & 06 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.42.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.72.07 & 08 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.43.01 & 02 . . ........ ..... 09.1999 07.72.09 & 10 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.43.03 & 04 . . ........ ..... 09.1999 07.72.11 & 12 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.46.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.72.13 & 14 . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.46.03 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.72.15 . . . . . . . ........ ..... 07.1998
07.47.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.73.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2001
07.47.03 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 09.2001 07.73.03 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 10.2001
07.48.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.75.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
07.48.03 . . . . . . . X ....... ..... 10.2001 07.75.03 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 10.2000
07.77.01 & 02 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
07.77.03 & 04 . . ........ X .... 10.2000
07.77.05 . . . . . . . ........ X .... 10.2000
07.98.01 & 02 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001
07.98.03 & 04 . . X ....... ..... 10.2001

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.03

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

08.50.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 06.00 08.81.41 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00

08.55.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.43 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.45 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.47 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.49 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.09 & 10 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.51 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.11 & 12 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 08.81.53 ....... ........ X ...... 12.00
08.55.13 & 14 . . X ....... ....... 12.00
08.55.15 & 16 . . ........ X ...... 12.00 08.85.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 11.01
08.55.17 & 18 . . ........ X ...... 12.00 08.85.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 11.01
08.55.19 & 20 . . ........ X ...... 12.01 08.85.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 11.01
08.55.21 & 22 . . ........ X ...... 12.01 08.85.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.56.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 07.99 08.85.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.56.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 07.99 08.85.11 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.85.13 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.85.15 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.71.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.85.17 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.71.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.85.19 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.71.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.85.21 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.71.09 & 10 . . X ....... ....... 11.01
08.71.11 & 12 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 11.01
08.71.13 & 14 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 11.01
08.71.15 & 16 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.05 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 11.01
08.71.17 & 18 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.19 & 20 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.21 & 22 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.11 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.23 & 24 . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.87.13 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.25 & 26 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.15 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.71.27 & 28 . . X ....... ....... 11.01 08.87.17 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.71.29 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 02.02 08.87.19 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.74.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 11.01 08.87.21 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.74.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 11.01
08.74.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 11.01 08.95.01 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.95.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 07.99 08.95.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 07.99 08.95.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.07 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 07.99 08.95.09 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.11 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 06.99 08.95.11 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.13 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 05.00 08.95.13 & 14 . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.15 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 05.00 08.95.15 & 16 . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.17 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 05.00 08.95.17 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.19 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 05.00 08.95.19 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.21 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 02.99 08.95.21 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 01.02
08.81.23 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 02.99 08.95.23 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.81.35 & 36 . . ........ X ...... 11.01 08.95.25 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 01.02
08.81.37 & 38 . . ........ X ...... 11.01
08.81.39 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 11.01 09.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.09 & 10 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
09.10.11 & 12 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
Underlined pages are joined as A3 size at the
end of each group.

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.04

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

09.20.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.04.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 05.99
09.20.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.04.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 05.99
09.20.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.04.05 . . . . . . ........ ....... 05.99
09.20.07 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.05.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 09.01
16.05.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 09.01
10.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.05.05 . . . . . . X ....... ....... 09.01
10.10.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.06.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
10.10.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.06.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
10.10.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.06.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
10.10.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.06.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
16.06.09 & 10 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.50.00 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.07.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.51.00 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.07.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.67.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.07.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.67.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.07.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.67.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.07.09 & 10 . . ........ X ...... 01.00
11.67.07 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.14.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 12.00
11.71.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 10.01 16.14.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 12.00
11.71.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 10.01 16.14.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 12.00
11.71.05 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.14.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 12.00
11.75.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 11.98 16.14.09 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 12.01
16.20.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 02.00
12.50.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.20.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 02.00
12.51.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.21.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 02.00
12.52.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.21.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 02.00
12.53.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.54.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.55.01 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.56.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 09.98 16.22.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.56.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.09 & 10 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.60.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.11 & 12 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.61.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.22.13 & 14 . . ........ X ...... 05.00
12.62.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 02.02
12.62.03 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 09.98 16.70.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 07.99
12.62.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 09.98 16.70.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 07.99
12.65.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 09.98 16.70.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
12.76.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.70.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 07.99
12.81.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 09.98 16.70.09 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 07.99
12.81.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 09.98 16.72.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
12.91.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.72.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
12.96.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 12.00 16.72.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
12.97.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 12.00 16.72.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
12.97.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 12.00 16.72.09 & 10 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
16.72.11 & 12 . . X ....... ....... 12.01
16.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01 16.72.13 & 14 . . ........ X ...... 12.01
16.02.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 03.00 16.74.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 07.99
16.02.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 03.00 16.74.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 07.99
16.02.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 03.00 16.74.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 07.99
16.02.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 03.00 16.74.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 07.99
16.02.09 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 03.00 16.76.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.03.01 & 02 . . X ....... ....... 09.01 16.76.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.03.03 & 04 . . X ....... ....... 09.01 16.76.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.03.05 & 06 . . X ....... ....... 09.01 16.76.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.03.07 & 08 . . X ....... ....... 09.01 16.78.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.03.09 . . . . . . ........ X ...... 09.01 16.78.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.78.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.78.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 06.99

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.05

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Table of contents

Groups / Modified New Date Groups / Modified New Date

Pages nb pages pages of issue Pages nb pages pages of issue

16.80.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 07.99

16.80.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 07.99
16.80.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.80.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.82.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.82.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.82.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.82.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.84.01 & 02 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.84.03 & 04 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.84.05 & 06 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.84.07 & 08 . . ........ ....... 06.99
16.84.09 . . . . . . . ........ ....... 06.99

17.00.00 . . . . . . . X ....... ....... 12.01

17.30.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.09 & 10 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.11 & 12 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.13 & 14 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.15 & 16 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.17 & 18 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.19 & 20 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.21 & 22 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.23 & 24 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.25 & 26 . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.30.27 . . . . . . . ........ X ...... 04.00
17.48.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.03 & 04 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.05 & 06 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.07 & 08 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.09 & 10 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.11 & 12 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.48.13 & 14 . . ........ X ...... 02.00
17.61.01 & 02 . . ........ X ...... 12.01

R 900 B > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 00.06

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic excavator General Information

Foreword

This manual has been prepared to provide you with technical information on the design and construction of
the various components which made up the LIEBHERR excavator.

It contains brief and precise descriptions, guidelines and drawings of adjustment procedures as well as
hydraulic and electrical schematics, and graphically depicted diagrams and sectionals to help you with any
repairs, which might become necessary on our hydraulic excavators.

We deliberately avoided full drawings and details of each repair stage, a practice often adopted in workshop
manuals of this kind, since only skilled mechanics already familiar with most repair work described in this
manual, should perform repair work. This manual is also intended to provide you with information
regarding certain adjustment values.

Instructions on maintenance is excluded from this manual, since it are covered in the individual Operation
and Maintenance Manual.
Be sure to observe all accident prevention guidelines and adhere to all safety information before and during
any maintenance and / or repair procedure on the hydraulic excavator.

To perform tests and repairs listed in this manual, a complete set of standard tools, as well as special tools
and fixtures shown and listed, is necessary. Always observe utmost cleanliness and order.

No special emphasis is put on replacing sealing components, since it is taken for granted that all removed
seals, O>rings and gaskets are replaced during the course of repair. Tighten any screw connections, if no
other values are given, to the required tightening torque.

Certain notes are used throughout this manual to emphasize important or critical instructions.

This mark used in our descriptions denotes an important note or reminder, which should be
especially noted.

This exclamation mark used in our descriptions denotes an important note or a reminder of
safety practices or directs attention to unsafe practices, which could pose a danger for the
mechanic and / or the machine.
This Service Manual has been issued by the Technical Documentation Department
of LIEBHERR>FRANCE SA, B.P. 287 F 68005 Colmar.

This manual will be updated regularly, as a registered holder of a Service Manual you will automatically
receive all revised and new pages according to the latest series status.

Some Service Information bulletins may also need to be filed in this Service Manual.

This book may not be copied nor given to third persons without our approval!

We reserve the right to make changes .

We trust that with this information contained in this manual and your cooperation we have taken another
step toward continuing improvement of service on our LIEBHERR hydraulic excavators.

LIEBHERR>FRANCE SA

R 900 B > R 924 / 6001Æ 00.10. 01

R 934 > R 944 / 5001Æ
Issue: 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic excavator General Information

Explanation

In order to make it easy to find certain information or to remove and/or add pages in case of changes
or improvements. the following system has been established:

Main group Subgroup Page No.

7. 10. 01

Hydraulic Variable displacement Page 01

components double pump
LPVD

The index for the main groups can be found on the index page.

The subgroups can be found on the index page in front of the main group. In addition, the machines
with serial numbers are listed on the index, which is valid for this subgroup.

In case of minor changes we will issue revised pages and update the date. If an already existent sub
group is completely revised, we will assign a new sub group number.

00. 10. 02 Issue : 10 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator General Information

SUBGROUP INDEX

1.01. Chart / Coming into Effect of Modifications

1.10. Safety Information

1.19. Conversion Factors

1.20. Tightening Torques

1.50. Lubrication

R 900 B > R 944 Li / 6001 Æ 01.01.00

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Safety Information

Working with an excavator can be dangerous, it could result in injury or death if proper precautions are not
taken! WE URGE YOU TO READ THIS MANUAL CAREFULLY! This safety information is provided to
operators and maintenance mechanics to ensure the safe operation and maintenance of the excavator. It is
essential that you read and familiarize yourself with this information, which explains safety requirements
and precautions and specific hazards of which you should be aware. This also applies to any personnel
which might be working on the machine only occasionally, such as during set up or maintenance.

f Careful adherence to these safety guidelines will permit safe operation and maintenance and
potentially prevent personal injury to yourself and others, and possible damage to the excavator.
f Important safety notes such as DANGER, CAUTION or NOTE are used throughout this manual to
emphasize important or critical instructions.
In this manual, DANGER, CAUTION or NOTE are defined as follows :
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa

aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
aaaaa
DANGER
Denotes an extreme intrinsic hazard which could result in a high probability of death or serious
injury if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
Denotes an extreme intrinsic hazard which could result in a high probability of death or serious
injury if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTE:

NOTE describes operation and maintenance procedures which should be followed to keep your
excavator operation and to insure long machine life and/ or to facilitate certain procedures.

In addition to these instructions you must follow the safety regulations applicable to your work
environment and job site and any federal, state and local safety requirements (A model
excavators must also follow local and federal highway regulations).

For EC countries, guidelines 89 / 655 / EWG contain the minimum safety guidelines for users.

DESTINED USE
f The excavator with the standard backhoe, grapple or bucket attachment may only be used to
loosen, pick up, move, load and dump soil, gravel, rock, or other material and to load trucks,
barges, conveyor belts, or rock crushing systems.
f Special guidelines are applicable for machines used for lifting applications and special safety
devices must be installed.
f Any other use above and beyond the applications described above, such as breaking out rock
or demolishing buildings, pounding in posts etc. requires special attachments and safety
devices.
f If the machine is exposed to the risk of falling down objects during operation, the cab of the
machine must be fitted with a safety device according to the FOPS prescriptions.
f Transporting personnel or loads etc. is not considered destined use and is therefore prohibited.
The manufacturer / dealer is not responsible for any resulting damage. Any risk must be carried
by the user himself.
f Destined use is considered part of observing and adhering to all regulations and inspection and
maintenance guidelines given in this Operation and Maintenance Manual.

A / R 900 B > R 944 01.10.01

Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
f Study the Operation and Maintenance
Manual before operating or working on the
excavator.
Make sure that you have additional
information for special attachments of your
machine, read it and understand it!
f Allow only authorized personnel informed
about the safety rules to operate, service or
repair the excavator. Make sure to observe
any minimum applicable age requirement.
f Allow only properly trained personnel to
operate or work on the excavator, make sure
to clearly specify the person who is
responsible for set up, maintenance and
repairs.
f Make sure the operator knows his
responsibility regarding the observance of
traffic regulations and permit him to refuse
any unsafe instructions given by a third
person.
f Any persons still in training should only
operate or work on the machine under the
supervision and guidance of an experienced
person.
f Check and observe any person working or
operating the excavator periodically and
regularly, if they observe safety instructions
and guidelines given in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
f Wear proper work clothing when operating
or working on the excavator. Rings, watches,
bracelets and loose clothing such as ties,
scarves, unbuttoned or unzipped shirts and
jackets are dangerous and could cause injury!
Wear proper safety equipment, such as safety
glasses, safety shoes, hard hats, work gloves,
reflector vests and ear protection.
f Consult your employer or supervisor for
specific safety equipment requirements and
safety regulations on the job site.
f Always tilt up the safety lever before leaving
the operatorπs seat.
f Do not carry tools, replacement parts or other
supplies while climbing on or off the
excavator. Never use the steering column,
control levers or joysticks as handholds.
f Never jump off the excavator, climb on and
off the excavator using only the steps, rails
and handles provided.
When climbing on or off the excavator, use
both hands for support and face the machine.
f If needed, use the front window as an escape
hatch.
1.10.02
Safety Information
f If no other guidelines are given, perform
maintenance and repairs utilizing the
following precautions :
> Park excavator on firm and level ground.
Rest the attachment on the ground.
> Place all control in neutral position and raise
the safety lever.
> Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
key.
f Before working on the hydraulic circuit, move
all joysticks and pedals with the ignition key
in contact position and the safety lever tilted
down to relieve the servo pressure and the
remaining pressures in the different main
circuits. In addition, relieve the pressure in
the hydraulic tank as described in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
f Secure all loose parts on the excavator.
f Never operate the excavator without a
complete walk around inspection. Check if all
warning decals are on the machine and if
they are all legible.
f Observe all danger and safety guidelines.
f For certain special applications, the excavator
must be equipped with specific safety
equipment. Use the excavator only, if they
are installed and functioning properly.
f Never perform any changes, additions or
modifications on the machine, which could
influence the safety, without obtaining the
written permission from the manufacturer.
This also applies to the installation and
adjustment of safety devices and safety valves
as well as to any welding on load carrying
parts.
f Do not install any equipment or attachments
made by other manufacturers or any which
are not specifically authorized by LIEBHERR
for installation without first obtaining the
written permission from LIEBHERR.
LIEBHERR will issue any required technical
documentation for approved installations.
f Should the electrical circuit be modified or
additional components be installed, so the
modification must be performed according to
the national standards and safety regulations
(such as OSHA per the USA).
The installation must be certificated by an
approved organization and a copy of the
certification has to be sent to the LIEBHERR
company.
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
f Never work underneath the excavator unless
it is safely resting on the ground and / or is
properly blocked and supported.
f Never use damaged or insufficient wire
ropes, slings or chains.
Always wear gloves when handling wire
ropes.
f Never reach into bores during attachment
installation or removal. Never align bores
with your fingers or hands. Use proper
alignment tools when installing, changing or
servicing attachments by qualified mechanics
f Keep objects away from the radiator fan.
Rotating fans will swirl and throw out
objects, which can become very dangerous
and cause severe injury to yourself and
others.
f Avoid contact with any components contai>
ning coolant. At or near operating tempe>
rature, the engine coolant is hot and under
pressure and could cause severe burns.
f Check the coolant level only after the
radiator cap is cool enough to touch. Remove
the radiator cap slowly to relieve pressure .
f Do not allow your skin to come into contact
with hot oil or components containing hot
oil. At or near operating temperature, engine
and hydraulic oil is hot and can be under
pressure.
f Always wear safety glasses and protective
gloves when handling batteries. Keep sparks
or open flames away!
f Never permit anyone to hand guide the
MACHINE START UP SAFETY
bucket or grapple into position.
f When working in the engine area, make sure
the top covers and side doors are properly
secured or closed with the appropriate
supports.
f Never work underneath or on the excavator
unless it is properly blocked and supported.
FIRE AND EXPLOSION PREVENTION
f Always turn off the engine while refueling
the excavator.
f Never smoke or allow an open flame in
refueling areas or where batteries are being
charged, or where batteries or flammable
materials are stored.
f Never leave machine unattended while
fueling. During this operation, no one but
the employee in charge of refueling is
allowed to stay on the excavator.
f Always start the engine as described in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual.
A / R 900 B > R 944
Litronic
Safety Information
f Check the electrical system regularly and
frequently.
All defects, such as loose connections, burnt
out fuses and bulbs, burnt or damaged cables
must be repaired immediately by a licensed
electrician or specially trained personnel.
f Never store flammable fluids on the machine
except in storage tanks intended for the
excavatorπs operation.
f Inspect all components, lines, tubes and hoses
for oil and fuel leaks and / or damage.
Replace or repair any damaged components
immediately.
Any oil, which escapes from leaks, can easily
cause a fire.
f Be certain that all clamps, guards and heat
shields are installed. These components
prevent vibration, rubbing, chafing and heat
build>up. Install tie wraps to fasten hoses and
wires, as required.
f Cold start ether is extremely flammable. Do
not use together with preheat. Use ether only
in ventilated areas and as directed. Never use
it near heat sources or open flames, do not
permit anybody to smoke.
f Know the location of the excavator's fire
extinguisher and be familiar with its opera>
tion. Make sure you know your local fire
regulations and fire reporting procedures.
f A fire extinguisher can be attached inside the
operator's cab, using the four threaded holes
provided in the rear left support of the cab.
f Before excavator start up, perform a
thorough walk around inspection.
f Visually inspect the excavator, look for loose
bolts, cracks, wear, any leaks and any
evidence of vandalism.
f Never start or operate an unsafe excavator.
f Report all defects to your foreman or
supervisor and make sure they are corrected
immediately.
f Make sure all covers and doors are closed and
locked and all warning decals are on the
machine.
f Make sure all windows, as well as inside and
outside mirrors are clean, and secure all doors
and windows to prevent any unintentional
movement.
01.10.03
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
f Be certain that the area surrounding the
excavator is free of other personnel, and that
no one is working on or under the excavator
before starting the engine.
f After entering the cab, adjust the operatorπs
seat and controls, the inside and outside
mirror, the armrests and fasten and adjust
the seat belt. Be certain that all controls can
be reached comfortably.
f All noise protection devices on the machine
must be functional during operation.
ENGINE START UP AND OPERATING SAFETY
f Before start up, check if all indicator lights
and instruments are functioning properly,
place all controls in neutral position and tilt
the safety lever up.
f Before starting the engine, alert any nearby
personnel that the excavator is being started
by sounding the horn.
f Start the machine only when seated in the
operatorπs seat, and with the seat belt
fastened (if installed).
f If you have no other instructions, start the
engine as outlined in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
f Tilt the safety lever down and check all indi>
cators, gauges, warning devices and controls
for their proper indication.
f Start and operate the engine only in a well
ventilated area. If necessary, open doors and
windows.
Warm up the engine and hydraulic system to
operating temperatures. Low engine and
hydraulic oil temperatures can cause the
excavator to be unresponsive.
f Check that all attachment functions are
operating properly.
f Move the excavator slowly into an open area
and check all travel functions for their proper
operation, check travel and swing brakes, the
steering function as well as the turn signals
and lights.
MACHINE OPERATING SAFETY
f Familiarize yourself with job site rules. Be
informed about traffic and hand signals and
safety signs. Ask who is responsible for
signaling.
Check your surrounding for any obstacles in
the working and movement range, check the
load carrying capacity of the terrain, and
1.10.04
Safety Information
secure the job site to shield it from any public
highway traffic. Rope off the working area of
the machine and install the necessary signs to
forbid any non authorized person entering
the area.
f Always keep a safe distance from overhangs,
walls, drop offs, and unstable ground.
f Be alert of changing weather conditions, bad
or insufficient visibility and of changing
ground conditions.
f Be alert for utility lines, check the location of
underground cables, gas and water lines, and
work especially careful in that vicinity. If
necessary and/ or if required, call local autho>
rities to mark the location, and take
precaution against contact with
underground utilities.
f Keep sufficient distance to electrical lines.
When working in the vicinity of high voltage
electrical lines, keep proper distance to assure
that the attachment does not come close to
the lines.
DANGER! You must inform yourself about
safe distances.
Preferably have the electrical lines de>
energized (and lockout / tagged out
according to the regulations applicable on
the job>site) each time it is possible, and in
any case if the closeness of the working area
make it necessary.
f In case you do touch a high voltage line by
accident, proceed as follows:
> do not leave the machine,
> move the machine, if possible, from the
danger zone until you obtain sufficient
distance,
> warn any personnel in the vicinity not to
come close to the excavator and not to
touch it,
> instruct or initiate that someone turns off
the voltage.
> Do not leave the machine until you are
absolutely sure that voltage in the line,
which had been touched or damaged, has
been turned off!
f Before moving the machine, make sure that
the attachments and equipment is secured
properly to avoid accidents.
f When traveling on public roads, make sure to
observe traffic regulations, and make sure
that the machine meets federal and local
public highway standards.
f Always turn on the lights if visibility is bad or
if you are still working during dusk.
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
f Never allow other personnel on the excavator.
f Operate the excavator only while seated and
with the seat belt fastened, if installed.
f Report any problems or needed repairs to your
foreman or supervisor and make sure they are
corrected immediately.
f Do not move the excavator until you are
certain that no one is endangered by moving
the excavator.
f On machines without negative brakes check
the brake system before starting to work, as
outlined in the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
f Never leave the operatorπs seat while the
machine is still moving.
f Never leave the machine unattended (within
view of machine), with the engine running.
f When moving the excavator, keep the upper>
carriage in lengthwise direction and keep the
load as close as possible to the ground.
f Prevent any working movements, which could
tip the machine over. If the excavator begins to
tip or slip on a grade, immediately lower the
attachment and load to the ground and turn
the excavator facing downhill.
If possible, always operate the excavator with
the attachment positioned uphill or downhill,
never sideways.
f Always travel slowly on rough or slippery
ground and on slopes, and on loose soils.
f Always travel downhill at permissible speed, so
you donπt loose control over the machine. The
engine must run at nominal speed, use only
the foot pedals to brake and slow down the
machine.
Never shift during down hill travel, always shift
to a lower gear before traveling downhill.
f Never load over an occupied truck. Request
that the driver leave the cab, even if a rock
protection is installed.
f For demolition work, clearing, crane
operation, etc. always use the appropriate
protection device designed for this specific
application.
f If operating in visually obstructed terrain or
whenever necessary, have another person
guide you. Always have only one person signal
you.
f Allow only experienced persons to attach loads
or to guide operators. The guide must be
visible by the operator and / or must be in
voice contact with him.
f Depending on the attachment combination, it
is possible for the bucket teeth to hit the cab,
the cab protection or the boom cylinders. Be
very careful when the bucket teeth get in this
range to prevent any damage.
f In case of a thunderstorm :
A / R 900 B > R 944
Litronic
Safety Information
> lower the attachment to the ground and
if possible anchor the digging tool into
the soil.
> leave the cab and move away from the
machine before the storm breaks out.
Otherwise, you must stop the excavator, turn
off the radio and keep inside the closed cab
until the end of the storm.
f Auxiliary control units can have various
functions. Always check their functions when
starting up the machine.
f Stop the swinging motion of the uppercariage
when lowering the attachment into a ditch
without striking the attachment on the ditch
walls.
f Inspect the machine for damage if the
attachment has been swung into a wall or any
other obstacles.
f Applications in which the attachment is to be
used to strike the material being extracted are
not permitted, even when working in a
longitudinal direction.
f Repeated strikes against an object leads to
damage to the steel structures and machine
components.
f Please refer to your LIEBHERR dealer if special
teeth for heavy>duty or special applications are
required.
f Do not attach too large bucket or bucket with
side cutters or that are during operations with
rocky material. This would prolong the work
cycles and may lead to damage to the bucket
as well as further machine components.
f With the 2x45∞ offset articulation, the offset
position may only be employed if the working
tool or the attachment does not touch the
material.
f Operation of the offset articulation to drill
into the material is not permitted.
f Do not lift the machine during operation.
Should this happen, lower the machine slowly
back to the ground.
f Do not let the machine fall heavily on the
ground and do not hold it back with the
hydraulics. This would damage the machine.
f During operation with the attachment it is
forbidden to raise the machine with the
dozing blade (e.g. carving at the ceiling when
tunnelling).
f The hydraulic hammer must be selected with
particular care. When using a hydraulic
hammer not permitted by LIEBHERR, steel
structures or the other machine components
can become damaged.
f Before beginning breaking tasks, position the
machine on firm and level ground.
01.10.05
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
f Use a hydraulic hammer designed exclusively
for breaking stone, concrete and other
breakable materials.
f Only operate the hydraulic hammer in the
longitudinal direction of the machine and with
the windshield closed or with a front
protective grid.
f Ensure during hammer operation that no
cylinder is entirely extended or retracted and
that the stick is not in the vertical position.
f In order to avoid damages to the machine, try
not to break stone or concrete while
performing retraction and extension motions
of the hydraulic hammer.
f Do not apply the hydraulic hammer
uninterrupted for more than 15 secs. at a time
to the same place. Change the breaking point.
Too long uninterrupted operation of the
hydraulic hammer leads to an unnecessary
overheating of the hydraulic oil.
f Do not use the drop force of the hydraulic
hammer to break stone or other materials. Do
not move obstacles with the hydraulic
hammer. Misuse of this nature would damage
both the hammer and the machine.
f Do not use the hydraulic hammer to lift
objects.
MACHINE PARKING SAFETY
f Park the excavator only on firm and level
ground .
If it becomes necessary to park the machine on
a grade, properly block and secure it with
wedges.
f Lock the uppercarriage with the lock pin.
f Lower the attachments to the ground and
anchor the bucket lightly in the ground.
f Bring all operating levers in neutral position
and engage the travel and swing brakes.
f Turn the engine off as outlined in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual and raise
the safety lever before you leave the
operator's seat.
f Lock the machine, remove all keys and secure
the excavator against vandalism, unauthorized
use, and any attractive nuisance.
MACHINE TRANSPORTING SAFETY
f Use only suitable transporting and lifting
devices with sufficient capacity.
f Park the machine on firm and level ground and
block the chains or wheels.
f If necessary, remove part of the attachments
during transport.
1.10.06
Safety Information
f When loading the machine on a flatbed
trailer or railroad car, be sure that the
loading ramp incline is less than 30∞ and
covered with wooden planks to prevent
skidding.
f Remove all mud, snow or ice from track
components before moving up the ramp.
f Before loading, secure the uppercarriage with
the undercarriage with the lock pin .
f Align the machine with the loading ramp.
f Attach the manual control levers to the foot
pedals for sensitive control.
f Have another person guide and signal the
operator.
f Have blocks or wedges ready to block the
machine, if necessary, to prevent the machine
from rolling backwards. Be careful to crushing
risks when handling and applying these
wedges. Keep clear of wheels and do not
attempt to ckocke or block the machine before
its complete standstill.
f Retract the attachment as far as possible and
lower the attachment as close as possible to
the loading surface and carefully drive up the
ramp and onto the flat bed trailer.
f When the excavator is on the trailer, release
the uppercarriage lock pin, turn the upper>
carriage back and lower the attachment.
If the backhoe attachment is attached, tilt the
stick and bucket in and relock the upper>
carriage.
f Carefully secure the uppercarriage and other
parts with chains, wedges and blocks to
prevent slipping.
f Release the hydraulic pressure, remove the
ignition key, raise the safety lever, close and
lock the cab and close and secure all other
doors and leave the machine.
f Carefully check out the transport route. Make
sure that width, height and weight allowances
are within the permitted limits.
f Check that there is enough clearance under>
neath all bridges, underpasses, utility lines,
and in tunnels.
f During the unloading procedure, proceed with
the same care and caution as during the
loading procedure. Remove all chains and
wedges. Start the engine as outlined in the
Operation and Maintenance Manual. Carefully
drive off the loading platform. Keep the
attachment as close as possible to the ground
level. Have another person guide and signal
you.
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
MACHINE TOWING SAFETY
f Observe the correct procedure: check the
index in your Operation and Maintenance
manual and refer to the appropriate section :
∫Towing the Excavator™.
f Only tow the excavator if absolutely necessary,
for example to remove it for repairs from a
dangerous job site.
f Be sure all towing and pulling devices such as
cables, hooks, and couplers are safe and
adequate.
f Make sure that the cable or the towing rod are
strong enough and are routed around the
center of the undercarriage or to the towing
hook on the undercarriage, which is
designated for this purpose. Be aware that any
damage to the machine caused by towing is
never covered by the manufacturer's warranty.
f Never allow anyone to stand near the cable
when pulling or towing the excavator.
f Keep the cable tight and free of kinks.
f Engage travel slowly, and do not jerk. With a
slack cable, the sudden impact of the load
being towed could snap and break.
f Keep personnel out of area. If cable breaks
while under stress, it could cause severe injury.
f During the towing procedure, keep within the
required transport position, permissible speed
and distance.
f After the towing procedure is completed,
return the machine to its previous state.
f Proceed as outlined in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual when putting the
excavator back in service.
MACHINE MAINTENANCE SAFETY
f The machine may not be made unsafe when
performing maintenance work. Never attempt
maintenance procedures or repairs you do not
understand.
f Check the Operatorπs and Maintenance
Manual for service and maintenance intervals.
Make sure you use only appropriate tools for
all maintenance work.
f Refer to your Operatorπs and Maintenance
Manual to see, who is authorized to perform
certain repairs. The operator should only
perform the daily / weekly maintenance
procedures.
The remaining work may only be performed by
especially trained personnel.
f Use only replacement parts corresponding to
the technical requirements specified by the
A / R 900 B > R 944
Litronic
Safety Information
manufacturer. This is assured by using only
original Liebherr replacement parts.
f Always wear proper work clothing when
maintaining the excavator. Certain work may
only be performed with a hard hat, safety
shoes, safety glasses and gloves.
f During maintenance, do not allow unautho>
rized personnel to enter the maintenance
area.
f Secure the maintenance area, as necessary.
f Inform the operator before any special or
maintenance work. Make sure he knows the
person, who is in charge of the work.
f If not otherwise noted in the Operation and
Maintenance Manual, always make sure the
excavator is parked on firm an level ground
and the engine is turned off.
f During maintenance and service work, make
sure you always retighten any loosened screw
connections!
f If it is necessary to disconnect or remove any
safety devices during set up, maintenance or
repair, make sure that after completion of
repairs, the safety devices are reinstalled and
checked for proper function.
f Before any maintenance work and especially
when working under the machine, make sure a
∫Do not operateπ tag is attached to the starter
switch. Remove the ignition key.
After end of maintenance works or repair,
restart the machine according to the
instructions "Machine start up", in this
manual.
f Before any repairs or maintenance work, clean
any oil, fuel and / or cleaning substances from
any fittings and connections .
Donπt use any harsh cleaners and use only lint
free cloths.
f Use only nonflammable cleaning fluids to
clean the machine.
f Any welding, torch or grinding work on the
machine must be explicitly authorized. Written
authorization is necessary for welding on
carrying structures. Before any using a welder,
torch or grinder, clean off any dust and dirt
and remove any flammable materials from the
surrounding area. Make sure the area is
sufficiently ventilated.
Danger of Fire and Explosion!
f Before cleaning the machine with water or
steam (high pressure cleaning) or other
cleaning fluids, make sure that all openings,
which , for safety and/ or functioning reasons
should not be exposed to water / steam/
cleaners, are covered and / or masked off.
Especially sensitive are electrical motors,
control boxes and plug connectors.
01.10.07
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
Make sure that the temperature sensors of the
fire alarm and extinguishers system do not come
in contact with the hot cleaning fluids, which
could trigger the fire extinguishing system.
Remove all coverings and masking material
after completing the cleaning procedure.
Then check all fuel lines, engine oil lines and
hydraulic oil lines for leaks, loose connections,
chafing and / or damage.
Fix any problems immediately.
f If you use a high pressure cleaner with steam or
hot water to clean the machine, observe
following recommendations :
> the distance between the nozzle and the
surface to be cleaned must be no lowerthan
20 inches
> the water temperature should not exceed
60∞c (140∞F)
> limit the water pressure to 80 bar maximum
(11500 PSI)
> if you employ cleaning fluid, only use neutral
cleaning agents such as customary car
shampoos diluted to 2 or 3 percent maximum
f Never employ high pressure cleaning apparatus
during the two first months following machine
delivery or repainting.
f Observe all product safety guidelines when
handling oils, grease, and other chemical
substances.
f Make sure service fluids and replacement parts
are disposed of properly and in an environ>
mentally sound manner.
f When using hot service fluids, be very careful.
(They can cause severe burns and injury!).
f Operate combustion motors and fuel operated
heaters only in well ventilated areas. Before
operating these units, check ventilation.
In addition, always follow applicable local
regulations.
f Never try to lift heavy parts. Use appropriate
lifting devices with sufficient load carrying
capacity. When replacing or repairing parts or
components,make sure they are mounted very
carefully on lifting devices, to prevent any
possible danger. Use only suitable and
technically sound lifting devices, make sure that
lifting tackle, wire cables, etc. has adequate
load carrying capacity.
Never position yourself, walk or work
underneath suspended loads.
f Never use damaged lifting devices, or devices
which are not sufficient to carry the load.
Always wear gloves when handling wire cables.
f Ask only experienced personnel to attach loads
and guide and signal the crane operator.
1.10.08
Safety Information
The guide must be within the visibility range of
the operator and / or must be in direct voice
contact with the operator.
f When working overhead, use appropriate and
safe ladders, scaffolding or other working plat>
forms designated for that purpose.
Never step on parts or components on the
machine when maintaining or repairing items
overhead.
When working high above ground, make sure
you are fitted with ropes and appropriate safety
devices which will prevent a possible fall.
Always keep handles, steps, railings, platforms
and ladders free of dirt, snow and ice!
f When working on the attachments, for example
when replacing the bucket teeth, makes sure
the attachment is supported properly. Never use
metal on metal support!
f For safety reasons, never open and remove a
track chain unless having previously totaly
released the pretension of the chain tensioning
unit.
f Never work underneath the machine if it is
raised or propped up with the attachment. The
undercarriage must be supported with wooden
blocks and supports.
f Always support the raised machine in such a
way that any shifting to the weight change will
not influence the stability. Do not support the
machine with metal on metal support.
f Only qualified, especially trained personnel may
work on travel gear, brake and steering systems.
f If it becomes necessary that the machine must
be repaired on a grade, block the chains with
wedges and secure the uppercarriage to the
undercarriage with the lock pin.
f Only qualified, especially trained personnel may
work on the hydraulic system.
f Never check for leaks with your bare hands,
always wear gloves. Fluid escaping from a small
hole can have enough force to penetrate the
skin.
f Never loosen or remove lines or fittings before
the attachment has been lowered to the ground
and the engine has been turned off. Then turn
the ignition key to contact position with tilted
down safety lever, move all servo controls
(joysticks and foot pedals) in both direction to
release pressures. Then release the tank
pressure as outlined in this Operation and
Maintenance Manual.
f Always disconnect the battery cable before
working on the electrical system or before any
arc welding on the machine. Always disconnect
the negative (>) cable first and reconnect it last.
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
f Check the electrical system regularly.
Make sure that any problems, such as loose
connections, burnt out fuses and bulbs,
scorched or chafed cables are fixed
immediately by an electrician or qualified
personnel.
f Use only Original fuses with the specified
amperage. Never use a different size or
stronger fuse than the original fuse.
f On machines with electrical medium or high
voltage systems:
> If there is any problem with the electrical
energy supply, turn the machine off
immediately.
> Follow established lockout / tagout
procedures where applicable.
> Any work on the electrical system may only
be performed by a qualified electrician or
qualified personnel under the guidance and
supervision of an electrician, according to
electro > technical regulations.
f If any work is required on any parts which carry
current, use a second person to turn off the
main battery switch, if necessary. Rope the
work area off with a safety rope or chain, and
set up warning signs. Use only insulated tools.
f When working on medium and high voltage
components, shut off the voltage and connect
the supply cable to the ground and ground the
components, such as the condensor, with a
grounding rod.
f Check all disconnected parts if they are truly
free of current, ground them and close them
off quickly. Insulate any close>by, current
carrying parts.
HYDRAULIC LINES AND HOSES
f Hydraulic lines and hoses may never be
repaired!
f All hoses, lines and fittings must be checked
daily, but at least every 2 weeks for leaks and
any externally visible damage! Any damaged
sections must be replaced immediately!
Escaping oil can cause injuries and fires!
f Even if hoses and lines are stored and used
properly, they undergo a natural aging
process. For that reason, their service life is
limited.
Improper storage, mechanical damage and
improper use are the most frequent causes of
hose failures.
The service life of a hose may not exceed six
years, including a storage period of not more
than two years (always check the
manufacturer's date on the hoses).
A / R 900 B > R 944
Litronic
Safety Information
Using hoses and lines close to the limit ranges
of permitted use can shorten the service life
(for example at high temperatures, frequent
working cycles, extremely high impulse
frequencies, multi shift or around the clock
operations).
f Hoses and lines must be replaced if any of the
following points are found during an
inspection:
> Damage on the external layer into the inner
layer (such as chaffings, cuts and rips);
> Brittleness of the outer layer (crack
formation of the hose material);
> Changes in shape, which differ from the
natural shape of the hose or line, when
under pressure or when not under pressure,
or in bends or curves, such as separation of
layers, blister or bubble formation;
> Leaks;
> Non observance of installation
requirements;
> Damage or deformation of hose fittings,
which might reduce the strength of the
fitting or the connection between hose and
fitting;
> Any movement of hose away from the
fitting;
> Corrosion on fittings, which might reduce
the function or the strength of the fitting;
> Storage or service life has been exceeded.
When replacing hoses or lines, always use
Original replacement parts.
f Route or install the hoses and lines properly.
Do not mix up the connections!
f Always take care to avoid torsional strain
when installing a new hose. On high pressure
hydraulic hoses, the mounting screws must be
first mounted on both hose ends (full flange or
half clamp) and tightened only thereafter.
On high pressure hoses having one curved end,
always tighten first the screws on the curved
hose end and only then the screws on the
straight hose end.
Install and tighten the hose clips that may be
mounted on the hose middle only when the
both hose ends are already tightened.
f Always install hoses so to avoid any friction
with other hoses and parts.
We recommand to keep a distance between
hose and other parts of at least one half of the
hose outer diameter. Keep a minimum gap of
1/2 inch in any case.
After mounting a hose connecting two parts
that are movable to each other, check during
the return to service that the hose is not
rubbing in the whole moving range.
01.10.09
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator
Additional safety guidelines for excavators
fitted with a cab elevation
When operating an excavator with a cab
elevation, observe the following safety
instructions which complete the general safety
information provided in the operation and
maintenance manual for the machine.
f Keep ladders, footsteps, handles and handrail
in clean condition and always free them from
mud, oil, grease, ice, snow or any other
obstacles.
f To guarantee an easy opening of the cab
door in all weather conditions, coat the
rubber seals around the door with silicon oil
or talcum every two months and more often
if necessary.
Regularly grease the hinges and lock of the
cab door as well the fixing device of the door
in opened position.
During maintenance works, always wear
safety glasses and proper protective clothes.
f To climb up or down the cab, the excavator
must be parked on firm, flat and level ground
and the uppercarriage must be swung so to
align ladders and steps on upper and
undercarriage.
f Face the excavator when climbing up and
always hold on to the machine at three
points, i. e. keep the contact with the access
components at the same time with two hands
and one foot or with one hand and the two
feet.
f As soon as you can reach the handle of the
door with your free hand unlock and open
the door before climbing up any more .
Keep and guide the door all the way with
your hand and lock it in its opened position,
making sure it is securely fixed in this
position, so it can not be slammed by the
wind.
Take care to keep yourself apart from the
slewing range of the door during the whole
of its opening motion.
Some external influences, and especialy the
wind, may make the opening of the door
uneasy.
1.10.10
Safety Information
f Go on climbing up, always holding yourself
by three points, enter the cab and seat down
to the seat.
If applying fasten the seat belt. Unlock the
door using the unlocking lever and close the
door holding it by the handle designed for
this purpose.
Only thereafter lower the safety lever and
start the machine.
f It is essential to have your seat belt fastened if
you want to operate the machine with the
cab door opened.
Should the belt be missing on your machine,
so you must compulsorily get one installed
before you start working with opened cab
door.
f Before climbing down the cab, you must
make sure the machine is parked on a flat,
firm and level ground and the ladders and
steps are aligned on upper and
undercarriage.
f Then open the cab door and lock it in opened
position and make sure it is securely fixed in
this position.
Be aware of difficult weather conditions and
anticipate their possible consequences. The
wind for example could slam the cab door.
f If necessary unfasten the seat belt.
f Carefully begin climbing down, facing the
machine and always holding the contact at
three points, until you reach the height
where you can close the cab door in the best
conditions, keeping yourself apart from its
slewing range and guiding it with the hand
until closed.
If you want so lock the door and take away
the key.
f Slowly and carefully go down to the floor.
Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Conversion factors

Conversion factors

Pressure : bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 14.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ PSI

Length : mm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .03937 . . . . . . . . . = ............ inches

cm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .3937 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ inches
m ................ ¥ 39.37 . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ inches
inches . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 25.40 . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ mm
feet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .3048 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ m

Volume : liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .2642 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ gallons

liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 2.113 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ pints
liter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 1.057 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ quarts
gallons . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 3.785 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ liter
cm3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .06102 . . . . . . . . . = ............ cubic inch
m3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 1.3079 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ cubic yard

Torque : Kpm . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 7.23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ ft.lbs

Nm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .7375 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ ft.lbs
ft.lbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .138 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ Kpm
ft.lbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 1.358 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ Nm

Weigth : kg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 2.2046 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ lbs

metr. t . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 1.102 . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ Short t
metr. t . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ 2204.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ lbs
lbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .4536 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ kg
lbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ¥ .000454 . . . . . . . . = ............ Metric ton

Temperature : Degree C ¥ 1.8 plus 32 = Degree Fahrenheit

Degree F minus 32 devided by 1.8 = Degree Celsius
0 degree Celsius = 32 degree Fahrenheit ; 100 degree Celsius = 212 degree F

A / R 900 B > R 944 Li 01.19.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Tightening torques

Factory Standarts WN 4037 > Tightening forces and torques of metric screws
Torque values and tightening forces for nuts and bolts with standard (coarse) metric thread or fine
metric thread
The tightening force values Pv listed in this chart provide approx. 90% utitization of screw stretch limit v
0.2. The tightening torques MA are calculated from Pv .
Surface condition:
> tempered or bonderized
> galvanized / electroplated
> DAKROMET 500
> Screw and nut without additional treatment, not lubricated, medium friction o ges.=0.12.

Standard metric thread Fine metric thread

Tightening Tightening Tightening Tightening

Bolt size Grade force torque Bolt size Grade force torque
FM in N MA in Nm FM in N MA in Nm

8.8 4050 2,8

M4 10.9 6000 4,1
12.9 7000 4,8
8.8 6600 5,5
M5 10.9 9700 8,1
12.9 11400 9,5
8.8 9400 9,5
M6 10.9 13700 14,0
12.9 16100 16,5
8.8 13700 15,5
M7 10.9 20100 23,0
12.9 23500 27,0
8.8 17200 23,0 8.8 18800 24,5
M8 10.9 25000 34,0 M8¥1 10.9 27500 36
12.9 29500 40,0 12.9 32500 43
8.8 24800 36
M9¥1 10.9 36500 53
12.9 42500 62
8.8 27500 46,0 8.8 31500 52
M10 10.9 40000 68,0 M10¥1 10.9 46500 76
12.9 47000 79,0 12.9 54000 89
8.8 29500 49
M10¥1,25 10.9 43000 72
12.9 51000 84
8.8 40000 79,0 8.8 45000 87
M12 10.9 59000 117,0 M12¥1,25 10.9 66000 125
12.9 69000 135,0 12.9 77000 150
8.8 42500 83
M12¥1,5 10.9 62000 122
12.9 73000 145
8.8 55000 125,0 8.8 61000 135
M14 10.9 80000 185,0 M14¥1,5 10.9 89000 200
12.9 94000 215,0 12.9 104000 235
8.8 75000 195,0 8.8 82000 205
M16 10.9 111000 280,0 M16¥1,5 10.9 121000 300
12.9 130000 330,0 12.9 141000 360
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
a

A / R 900 B > R 944 Li 01.20.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Tightening torques

Standard metric thread Fine metric thread

Tightening Tightening Tightening Tightening

Bolt size Grade force torque Bolt size Grade force torque
FM in N MA in Nm FM in N MA in Nm

8.8 94000 280 8.8 110000 310

M18 10.9 135000 390 M18¥1,5 10.9 157000 440
12.9 157000 460 12.9 184000 520
8.8 102000 290
M18¥2 10.9 146000 420
12.9 170000 490
8.8 121000 390 8.8 139000 430
M20 10.9 173000 560 M20¥1,5 10.9 199000 620
12.9 202000 650 12.9 232000 720
8.8 152000 530 8.8 171000 580
M22 10.9 216000 750 M22¥1,5 10.9 245000 820
12.9 250000 880 12.9 285000 960
8.8 175000 670 8.8 207000 760
M24 10.9 249000 960 M24¥1,5 10.9 295000 1090
12.9 290000 1120 12.9 346000 1270
8.8 196000 730
M24¥2 10.9 280000 1040
12.9 325000 1220
8.8 230000 1000 8.8 267000 1110
M27 10.9 330000 1400 M27¥1,5 10.9 381000 1580
12.9 385000 1650 12.9 445000 1850
8.8 255000 1070
M27¥2 10.9 365000 1500
12.9 425000 1800
8.8 280000 1350 8.8 335000 1540
M30 10.9 400000 1900 M30¥1,5 10.9 477000 2190
12.9 465000 2250 12.9 558000 2560
8.8 321000 1490
M30¥2 10.9 457000 2120
12.9 534000 2480
8.8 350000 1850 8.8 410000 2050
M33 10.9 495000 2600 M33¥1,5 10.9 584000 2920
12.9 580000 3000 12.9 683000 3420
8.8 395000 2000
M33¥2 10.9 560000 2800
12.9 660000 3300
8.8 410000 2350 8.8 492000 2680
M36 10.9 580000 3300 M36¥1,5 10.9 701000 3820
12.9 680000 3900 12.9 820000 4470
8.8 440000 2500
M36¥3 10.9 630000 3500
12.9 740000 4100
8.8 490000 3000 8.8 582000 3430
M39 10.9 700000 4300 M39¥1,5 10.9 830000 4890
12.9 820000 5100 12.9 971000 5720
8.8 530000 3200
M39¥3 10.9 750000 4600
12.9 880000 5300

01.20.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Tightening torques

Tightening torques for straight male stud coupling "GE"( Ermeto )

valid if screwed into steel parts ( coat with oil before mounting ! )
Type with sealing edge Type with eolastic seal ring
Thread Tightening Thread Tightening
Type Size torque Type Size torque
M or G M or G
Nm Nm
Series Light L Series Light L
GE 06 LM A3C M 10¥1 18 GE 06 LM ED A3C M 10¥1 18
GE 06 LR A3C G 1/8 A 18 GE 06 LR ED A3C G 1/8 A 18
GE 08 LM A3C M 12¥1,5 30 GE 08 LM ED A3C M 12¥1,5 25
GE 08 LR A3C G 1/4 A 35 GE 08 LR ED A3C G 1/4 A 35
GE 10 LM A3C M 14¥1,5 45 GE 10 LM ED A3C M 14¥1,5 45
GE 10 LR A3C G 1/4 A 35 GE 10 LR ED A3C G 1/4 A 35
GE 12 LM A3C M 16¥1,5 65 GE 12 LM ED A3C M 16¥1,5 55
GE 12 LR A3C G 3/8 A 70 GE 12 LR ED A3C G 3/8 A 70
GE 15 LM A3C M 18¥1,5 80 GE 15 LM ED A3C M 18¥1,5 70
GE 15 LR A3C G 1/2 A 140 GE 15 LR ED A3C G 1/2 A 90
GE 18 LM A3C M 22¥1,5 140 GE 18 LM ED A3C M 22¥1,5 125
GE 18 LR A3C G 1/2 A 100 GE 18 LR ED A3C G 1/2 A 90
GE 22 LM A3C M 22¥1,5 140 GE 22 LM ED A3C M 26¥1,5 180
GE 22 LR A3C G 3/4 A 180 GE 22 LR ED A3C G 3/4 A 180
GE 28 LM A3C M 33¥2,0 340 GE 28 LM ED A3C M 33 x 2,0 310
GE 28 LR A3C G1A 330 GE 28 LR ED A3C G1A 310
GE 35 LM A3C M 42¥2,0 500 GE 35 LM ED A3C M 42¥2,0 450
GE 35 LR A3C G 1 1/4 A 540 GE 35 LR ED A3C G 1 1/4 A 450
GE 42 LM A3C M 48¥2,0 630 GE 42 LM ED A3C M 48¥2,0 540
GE 42 LR A3C G 1 1/2 A 630 GE 42 LR ED A3C G 1 1/2 A 540
Series Heavy S Series Heavy S
GE 06 SM A3C M 12¥1,5 35 GE 06 SM ED A 3 C M 12¥1,5 35
GE 06 SR A3C G 1/4 A 55 GE 06 SR ED A 3 C G 1/4 A 55
GE 08 SM A3C M 14¥1,5 55 GE 08 SM ED A 3 C M 14¥1,5 55
GE 08 SR A3C G 1/4 A 55 GE 08 SR ED A 3 C G 1/4 A 55
GE 10 SM A3C M 16¥1,5 70 GE 10 SM ED A 3 C M 16¥1,5 70
GE 10 SR A3C G 3/8 A 90 GE 10 SR ED A 3 C G 3/8 A 80
GE 12 SM A3C M 18¥1,5 110 GE 12 SM ED A 3 C M 18¥1,5 90
GE 12 SR A3C G 3/8 A 90 GE 12 SR ED A 3 C G 3/8 A 80
GE 14 SM A3C M 20¥1,5 150 GE 14 SM ED A 3 C M 20¥1,5 125
GE 14 SR A3C G 1/2 A 150 GE 14 SR ED A 3 C G 1/2 A 115
GE 16 SM A3C M 22¥1,5 170 GE 16 SM ED A 3 C M 22¥1,5 135
GE 16 SR A3C G 1/2 A 130 GE 16 SR ED A 3 C G 1/2 A 115
GE 20 SM A3C M 27¥2,0 270 GE 20 SM ED A 3 C M 27¥2,0 180
GE 20 SR A3C G 3/4 A 270 GE 20 SR ED A 3 C G 3/4 A 180
GE 25 SM A3C M 33¥2,0 410 GE 25 SM ED A 3 C M 33¥2,0 310
GE 25 SR A3C G1A 340 GE 25 SR ED A 3 C G1A 310
GE 30 SM A3C M 42¥2,0 540 GE 30 SM ED A 3 C M 42¥2,0 450
GE 30 SR A3C G 1 1/4 A 540 GE 30 SR ED A 3 C G 1 1/4 A 450
GE 38 SM A3C M 48¥2,0 700 GE 38 SM ED A 3 C M 48¥2,0 540
GE 38 SR A3C G 1 1/2 A 700 GE 38 SR ED A 3 C G 1 1/2 A 540

GE = straight male stud coupling (with thread M = metric, G = inch)

aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a

A / R 900 B > R 944 Li 01.20.03

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Tightening torques

Tightening torques for Ermeto "banjo" type coupling

valid if screwed into steel parts ( coat with oil before mounting ! )

Tightening Tightening
Type torque Type torque

Series Light Thread Size Nm Series Light Thread Size Nm

WH / TH 06 LR KDS WH / TH 06 LM KDS
G 1/8 A 18 M 10¥1 18
A3C A3C
WH / TH 08 LR KDS WH / TH 08 LM KDS
G 1/4 A 45 M 12¥1,5 45
A3C A3C
WH / TH 10 LR KDS WH / TH 10 LM KDS
G 3/8 A 45 M 14¥1,5 55
A3C A3C
WH / TH 12 LR KDS WH / TH 12 LM KDS
G1/2 A 70 M 16¥1,5 80
A3C A3C
WH / TH 15 LR KDS WH / TH 15 LM KDS
G3/4 A 120 M 18¥1,5 100
A3C A3C
WH / TH 18 LR KDS WH / TH 18 LM KDS
G1 A 120 M 22¥1,5 140
A3C A3C
WH / TH 22 LR KDS WH / TH 22 LM KDS
G 1 1/4 A 230 M 27¥2,0 320
A3C A3C
WH / TH 28 LR KDS WH / TH 28 LM KDS
G 1 1/4 A 320 M 33 x 2,0 360
A3C A3C
WH / TH 35 LR KDS WH / TH 35 LM KDS
G 1 1/4 A 540 M 42¥2,0 540
A3C A3C
WH / TH 42 LR KDS WH / TH 42 LM KDS
R 1 1/2 A 700 M 48¥2,0 700
A3C A3C

Series Heavy Thread Size Nm Series Heavy Thread Size Nm

WH / TH 06 SR KDS WH / TH 06 SM KDS
G 1/4 A 45 M 12¥1,5 45
A3C A3C
WH / TH 08 SR KDS WH / TH 08 SM KDS
G 1/4 A 45 M 14¥1,5 55
A3C A3C
WH / TH 10 SR KDS WH / TH 10 SM KDS
G 3/8 A 70 M 16¥1,5 80
A3C A3C
WH / TH 12 SR KDS WH / TH 12 SM KDS
G 3/8 A 70 M 18¥1,5 100
A3C A3C
WH / TH 16 SR KDS WH / TH 14 SM KDS
G 1/2 A 120 M 20¥1,5 125
A3C A3C
WH / TH 20 SR KDS WH / TH 16 SM KDS
G 3/4 A 230 M 22¥1,5 135
A3C A3C
WH / TH 25 SR KDS WH / TH 20 SM KDS
G1A 320 M 27¥2,0 320
A3C A3C
WH / TH 30 SR KDS WH / TH 25 SM KDS
G 1 1/4 A 540 M 33¥2,0 360
A3C A3C
WH / TH 38SR KDS WH / TH 30 SM KDS
G 1/4 A 700 M 42¥2,0 540
A3C A3C
WH / TH 38 SM KDS
M 48¥2,0 700
A3C

01.20.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Tightening torques

Tightening torques for screw in plugs "VSTI" ( Ermeto )

valid if screwed into steel parts ( coat with oil before mounting ! )

Thread Tightening Thread Tightening

Type Size torque Type Size torque
(Metric) G
VSTI VSTI Nm
Nm

VSTI 10¥1 ED A3C M 10¥1 12 VSTI 1/8 ED A3C G 1/8 A 13

VSTI 12¥1,5 ED A3C M 12¥1,5 25 VSTI 1/4 ED A3C G 1/4 A 30
VSTI 14¥1,5 ED A3C M 14¥1,5 35 VSTI 3/8 ED A3C G 3/8 A 60
VSTI 16¥1,5 ED A3C M 16¥1,5 55 VSTI 1/2 ED A3C G 1/2 A 80
VSTI 18¥1,5 ED A3C M 18¥1,5 65 VSTI 3/4 ED A3C G 3/4 A 140
VSTI 20¥1,5 ED A3C M 20¥1,5 80 VSTI 1 ED A3C G1A 200
VSTI 22¥1,5 ED A3C M 22¥1,5 90 VSTI 1 1/4 ED A3C G 1 1/4 A 450
VSTI 26¥1,5 ED A3C M 26¥1,5 120 VSTI 1 1/2 ED A3C G 1 1/2 A 450
VSTI 27¥2 ED A3C M 27¥2,0 135
VSTI 33¥2 ED A3C M 33¥2,0 225
VSTI 42¥2 ED A3C M 42¥2,0 360
VSTI 48¥2 ED A3C M 48¥2,0 360

VSTI = Plug with hexagon socket

A / R 900 B > R 944 Li 01.20.05

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel

a
a

5. LUBRICATION

GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION

It is very important that all guidelines describing lubrication, checking the oil level, replacing the
oil are strictly adhered to !
This maintenance increases the life of the excavator and improves its dependability.

It is especially important to change the oil regularly and in the intervals noted on the
maintenance schedule ! Only use specified lubricants and oils !

CAUTION

When checking or replacing the oil, observe the following :

f Park the machine on level ground, if not otherwise stated, and turn the engine off.

f When working in the engine area, make sure the covers and side doors are secured.

f Only add fuel when the engine is turned off.

f Never smoke or allow an open flame in refueling areas.

f The machine's zone of operation must always remain clear of lubricating materials to
prevent the personnel working in the area from slipping. Be sure to clean excess oil or
grease from the machine, especially where the various bearings are connected to the
central lubrication devices.

Cleanliness is especially important when changing engine, gear or hydraulic oil.

Before removing fittings or plugs, make sure the surrounding areas are cleaned.
When changing the oil, clean the fill or drain plugs.

IMPORTANT !

Be sure to drain oil into a suitable container and dispose of oil and filter cartridges properly.

A / R900 B > R 944 01.50.01

Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
 a

> Fuel

SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC
> Lubricant

> Antifreeze
COMPONENTS

(TURBOCHARGED)
DIESEL ENGINE

01.50.02
Service Manual

SYMBOL

aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

∞C
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

∞F
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

∞F >40
∞C >40
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>31
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
>30
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>22
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>30

>22
SAE

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

Protected to :

>13
>4
>20

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>4
DIN 51512

>20
5

% of antifreeze
VISCOSITY

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
Hydraulic Excavator

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

5
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
>10

14

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>10
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

14
23

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

∞F
∞C

23
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
0

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

32

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

0
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
41

32

Warming up the hydraulic system:

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>40
>40
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

41
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
50
+10
SAE 10W>30

SAE 10W
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
SAE 5W>40

>31
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

50
59

+10
SAE 15W>30

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

on page 5.6.
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>30
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
SAE 10W>40

>22

59
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
69

SAE 10W>30
+20

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>13
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
SAE 15W>40

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

77

69
+20
SAE 20W>20
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

>4
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
>20

77
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

2. For temperatures below the limits listed under 1 :

SAE 10W>40
Use only Diesel fuels with a sulfur content e 0,5%.

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

86
+30

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

5
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

60%
95

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

86
+30
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

SAE 15W>40
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
> Below > 25∞C (>13∞F) preheat the engine before starting

SAE 30
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
>10

95
See recommendations concerning engine coolant
14

50%

1. For temperatures 18∞F (10∞ C) below the lower limits :

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
SPECIFICATION

Ethylen glycol based antifreeze and anticorrosive mixture

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

Preheat hydraulic oil in the tank before starting the engine.

104
+40

45%
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
23

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

104
+40
113

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

Run engine at half speed. Warm up the hydraulic system by fully

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
0

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

32

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

113
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
+50

122

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

up for about 10 minutes or until operating temperatures are reached.

+50
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

122
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

actuating hydr. cylinders and motors for short periods. Continue warm
API: CD/SE resp. CD/SF" SHPD " oils

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa a aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaa aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaa

Issue : 09 / 2001
and
main>
Lubricants and fuel chart

See the

manual
tenance
CAPACITIES

operator

a
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel chart

a
a

VISCOSITY
COMPONENTS SYMBOL SAE SPECIFICATION
DIN 51512

1) With swing brake only used as a parking brake

SWING GEAR
SAE 90 API GL>5 and MIL>L>2105 B, C or D
2) With swing brake also used as a service brake
(Actuated via a footpedal)
SAE 90 LS API GL>5. MIL>L>2105 B

TRAVEL GEAR SAE 90 API GL>5 and MIL>L>2105 B, C or D

SPLITTERBOX
SAE 90 API GL>5 and MIL>L>2105 B, C or D

API GL>5
AXLES SAE 90 LS MIL>L>2105 B
ZF TE>ML 05

GEAR BOX SAE 10W30

TRANSMISSION or ZF TE>ML 07
SAE 20 W 20
GENERAL
LUBRICATION
POINTS

Swing ring Consistency 2 MULTI PURPOSE GREASE

Attachment bearings NLGI N∞ 2 Grade KP2k or EP2
Track tensioner ... (Extreme pressure N∞ 2 Grade)

Hinges, couplings, Engine oil

locks
Rubber seal on doors Silicon spray
and covers or Talcum

REFRIGERATING
AGENT FOR AIR R 134 a
CONDITIONER

REFRIGERATING
AGENT FOR AIR PAG H 14>002>454
CONDITIONER

WINDSHIELD Commercial Windshield washer fluid

WASHER SYSTEM Denatured alcohol

A / R900 B > R 944 01.50.03

Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel specifications

a
a

LUBRICANT AND FUEL SPECIFICATIONS

INFORMATION TO THE LUBRICANTS AND LUBRICATION CHARTS

The capacities in the lubricants chart and on the lubrication chart inside the cab are only given for your
guidance.
Always check the level of a component after replacing its oil or when topping it up.

1) LUBRICANTS FOR DIESEL ENGINE :

Lube oil for Liebherr Diesel engine must meet one of the following specifications :
For turbocharged engines
API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CG>4, CF>4
(American Petroleum Institute)
ACEA (CCMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E2>96, E3>96, (D4, D5), E4>98
Associat. des Constructeurs Europ. de l'automobile
(CCMC=Comitee of Com. Market / Autom. constructors)

Oil change intervals in operating hours

f The oil filter must be changed every 500 operating hours. Oil change intervalls must be defined
according to the chart below, depending on ambient temperatures, sulphur content in fuel and
oil quality.
f If indicated operating hours are not reached, change engine oil and filter at least once a year.
f Notice: Engines delivered ex works up to 12 > 99 were filled with running in oil. For these
engines, a first oil and filter change must be performed after the 50>100 first working
hours.

Oil change intervals for turbocharged engines

Oil quality

Ambient Sulfur contents CG>4 E3>96

temperatures in fuel CF>4 D5
E2>96 E4>98
D4

f>10∞C e 0,5% 250 h 500 h

> 0,5% 125 h 250 h

<>10∞C e 0,5% 125 h 250 h

> 0,5% >> 125 h

01.50.04 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel specifications

a
a

2) DIESEL FUEL :

Authorized Diesel fuel specifications

Use only Diesel fuel with a sulfur content of less than 0,5 % and complying with one of the following
standarts : DIN EN 590
ASTM D 975>89a: 1>D and 2

The sulfur content in Diesel fuel should be less than 0.5%.

Higher sulphur contents influence oil change intervals and engine life.

Lubricity
By reducing sulphur content, the question of engine fuel lubricity arose. It has been clearly shown
that engine fuels with the maximum allowable sulphur content (in Europe 0.05% by volume) can
cause damage to the injector systems (especially in the case of distributor injection pumps).

Improving Diesel fuel fluidity in cold climates

Addition of regular gasoline or kerosene

When ambient temperature are below 0 ∞C (32 ∞F), Diesel fuels normally used during the summer may
suffer a decline in fluidity due to paraffin separation. The same occurs if Diesel fuels normally used
during the winter are used at temperature below >15 ∞C (5 ∞F).
Often, additive diesel fuel is on offer with operating temperatures down to >20∞C (>4 ∞F).
In order to prevent operating problems at these low temperatures, the Diesel fuel must be mixed
with regular gasoline or kerosene.
Mixing regular gasoline should be considered at last resort, under no circumstances should the ratio
of gasoline exceed 30%.
Never use super grade gas for mixing.

Ambient temperature Summer Winter

∞C ∞F % Diesel fuel % Addition % Diesel fuel % Addition
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
0 = >10 32 = 14 70 30 100
>10 = >15 14 = 5> 50 50* 100
>15 = >20 5 = >4 70 30
>20 = >25 >4 = >13 50 50*

* If an additive of 50% is necessary, only use petrol (no normal gas).

Depending on the ratio of Diesel fuel to gasoline or kerosene, engine output may somethat decline.
Depending on the ambient temperature, add as little gasoline or kerosene as possible to the Diesel
fuel.

Other Fuel additives (flow improvers):

Widely available flow improvers also enhance Diesel fuel ability to perform reliably in cold climate
conditions. When using such flow improvers, follow the manufacter's recommendations closely.

A / R900 B > R 944 01.50.05

Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel specifications

a
a

3) ENGINE COOLANT > Specifications for anticorrosion and antifreeze protection

Using a mixture of antifreeze and anticorrosion with "DCA 4" anticorrosion additive.
To assure the protection from corrosion of the cooling system, the coolant must contain at least 50%
corrosion / antifreeze mixture all year round. This protects the cooling system to about > 35∞ C ( > 33∞ F).
When fluid is added to the coolant mixture, it must be assured that the mixture maintains a 50%
antifreeze content.
Caution : The percentage of antifreeze should not exceed 60 % . A higher concentration would lead
to reduced antifreeze and cooling properties.
In addition, the cooling system must contain DCA4 (DCA = Diesel Coolant Additive) from FLEETGUARD.
The prescribed concentration is from 0.3 to 0.8 DCA units per liter of coolant (1.2 to 3.0 units per US
Gallon).
The coolant must be changed every 2 years. Before adding new coolant, check the circuit for cleanness
and if necessary flush it with water.
Using a mixture of water and DCA4 (without antifreeze and anticorrosion)
In certain circumstances, and if ambient temperatures are constantly above the freezing point, for
instances in tropical regions, and if there are no corrosion or antifreeze fluids available, then a mixture
of water and DCA4 additives may be used.
To maintain sufficient anticorrosion properties however, the DCA4 concentration of thecoolant must in
this case be about doubled in comparison with the one prescribed when using a mixture also containing
antifreeze and anticorrosion, it equals a concentration from 0.6 to 1.6 DCA units per liter of coolant (2.4
to 6.0 units per US Gallon) .
Important !
If employing a mixture consisting only of water and DCA4 additives :
> the use of coolant refiners (corrosion protective oils) is not authorized,
> the coolant change interval must be reduced to once a year.
Checking and maintaining the right DCA4 concentration in the cooling circuit
To check the DCA4 concentration, we recommend the use of the test kit CC 2602 M from FLEETGUARD
(LIEBHERR order Nb 5608459).
The water fliter mounted in the cooling circuit contains from 4 up to 8 DCA4 units, see the following
schedule. When changing the filter, the corresponding units are addad to the cooling circuit.
If there are no significant coolant leakages, regularly replacing the water filter every 500 working hours
is sufficient to maintain the correct concentration of anticorrosive agent.
The DCA concentration has to be checked before each filter change, after each important coolant make
up, and at regular intervals if smaller coolant quantities are refilled frequently.
If the concentration is too low, or when changing the coolant in the system, the remaining necessary
DCA4 units must be added to the system in liquid form (see schedule).
The LIEBHERR order number for a 0,5 liter can containing 5 DCA4 units is 7363898.

DCA4>Water Filter Quantity of DCA4 liquid(1) (1) For use with a

Cooling system
mixture containing
capacity
Designa> LIEBHERR DCA4 DCA4 50% antifreeze
(liter / US.Gallons) 0,5 liter cans
tion order nb units units and anticorrosion

24 > 39 / 6.3>10.4 WF 2071 7367045 4 3 15

40 > 59 / 10.5>15.7 WF 2072 7381493 6 4 20

60 > 79 / 15.8>20.9 WF 2073 7367052 8 5 25

80 > 115 / 21.0>30.4 WF 2073 7367052 8 8 40

Fresh water guidelines:

To mix the coolant fluid, only clean, preferably soft water should be used. Often, but not always,
regular drinking water can be used. Sea water, brackish waters, sole water or industrial waste water
may not be used.

01.50.06 Edition : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel specifications

a
a

Fresh water quality

Sum of alkalies (water hardness) : 0,6 to 2,7 mmol/l
(3 to 15∞d)z z
1∞ dGH (total hardness > germany)
ph value at 20∞ C ( 68∞ F) : 6,5 to 8,0 = 1,2∞ (englisch hardness)
Chloride > ion content : max. 80 mg/l = 17.9 ppm (US hardness)
Sulfate > ion content : max. 80 mg/l

The following corrosion and antifreeze fluids may be used:

Brand Manufacturer
Agip Antifreeze Plus Agip Petroll S.p.A Rom / Italy
Agip>Auto Langzeit>Frostschutz Agip Schmiertechnik GmbH, WÂrzburg / Germany
Antigel DB 486 Sotagral SA, St. Priest / France
Aral Antifreeze Extra Aral GmbH, Bochum / Germany
Aral Antifreeze T Aral GmbH, Bochum / Germany
AVIA Antifreeze APN Deutsche AVIA>Mineral>Tl GmbH, MÂnchen / Germany
BP Antifrost X 2270 A Deutsche BP AG, Hamburg / Germany
BP Napgel C 2270/1 BP Chemicals Ltd, London / England
DEA KÂhlerfrostschutz DEA Mineral‘l AG, Hamburg / Germany
DEUTZ KÂhlmittelschutz 0101 1490 DEUTZ Service International GmbH, K‘ln / Germany
DOW KÂhlmittel D542 / 1993 BOSS Chemie AG, Wittenbach / Swiss
Frostschutz 600 Mobil Schmierstoff GmbH, Hamburg / Germany
Glacelf SX Elf Lubrifiants Paris / France
Glycoshell Shell Chemie GmbH, Eschborn / Germany
Glysantin (G 48>00) BASF AG, Ludwigshafen / Germany
Igol Antigel Type DB Igol France, Paris / France
Motul Anti>freeze Motul SA, Aubervilliers / France
TMV>Frostschutzmittel TMV>AG, Wien / Austria
OZO Frostschutz S Total Germany GmbH, DÂsseldorf / Germany
Total Multiprotect Total Germany GmbH, DÂsseldorf / Germany

4) HYDRAULIC OIL :
Hydraulic oil specifications
1. Mineral oils
Recommended and approved are engine oils, which conform to the following specifications and
regulations :
For single viscosity oils : API > CD / CCMC > D4 / ACEA > E1
Mercedes>Benz specifications > page No 226.0 and 227.0
For multi viscosity oil : API > CD+SF / CCMC > D5 / ACEA > E3
Mercedes>Benz specifications > page No 227.5, 228.1 and 228.3

2. Environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids (also called "BIO oils" >bio degradable oils> )
The "environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids" recommended by LIEBHERR are limited to synthetic
ester based hydraulic fluids with a viscosity according to ISO VG 46.
Initial filling is performed ex works according to customer desires. The use of environmentally>friendly
hydraulic fluids must be arranged with the LIEBHERR Co beforehand.
Organic oils should not be used due to their poor temperature consistency.

Note: It is absolutely necessary never to mix different brands of environmentally friendly hydraulic
fluids or to mix fluids with mineral oils.
For further information on operating while using environmentally friendly hydraulic fluids, see
operation and maintenance manual.

A / R 900 B > R 944 01.50.07

Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Lubricants and fuel specifications

a
a

To limit the hydraulic oil contamination when working under extreme dusty conditions
On excavators working under very dusty conditions or with a hydraulic hammer attachment, the
contamination of the hydraulic oil may be significently increased.
In order to avoid any premature wear and failure of hydraulic components in consequence of this
contamination reduce the oil change intervals as described above and, in addition, observe
following recommandations:
> The tank return filter element(s) must be replaced every 500 operating hours.
> The tank return filter must be fitted with lower (finer) micron filter element(s) (10 om instead 20
om element, serially mounted).
> The breather filter on the hydraulic tank (fineness of serially mounted filter is 10 om) must be
replaced with a 3 om fine breather filter.
> This 3 om breather filter must be replaced every time the hydraulic oil is changed (every 500
operating hours).

Notice: The excavators delivered from factory with a hydraulic hammer attachment are fitted
with the fine 10 om return filter element(s) and with the 3 om fine breather filter.
The kit for retrofit installation of a hydraulic hammer also contains these fine element(s).

5) GEAR OILS

Gear oils for vicosity classification SAE 90 must meet the specifications API>GL>5>90 and MIL > L
2105 B, C or D.
For SAE 90 viscosity, SAE 80W90 can also be used.

6) GREASE FOR SWING RING AND GENERAL LUBRICATION POINTS :

This grease must meet specifications, consistency classification 2 in NL>GI viscosity per
DIN 51 818 and DIN 51 825 or EP2 per NF>T>60 132.
The grease must be lithium>complex based, with VKA value of at least 2300 N per DIN 51350 or
ASTM D 2596.

GREASE FOR AUTOMATIC LUBRICATION SYSTEM

For the temperature range +60∞ C to >10∞ C (140∞ F to >50∞ F) use a grease meeting the
consistency classification 2 in NL GI viscosity.
LIEBHERR recommends the use of :
Multi>service grease RPL: Liebherr order no : 8501565 / 1 pack 5 cartridges of 400 grammes.
For operating in ambient temperatures that are expected to remain under >10∞ C, it is recom>
manded to make an early change of the grease type to a specific "LOW TEMPERATURE" grade,
which can be recommended to you from your grease supplier and which will have the necessary
pumpability and "WORKED PENETRATION" consistency between 265 > 295 at >10∞ C
temperature.

7) REFRIGERATOR OIL IN AIR CONDITIONER COMPRESSOR :

The following refrigerator oil may be used:
Brand Manufacturer LIEBHERR part N∞
0,25 liter (6 oz.) can of oil
PAG H 14>002>454 SANDEN 8503515
PLANETELF ELF 8504414

At delivery, the compressor is filled with oil : PAG H 14>002>454

PAG oils (Polyalcylen>Glycol oils) are the only oils presently authorized by the compressor
manufacturer when using refrigerant R 134 a.

A / R 900 B > R 944 01.50.09

Litronic Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special Tools

SUBGROUP INDEX A / R 900 B > R 944

2.01. Special Tools for maintenance and repair of hydraulic excavators

2.02. Special Tools for maintenance and adjustments of LIEBHERR > Diesel >Engines
2.03. Special Tools for maintenance and adjustments of DEUTZ > Diesel >Engines
2.05. Special Tools for maintenance, repair and adjustments of the Hydraulic System
2.06. Special Tools for maintenance and repair of electrical connectors
2.07. Special Tools for maintenance and repair of Gears
2.08. Special Tools for maintenance and repair of Axles

2.12. Piston Wrench

2.14. Slotted nut Wrench
2.15. Mounting device for brake housing on swing gear Liebherr
2.16. Mounting device for brake housing on travel gear Liebherr
2.18. Installation tool for slipring seals

A / R 900 B > R 944 02.00.00

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung und Reparatur von Hydraulikbaggern

Special tools

for maintenance and repair of hydraulic excavators

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien et les r±parations des pelles hydrauliques

2.01>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

1 Me˚stutzen NW 10 7002404 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pipe adaptator
Embout

2 NW 12 7008688 d d d d d d d d d d d

4 Manometer R 1/2" 7002436 d d d d d d d d d d d

BSP coupling
Raccord

5 Manometer Direktanschlu˚ R 1/2" 7002435 d d d d d d d d d d d

Direct gauge coupling
Raccord (brancht. direct du
manom∞tre)

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.01>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
Zum Anschlie˚en von
7 Hochdruckschlauch Lßnge 1000 mm 7002437 d d d d d d d d d d d Manometern an allen Me˚stellen
High pressure hose Length (Me˚stutzen Nr. 1/2 und
Schraubkupplungen 10 > 14)
Flexible haute pres. Long.
To connect pressure gauges on all
check points (pipe adapter no 1/2
8 1500 mm 7002475 d d d d d d d d d d d and gauge coupling 10 > 14)

Pour le branchement des

manom∞tres sur tous les embouts
1/2 et raccords complets 10 > 14.

10 Schraubkupplung kpl. M10¥1 5005180 d d d d d d d d d d d

Gauge coupling
Raccord complet

11 M12¥1,5 7402580 d d d d d d d d d d d
12 M14¥1,5 5004002 d d d d d d d d d d d
13 M16¥1,5 7361345 d d d d d d d d d d d
14 R 1/4" 7362579 d d d d d d d d d d d

Zur eberprÂfung der Betriebs>

15 Manometer 0>1,6 bar 8042577 d d d d d d d d d d d drÂcke eines bzw. mehrerer
Hydraulic pressure gauge Hydraulikkreise.
Mano. ° bain de glyc±rine Used to check system pressure in
one or more hydraulic systems.
16 0>1,6 bar* 8042578 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pour le contr—le des pressions
17 0>10 bar* 5002865 d d d d d d d d d d d d'un ou de plusieurs circuits hydr.
18 0>40 bar* 7361288 d d d d d d d d d d d
19 0>60 bar* 5002867 d d d d d d d d d d d
* glyceringedßmpft
20 0>250 bar* 7361285 d d d d d d d d d d d
* dampened with glycerin
21 0>400 bar* 7500002 d d d d d d d d d d d
* ° bain de glyc±rine
22 0>600 bar* 7002866 d d d d d d d d d d d

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.01>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

30 Differenzdruck>Me˚>Set Zum Messen des Differenzdruckes Ep

bestehend aus : 7025376 d d d d d d d d zwischen Pumpen> und LS Druck
Measuring device for differen>
tial pressures contents : To measure the differntial pressure Ep
Instrument de mesure pour
between pump> and LS pressure
pressions diff±rentielles,
comprenant :
Pour mesurer la diff±rence de pression
30.1 > Me˚gerßt Multi>Handy 2045 7025272 d d d d d d d d Ep entre pression de pompe et
> Measuring device M>H 2045 pression LS
> Instrument de mesure M>H 2045

30.2 > Steckernetzgerßt 230 V 7025279 d d d d d d d d

> Power supply unit 230 V
> Unit± d'alimentation 230 V

30.3 > KFZ>Anschlu˚kabel 7025273 d d d d d d d d

> Connecting wire>bord circuit
> C£ble de brancht. au tableau

30.4 > Transportkoffer 7025274 d d d d d d d d

> Travel box
> Coffret de transport

30.5 > Adapterkabel / Daten>Âbertrag. 7025275 d d d d d d d d

> Adapter wire > data transfert
> C£ble pour transfert de donn±es

30.6 > Druckaufnehmer 7025751 d d d d d d d d

> Pressure sensor
> Capteur de pression

30.7 > Direktanschlu˚ fÂr Druck>

aufnehmer 7025752 d d d d d d d d
> Connecting wire for pressure
sensor
> Raccord pour capteur de pression

30.8 > Me˚kabel MK 12 7025753 d d d d d d d d

> Measuring wire MK 12
> C£ble de mesure MK 12

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.01>04

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
Zum Messen des Differenzdruckes Ep
31 Differenzdruck>Me˚>Set zwischen Pumpen> und LS Druck
bestehend aus : 7025755 d d d d d d d d
Measuring device for differen> To measure the differntial pressure Ep
tial pressures contents : between pump> and LS pressure
Instrument de mesure pour
pressions diff±rentielles, Pour mesurer la diff±rence de pression
comprenant :
Ep entre pression de pompe et
pression LS
31.1 Siehe 30.1, see 30.1, voir 30.1 7025272 d d d d d d d d

31.2 > Steckernetzgerßt 120 V 7025754 d d d d d d d d

> Power supply unit 120 V
> Unit± d'alimentation 120 V

31.3 Siehe 30.3, see 30.3, voir 30.3 7025273 d d d d d d d d

31.4 Siehe 30.4, see 30.4, voir 30.4 7025274 d d d d d d d d

31.5 Siehe 30.5, see 30.5, voir 30.5 7025275 d d d d d d d d

31.6 Siehe 30.6, see 30.6, voir 30.6 7025751 d d d d d d d d

31.7 Siehe 30.7, see 30.7, voir 30.7 7025752 d d d d d d d d

31.8 Siehe 30.8, see 30.8, voir 30.8 7025753 d d d d d d d d

33 Stutzen 4901372 d d d d d d d d Zum Druckabgleich in Verbindung mit

Pipe adaptator Wekzeug Nr. 30 / 31
Embout de prise de pression

34 Me˚stutzen mit Metallkappe 7002404 d d d d d d d d For pressure equilibration in

Pipe adaptator with metalic cap connection with tool no.30 / 31
Prise de pression +embout m±tall.
Pour l'±quilibrage en pression en
35 eberwurfmutter 4774002 d d d d d d d d
utilisant l'outil n∞ 30 / 31
Cap nut
Ecrou de raccord

36 Schneidring 4774001 d d d d d d d d
Cutting ring
Bague de sertissage

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.01>05
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

40 LMS>Litronic>Me˚system kpl. 614062001 d d d d d d d d d d d Zum Messen und Abspeichern aller

bestehend aus :Me˚gerßt, DrÂcke, F‘rdermengen, Drehzahlen,
Transportkoffer u. Trageriemen elektr. Str‘me und Spannungen
LMS>Litronic>Measuring kpl. Used to measure and store hydr.
containing : measuring tool, pressures, pump flow, electrical
carrying case and straps current and voltage
Syst∞me de mesure Litonic > LMS Pour la mesure et la m±morisation de
comprenant : instruments de toutes les pressions, d±bits, r±gimes,
mesure, coffret de transport et
tensions et courants ±lectriques
courroie d'±paule
In Verbindung mit Werkzeug Nr. 40
42 Sensoren und Zubeh‘r d d d d d d d d d d d
Sensors and Extas On connexion with tool no. 40
Capteurs et Accessoires En liaison avec l'outil n∞ 40

FÂr Strommessung an der Pumpen>

44 Me˚adapter 8504231 d d d d d d d d d d
regelung
Measuring adapter
Bo¿tier de mesure To check current on pump regulation

Mesure des courants de r±gulation sur

les pompes

FÂr Messung des Induktivgebers B12

45 Adapter 9956422 d d d d d d d d d d
von 3>polig (LH) auf 2>polig (Deutz) in
Adapter Verbindung mit Werkzeug Nr. 44
Adapteur
To check of the RPM >Sensor B12 from
3>pole (LH) on 2>pole (Deutz) in
connection with tool no.44
Mesure des capteur inductif B12
3>bornes (LH) en 2>bornes (Deutz) en
utilisant l'outil n∞ 44

46 Me˚kabel 9956436 d d d d d d d d d d FÂr Strommessung

Measuring wire To check current
C£ble de mesure Mesure des courants

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.01>06

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
Zum Messen der Motordrehzahl
60 Drehzahlmesser Ono Sokki GE 450 7009538 d d d d d d d d d d d Âber Impulsfrequenz der
Revolution > Indicator Einspritzleitung
To check the engine RPM via
Compte>tours Ono Sokki
impulse frequency of the
injection line
Mesure de r±gime du moteur
thermique par rapport aux
impulsions de la pompe °
injection

62 Drehzahlmesser Ornel HT 460 7006974 d d d d d d d d d d d Zum Messen der Drehzahl Âber

Reflexions>Streifen
Revolution > Indicator
Compte>tours Ornel To check the RPM via reflexions
stripe

63 Drehzahlmesser Shimpo DT 205 7364284 d d d d d d d d d d d Mesure de r±gime par

l'interm±diaire d'une pastille
Revolution > Indicator
r±flectrice
Compte>tours Shimpo

64 Streifen / Stripes / Pastilles 614063201 mit Nr.63 / with no. 63 / avec n∞ 63

FÂr Spannungs>, Strom> und Wider>

65 Vielfachme˚gerßt stands>messungen von Elektro>
mit Digitalanzeige Chauvin 8502956 d d d d d d d d d d d anlagen und Elektro > Ventilen
Multimeter with digital display Arnoux For voltage, current and resistance
measurements of eleectrical systems
Contr—leur universel ° MAX 3000 and electrical valves
affichage digital
Mesure de la tension, de la r±sistance
de circuits et clapets ±lectriques

66 Zusatz > Me˚werkzeuge 5616316 d d d d d d d d d d d In Verbindung mit Nr. 65

Kit To be used with tool no. 65
Ensemble de mesures compl. A employer avec l'outillage n∞ 65

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.01>07
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

Zum eberwachen der Temperatur

70 Thermometer GMTL1826 7020372 d d d d d d d d d d d eines Mediums bzw. der Au˚en>
berÂhrungslos ( Infrarot ) Temperatur eines Aggregates

Thermometer Used to monitor the temperatur of

any liquid resp. the housing temp. of
Infrared Temperature sensor
any component
Thermom∞tre Pour mesurer la temp. d'un liquide ou
sans contact la temp. ext±rieure d'un composant

80 Handpumpe 8145666 d d d d d d d d d d d Zur Entnahme einer Tlprobe fÂr die

80 Tlanalyse
Sampling Pump
Pompe manuelle Used to taking samples for oil analysis
82
Pour pr±levement d'±chantillon pour
analyse d'huile
82 Entnahmeventil fÂr Tlproben 7019068 d d d d d d d d d d d
alternativ zur Handpumpe 80
Sampling valve for oil samples
alternative to the sampling
pump no. 80
Vanne de soutirage d'±chan>
tillons d'huile utilisable au lieu
de la pompe manuelle n∞ 80

84 Tl Analysenset * Nr. 1 7018368 d d d d d d d d d d d 6 Stck. Tlproben

Oil Analysis set * 6 samples

85 Tl Analysenset * 8145660 d d d d d d d d d d d 1 Stck. Tlprobe

Oil Analysis set * 1 sample
Schlauch
Probenbehßlter
Hose
Sample container
* Analysen bei WAER CHECK Deutschland
Flexible Laborbericht in deutscher Sprache
R±cipient pour
±chantillon * Analysis at WAER CHECK Germany
Versandtasche
Shipping bag
Analysis report in German language
Proben Begleitschein Enveloppe
Samples form pour envoi 86 N±cessaire pour analyses d'huiles ** 8503561 d d d d d d d d d d d Pour 6 ±chantillons
** Analyses par St± WAER CHECK Belgique
Formulaire d'accompagnement
Rapport d'analyses en Fran≠ais
d'±chantillon

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.01>08

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

90 Vakuumpumpe REFCO RD>4 7027552 d d d d d d d d d d d Zur Wartung und Reparatur der

Klimaanlage Konvekta
Evacuation pump REFCO
Pompe ° vide REFCO
For servicing and repairing the air
conditioning equipement Konvekta

Pour l'entretien et la r±paration du

elimatiseur Konvecka

91 FÂllschlauch ITE blau 1500 mm 7027553 d d d d d d d d d d d Siehe Pos 90

Filling hose ITE blue
See Pos. 90
Flexible de remplissage ITE bleu

92 FÂllschlauch ITE gelb 1500 mm 7027554 d d d d d d d d d d d Voir Pos. 90

Filling hose ITE yellow
Flexible de remplissage jaune

93 FÂllschlauch ITE rot 1500 mm 7027555 d d d d d d d d d d d

Filling hose ITE red
Flexible de remplissage rouge

94 KFZ > Kupplung ITE 253a 7027556 d d d d d d d d d d d Siehe Pos 90

Quick coupling ITE
See Pos. 90
Attache rapide ITE
Voir Pos. 90
95 KFZ > Kupplung ITE 254a 7027557 d d d d d d d d d d d
Quick coupling ITE
Attache rapide ITE

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.01>09
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

96 4>Ventil > PrÂfarmatur M4WS5C 7027558 d d d d d d d d d d d Zur Wartung und Reparatur der
Klimaanlage Konvekta
Test equipement
with 4 valves For servicing and repairing the air
conditioning equipement Konvekta
Unit± d'essai ° 4 clapets
Pour l'entretien et la r±paration du
elimatiseur Konvecka

100 Montage >/ Demontage> Zur Montage und Demontage der

Expanderbolzen
werkzeug UTV>M20 7023304 d d d d d d d d d d d
For assembly and disassembly of
Assembly/disassembly tool expander bolts
Outillage de montage /
Pour le montage te le d±montage des
d±montage
axes ° bague de serrage expansive
101 UTV>M24 7023305 d d d d d d d d d d d
102 UTV>M30 7023306 d d d d d d d d d d d
103 UTV>M36 7023307 d d d d d d d d d d d
104 UTV>M42 7023308 d d d d d d d d d d d

110 Demontagescheibe M14 7023309 d d d d d d d d d d d Zur Demontage der Expanderbolzen

Disassembly tool For disassembly of expander bolts

Rondelle d'appui pour le Pour le d±montage des axes ° bague

d±montage de serrage expansive
111 M20 7023310 d d d d d d d d d d d
112 M24 7023311 d d d d d d d d d d d
113 M30 7023312 d d d d d d d d d d d
114 M36 7023313 d d d d d d d d d d d
115 M42 7023314 d d d d d d d d d d d

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.01>10

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

120 Diagnosegerßt 5010474 d d d d d d d d d Zur Fehlerdiagnose der Zusatz >

Heizung D 5 W S.
Diagnostic tool
For diagnostic purposes on the
Appareil diagnostique additional cab heater.
Pour diagnostiser des anomalies au
chauffage suppl±montaire

121 Adapterkabel 9960799 d d d d d d d d d Zum Anschlu˚ im Kabelbaum linke

Konsole.
Adapter harness
To connect to the wire harness in left
C£ble d¡adaption control panel.
Pour brancher au faisceau dans le
pupitre gauche.

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.01>11
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industry
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung und Einstellung von Liebherr>Dieselmotoren

Special tools

for maintenance and adjustments of Liebherr>Diesel>engine

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien et le r±glage des moteurs thermiques Liebherr

2.02>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

1 Kompressions>DruckprÂfer 8008782 d d d d d d d d d Zum PrÂfen des Kompressionsdruckes

To check compression
Compressiometer
Pour le contr—le de la pression
Compressiom∞tre d'injection

2 Anschlu˚stÂckfÂr
Kompressions>DruckprÂfer 0524044 d d d d d d d d d An Stelle des Einspritzventils
einzusetzen
Fitting of the recorder
of compression pressure Replaces injection valve

Pi∞ce de raccordement A monter ° la place de l'injecteur

pour compressiom∞tre

3 DÂsenprÂfgerßt 7361236 d d d d d d d d d Zum PrÂfen der Einspritzventile

Nozzle testing device To check injection valve

Appareil de contr—le des Pour le contr—le des injecteurs

injecteurs

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.02>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

4 Hochdruck > Handf‘rder>

pumpe mit Zubeh‘r 7009318 d d d d d d d d d Zum PrÂfen und Einstellen des
F‘rderbeginns der Einspritzpumpe
High>pressure hand feed
pump with accessory Used to check delivery begin of the
injection pump
Pompe manuelle haute
pression avec accessoires Pour le contr—le et le r±glage de la
pression d'injection de la pompe °
injection

10 Me˚vorrichtung 7022420 d d d d d d d Zum PrÂfen und Einstellen des

Measuring device F‘rderbeginns der Einspritzpumpe

Gabarit de mesure Used to check delivery begin of the

injection pump

Pour le contr—le et le r±glage de la

pression d'injection de la pompe °
injection

12 Me˚uhr 7022418 d d d d d d d Zum PrÂfen und Einstellen des F‘rder>

beginns in Verbindung mit Nr. 10
Dial gauge
To check delivery begin tobe used
Comparateur
with no. 10

Pour le contr—le et le r±glage de la

pression d'injection ° employer avec
l'outillage n∞ 10

13 ZwischenstÂck 7022419 d d d d d d d In Verbindung mit Nr. 10

Intermediate piece To be used with no. 10

Entretoise A employer avec l'outillage n∞ 10

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.02>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904 904* 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
18 Ausziehvorrichtung fÂr
Einspritzventile 0524072 d d d d d d d d d Zum Ausbau der Einspritzventile
Extracting device for Used to remove injection valves
injection valve
Extracteur ° chocs pour Pour le d±montage des injecteurs
injecteurs

19 Adapter
fÂr Ausziehvorrichtung 0524029 d d d d d d d d d Gemeinsam mit der Ausziehvor>
richtung zu verwenden
Adapter for extracting
device Used in connection with extracting
Extracteur pour support device
d'injecteurs A utiliser avec l'extracteur

30 Drehvorrichtung / Anbau
am Schwungradgehßuse 0524045 d d d d d d d d d Zum Drehen des Dieselmotors Âber
das Schwungrad
Turning>device/attachment
on flywheel case Used to turn engine over the flyweel
Vireur (mont± sur le carter Pour virer le moteur thermique par
du volant moteur) dessus le volant moteur

35 Keilriemen > Me˚gerßt Krikit 8042829 d d d d d d d d d Zur Messung der Keilriemenspannung

Measuring tool To measure of V>belt tension

Outillage de mesure Pour mesurer la tension des courroies
pour courroies

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.02>04

11 / 2000
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung und Einstellung von DEUTZ>Dieselmotoren

Special tools

for maintenance and adjustments of DEUTZ>Diesel>engine

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien et le r±glage des moteurs thermiques DEUTZ

2.03>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

Zum PrÂfen des Kompressionsdruckes

1 Kompressions>DruckprÂfer 8008782 d d
Compressiometer To check compression

Compressiom∞tre Pour le contr—le de la pression

d'injection

4 Anschlu˚stÂck fÂr
Kompressions>DruckprÂfer 7019856 d d An Stelle des Einspritzventils
einzusetzen
Fitting of the recorder
of compression pressure Replaces injection valve
Pi∞ce de raccordement A monter ° la place de l'injecteur
pour compressiom∞tre

10 DÂsenprÂfgerßt 7361236 d d Zum PrÂfen der Einspritzventile

Nozzle testing device To check injection valve

Appareil de contr—le Pour le contr—le des injecteurs

des injecteurs

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.03>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

14 Keilriemenspannungs>
me˚gerßt 7019872 d d
V>belt tension gauge
Appareil de v±rification
de la tension de la
courroie trap±zoidale

20 Torx > Werkzeugsatz 7014716 d d

Torx tools kit
Jeu d'outils Torx

22 Torx > SteckschlÂssel >

Einsßtze lange AusfÂhrung E14 7019851d d
Torx sockets long version
Embouts de cl± ° douille
Torx, mod∞le long

23 E18 7011668 d d

24 E20 7019852 d d

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.03>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

25 Stecknu˚ fÂr Einspritzventil

lange AusfÂhrung
( eberwurfmutter ) SW15 7019853 d d
Socket for injector long
version ( cap nut )
Douille pour injecteur mod∞le
long ( ±crou>raccord )

30 DrehmomentschlÂssel 7019854 d d
Torque wrench
Cl± dynamom±trique

32 EinsteckschlÂssel 1/4∫ 7019855 d d

Socket wrench
R±ducteur 3/8∫ int±rieur
1/2∫ ext±rieur

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.03>04

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

35 VerdrehschlÂssel fÂr
Einspritzpumpe 7021680 d d
Wrench for turning
injection pump
Cl± ° douille KDE P 2986

40 AndrÂckvorrichtung fÂr
Regelstange 7021677 d d
Press>on device for
control rod
Dispositif de montage
de cr±maill∞re

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.03>05
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

50 Montagewerkzeug fÂr
KÂhlmittelthermostat 7019861 d d
Assembly tool for coolant
thermostat
Outil de montage pour
thermostat de r±frig±rant

54 Kolbenring > Auflegezange 7009319 d d

Piston ring pliers
Pince ° monter les
segments de piston

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.03>06

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904 914 914 924 934 934 944 Application

60 Demontagewerkzeug (Haken)
fÂr Kurbelwellendichtringe
vorn und hinten 7019858 d d
Puller (hook) for front and
rear crankshaft seals
Outil de d±montage (crochet)
de joint d'±tanch±it± de
vilebrequin AV et AR

64 Montagevorrichtung fÂr
Kurbelwellendichtringe vorne
( LÂfterseite ) 7021676 d d
Assembly tool for crankshaft
seal, in front (fan side)
Dispositif de montage pour
bague d'±tanch±it± de
vilebrequin avant (ventilateur)

66 Montagevorrichtung fÂr
Kurbelwellendichtringe hinten
( Schwungradseite ) 7021675 d d
Assembly tool for crankshaft
seal, behind (fly wheel side)
Dispositif de montage pour
bague d'±tanch±it± de vilebre>
quin arri∞re (volant d'inertie)

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.03>07
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung, Reparatur und Einstellung der Hydraulikanlage

Special tools

for maintenance, repair and adjustments of the hydraulic System

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien, la r±paration et le r±glage des circuits hydrauliques

2.05>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

Zum Sichern der Einstellschrauben an

20 Sicherungskappe SW10 7009315 d d d d d d d d d d d Pumpe und Tlmotor
Safety > cap To secure the adjusting screws on the
pump and oilmotor
Capuchon de s±curit±
21 SW13 court 7018734 d d d d d d d d d d d Pour assurer les vis de r±glage sur
pompe et moteur hydraulique
22 SW13 long 7615515 d d d
23 SW17 7380629 d d d d d d d d d d d
24 SW19 court 7009316 d d d d d d d d d d d
25 SW19 long 7009317 d d d d d d d d d d d

30 Vakuumpumpe mit Zur Absperrung des Hydraulitank>

Unterdruck>DB>Ventil TF63/2>24 V 7405073 d d d d d d d d d d d Inhaltes bei Reparaturarbeiten im
Vacuum pump with Hydraulikkreis.
vacuum valve Used to retain content of hydraulic
Pompe ° vide avec clapet de tank during repair work in the
lim. de pression n±gative hydraulic system.

31 Unterdruck>DB>Ventil 5006213 d d d d d d d d d d d Pour ±viter l'±coulement du r±servoir

hydraulique lors de travaux de
Vacuum valve r±parations dans le circuit hydr.
Clapet de lim. de press. n±gative
32 T > StÂck Coupling Raccord 7015042 d d d d d d d d d d d

35 / 36 Filteranlage fÂr geschlossenen Zum Filtern des geschlossenen Dreh>

Drehwerkskreis werkskreises nach Reparatur oder bei
Pumpen> bzw. Tlmotorschßden.
37 Filter kit for closed swing loop
Kit de filtration pour circuit For filtation of the closed swing loop
ferm± d'orientation after repairs or remplacement of
defective pump
Filter / Filter / Filtre ARGO
35 Filter kpl. / Filter cpl / Filtre cpl. 5611009 d d Pour filtrer le circuit ferm±
d'orientation apr∞s r±paration ou
36 Filterelement /
±change d'une pompe ou d'un
Filter element / El±ment filtrant 5611010 d d moteur d±fectueux
37 Verbindungsteile fÂr Filter 35
Joining pieces for filter 35
Pi∞ces de liaison pour filtre 35 9392128 d d

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.05>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

40 MontagehÂlse a 32 9136418 Zur Montage von O>Ring und

Mounting sleeve a 38 9143279 Stepseal>Ring auf Kolben von
Bague de montage a 40 9196902 Hydraulikzyl. und Stellkolben von
a 45 9136419 Verstelldoppelpumpe und
a 65 9177541 Verstellmotor
a 70 9110556 Siehe die Hydraulik>Zylinder Aufstellung, For assembly of the o>ring and
a 80 9227165 Gruppe 7. stepseal>ring on hydraulic zylinder>
a 85 9998618 piston and variable displacement
double pump> regulation piston and
a 90 9227161
Refer to Hydraulic cylinder shedules variable displacement motor
a 100 9998626 regulating piston
a 110 9170509 in chapiter 7.
Pour le montage des joints toriques et
a 115 9998625
stepseal sur les pistons des v±rins hydr.
a 120 9998778 Se reporter aux listes des v±rins hydrauliques et les pistons de positionnement de la
a 125 9227163 dans le groupe 7. pompe double et du moteur hydr. °
a 130 9998624 d±bit variable
a 140 9998623
a 150 9998622
a 160 9998621
a 170 9107931
a 180 9107932
Anwendung, siehe Werkzeug Nr. 40
60 SpreizhÂlse a 32 9136416
Spreader sleeve a 38 9143280
Application, see also tool no. 40
Bague d'±cartement a 40>45 9136417
a 65 9177540
Application, voir outillages n∞ 40
a 70 9110402
a 80 9227166 Siehe die Hydraulik>Zylinder Aufstellung,
a 85 9110404 Gruppe 7.
a 90 9227162
a 100 9110405
a 110 9170511 Refer to Hydraulic cylinder shedules
a 115 9110406 in chapiter 7.
a 120 9110407
a 125 9227164 Se reporter aux listes des v±rins hydrauliques
a 130 9110408
dans le groupe 7.
a 140 9110409
a 150 9110410
a 160 9110411
a 170 9110412
a 180 9110413

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.05>04

11 / 2000
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge
zur Wartung und Reparatur von elektrischen Steckverbindern

Special tools
for maintenance and repair of electrical connectors

Outillage sp±cial
utilis± pour l'entretien et la r±paration des connecteurs ±lectriques

MATE > N > LOK

(AMP) DT
(Deutsch)

MICROTIMER
a
a

(AMP)
a
a

SURE > SEAL

(Cannon)

2.06>01
Ausbabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

10 Zum Crimpen der Kontakte fÂr

Adern 1,5 mm2 fÂr Steckver>
binder MATE>N>LOK,
siehe hierzu Werkzeug Nr. 320 7367025 d d d d d d d d d d d
To crimp contacts for leads
1,5 mm2 of MATE>N>LOK
connectors, see tool No. 320
Pour sertir les contacts pour
conducteurs 1,5 mm2 sur
connecteurs MATE>N>LOK,
voir outillage n∞ 320

12 Zum Crimpen der Kontakte fÂr

Adern 2,5 mm2 fÂr Steckver>
binder MATE>N>LOK 7366314 d d d d d d d d d d d
To crimp contacts for leads
2,5 mm2 of MATE>N>LOK
connectors. *
Pour sertir les contacts pour
conducteurs 2,5 mm2 sur
connecteurs MATE>N>LOK

15 Werkzeug zum Ausbauen der

verkabelten Crimpkontakte aus
den Steckverbindern
MATE>N>LOK 7366655 d d d d d d d d d d d
Extraction tool to push a
crimped contact of to the
MATE>N>LOK connectors.
Outil pour extraire les contacts
sertis des connecteurs
MATE>N>LOK.

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.06>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

20 Buchsenkontakt fÂr Adern 1,5 mm2

der Steckverbinder MATE>N>LOCK. 6202619 d d d d d d d d d d d
Socket contact for cable 1,5 mm2
for connectors MATE>N>LOCK.
Douilles pour conducteurs 1,5 mm2
pour connecteurs MATE>N>LOCK.
21 Stiftkontakt fÂr Adern 1,5 mm2
der Steckverbinder MATE>N>LOCK. 6202620 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pin contact for cable 1,5 mm2
for connectors MATE>N>LOCK.
Broche pour conducteurs 1,5 mm2
pour connecteurs MATE>N>LOCK.

22 Buchsenkontakt fÂr Adern 2,5 mm2

der Steckverbinder MATE>N>LOCK. 6202591 d d d d d d d d d d d
Socket contact for cable 2,5 mm2
for connectors MATE>N>LOCK.
Douilles pour conducteurs 2,5 mm2
pour connecteurs MATE>N>LOCK.
23 Stiftkontakt fÂr Adern 2,5 mm2
der Steckverbinder MATE>N>LOCK. 6202592 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pin contact for cable 2,5 mm2
for connectors MATE>N>LOCK.
Broche pour conducteurs 2,5 mm2
pour connecteurs MATE>N>LOCK.

28 Handcrimpzange (nach MIL>C5015,

VG 95234, VG 955342) 7367086 d d d d d d d d d d d
Tool to crimp contacts (after MIL>C5015,
VG 95234, VG 955342)
Pince pour sertissage des contacts (d'apr∞s
MIL>C5015, VG 95234, VG 955342)
29 Crimpeinsatz zum Crimpen fÂr DEUTSCH
Steckverbinder mit Zange Nr. 28 7409779 d d d d d d d d d d d
Crimp turret to crimp contact of connectors
type DEUTSCH size s with special tool no. 28
T≤te de sertissage ° utiliser pour connecteurs
DEUTSCH avec la pince ° sertir n∞ 28

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.06>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

40 Zum Crimpen der gestantzten Kontakte der

Steckverbinder AusfÂhrung SURE>SEAL. 7367025 d d d d d d d d d d d
To crimp the stamped contacts of the
connectors type SURE>SEAL.
Pour le sertissage des contacts emboutis des
connecteurs de type SURE>SEAL.

41 Einbauwerkzeug zum EinfÂhren der

verkabelten Crimpkontakte in die
Steckverbinder SURE>SEAL. 7367023 d d d d d d d d d d d
Insertion tool to insert crimped contact
into the connectors SURE>SEAL.
Outil d'insertion des contacts sertis dans
les connecteurs SURE>SEAL.

42 A : Ausbauwerkzeug Stiftkontakte aus

Steckverbinder SURE>SEAL. 7567020 d d d d d d d d d d d
Extraction tool for pin contacts of
connectors SURE>SEAL.
Outil d'extraction pour broches des
connecteurs SURE>SEAL.
B : Ausbauwerkzeug Buchsenkontakte. 7567022 d d d d d d d d d d d
Extraction tool for socket contacts.
Outil d'extraction pour douilles.
C : Ausbauwerkzeug fÂr Kontakte der
Steckverbinder MICROTIMER 7370373 d d d d d d d d d d d
Extraction tool for contacts of
connectors MICROTIMER
Outil d'extraction pour contacts
des connecteurs MICROTIMER

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.06>05
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

43 Einbaur‘hrchen fÂr
Werkzeug Nr. 42 CT 31 7022464 d d d d d d d d d d d
Pipe for tool no. 42
Tube pour outil n∞ 42

45 Hilfswerkzeug zum halten des SURE>SEAL

Steckverbinder 2, 3 und 4 polig beimEin>
und Ausbau der angecrimten Kontakte 7367021 d d d d d d d d d d d
Auxiliary tool for holding SURE>SEAL
connectors with 2, 3 and 4 contacts during
insertion and extraction of crimped contacts
Outil de maintien des connecteurs SURE>
SEAL 2, 3 et 4 p—les pendant l'insertion et
l'extraction des contacts sertis

46 Gleich wie Werkzeug 324 fÂr 5, 6 u. 7 polig 7367085 d d d d d d d d d d d

The same as tool 342, for connections
with 5, 6 and 7 contacts
Idem 342, pour connecteurs 5, 6 et 7 p—les

48 Reparatur > Set

beinhaltet Sonderwerkzeuge 40, 41, 42, 45
und 46, sowie Bedienungsanleitung
und Gleitmittel 7015073 d d d d d d d d d d d
Kit for field repair
contents special tools 40, 41, 42,45 and 46,
operating instruction and lucatingfluid
N±cessaire de r±paration
contient les outillages sp±ciaux 40, 41, 42,
45 et 46, une notice d'utilisation et
le lubrifiant pour les contacts

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.06>06

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

50 Buchsenkontakt fÂr Adern 1,5 mm2

der Steckverbinder SURE>SEAL 6202434 d d d d d d d d d d
Socket contact for cable 1,5 mm2
for connectors SURE>SEAL
Douilles pour conducteurs 1,5 mm2
pour connecteurs SURE>SEAL
51 Stiftkontakt fÂr Adern 1,5 mm2
der Steckverbinder SURE>SEAL 6202444 d d d d d d d d d d
Pin contact for cable 1,5 mm2
for connectors SURE>SEAL
Broche pour conducteurs 1,5 mm2
pour connecteurs SURE>SEAL

55 Entriegelungswerkzeug fÂr
WAGO > Steckelemente 777>310 7022773 d d d d d d d d d d
Extraction tool for
WAGO > connectors
Outil d'extraction pour
connecteurs WAGO

60 IC > Ausziehwerkzeug 8042630 d d d d d d d d d d

IC> Extracting tool
Outil d'extraction de Circuits Int±gr±s

61 IC > Einsetzwerkzeug 8042629 d d d d d d d d d d

IC> Mounting tool
Outil de sertissage de Circuits Int±gr±s

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.06>07
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung und Reparatur von Getriebe

Special tools

for maintenance and repair of Gears

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien et les r±parations des R±ducteurs

2.07>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

Zum L‘sen und Anziehen der Nut>

10 NutmutterschlÂssel fÂr
Drehwerksgetriebe SAT 225 9202820 d d d d d mutter im Abtrieb/Drehwerksgetriebe
SAT Skizze, siehe Blatt>Nr. 2.14.01
Slotted nut wrench for
swing gear To remove or/and tighten of the
slotted nut on the output/swing ring
Cl± pour ±crou ° cr±neaux SAT. For details , see page no. 2.14.01
du r±ducteur d'orientation
Pour le d±blocage et le serrage de
11 SAT 250 9199665 d d l'±crou ° cr±neaux sur l'arbre de sortie
du r±ducteur d'orientation SAT. Voir
12 SAT 275 9202821 d d d dessin , feuille n∞ 2.14.01

13 SAT 300 9202822 d

Zur Demontage u. Montage des

20 AbdrÂckvorrichtung SAT 225 9202825 d d d d d
Bremsgehßuses/ Lamellenbremse fÂr
Mounting device Drehwerksgetriebe SAT.
Outillage de montage Skizze, siehe Blatt>Nr. 2.15.01
For disassembly and assembly of brake
21 SAT 250 9199319 d d housing/ disk brake on swing gear
SAT. For details , see page no. 2.15.01
22 SAT 275 9202826 d d d
Pour le d±montage et le montage du
carter de frein/frein ° disques du
23 SAT 300 9202827 d
r±ducteur d'orientation SAT.
Voir dessin , feuille n∞ 2.15.01

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.07>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
Zum L‘sen und Anziehen der
30 AbdrÂckvorrichtung FAT350/022 Nutmutter im
FAT350/032 9202819 d d d d Abtrieb/Drehwerksgetriebe SAT
Mounting device Skizze, siehe Blatt>Nr. 2.16.01
Outillage de montage To remove or/and tighten of the
slotted nut on the output/swing ring
SAT. For details, see page no. 2.16.01
31 FAT400/063
FAT400/073 9392820 d d Pour le d±blocage et le serrage de
l'±crou ° cr±neaux sur l'arbre de sortie
du r±ducteur d'orientation SAT.
Voir dessin, feuille n∞ 2.16.01

Zum Einbauen der Gleitringdichtun>

35 Montagevorrichtung fÂr FAT350/022 gen der Fahrwerksgetrieben FAT
Gleitringdichtungen FAT350/032 8503594 d d d d Skizze, siehe Blatt Nr. 2.18.01
Installation tool for To install the slipring seals on the
slipring seals travel gears FAT. For details to
Outillage de montage des manufacture, see page no. 2.18.01
joints ° glace
Pour la mise en place des joints ° glace
des r±ducteurs de translation FAT.
Voir dessin , feuille n∞ 2.18.01
36 FAT400/063
FAT400/073 8503179 d d

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.07>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux *Industrie
Service Handbuch Hydraulikbagger Spezialwerkzeuge

Spezialwerkzeuge

zur Wartung und Reparatur von Achsen

Special tools

for maintenance and repair of Axles

Outillage sp±cial

utilis± pour l'entretien et les r±parations des Ponts

2.08>01
Ausgabe: 11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application

Zum Aus>und Einfedern des

10 Spannzange fÂr Achsen 7009536 d d d d d Sicherungsringes im Planetenantrieb
der Achsen
Clamping > pliers for axles
To remove or insert snap rings in the
Pince ° circlips de ponts planetary drive of the axles

11 Zangenspitze 5 mm 8145768 d d d d d Pour le d±montage et le montage du

circlips sur l'axe des plan±taires des
Plier tip ponts

Pointe des pinces

12 6 mm 8145769 d d d d d

Zum L‘sen und Anziehen der Nut>

20 NutmutterschlÂssel fÂr Achsen AP/APL 755 7013102 d mutter im Planetenantrieb / Achsen
Slotted nut wrench for axles
To remove or/and tighten of the
Cl± pour ±crou ° cr±neaux
slotted nut in the planetary drive of
de ponts
the axles
21 AP 755 TR 7021789 d
Pour le d±blocage et le serrage de
22 AP 765 7014452 d d d d l'±crou ° cr±neaux sur l'axe des
APL 765 plan±taires des ponts

23 AP 765 TR 7026768 d

In Verbindung mit Nr. 20 > 23

30 Zentrierscheibe AP/APL 755 7013101 d To be used with tool no. 20 > 23
AP 755 TR
A employer avec l'outillage n∞ 20 > 23
Centering disk
Bague de centrage
31 AP/APL 765 7013920 d d d d
APL 765 TR

In Verbindung mit Nr. 30

35 Zentrierring AP/APL 755 7024975 d
To be used with tool no. 30
Centering ring
A employer avec l'outillage n∞ 30
Bague de centrage

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.08>02

11 / 2000
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900 B 900 B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 924 934 944 Application
Zum Einsetzen des Kasettendicht>
40 Aufsetzer AP/APL 755 7024127 d ringes in die Nabe / Achsen
Driver To install cage>seal on weheel >
hub / axles
Tampon
Pour le montage du joint d'arbre
42 AP 755 7024974 d dans le moyeu
AP 755 TR

44 AP 765 7024973 d d d d
APL 765

45 AP 765 TR 7027153 d

Zum Montieren des Bremskolbens

50 Schlupfbuchse 2>teilig AP/APL 755 7019632 d
in das Hohlrad
2 pieces slip ring
To install brake piston into hollow
Bague de montage gear
en 2 parties
Pour le montage du joint d'arbre
51 AP/APL 765 7024131 d d d d dans le moyeu

60 Me˚schraube fÂr Zur Bremsbelag > Verschlei˚>

Belagverschlei˚
Measuring screw for
lining wear
Gabarit de mesure de l'usure
des garnitures de frein
M16¥1,5 7019556 d d d d d messung an den ZP>Achsen
To measure the wear of the brake
lining on axles ZP
Pour mesurer l'usure des garni>
tures de freins sur les ponts ZP

Benennung / Description / D±nomination Blatt Nr. / Page no. / Feuille n∞

Spezialwerkzeuge
Datum / Edition / Date
Special Tools 2.08>03
11 / 2000 Outillages Sp±ciaux * Industrie
 Darstellung Nr. Benennung Gr‘˚e Ident Nr Gerßt Model Type Anwendung
Representation No. Description Size Order no A R A A R A R A R R Application
Dessin N∞ D±nomination Grandeur N∞ code 900B 900B 904 904* 904 914 914 924 HD 934 944 Application
Zum L‘sen bzw. Anziehen der
70 SchlÂssel fÂr Radnaben> Radnabensicherungsmutter am
sicherungsmutter LT71 PL477 7026039 d Achsschenkel

Spanner for wheel hub To loose resp. tighten the wheel hub
safety nut
safety nut
Pour desserrer respec. serrer l'±crou de
Cl± pour l'±crou de s±curit± s±curit± du moyeu
du moyeu

72 SchlÂssel fÂr Sicherungs> Zum L‘sen bzw. Anziehen der

mutter LT71 PL477 7026040 d Sicherungsmutter am Planetentrßger

To loose resp. tighten the planetary

Spanner for locking nut
carrier safety nut
Cl± pour l'±crou de s±curit± Pour desserrer respec. serrer l'±crou de
s±curit± du porte > plan±taire

74 Einsetzwerkzeug fÂr LT71 PL477 7027696 d Zur Montage der Gleitringdichtung

Gleitringdichtung For assembly of slipring seal

Installation tool for Pour le montage de joints ° glace

slipring seal

Outillage de montage
des joints ° glace

Datum / Edition / Date *Industrie 2.08>04

11 / 2000
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special Tools

Special wrench to remove and install the piston on hydraulic cylindrers

For securing screw

Pour vis de maintien

a Piston * a b c d e f g h i 4>KT Id. No.

70 52 38 75 200 10 8 8 15 60 1/2" 9131359

85 > 90 60 44 85 200 14 10 10 15 65 1/2" 9131362
90 68 52 100 220 14 10 10 15 70 1/2" 9231993
100 > 110 75 54 110 220 14 12 10 20 84 3/4" 8007364*
100 > 110 80 54 110 220 14 12 10 20 84 3/4" 8007364*
120 > 125 88 63 120 250 14 12 10 20 90 3/4" 8007365
130 > 160 100 78 135 260 14 14 10 20 95 3/4" 8007366
140 115 88 150 300 14 14 10 20 105 3/4" 9919856
150 > 180 125 97 170 320 14 14 10 25 110 3/4" 9196978#
150 > 180 130 97 170 320 14 18 15 25 110 3/4" 9196978#
180 > 210 145 113 185 380 14 18 15 25 120 3/4" 8007367
160 125 200 420 14 18 15 25 130 3/4" 9925117
210 > 260 175 135 215 450 14 20 19 25 135 3/4" 9131373
280 > 310 220 156 280 500 14 30 28 40 158 3/4" 9131376

Dimensions are in mm (mm¥0.03937=inches) (*) + (#) une seule et m≤me cl±

* The indication of the piston diameter related to the wrench size is only for your guidance.
For indication of the piston wrench Id. no., refer to the spare part list of the corresponding hydraulic
cylinder.

A / R 900 B > R 944 02.12.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special Tools

aa
aa

To remove or tighten of the slotted nut on the output shaft of the swing gears

SAT 225 / 250 / 275 / 300 / 325 / 350 / 400 / 450

Id. > No of
Gear > Typ special tool for
slotted nut

SAT 225 9202820

SAT 250 9199665

SAT 275 9202821

SAT 300 9202822

SAT 325 9202823

SAT 350 9202824

SAT 400 9960374

SAT 450 9960410

aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaaa
aaaaaa

Drawing, see overleaf

A / R 900 B > R 944 02.14.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special Tools

a
a

Material : 42 Cr Mo 4 V
Superficial hardening 800 > 1000 N/mm2

SAT A B C D E F G H J K L M N O

225 90 50 30 55 71,5 77 100 95 3,8 80 35 30 40 7,8

250 100 55 46 60 81,5 86 110 105 3,8 90 35 30 50 7,8

275 110 55 46 70 92,2 95 120 105 3,8 90 35 30 50 7,8

300 125 55 46 80 106,5 110 140 120 3,8 105 35 30 50 7,8

325 126,5 55,5 46 50 115 115,5 150 115,5 3,8 94 35 30 55 7,8

350 137,5 55,5 46 50 125 126,2 160 113,5 3,8 92 35 30 55 7,8

400 173,5 60 46 60 144,3 146 189,5 145 6,7 117 35 30 85 19,7

450 179 50 30 0 164 166 198 127 6,5 107 35,47 33 76 20

02.14.02 Edition : 09 / 2001

 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special Tools

aa
aa

Mounting device for disassembly and assembly of brake housing/disk brake on swing gear Liebherr
SAT 200 / 225 / 250 / 275 / 300 / 325 / 350 / 400 / 450

Ident No
Swing gear
Mounting A B C D E F G H
size
device

SAT 200 9206110 252 40 12 10 10 14 90 110

SAT 225 9202825 268 40 12 10 10 16 100 117
SAT 250 9199319 300 40 12 10 10 18 110 131
SAT 275 9202826 326 40 12 10 10 18 120 143
SAT 300 9202827 364 50 20 15 15 22 130 157
SAT 325 / 204 9202828 390 50 20 15 15 22 142 170
SAT 350 / 205 9202829 410 50 20 15 15 22 154 180

SAT 400 / 206 9393900 440 50 20 15 15 18 175 202,5

SAT 450 / 207

A / R 900 B > R 944 02.15.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Special tools

Mounting device for disassembly and assembly of brake housing / disk brake
on travel gear LIEBHERR > FAT

Type ¡ Type ¬

Travel Gear Type A B C D E F G H ID No.

FAT 350 / 022 / 032 ¬ 238 205 100 108 40 18 a 16 15 9981445

FAT 400 / 063 / 073 ¡ 280 245 123 125 40 a 21 a 16 15 9392820

Dimensions are in mm (mm¥0.3937=inches)

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 2.16.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Edition : 01 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Slipring>Seal mounting tool

aa
aa

Outer diameter of slipring

Hinge adjusted
to tool diameter (a1)

Sawed after machining

soud± au milieu
de l'anneau

Schnitt A>A

ID. No. Slipring seal

Travel Gear Tool
a1 a2 a3 a4 a5
Typ a6
350 / 022 8503594 76.90 H > 28 341 350 340 310 334 343
350 / 032

350 / 012 8503178 76.90 H > 30 A1 375 384,1 372 325 369 377,5
400 / 023 / 043 8503179 76.90 H > 60 394 402 392 365 384 395
/ 063 / 073

400 / 013 8503180 76.90 H > 70 415 424 414 390 405 417
450 / 064 8503181 76.90 H > 61 457 465 455 415 446 458
450 / 044

A / R 900 B > R 944 02.18.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

3.51. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6001 Æ

3.52. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / 6001 Æ
3.54. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
3.55. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 924 / 6001 Æ
3.57. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
3.58. Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

3.61. Maintenance Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6001 Æ

3.64. Maintenance Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904, R 914, R 924 / 6001 Æ
3.67. Maintenance Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934, R 944 / 5001 Æ

3.71. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6001 Æ

3.72. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / 6001 Æ
3.74. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
3.75. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 924 / 6001 Æ
3.77. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
3.78. Lubrication Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ R 900 B, ...

Model
Type R 944
Technical Data Ab
From
Datum
Maintenance Guidelines Depuis
Edition 07.98 Lubrication Charts Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 3.50.00
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 900B

Type 664

Valid from S/N. 6001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm track pads . . . t 18.4
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 4170
Width with 500 > 750 mm track pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2500 > 2750
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3060
Tail swing / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2035 / 2190
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 470
Digging force /Breakout force with 2400 mm stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 97.6 / 89.4
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi & j=1) . . . . . . . . . . kN 177

ENGINE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DEUTZ BF 4 M 1013 E
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN 6001 Æ 9185
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 82 (112 CV)
................................................................. SN 9186 Æ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 87 (117 CV)
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 442 ±10 ° 1300 > 1500 min>1
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 15.5
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.71
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 240
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.05

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPV 130 LR / LS
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 80 ( SN 6001 Æ 9185 )
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 85 ( SN 9186 Æ )
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 252
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 250
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.71
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M7 / NG 22 > 16
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF520
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 120 / 70
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 130 / 85 ( 120 / 80 )
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 100 / 70
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 80
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.34
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr gear pump
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 36
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2
Further adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.61

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥92 (switched in series)
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4

R 900B Li / 6001 Æ 3.51.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 900B

Type 664

Valid from Serial No. 6001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 225 / 220
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr FMF 45
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 9.0
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 4.4
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.71
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 350 / 032
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 75 / 31.5
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 2.4 (5.0)
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2¥4.1
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.71
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 L
Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 L / 2¥7
Carrier roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 L / 2¥2
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 . 500 / 600 / 75
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 5.0 / 4.2 / 3.4
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.51 and 12.60

3.51.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 904

Type 668 669

Valid from S/N. 6001 6001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm track pads . . . t 20.150 . . . . . . . . 19.650
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 4615 . . . . . . . . . . 4425
Width with 500 > 750 mm track pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2750 > 3000 . . . . 2500 > 2750
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3060 . . . . . . . . . . =
Tail swing / . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2342 / 2450 . . . . =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 472 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Digging force /Breakout force with 2400 mm stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 120.3 / 126.4 . . . =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi & j=1) . . . . . . . . . . kN 234 . . . . . . . . . . . =

ENGINE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 924 T > E . . . . . =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN 6001 Æ 8708
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 85 (115 CV) . . . . =
................................................................. SN 8709 Æ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 92 (124 CV) . . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 510 ±10 ° 1400 min>1
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.72
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 240 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPV 150 LR / LS
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 83 ( SN 6001 Æ 8708 )
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 90 ( SN 8709 Æ ) =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 290 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 280 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.72
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M7 / NG 22 > 16
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF520 =
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 125 / 85 > 130 / 85 =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 130 / 85 . . . . . . . =
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 120 / 80 (100 / 70 + 90 / 60)
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 80
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.35
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr gear pump . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.62

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥92 (switched in series) . . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 904 Li / 6001 Æ 3.52.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 904

Type 668 669

Valid from Serial No. 6001 6001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 225 / 220
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr FMF 45 / 31,5
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 9 ............. =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 4.4 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.72
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 350 / 032 . . =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 75 / 31.5 . =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 2.6 (5.2) . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2¥5 . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.72
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 L . . . . . . . . . =
Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 L / 2¥7 . . . =
Carrier roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 L / 2¥2 . . . =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 . 500 / 600 / 750
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 4.9 / 4.2 / 3.5 . 5.4 / 4.5 / 3.7
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.52 and 12.60

3.52.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 914

Type Std / 641 HD>SL / 640 HD>S / 642

Valid from S/N. 6001 6001 6001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm track pads . . . t 21.3 . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2 . . . . . . . . . 22.05
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 4760 . . . . . . . . . . 4950 . . . . . . . . 4802
Width with 600 mm track pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2600 . . . . . . . . . . 3000 . . . . . . . . 2600
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3060 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... 3077
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2680 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 472 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... 490
Digging force /Breakout force with 2400 mm stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 115 / 147 . . . . . . = .......... =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi & j=1) . . . . . . . . . . kN 264 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... 260

ENGINE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 924 T > E . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SN 6001 Æ 8712
kW 99 (135 CV) . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
SN 8713 Æ
kW 105 (143 CV) . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 600±10 at 1400 min>1 . . . . . . . . . . . = =
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.74
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 360 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 100 LR / LS . . . . . . . = =
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 97 ( SN 6001 Æ 8712 ) . . . . . . . . . . . =
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 103 ( SN 8713 Æ ) = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥194 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 300 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.74
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type LINDE > VT5 > VW25/18 . . . . . . . . . =
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF520 = . . . . . . . . . . =
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 85 >130 / 85 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 40 / 95 > 125 / 85 = .......... =
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 125 / 85 (120 / 80 + 130 / 85) . . . . =
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 85 . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.36
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr gear pump . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.63

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 3.54.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 914

Type Std / 641 HD>SL / 640 HD>S / 642

Valid from Serial No. 6001 6001 6001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 250 / 231 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Linde HMF 75>02 = . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 8 ............. = ............ =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.74
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 350 / 022 . . = ............ =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 75 / 44 . . . = ............ =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 3.1 (5.2) . . . . . . . = ............ 3.0 (5.0)
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2¥5 . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.74
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 / 46 Links . B 60 / 52 Links . D 6C / 44 Links
Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 / 2¥7 . . . . B 60 / 2¥8 . . . . D 6C / 2¥7
Carrier roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 / 2¥2 . . . . B 60 / 2¥2 . . . . D 6C / 2¥2
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 . 600 / 750 . . . . . . 500 / 600
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 5.8 / 4.9 / 4.2 . 4.6 / 3.8 . . . . . . . 5.9 / 6.0
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.53 and 12.60

3.54.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 924

Type HD>SL / 645 EW / 646

Valid from S/N. 6001 6001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm track pads . . . t 24,800 . . . . . . . . 25300
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 5115 . . . . . . . . . . 5125
Width with 600 mm track pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3000 . . . . . . . . . . 4000
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3060 . . . . . . . . . . 3120
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2805 . . . . . . . . . . =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 472 . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Digging force /Breakout force with 2,400 mm stick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 132 / 159 . . . . . . =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi & j=1) . . . . . . . . . . kN 264 . . . . . . . . . . . =

ENGINE
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D 924 T > E . . . . . =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 112 (152 HP)
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 695±10 at 1200 > 1300 min>1
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.75
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 360 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 107 LR / LS
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 109 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥208 . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 300 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.75
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type LINDE > VT5 > VW25/18
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF520 =
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 90 > 140 / 90 =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 95 > 125 / 85 =
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 125 / 85 (130 / 85+140 / 90+150 / 90)
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 85 . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.37
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr gear pump
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 =
Further adjustment values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.64

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 3.55.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 924

Type HD>SL / 645 EW / 646

Valid from Serial No. 6001 6001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 275 / 233
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Linde HMF 75>02 =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 7 ............. =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 6.0 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.75
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 350 / 022 . . =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 75 / 44 . . . =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 3.1 (5.2) . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2¥5 . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.75
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 / 52 Links . =
Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 / 2¥9 . . . . =
Carrier roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/Qty B 60 / 2¥2 . . . . =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 . =
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 5.5 / 4.6 / 3.8 . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.53 and 12.60

3.55.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 934

Type HD>SL / 648 HDS / 647 EW / 649

Valid from S/N. 5001 5001 5001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm pads . . . . . . . . t 28,0 . . . . . . . . . . . 27,9 . . . . . . . . .
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 5300 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Width with 600 mm tracks pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . 3000 . . . . . . . . 4000
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3130 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2950 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 493 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Digging force /Breakout force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 142 / 165 . . . . . . = .......... =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 323 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =

ENGINE &SPLITTERBOX
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liebherr D 924 TI > E . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 137 (186 HP) . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 810±10 at 1200 min>1 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 390 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump splitterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type PVG 350 B 381 . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 125 > LR / SD / DA . =
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 132 (180 HP) . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥230 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 370 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M8 / NG 22 . . . . . . . . . . . =
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF525 > 1" . . . . . . . . . . . =
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 95 . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 105 (140 / 95 + 125 / 85) . . . =
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 95 (150 / 105) = . . . . . . . . . . =
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 180 / 110 . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.38
Swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed loop . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Swing pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A4 V56 MS ( Æ SN 5277 ) see subgroup 7.19
A4 V56 DWD ( SN 5278 Æ ) see subgroup 7.18
Swing pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump with integrated
replenishing pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 72 (98 HP) . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 47.0 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 120 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch gear pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic pump/special attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch Gear pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow/attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further adjustment values & pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.65

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ 3.57.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 934

Type HD>SL / 648 HD>S / 647 EW / 649

Valid from Serial No. 5001 5001 5001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 275 / 222 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMF 64 . . . . . . . = ............ =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 7.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 400 / 063 . . = ............ =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 100 / 56 . . = ............ =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 2.9 (5.2) . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2 x 6.5 . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 / 52 links . = ............ =
Track rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/ Qty. B5/2x9 ..... = ............ =
Carrier rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. E5/2x2 ..... = ............ =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 500 / 600 / 750 . 500 / 600 / 750
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 6.5 / 5.5 / 4.4 . . 6.5 / 5.5 / 4.4 . > /> />
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.54 and 12.60

3.57.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 934 B

Type HD>SL / 924 HDS / 923 EW / 925

Valid from S/N. 9995 9995 9995

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm pads . . . . . . . . t 28,0 . . . . . . . . . . . 27,9 . . . . . . . . .
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 5300 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Width with 600 mm tracks pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . 3000 . . . . . . . . 4000
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3130 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 2950 . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 493 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Digging force /Breakout force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 142 / 165 . . . . . . = .......... =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 323 . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =

ENGINE &SPLITTERBOX
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liebherr D 924 TI > E . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 145 (197 HP) . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 855±10 at 1200 min>1 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 18.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 390 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump splitterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type PVG 350 B 381 . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 125 > LR / SD / DA . =
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 140 (190 HP) . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥230 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 370 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M8 / NG 22 . . . . . . . . . . . =
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF525 > 1" . . . . . . . . . . . =
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 95 . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 105 (140 / 95 + 125 / 85) . . . =
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 95 (150 / 105) = . . . . . . . . . . =
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 180 / 110 . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.38

Swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed loop . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

Swing pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A4 V56 DWD . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Swing pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump with integrated
replenishing pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 72 (98 HP) . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 47.0 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 120 . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch gear pump = .......... =

Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =

Hydraulic pump / cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type A 10 VO 28 ED . = .......... =

Max. flow / circuit for cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Hydraulic motor / cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type A 10 FE 28 . . . . . = .......... =

Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = .......... =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = .......... =
Hydraulic pump/special attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch Gear pump = .......... =
Max. flow/attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Further adjustment values & pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.65

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 934 B Li / 9995 Æ 3.57.03

Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 934 B

Type HD>SL / 924 HD>S / 923 EW / 925

Valid from Serial No. 9995 9995 9995

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 275 / 222 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMF 64 . . . . . . . = ............ =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 6,9 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 5.5 . . . . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 400 / 063 . . = ............ =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 100 / 56 . . = ............ =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 2.8 (5.1) . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2 x 6.5 . . . . . . . . = ............ =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.77
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type B 60 / 52 links . = ............ =
Track rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type/ Qty. B5/2x9 ..... = ............ =
Carrier rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. E5/2x2 ..... = ............ =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 500 / 600 / 750 . 500 / 600 / 750
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 6.5 / 5.5 / 4.4 . . 6.5 / 5.5 / 4.4 . > /> />
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.54 and 12.60

3.57.04 Issue : 02 / 2002

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 944

Type HD>SL / 651 HD>S / 650

Valid from S/N. 5001 5001

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm pads . . . . . . . . t 34.4 . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 5725 . . . . . . . . . . =
Width (500 > 900 mm tracks pads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . 3000
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . =
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3265 . . . . . . . . . . =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 540 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Digging force /Breakout force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 164 / 195 . . . . . . =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 336 . . . . . . . . . . . =

ENGINE &SPLITTERBOX
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liebherr D 926 T > E =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 164 (223 CV) . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 950±10 at 1200 RPM
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 705 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump splitterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type PVG 350 B 381 . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 140 > LR / SD / DA
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 160 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥252 . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 570 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M8 / NG 22
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF525 > 1"
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 105 . . . . . . =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 110 (150 / 105)
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 105 (160 / 105 + 125 / 85 )
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 85 . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.39
Swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed loop . . . . =
Swing pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A4 V56 MS ( Æ SN 5264 ) see subgroup 7.19
A4 V56 DWD ( SN 5265 Æ ) see subgroup 7.18
Swing pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump with integrated
replenishing pump
Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 86 ( 117 CV) . . . . =
Max. flow volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 56.0 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 144 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch gear pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic pump/special attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch Gear pump = . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow/attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Further adjustment values & pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.66

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 944 Li / 5001 Æ 3.58.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 944

Type HD>SL / 651 HDS / 650

Valid from Serial No. 5001 5001

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 300 / 213 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMF 90 . . . . . . . = ............ =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 8 ............. =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 400 / 073 . . = ............ =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 100 / 63.5 =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 3,2 / 5.0 . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2 x 6.5 . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type D 7 / 51 links . . =
Track rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. B6/2x9 ..... =
Carrier rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. E6/2x2 ..... =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 500 / 600 / 750
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 7.6 / 6.5 / 5.3 . . 7.6 / 6.5 / 5.3
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.55 and 12.61

3.58.02 Issue : 09 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data
























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 944 B

Type HD>SL / 651 HD>S / 650

Valid from S/N. 9872 9872

GENERAL
Machine weight with backhoe attachment and 600 mm pads . . . . . . . . t 34.4 . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 5725 . . . . . . . . . . =
Width (500 > 900 mm tracks pads) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . 3000
Height of machine without attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3200 . . . . . . . . . . =
Tail swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 3265 . . . . . . . . . . =
Ground clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 540 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Digging force /Breakout force . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 164 / 195 . . . . . . =
Total drawbar pull of the chains (at pressure maxi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kN 336 . . . . . . . . . . . =

ENGINE &SPLITTERBOX
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Liebherr D 926 T > E =
Rating at nominal speed per DIN / ISO 9249 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 180 (244 CV) . . . =
Nominal speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 2000 . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 1040 ±10 at 1200 RPM
Oil quantity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Diesel fuel tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 705 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pump splitterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type PVG 350 B 381 . =
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 4.10

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr LPVD 140 > LR / SD / DA
Hydraulic pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston double pump
Pump power (driving power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 175 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 2¥252 . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic oil tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 570 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . hrs see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Control valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Rexroth > M8 / NG 22
5 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr DDF525 > 1"
1 way rotary connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Tries 815.001 . . =
Boom cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 105 . . . . . . =
Stick cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 160 / 110 (150 / 105)
Bucket cylinder a Piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 150 / 105 (160 / 105 + 125 / 85 )
Cylinder for boom adjustment a piston / a Rod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 140 / 85 . . . . . . . =
Further cylinder data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 7.39

Swing circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed loop . . . . =

Swing pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type A4 V56 DWD . . . =
Swing pump / design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Swash plate type axial piston pump with integrated
replenishing pump
Pump output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KW 86 ( 117 CV) . . . . =
Max. flow volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 56.0 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Max. flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 144 . . . . . . . . . . . =

Hydraulic pump / servo control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch gear pump = .......... =

Max. flow / servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 26 . . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =

Hydraulic pump / cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type A 10 VO 28 ED . =

Max. flow / circuit for cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min 62 . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Hydraulic motor / cooler fan drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . type A 10 FE 28 . . . . . =

Servo control / attachment and swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>4 = .......... =
Servo control / travel left / right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr VG > 7>2 = .......... =
Hydraulic pump/special attachments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Bosch Gear pump = .......... =
Max. flow/attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l.min>1 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . = .......... =
Further adjustment values & pressure values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 6.66

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V 24 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Battery capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ah 2¥110 (switched in series) . . . . . . =
Alternator > voltage / max. current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V/A 24 / 55 . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =
Starter power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . kW 5,4 . . . . . . . . . . . . = . . . . . . . . . . =

R 944 Li / 9872 Æ 3.58.03

Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Technical Data



























































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine R 944 B

Type HD>SL / 651 HDS / 650

Valid from Serial No. 9872 9872

SWING GEAR
Swing gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Liebherr SAT 300 / 213
Hydraulic swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMF 90 . . . . . . . =
Swing speed of uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RPM 6.4 . . . . . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 8 ............. =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brake
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 9.10

TRAVEL GEAR
Travel gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FAT 400 / 073 . . =
Hydraulic travel motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type FMV 100 / 63.5 =
Travel speed max. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . km/hr 3,2 / 5.0 . . . . . . . =
Oil quantity in gear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l 2 x 6.5 . . . . . . . . =
Oil quality, viscosity and change intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 1.50 and 3.78
Travel brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type Negative acting multidisc brakes
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroup 11.67

TRANSLATION
Track chain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type D 7 / 51 links . . =
Track rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. B6/2x9 ..... =
Carrier rollers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type / Qty. E6/2x2 ..... =
Track pad width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mm 500 / 600 / 750 500 / 600 / 750
Ground pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . N/cm2 7.6 / 6.5 / 5.3 . . 7.6 / 6.5 / 5.3
Further technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . see subgroups 12.55 and 12.61

3.58.04 Issue : 02 / 2002



09.01




















Operating hours

Datum / Date / Date

Check coolant level

Replace hydraulic oil

Check engine oil level

Replace the water filtert

Check system for function

Check and adjust valve play

Check head and floodlights

(Operator)

Check oil level in hydraulic tank

Check mounting of components

Check and clean battery terminals

First and only interval

Change engine oil (first at 50 hours.)

Check condition and tension of V>belt

Clean hydraulic oil cooler (as necessary)

Bleed servo system and hydraulic pumps

Check and clean cooler, hoses, ventilator
by maintenance personnel

Replace breather filter on hydraulic tank

Replace oil filter in the servo control circuit

Drain condensation water at hydraulic tank

Check hydraulic system for function and leaks

Replace fuel prefilter cartridge (or if power loss)

Press to open dust discharge valve on air cleaner

Replace return filter cartridge (first at 50 hours.)

Replace fuel finefilter cartridge (or if power loss)
Replace lube oil filter cartridge (first at 50 hours.)

Check and if necessary adjust engine speed control

Check preheater system before start of cold season

Empty water separator at fuel filter and drain fuel tank

Check for air filter clogging at the maintenance indicator

Check mounting screws of engine and of engine oil sump

DIESEL ENGINE

Check intake and exhaust system for condition and tightness

Check level and specific gravity of electrolyte in the batteries

Check oil pressure and coolant temperature during operation

Check and adjust primary and secondary pressure relief valves

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Clean magnetic rod in return filter (daily during the first 300 hrs.)

Check indicator lights and gauges on control panel when starting

Check the oil, cooling and fuel systems for leaks and good condition

Replace main element on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)

Check air hose between air filter and engine ( at filter maintenance )













































































































Replace safety element on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)


























































































































































































































Work to be performed

Repeat interval

Replace coolant (correct antifreeze and anticorrosive mixture) every 2 years




















































































































































































































































































































































































































































Check the concentration of anticorrosion and antifreeze additive in the coolant

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE R 900 B

By authorized trained personnel

2)
2)
2)

3.61.01
























































































































































































































































































































































































































































Notes,

see page

Blatt / Page / Feuille

guidelines

Also notice 1)

performance

For fill quantities,



09.01

Operating hours

2)
1)

on page 5.9.

sub group 5.4.

Lube swing ring teeth

Check pinion gear mesh

Check all parts for cracks

Lube swing ring bearing

Check oil level and for leaks

Check oil level and for leaks

Check heater system for leaks

(Operator)

explain defects and deficiencies.

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

First and only interval

Check bucket teeth visually for wear

Check mounting of gear and oil motor

Clean track chain (after working hours)

by maintenance personnel

Check the lower speed of the attachment

Lubricate all grease and lubrication points

Check and lubricate cover hinges and locks

Check function and operation of swing brake

Check function and operation of travel brake

Check idler, carrier and track rollers for leaks

Check and tighten mounting screws, if necessary

Check and tighten mounting screws of track pads

Explain proper use and maintenance to the operator

TRACKS

Check mounting screws of counterweight for tightness

Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of chain tensioners

Check track chain tension visually, retighten if necessary

SWING RING

SWING GEAR

Check and grease locks and hinges on doors and windows

TRAVEL GEAR

CAB & HEATER

For industrial attachment perform check every 250 hrs

of engine, hydraulic system, gears, and track parts for leaks.













































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Check mounting screws of gear, sprocket wheel and oil motor

Check level in resrvoir for windshield washer, refill if necessary

Ask the operator to lubricate the machine using the lube chart,






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Repeat interval

WORK TO BE PERFORMED

UNDER / UPPERCARRIAGE, & ATTACHMENTS

Clean, if necessary replace the both filters inside the heater and air conditioner unit









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































By authorized trained personnel

Check the condition of condensator, themounting srews and drive belt of airco compressor

Check function of heater, if necessary clean the exchanger core (before start of cold season)

Check the drier / receiver unit formoisture degree and coolant level, if necess. replace the unit

electric and brakes systems before starting operation. He must also perform daily a visual check

The daily maintenance work of the driver include the check of the proper function of hydraulic,






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































see page

guidelines

For fill quantities,

Notes, performance

If very dusty working atmosphere, the intervals for remplacing the filters may be reduced, see specials instructions
Depending on temperature, fuel and oil qualities, the intervals for engine lube oil changes may be reduced , see

3.61.02































































































































09.01




















Operating hours

Datum / Date / Date

Change engine oil

Check coolant level

Replace hydraulic oil

Check engine oil level

Grease flywheel teeth

Check system for function

Check and adjust valve play

Check head and floodlights

Replace lube oil filter cartridge
(Operator)

Check oil level in hydraulic tank

Check mounting of components

Check and clean battery terminals

Change oil separator (every 2 years)

First and only interval

Check condition and tension of V>belts

Check and clean cooler, hoses, ventilator

Bleed servo system and hydraulic pumps

by maintenance personnel

Replace breather filter on hydraulic tank

Check mounting screws of engine console

Replace oil filter in the servo control circuit

Drain condensation water at hydraulic tank

Check hydraulic system for function and leaks

Replace fuel prefilter cartridge (or if power lost)

Press to open dust discharge valve on air cleaner

Replace fuel finefilter cartridge (or if power lost)

Replace return filter cartridges (first at 500 hours.)

Check and if necessary adjust engine speed control

Check preheater system before start of cold season






































































































































































































































































































































Empty water separator at fuel filter and drain fuel tank

Check for air filter clogging at the maintenance indicator

Check cleanless of hydraulic oil cooler, clean it as necessary

DIESEL ENGINE

Check intake and exhaust system for condition and tightness

Check level and specific gravity of electrolyte in the batteries

Check oil pressure and coolant temperature during operation

Check and adjust primary and secondary pressure relief valves

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check indicator lights and gauges on control panel when starting

Clean magnetic rods in return filters (daily during the first 300 hrs.)
Work to be performed

Replace main elements on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)

Check air hoses between air filter and engine ( at filter maintenance )
Replace safety elements on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)

Repeat interval

Replace coolant (correct antifreeze and anticorrosive mixture), (every 2 years)
Check and adjust fuel injectors (every 3000 hours or as necessary >power loos>)




































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE R 904 > R 914 & R 924

By authorized trained personnel

Replace the water filter, check the concentration of anticorrosion additive DCA4 in the coolant

2)
2)
2)

3.64.01
















































































































































































































































































































































































































































see page

Blatt / Page / Feuille

guidelines

Also notice 1)

0,20/0,25 mm

For fill quantities,

Notes, performance



09.01

Operating hours

2)
1)

on page 5.9.

sub group 5.4.

Lube swing ring teeth

Check pinion gear mesh

Check all parts for cracks

Lube swing ring bearing

Check oil level and for leaks

Check oil level and for leaks

Check heater system for leaks

(Operator)

explain defects and deficiencies.

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

First and only interval

Check bucket teeth visually for wear

Check mounting of gear and oil motor

Clean track chain (after working hours)

by maintenance personnel

Check the lower speed of the attachment

Lubricate all grease and lubrication points

Check and lubricate cover hinges and locks

Check function and operation of swing brake

Check function and operation of travel brake

Check idler, carrier and track rollers for leaks

Check and tighten mounting screws, if necessary

Check and tighten mounting screws of track pads

Explain proper use and maintenance to the operator

TRACKS

Check mounting screws of counterweight for tightness

Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of chain tensioners

Check track chain tension visually, retighten if necessary

SWING RING

SWING GEAR

Check and grease locks and hinges on doors and windows

TRAVEL GEAR

CAB & HEATER

For industrial attachment perform check every 250 hrs

of engine, hydraulic system, gears, and track parts for leaks.













































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Check mounting screws of gear, sprocket wheel and oil motor

Check level in resrvoir for windshield washer, refill if necessary

Ask the operator to lubricate the machine using the lube chart,






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Repeat interval

WORK TO BE PERFORMED

UNDER / UPPERCARRIAGE, & ATTACHMENTS

Clean, if necessary replace the both filters inside the heater and air conditioner unit









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































By authorized trained personnel

Check the condition of condensator, themounting srews and drive belt of airco compressor

Check function of heater, if necessary clean the exchanger core (before start of cold season)

Check the drier / receiver unit formoisture degree and coolant level, if necess. replace the unit

electric and brakes systems before starting operation. He must also perform daily a visual check

The daily maintenance work of the driver include the check of the proper function of hydraulic,

w 4 sec













































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































see page

guidelines

For fill quantities,

Notes, performance

If very dusty working atmosphere, the intervals for remplacing the filters may be reduced, see specials instructions
Depending on temperature, fuel and oil qualities, the intervals for engine lube oil changes may be reduced , see

3.64.02































































































































09.01










Operating hours

Datum / Date / Date

Change engine oil

Check coolant level

Replace hydraulic oil

Check engine oil level

Grease flywheel teeth

Check system for function

Check and adjust valve play

Check oil level in splitterbox

Check head and floodlights

Replace oil in the splitterbox

Replace lube oil filter cartridge
(Operator)

Check oil level in hydraulic tank

Check mounting of components

Check and clean battery terminals

Change oil separator (every 2 years)
First and only interval

Check condition and tension of V>belts

Check and clean cooler, hoses, ventilator

Bleed servo system and hydraulic pumps

by maintenance personnel

Replace breather filter on hydraulic tank

Replace oil filter in the servo control circuit

Drain condensation water at hydraulic tank

Replace replenishing oil filter on swing pump

Check hydraulic system for function and leaks

Replace fuel prefilter cartridge (or if power lost)

Press to open dust discharge valve on air cleaner

Replace fuel finefilter cartridge (or if power lost)

Replace return filter cartridges (first at 500 hours.)

Check and if necessary adjust engine speed control

Check preheater system before start of cold season

Empty water separator at fuel filter and drain fuel tank

Check for air filter clogging at the maintenance indicator

Check cleanless of hydraulic oil cooler, clean it as necessary

Check mounting screws of engine console and of splitterbox
Check intake and exhaust system for condition and tightness

Check level and specific gravity of electrolyte in the batteries

Check oil pressure and coolant temperature during operation

Check and adjust primary and secondary pressure relief valves

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Check indicator lights and gauges on control panel when starting

Clean magnetic rods in return filters (daily during the first 300 hrs.)












































































































Work to be performed

Replace main elements on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)

Check air hoses between air filter and engine ( at filter maintenance )












































































































Replace safety elements on air filter (as necessary, at least once a year)
























































































































































































































DIESEL ENGINE & SPLITTERBOX

Repeat interval

Replace coolant (correct antifreeze and anticorrosive mixture), (every 2 years)

Check and adjust fuel injectors (every 3000 hours or as necessary >power loos>)




























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE R 934 & R 944

By authorized trained personnel

Replace the water filter, check the concentration of anticorrosion additive DCA4 in the coolant

2)
2)
2)

3.67.01







































































































































































































































































































































see page

guidelines

Also notice 1)

Blatt / Page / Feuille

0,20/0,25 mm

For fill quantities,

Notes, performance



09.01

Operating hours

2)
1)

on page 5.9.

sub group 5.4.

Lube swing ring teeth

Check pinion gear mesh

Check all parts for cracks

Lube swing ring bearing

Check oil level and for leaks

Check oil level and for leaks

Check heater system for leaks

(Operator)

explain defects and deficiencies.

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

Replace gear oil (first at 500 hrs.)

First and only interval

Check bucket teeth visually for wear

Check mounting of gear and oil motor

Clean track chain (after working hours)

by maintenance personnel

Check the lower speed of the attachment

Lubricate all grease and lubrication points

Check and lubricate cover hinges and locks

Check function and operation of swing brake

Check function and operation of travel brake

Check idler, carrier and track rollers for leaks

Check and tighten mounting screws, if necessary

Check and tighten mounting screws of track pads

Explain proper use and maintenance to the operator

TRACKS

Check mounting screws of counterweight for tightness

Clean and lubricate sliding surfaces of chain tensioners

Check track chain tension visually, retighten if necessary

SWING RING

SWING GEAR

Check and grease locks and hinges on doors and windows

TRAVEL GEAR

CAB & HEATER

For industrial attachment perform check every 250 hrs

of engine, hydraulic system, gears, and track parts for leaks.













































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Check mounting screws of gear, sprocket wheel and oil motor

Check level in resrvoir for windshield washer, refill if necessary

Ask the operator to lubricate the machine using the lube chart,






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Repeat interval

WORK TO BE PERFORMED

UNDER / UPPERCARRIAGE, & ATTACHMENTS

Clean, if necessary replace the both filters inside the heater and air conditioner unit









































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































By authorized trained personnel

Check the condition of condensator, themounting srews and drive belt of airco compressor

Check function of heater, if necessary clean the exchanger core (before start of cold season)

Check the drier / receiver unit formoisture degree and coolant level, if necess. replace the unit

electric and brakes systems before starting operation. He must also perform daily a visual check

The daily maintenance work of the driver include the check of the proper function of hydraulic,

w 5 sec













































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































see page

guidelines

For fill quantities,

Notes, performance

If very dusty working atmosphere, the intervals for remplacing the filters may be reduced, see specials instructions
Depending on temperature, fuel and oil qualities, the intervals for engine lube oil changes may be reduced , see

3.67.02





























































































































Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Diesel Engines

SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

4.05. Technical Data Diesel Engine R 900B / 6001 Æ

4.10. Technical Data Liebherr > Diesel Engine A / R 904 / 6001 Æ

A / R 914 / 6001 Æ
A / R 924 / 6001 Æ
A / R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 04.00.00

A / R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Deutz Diesel Engine

Engine Type BF 4 M 1013 E

Mounted on machines Type A / R 900 B
from Serial Number 6001

Performance per DIN / ISO 9249 kW 82

hp 112
Torque max. (Md max.) Nm 442 at 1400 min>1

General Data :
Type 4 cylinder > Turbo
Working principle 4> cycle > Direct injection
Bore mm 108
Stroke mm 130
Displacement cm3 4764
Firing Order 1>3>4>2
Compression Ratio 17.6:1
Compression pressure
at starting RPM bar 30 > 38
Firing sequence ∞Cranshaft 180
Weight of engine (dry kg 430
Direction of rotation
(when facing flywheel) left
Flywheel housing SAE 4
Cooling System Water circulation

RPM range :
Nominal engine speed min>1 2000
High idle min>1 2110+90
Low idle min>1 750 +100
Lowest operating RPM min>1 1000
RPM at max. torque min>1 1300 > 1500

Adjustments :
Valve clearance>intake> cold mm 0.30
Valve clearance>exhaust>cold mm 0.50
Begin of delivery ∞Cranshaft See maker plate
Backlash > oil pump mm

Capacities :

Engine oil > standart oil pan l 13

Engine oil quantity
(with filter change) l 15,5
Coolant > incl. radiator l 21 (engine 11,5 l+
radiator and hoses 9,5 l)

A / R 900 B Litronic 6001Æ 04.05.01

Issue : 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Deutz Diesel Engine

Engine Type BF 4 M 1013 E

Machine Models, see reverse side

Operating Values :

Coolant temperature ∞C max 125

Thermostat setting ∞C
Cooling system pressure PSI / bar 16 / 1.1 min at engine operating temperature (coolant
temperature >75∞C) measured on coolant pump outlet
(heater connection)
Lube oil temperature ∞C
Min. engine oil pressure bar 0.8 bar (oil temperature 248∞F / 120 ∞C)

Injection valves Bosch / DLLA

Injection pressure
New bar 250 +8
Used bar 245 +8
Max. machine inclination > left/right 30 ∞

Max. machine inclination > forward/backward 30 ∞

Filter elements :
1. Dual fuel filter 1 Filter element Prefilter
1 Filter element Fin mesh filter
2. Oil filter 1 ea.
3. Air filter 1 main element
1 safety element

V>belts 3 ea.

Sending units > indicators

1 oil pressure sending unit Shifting pressure 0.5 bar

1 coolant temperature sending unit Shifting temperatur 113∞ C

1 coolant lecel sending unit

Antifreeze ratio Protected to Water Antifreeze

>4∞F / >37∞C 50% 50%

The percentage of antifreeze should not exceed 60% . A higher percentage would reduce the cooling effect
and freeze protection !

04.05.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Deutz Diesel Engine

Engine Type BF 4 M 1013 E

Series Litronic
Machine A / R 900 B
Serial number 6001

Torques :
Screw connections Torques Notes

m∞
Cylinder head 1. Pas Pretorque to 37 ft.lbs / 50 Nm
2. Pas 130 Nm After installation, run the engine until
warm, retorque when cold.
3. Pas 90∞ Retorque=90∞

Screw for V>belt pulley Pretorque to 22/29.5 ft.lbs>30/40 Nm

Screw thread and head lubricated
with oil
1. Pas 60∞
2.Pas 60∞

Flyweel Pretorque to 22 ft.lbs / 30 Nm

1. Pas 60∞ Screw thread and head lubricated
with oil
2.Pas 60∞

Limit Values
Cylinder
Bore normal mm 108+0,02
Bore > wear limit mm 108,1

Piston
Bore normal mm 107,785±0,009
Height from piston mm Sort of piston A=71,10
B=71,18
C=71,26

Piston ring groove

Ring groove mm Double trapezoidal groove
Height 1. Ring groove mm 2,0+0,10 / +0,08
Height oil ring groove mm 3,5+0,04 / +0,02

A / R 900 B Litronic 6001Æ 04.05.03

Issue : 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Deutz Diesel Engine

Engine Type BF 4 M 1013 E

S±rie Litronic
machine A / R 900 B
Serial Number 6001
Piston ring > side clearance
1. compression ring
Wear limit mm >> (double trapezoidal groove)
Clearance
Wear limit mm 0,17
Oil scraper limit
Wear limit mm 0,10

Piston ring clearance

Limit >1. Compression rings mm max. 0,8
Limit >2. Compression rings mm max. 2,5
Limit > Oil scraper limit mm max. 1,5

04.05.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Liebherr Diesel Engine

Engine Type D 924 T>E A1 D 924 TI>E A2 D 926 T>E A2

Mounted on machines Type A 904 A 914
R 904 R 914 A / R 924 R 934 R 944
from Serial Number 6001 6001 6001 5001 5001

Performance per DIN / ISO 9249 kW 85 99 112 137 164

cv 115 135 152 186 223
Torque max. (Md max.) Nm 510 585 695 810 950

General Data :
Type 4 cylinder > Turbo 6 cyl. > Turbo
Working principle 4> cycle > Direct injection =
Bore mm 122 = = = =
Stroke mm 142 = = = =
Displacement cm3 6636 = = = 9954
Firing Order 1>3>4>2 = = = 1>5>3>6>2>4
Compression Ratio 17,2:1 = = = =
Compression pressure
at starting RPM bar 20>28 = = = =
Firing sequence ∞Cranshaft 180 = = = 120
Weight of engine (dry) kg 740 = = = 950
Direction of rotation
(when facing flywheel) left = = = =
Flywheel housing SAE 2 = = = =
Cooling System Water circulation

RPM range :
Nominal engine speed min>1 2000 = = = =
High idle min>1 2110+90 = = = =
Low idle min>1 750 +100 = = = =
Lowest operating RPM min>1 1000 = = = =
RPM at max. torque min>1 1400 = = 1200 =

Adjustments :
Valve clearance>intake> cold mm 0,25 = = = =
Valve clearance>exhaust>cold mm 0,30 = = = =
Begin of delivery
∞ Cranshaft See maker plate
Backlash > oil pump mm 0,15 > 0,25 (Engine in installation position : cylinder head pointing down)

Capacities :
Engine oil > standart oil pan l 16 max. / 10 min. = 20 max. / 10 min.
Engine oil system
(Filter / cooler / hoses) l 5 = = = 6
Engine oil quantity
(with filter change) l 18,5 = = = 23

Coolant > incl. radiator l 29 29 / 33,5 33,5 40 48

A / R 904 > 924 Li 6001Æ 04.10.01

A / R 934 > 944 Li 5001Æ Issue : 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Liebherr Diesel Engine
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
aa
Engine Type D 924 T > E A1 D 924 T > E A2 D 926 T > E A1
Machine Models, see reverse side

Operating Values :

Coolant temperature ∞C 79 to max.95

Thermostat setting ∞C 79
Cooling system pressure PSI / bar 16 / 1.1 min at engine operating temperature (coolant
temperature >75∞C) measured on coolant pump outlet
(heater connection)
Lube oil temperature ∞C max. 115
Min. engine oil pressure bar at 800 min >1 1 bar (oil temperature 212∞F / 100 ∞C)
at 1400 min >1 2 bar (oil temperature 212∞F / 100 ∞C)
at 2000 min >1 3,5 bar (oil» temperature 212∞F / 100 ∞C)
Injection valves Bosch / DLLA Bosch / DLLA Bosch / DLLA
142 P 632 142 P 632 142 P 632

Injection pressure
New bar 225 +8 225 +8 225 +8
Used bar 217 +8 217 +8 217 +8
Max. machine inclination > left/right 45 ∞

Max. machine inclination > forward/backward 45 ∞

Filter elements :
1. Dual fuel filter 1 Filter element Prefilter 50 > 60¥10>6
1 Filter element Fin mesh filter 7¥10>6
2. Oil filter 2 ea.
3. Air filter 1 main element
1 safety element

V>belts 1 ea. 12,5¥1125 mm

a
a

Sending units > indicators

1 oil pressure sending unit Shifting pressure 0,5 bar

1 coolant temperature sending unit Shifting temperatur 100±3∞ C

1 coolant lecel sending unit

Antifreeze ratio Protected to Watter Antifreeze

>4∞F / >37∞C 50% 50%

The percentage of antifreeze should not exceed 60% . A higher percentage would reduce the cooling effect
and freeze protection !

04.10.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Liebherr Diesel Engine

Engine Type D 924 T > E ( A1, A2) D 926 T > E (A2)

Torques :
Screw connections Pre>torque Torque Re>torque

Crankshaft main bearing bolts (1) 30 mN

1. Stage ............... m∞ 30
2. Stage ............... m∞ 30
3. Stage ............... m∞ 30
Total Torque ............... m∞ 90

Connecting rod bolts (1) 30 mN

1. Stage ............... m∞ 45
2. Stage ............... m∞ 30
3. Stage ............... m∞ 30
Total Torque ............... m∞ 105

Flywheel housing (1) ............... m∞ 30 ou 80 Nm

Cylinder head (1) 30mN

avec soft seals 1. Stage ............... m∞ 30
2. Stage ............... m∞ 30
3. Stage ............... m∞ 60
4. Stage ............... m∞ 60
Total Torque ............... m∞ 180 (2) m∞ 90

Cylinder head (1) 30mN

with Elastomer seals 1. Stage ............... 90 mN
2. Stage ............... m∞ 70
3. Stage ............... m∞ 30
4. Stage ............... m∞ 70
5. Stage ............... m∞ 70
Total Torque ............... m∞ 280

Drive shaft > front (1) 30 mN

crankchaft hub 1. Stage ............... m∞ 45 or 100 Nm
2. Stage ............... m∞ 45 or 160 Nm
Total Torque ............... m∞ 90 or 160 Nm

Flywheel (1) 30 mN
1. Stage ............... m∞ 30 or 180 Nm
2. Stage ............... m∞ 35 or 330 Nm
Total Torque ............... m∞ 65 or 330 Nm

Intermediate gear (3) 60 mN . . . . . . . . . m∞ 70 or 280 Nm

Camshaf Screw M 16¥1,5 (3) 60 mN . . . . . . . . . m∞ 60 or 280 Nm

Screw M 20¥1,5 (3) 130 mN . . . . . . . . m∞ 145 or 650 Nm

(1), (2) et (3), see notes on reverse side

A / R 904 > 924 Li 6001Æ

A / R 934 > 944 Li 5001Æ
04.10.03
Edition : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators Liebherr Diesel Engine

General Notes
(1) Screw thread and head lubricated with oil
(2) After installation, run the engine until warm, retorque when cold
(3) Secure the screws with Loctite 242 / 243
Please note the following tightening sequence for the cylinder head :
1>2>3>4>5>6

2 6
4

3 1

Please note the following tightening sequence for the flywheel housing:
1 > 2 > 3 > 4 > 5 > 6 > 7 > 8 > 9 > 10 > 11

04.10.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pump Splitterbox

a
a

SUB GROUP INDEX

5.20. Pump Splitterbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ

R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ 5.00.00

Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pump Splitterbox

a
a

GENERAL NOTES FOR REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION

Recommended sealing, retaining and lubrication compounds

To degrease screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Activator T

To secure screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loctite No. 262
To install cylinder pins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loctite No. 242
To seal housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loctite No. 562, 573
Grease to insert seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vaseline
To glue in shaft seal 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omnivisc 1002
Grease for grooves > shaft seal 60 . . Molycote Longterm 2 Plus

Important Installation Notes

Do not reuse any parts, which have been damaged during removal of a components, such as shaft
seals, packing and O>rings, ball and roller bearing and other seals. Any damage (scratches, etc.) to
surfaces during removal must be removed before installation.

Flush all areas of components, especially corners and angles, until they are clean. If necessary, use
Diesel fuel or gasoline. Clean every part before reinstallation, check every part for wear and damage .

Before installation, coat all surfaces in the gear with a thin layer of oil.

Apply oil to the O>rings or lightly grease them before installation.

When securing cylinder pins in bore holes, apply Loctite to screw threads / cylinder pin and to the bore
hole.

Before pressing in shafts, bearings etc., apply oil to both parts.

5.20.02 Issue: 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pump Splitterbox

a
a

GENERAL DATA

Model A / R 934 R 944

S/N 5001 5001

Splitterbox Type PVG 350 B 381 PVG 350 B 381

Drawing No. 78 381 0000 00 ... 78 381 0000 00 ...
Direction of rotation (as seen from the flywheel) left left
Output RPM (Nominal RPM) RPM 2000 2000
Ratio to working pump 1,024 1,024
Ratio to swing pump 0,756 0,756
Weight kg 70 70
Oil quantity in gear l. 2 2
Oil specification API GL > 5 API GL > 5
Oil viscosity SAE 90 or SAE 80 W 90 SAE 90 or SAE 80 W 90

Working pump Type LPVD 125 (limited at 118 cm3) LPVD 140 (limited at 133 cm3)
Output RPM (Nominal RPM) RPM 1953 1953
Direction of rotation (as seen from output shaft) right right
Input > working pumps kW 132 160

Swing pump Type A4V 56 A4V 56

Output RPM RPM 2645 2645
Direction of rotation (as seen from output shaft) right right
Input > swing pump kW 76,6 84,5

Adjustment values, to be noted at installation

> Axial play of drive shaft 10 mm 0,5 > 1,1 0,5 > 1,1
> Torques
Dipstick 2 Nm 100 100
Screw 40 (adapter flange swing pump) Nm 86 86
Screw 41 (gear cover ) Nm 50 50
Nut 42 (working pump) Nm 310 310
Screws 43 (swing pump) Nm 310 310
Filter 54 Nm 100 100
Drain valve 80 Nm 240 240
Screw 95 (PVG on SAE housing) Nm 75 75

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ 5.20.03

Issue: 12 / 2000
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pump Splitterbox

aa
aa

3.2 Installation of spur gear 11

Press bearing 33 onto spur gear 11.
Push the spur gear 11 with bearing into housing, either with a press or by installing a flatplate with
two bore holes onto the stud. Tighten the two nuts 46 evenly. (Push an intermediate piece under the
flatplate to press the spur gear all the way in.)
3.3 Installation of spur gear 12
Press bearings 32 on both sides onto spur gear 12. Make sure that the snap ring always points to the
center of the spur gear. Push spur gear into flange 7.
Heat housing in the area where the bearing 32 is installed with warm air to 100∞C (212∞ F).
Mount both O>rings 63 to adapter flange 7 and push flange 7 complete with spur gear 12 into
housing, the arrow on the outside of the flange should point up.
Push adapter flange 7 all the way into housing, either with a press or by regularly tightening the four
longer screws 40. Install and torque Allen screws 40 .
3.4 Insert dipstick guide 2 with seal 51, using Loctite 242 and torque.
Insert dipstick 4 .
Insert filter 54 with seal 51 .
Install and torque drain plug 80 with seal 52.

4. Installation
Install the splitterbox to the engine connector housing and tighten with screws 95.
Install hydraulic pumps and connect suction, pressure, control and leak oil lines.
Open shut off valve on hydraulic tank.
Add gear oil to the mark on the dipstick and insert filter 54 .
Bleed hydraulic pumps (see ∫Start up after pump replacement∫ on page 7.10.01 for double pump and
page 7.15.01 for swing pump).

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ 5.20.05

Issue: 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

6.61. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B / 6001 Æ

6.62. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / 6001 Æ
6.63. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
6.64. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 924 / 6001 Æ
6.65. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
6.66. Hydraulic System > Adjustment check list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

6.67. Hydraulic System "LUDV" > General Description and Construction . . . . . R 900 B / 6001 Æ
R 904 / 6001 Æ
6.68. Hydraulic System "LSC" > General Description and Construction . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
R 924 / 6001 Æ
6.69. Hydraulic System > General Description and Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

6.71. Hydraulic System > Pressure check and adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6001 Æ
R 904 / 6001 Æ
6.75. Hydraulic System > Pressure check and adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
R 924 / 6001 Æ
6.77. Hydraulic System > Pressure check and adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

6.81.01 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6001 Æ

R 904 / 6001 Æ
6.81.11 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900B / 6093 Æ
R 904 / 6278 Æ
6.85.01 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6001 Æ
R 924 / 6001 Æ
6.85.11 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6676 Æ
R 924 / 6282 Æ
6.87.01 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ
6.87.11 Hydraulic diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5278 Æ
R 944 / 5265 Æ

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 6.50.00

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value point value adjustm. Notes

11. Travel speed

Slow travel speed
Slow travel speed engaged,
measure the sprocket
wheel speed in min>1
> On right chain
! travel reverse 18±1 ......... .........
Protrusion Y of screw 160.1 15,5 mm ......... .........
! travel forward 18±1 ......... .........
Protrusion Y of screw160.2 15,5 mm ......... .........
> On left chain
! travel reverse 18±1 ......... .........
Protrusion Y of screw 180.1 15,5 mm ......... .........
! travel forward 18±1 ......... .........
Protrusion Y of screw180.2 15,5 mm ......... .........

Fast travel speed

Fast travel speed engaged,
measure the sprocket
wheel speed in min>1
> On right chain
! travel forward / reverse 43±1 ......... .........
> On left chain
! travel forward / reverse 43±1 ......... .........
Adjust the screw 67 of the
concerned travel motor.
Adapt faster rotating motor
to the slower one so to
obtain straight travel of
excavator

R 900 B Li / 6001 Æ 6.61.05

Issue : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Adjustment Check List R 934

Date : ......................... Operating hours : .............. Name : ....................................

Machine No. ................. Pump typ: ....................... Pump No. .................................

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value* point value adjust. Notes

* All pressure data are in bar

1. Basic adjustments
Machine specific data
> Machine type R 934 ....... a)
> Nominal RPM 2000 min>1 ....... a)
> Tooth specification 147 ....... a)
> Maximum idle RPM 2110+90 min>1 ......... .........
> Low idle RPM 850+50 min>1 ......... .........

a) Read values in menu

"i>hours"

2. Test conditions
> Hydraulic oil temperature > 50∞C ......... .........

3. Servo pressure
Diesel engine in mode P
Adjustment at PR Valve 51 35+1 49 ......... .........

4. Horsepower regulation
In mode L/F
> Controls in neutral
Horsep. regul. current ILR ........ z Y50 .........
Horsep. regul. press. p(LR) ........ z 59 .........
In mode E/P
> Controls in neutral
Horsep. regul. current ILR ........ z Y50 .........
Horsep. regul. press. p(LR) ........ z 59 .........
In mode P, and engine Use adapter wire to meas. ILR on Y50 .
z ILR in mA and p(LR) in bar are depending
loaded so the RPM drops on Bst> Version, as in schedule below
below nominal RPM ILR =~470mA Y50 .........
Version Mode Mode Mode
Bst L/F E P
V 2.0 > 450+10mA 750+15mA 750+15mA
V2 .5 7+1 bar 20+1 bar 20+1 bar

V 2.6 > 450+10mA 750+15mA 750+15mA

& V2 .7 7+1 bar 20+1 bar 20+1 bar

Horsep. regul. pressure

Select menu Powertest at display.
for power test p(LR) 20+1 59 .........

Horsep. regul. pressure

Disconnect Y50 and change over
for safety operation p(LR) 9+0,5 59 ......... ......... its control lever.

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ 6.65.01

Edition : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value* point value adjust. Notes

5. Working pumps P1 (P2) * All pressure data are in bar

5.1 Hydraulic regulation Disconnect horsepower
begin Prb (Pmin) regulating solenoid valve Y50.
of pumps P1 (P2)
Adjustment via valve 23.2 (24.2)
Reduce to the minimum, of the horsepower regulator.
then slowly increase
the primary pressure.
Positioning pressure on
44 (43) must start to drop
for following high pressure
> P1 at Prb (Pmin) = 50±2 41 ......... .........
> P2 at Prb (Pmin) = 50±2 40 ......... .........

5.2 Pressure cut off

of Pumps P1 (P2)
Adjust primary relief
valve 120 (121) to pressure
at end of pressure cut off
Pda (end) 340±5 41
340±5 (40) Adjustment via pressure cut off valve
Read positioning pressure 23.3 (24.3) of the pump regulator.
for end of cut off Ppos(end) 90±10 44 ......... ......... Port Pst of the pump regulator
90±10 (43) ......... ......... must be pressureless.

6. Check of Diesel engine

output
Reduce both primary
valves 120 > 121 to less
than Ppowertest .
Set the pumps to Qmax
using the menu
"Powertest"
Slowly and
simultaneously increase
both primary valves.
When engine RPM has
dropped to 2000+10 min>1,
read the pressure
P1 at test point 41 . . . . . f140 41 ......... .........
and at the same time f 145 z
P2 at test point 40 . . . . . f140 40 ......... .........
P1=P2 must befPpowertest f 145 z
zsince R 934 B (SN 9995)

6.65.02 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value point value adjust. Notes

7. Secondary relief valves

7.1 for attachment functions

> Boom cylinders retract 380+10 40 ......... ......... 125

> Boom cylinders extend 400+10 40 ......... ......... 126

> Bucket tilt cylinder retract 380+10 40 ......... ......... 127

> Bucket tilt cylinder extend 380+10 40 ......... ......... 128

> Stick cylinder retract 380+10 41 ......... ......... 133

> Stick cylinder extend 380+10 41 ......... ......... 134

7.2 for travel function

Travel with applied

travel brakes
> Travel left forward 380+10 41 ......... ......... 130
> Travel left reverse 380+10 41 ......... ......... 129
> Travel right forward 380+10 40 ......... ......... 132
> Travel right reverse 380+10 40 ......... ......... 131

Screw in the primary

valves 120/121 for the
duration of the test

8. Primary relief valves

High pressure on pump P1 350+10 41 ......... ......... 121
High pressure on pump P2 350+10 40 ......... ......... 120

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ 6.65.03

Edition : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value point value adjust. Notes

9. Lowering speed of
working attachment
Attachment all the way
extended and maximum
engine RPM
Fully actuate the
boom cylinders
Lowering time from
upper position
down to the ground 5,0 sek. ......... .........

Adjustment via
throttle check valve 162.

10. Swing pump

(up to SN 5277)
Replenishing pressure (1) 25+1 45 ......... .........
(Adjustment via valve 10.7)
Secondary pressure
swing left (2) 380+10 46 ......... .........
(Adjustment via valve 10.3)
Secondary pressure
swing right (2) 380+10 47 ......... .........
(Adjustment via valve 10.4)

Working pressure
swing left (2) 370+10 46 ......... .........
and
Working pressure
swing right (2) 370+10 47 ......... .........
(Adjustment via valve 15.3)

(1) engine at maximum RPM

Brake torque (2) engine at about 1000 RPM
Protrusion of screw 16.2 14 mm ......... .........

6.65.04 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System > Adjustment Check List

Test Nominal Test Actual Possible View

value point value adjust. Notes

11. Swing pump

(from SN 5278)
Replenishing pressure (1) 25+1 45 .........*
(Valve 10.7*)
Secondary pressure
swing left (2) 400+10 46 .........*
(Valve 10.3*)
Secondary pressure
swing right (2) 400+10 47 .........*
(Valve 10.4*)
Working pressure
swing left+right (2) 370+10 46/47 .... / .... .... / ....
(Adjustment via
cut>off valve 10.8)

Control start swing right

Slowly actuate joystick
to the right, until pressure
increases on x1,
then read Py1>min 6,5+0,5 48 ......... ......... Adjustment screw 15.8
Control start swing left
Slowly actuate joystick
to the left, until pressure
increases on x2,
then read Py2>min 6,5+0,5 48 ......... ......... Adjustment screw 15.7

Swing brake delay

Basic adjustment:
(1) engine at maximum RPM
First unscrew completely, (2) engine at about 1000 RPM
then screw in again by
..... turns * not adjustable
swing right: screw 15.1 2 1/2 trn. .........f .........f f should not be checked/readjusted
swing left: screw 15.2 2 1/2 trn. .........f .........f under normal circumstances.

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ 6.65.05

Edition : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Description of the hydraulic system

See also the corresponding hydraulic schematics.
1. Hydraulic tank and return oil filter
The hydraulic tank 1 contains the hydraulic oil for the com>
plete hydraulic system.
The hydraulic tank and the fuel tank make up a single
component, which is installed on the right side of the
excavator.
Baffle plates inside the tank prevent hydraulic oil
turbulence during machine operation and separate the
tank into three different section:
> The return oil side A, where all return and leak oil is
collected.
> The filter chamber B, where the oil enters after flowing
through the return filter 4, which consists of a magnetic
and fiberglass filter.
During cold start, or if the filter element is contaminated,
the oil can return via the bypass valve 5, which is
integrated in the filter. A
> The suction side C is connected with the chamber B via an
opening in the lower baffle plate.
After dearetion in chamber C, the vented and foam free
oil flows to the suction side D, from where the oil is
drawn through the shut off valve 3.
C
After 1.0 bar pressure has been reached, the safety valve 2
allows air to escape from the closed hydraulic system.
For tank 1 and filter 4 maintenance (removal of condensa> D B
tion in tank, replacement of filter elements, ...), refer to
the maintenance guidelines and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.

Filter elements
> the return filter 4 has two stage fiberglass filter element
and safety bypass valve 5.
Filter grade :
for run in (initial installation at delivery) 10o
for normal application two stage 20/5o
dust intensive application 10o
Cleaning cartridge 5o
> Breather filter
for normal application : 7o
dust intensive application ; 2o

R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 6.67.01

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

4. Control valve block

Construction :
The control valve block comprises
> an integrated LUDV control system
> an input section
> five spool valves
> a pressure compensator for the LUVD control for each
control valve
> the possibility to flange additional control valves (for
swing movements, ...)
> pressure relief valves (primary and secondary valves
with suction function) screwed into the valve block to
limit the pressure
> suction valves for travel function
> stroke limitation of the spools
> deaeration valves for the control covers
For description of the working principle, refer to subgroup
7.60.

6.67.04 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

II) On machines R 900 B / SN 6106 Æ and R 904 / SN 6291 Æ

A regulating valve Y53 regulates, depending on the
hydraulic oil temperature, the amount of oil flowing
through the load holding valve 7, and the cooler 6.
The transmitter B8 mounted to the hydraulic tank informs
the U16 regulator about the momentary oil temperature.
Figure 14 shows the variations of the regulating current
IY53 depending on (khyd ), the hydraulic temperature given
by B8 (=response of Bst regulator U16).
As the oil is cold, IY53 is maximum,
khyde40∞ C IY53=740 mA
The solenoid valve Y53 closes the oil flow to the tank and
the pressure becomes the same on both sides of the orifice
in the valve 7. The relief pressure of the valve 7 is by the
12 fact increased and the oil must return to the tank via the
holding valve 8.
For temperatures above 40∞ C, the current IY53 is reduced
and the solenoid valve Y53 progressively opens. The oil
flow in the orifice of valve 7 increases, the pressure behind
orifice decreases and the relief pressure of the valve 7 is
reduced.
The amount of oil flowing over valve 7 and cooler 6
progressively augments with the temperature.

13

khyd (∞C)
80
80

70

60 "a"
50
50

40
IY53 (mA)
30
30
200 400 600 800
0 200 400 600 800

14

6.67.06 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

6. The hydraulic rotary connection

The rotary connection 195 is a special connection, which

transfers hydraulic oil from the uppercarriage to the
undercarriage.
Pressurized oil is led to both travel motors 200 and 201 via
four high pressure channels 1, 2 , 3 and 4.
The leak oil from both motors returns via channel O to the
tank.
The pressurized oil necessary to control the variable
displacement of the travel motors 200 and 201 flows
through the smaller rotary connection 196 in the center.

For description, function and sealing works, refer to

subgroups 7.75 and 7.77.
15

R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 6.67.07

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

9. Load > Sensing Control

9.1 General
The new Liebherr hydraulic excavator generation 900 B > 904 Litronic is equipped with a LS >
hydraulic control ( Load Sensing control ) .
This control offers some important advantages as compared to the previous restrictor control on
Litronic 1 generation machines:
1. Reduced power requirement (fuel consumption due to optimum match of pump flow to
requirement).
2. Quicker and more precise working due to automatic synchronization of moments of several users
if maximum flow is exceeded. this also applied to the regulating range of the pump.
9.2 Comparison > Restrictor control > Load Sensing control
9.2.1 Control elements
Control piston in directional valves or control valve blocks are used in our machines to
distribute the available pump flow. They are moved hydraulically by the operator via pilot
controls.
9.2.2 Flow diameter
The flow diameter for the pump flow between piston, pump channel and user channel is
determined through a given control pressure, which is set by the operator .
This means : Small lever stroke / pedal on pilot control
= Low control pressure on piston
= small flow diameter
= low speed of user
However : Large stroke = high pressure = large flow diameter = high speed
9.2.3 Flow quantity
According to principles of physics, the flow quantity to the user depends on the pressure
difference between the pump channel (pump pressure) and the user (load pressure).
This means: Large Ep = large flow quantity
Small Ep = small flow quantity
Q = A¥ EP or Q=A¥(EP) 1/2

9.2.4 Restrictor control

To be able to obtain a constant speed of movement for the user (flow quantity) at constantly
changing load pressures, the operator must change the opening diameter on the pistons for
the current user to hold the output from the flow diameter A and the Ep (before and behind
the control piston) constant.
The pump flow which is not needed by the user is directed via a pressure relief valve at the
maximum pressure relief setting (primary pressure) back to the tank.

R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 6.67.11

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

9.2.5 Load > Sensing Control

The regulating pump receives the user pressure. The volume flow is controlled by the operator
through the flow diameter of the directional valves. The pressure drop on the control piston
remains the same. This significantly improves the energy balance of the hydraulic circuit,
because the required pump capacity is matched very closely to the actual power requirement
(oil requirement) of all users. If the oil requirement of the user exceeds the flow capacity of
the pump(s), then the state of the pressure drop and therefore also the synchronization of the
control is canceled.
The desired control comfort would also be canceled.
Another optimization is offered through the LSC > System ( LINDE > Synchron Control System )
in A / R 900 B > A / R 904 , which is installed in the excavatorπs hydraulic system.

9.3 The LSC System ( LINDE )

The new LSC system is a Load > Sensing > System with a control piston (test orifice) for each user and
a pressure balance thereafter. The load pressure of each user ( LS > Signal ) is taken on the pressure
channel to the user. The highest load pressure is reported to the working pump via the change over
valve and applies to the pressure balance at the same time.
The Ep of 23 / 25 bar given by the pressure spring of the LS regulator (located on the working pump)
is used as the standard > Ep for the system .
The pump supplies in proportion to the test orifice diameters A1 and A2. The Ep on the test orifices
(Ep1 and Ep2 ) is the same due to the pressures P1' = P2'.
If several users are actuated and the pump flow Q is not sufficient to take care of the test orifice
diameters, Ep1 and Ep2 are reduced. Due to the highest load pressure signal P2 reported on all
pressure balances, the flow distribution continues independent of load pressure according to the
condition:

QV1 A1
QV2 A2

9.3.1 Proportional flow distribution

If a user is actuated with the required amount Q = for example 200 l / min, the oil quantity is
supplied by the regulating pump as needed.
If a second user needs Q = 150 l / min , then the maximum pump flow Q = 300 l /min is
divided to both users at a ratio of :
300 / (200+150)=0,85
This way the first user, user 1, will still receive :
Qv1=200¥0,85=172 l/min
and user 2 receives only :
Qv2=150¥0,85=128 l/min.

6.67.12 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Description of the hydraulic system

See also the corresponding hydraulic schematics.
1. Hydraulic tank and return oil filter
The hydraulic tank 1 contains the hydraulic oil for the com>
plete hydraulic system.
The hydraulic tank and the fuel tank make up a single
component, which is installed on the right side of the
excavator.
Baffle plates inside the tank prevent hydraulic oil turbulence
during machine operation and separate the tank into three
different section:
> The return oil side A, where all return and leak oil is
collected.
> The filter chamber B, where the oil enters after flowing
through the return filter 4, which consists of a magnetic
and fiberglass filter.
During cold start, or if the filter element is contaminated,
the oil can return via the bypass valve 5, which is integrated
in the filter.
> The suction side C is connected with the chamber B via an
opening in the lower baffle plate.
After dearetion in chamber C, the vented and foam free oil
flows to the suction side D, from where the oil is drawn
through the shut off valve 3.
After 1.0 bar pressure has been reached, the safety valve 2
allows air to escape from the closed hydraulic system.
For tank 1 and filter 4 maintenance (removal of condensa>
tion in tank, replacement of filter elements, ...), refer to the
maintenance guidelines and the Operation and
Maintenance Manual.

Filter elements
> the return filter 4 has two stage fiberglass filter element
and safety bypass valve 5.
Filter grade :
for run in (initial installation at delivery) 10o
for normal application two stage 20/5o
dust intensive application 10o
Cleaning cartridge 5o
> Breather filter
for normal application : 7o
dust intensive application ; 2o

R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 6.68.01

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

6. The hydraulic rotary connection

The rotary connection 195 is a special connection, which

transfers hydraulic oil from the uppercarriage to the under>
carriage.
Pressurized oil is led to both travel motors 200 and 201 via
four high pressure channels 1, 2 , 3 and 4.
The leak oil from both motors returns via channel O to the
tank.
The pressurized oil necessary to control the variable
displacement of the travel motors 200 and 201 flows
through the smaller rotary connection 196 in the center.
For description, function and sealing works, refer to sub
groups 7.75 and 7.77. 15

R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 6.68.07

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

9. Load > Sensing Control

9.1 General
The new Liebherr hydraulic excavator generation 914 > 924 Litronic is equipped with a LS > hydraulic
control ( Load Sensing control ) .
This control offers some important advantages as compared to the previous restrictor control on
Litronic 1 generation machines:
1. Reduced power requirement (fuel consumption due to optimum match of pump flow to
requirement).
2. Quicker and more precise working due to automatic synchronization of moments of several users
if maximum flow is exceeded. this also applied to the regulating range of the pump.
9.2 Comparison > Restrictor control > Load Sensing control
9.2.1 Control elements
Control piston in directional valves or control valve blocks are used in our machines to
distribute the available pump flow. They are moved hydraulically by the operator via pilot
controls.
9.2.2 Flow diameter
The flow diameter for the pump flow between piston, pump channel and user channel is
determined through a given control pressure, which is set by the operator .
This means : Small lever stroke / pedal on pilot control
= Low control pressure on piston
= small flow diameter
= low speed of user
However : Large stroke = high pressure = large flow diameter = high speed
9.2.3 Flow quantity
According to principles of physics, the flow quantity to the user depends on the pressure
difference between the pump channel (pump pressure) and the user (load pressure).
This means: Large Ep = large flow quantity
Small Ep = small flow quantity
Q = A¥ EP or Q=A¥(EP) 1/2

9.2.4 Restrictor control

To be able to obtain a constant speed of movement for the user (flow quantity) at constantly
changing load pressures, the operator must change the opening diameter on the pistons for
the current user to hold the output from the flow diameter A and the Ep (before and behind
the control piston) constant.
The pump flow which is not needed by the user is directed via a pressure relief valve at the
maximum pressure relief setting (primary pressure) back to the tank.

R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 6.68.11

Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

9.2.5 Load > Sensing Control

The regulating pump receives the user pressure. The volume flow is controlled by the operator
through the flow diameter of the directional valves. The pressure drop on the control piston
remains the same. This significantly improves the energy balance of the hydraulic circuit,
because the required pump capacity is matched very closely to the actual power requirement
(oil requirement) of all users. If the oil requirement of the user exceeds the flow capacity of
the pump(s), then the state of the pressure drop and therefore also the synchronization of the
control is canceled.
The desired control comfort would also be canceled.
Another optimization is offered through the LSC > System ( LINDE > Synchron Control System )
in A / R 914 > A / R 924 , which is installed in the excavatorπs hydraulic system.

9.3 The LSC System ( LINDE )

The new LSC system is a Load > Sensing > System with a control piston (test orifice) for each user and
a pressure balance thereafter. The load pressure of each user ( LS > Signal ) is taken on the pressure
channel to the user. The highest load pressure is reported to the working pump via the change over
valve and applies to the pressure balance at the same time.
The Ep of 23 / 25 bar given by the pressure spring of the LS regulator (located on the working
pump) is used as the standard > Ep for the system .
The pump supplies in proportion to the test orifice diameters A1 and A2. The Ep on the test orifices
(Ep1 and Ep2 ) is the same due to the pressures P1' = P2' , see schematic on page 6.18.09.
If several users are actuated and the pump flow Q is not sufficient to take care of the test orifice
diameters, Ep1 and Ep2 are reduced. Due to the highest load pressure signal P2 reported on all
pressure balances, the flow distribution continues independent of load pressure according to the
condition:

QV1 A1
QV2 A2

9.3.1 Proportional flow distribution

If a user is actuated with the required amount Q = for example 300 l / min, the oil quantity is
supplied by the regulating pump as needed.
If a second user needs Q = 150 l / min , then the maximum pump flow Q = 400 l /min is
divided to both users at a ratio of :
400 / (300+150)=0,88
This way the first user, user 1, will still receive :
Qv1=300¥0,88=266,5 l/min
and user 2 receives only :
Qv2=150¥0,88=133,5 l/min.

6.68.12 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Description of the hydraulic system

See also the corresponding hydraulic schematics.
1. Hydraulic tank and return oil filter
The hydraulic tank 1 contains the hydraulic oil for the com>
plete hydraulic system.
The hydraulic tank and the fuel tank make up a single
component, which is installed on the right side of the
excavator.
Baffle plates inside the tank prevent hydraulic oil
turbulence during machine operation and separate the
tank into three different section:
> The return oil side A, where all return and leak oil is
collected.
1
> The filter chamber B, where the oil enters after flowing
through the return filter 4, which consists of a magnetic
a
and fiberglass filter.
During cold start, or if the filter element is contaminated,
the oil can return via the bypass valve 5, which is
integrated in the filter.
> The suction side C is connected with the chamber B via an
opening in the lower baffle plate.
After dearetion in chamber C, the vented and foam free
oil flows to the suction side D, from where the oil is drawn
through the shut off valve 3.
After 1.0 bar pressure has been reached, the safety valve 2
allows air to escape from the closed hydraulic system.
For tank 1 and filter 4 maintenance, refer to the mainte>
nance guidelines and the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.

2
Filter elements and filter grade :
Return filter 4
The return filter 4 has two stage fiberglass filter element
and safety bypass valve 5.
> filter element for run in (initial installation at delivery)
10o
> filter element for normal application: two stage 20/5o
> filter element for dust intensive application: 10o
Breather filter 2
> filter element for normal application : 7o
> filter element for dust intensive application ; 2o

R 934 > 944 Li / 5001 Æ 6.69.01

Issue: 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

k B2 (∞C) k B8 (∞C)
Principle of the fan RPM regulation
When the temperature of hydraulic oil,
respec. of engine coolant are below fixed 97
97 77
lower limit values (65∞C, resp. 85∞C on 95 75
example beside), the output current of Bst
regulation unit U16 to the regulation 93 73
solenoid valve Y347 is equal to 350 mA.
In this case, the pressure maintained by the 91
91 71
pilot valve 32 is reduced. As soon as a
89 69
relatively low pump pressure has been
reached (w40 bar), the flow regulator 37 87
87 67
connects the positioning piston 35.1 to the
pump pressure. The pump flow is by the fact 85 65
limited to a value corresponding to the 0 350 IY347 (mA)
minimum working RPM (w700 RPM). 83
83
50 100 200 300
At the opposite, when the temperatures are >50 50 150 250 400
above higher limit values (75∞C for hydraulic
oil, resp. 95∞C for engine coolant on example } (min>1)
beside), the current to Y347 is equal to 0mA. 300
The pressure maintained by the pilot valve 32 1800
is now maximum and the flow regulator 37 240 1400
then reduces the pump angle (i. e. it connects P (bar)
the positioning piston to the pump high 1000
pressure) only once the pressure in the fan 180
drive circuit has reached a value high enough 160 600
140
to allow the fan to run at its nominal RPM.
100 0
Between above mentioned lower and higher
80
limit values, the variations of the current sent 60
by U16 to Y347 are linear. To each
intermediate temperature corresponds a 20 IY347 (mA)
0
current value and, by the fact, a pressure 0 100 200 300 350
value between 40 and 180 bar which >50 50 150 250 400
determines a precise fan RPM (see attached
charachteristic curves). k B2 (∞C) Temperature in engine coolant circuit
k B8 (∞C) Temperature in hydraulic circuit
IY347 (mA) Current to solenoid valve Y347
P (bar) Pressure in fan drive circuit (test point 34)
} (min>1) Cooler fan RPM

6. The hydraulic rotary connection

The rotary connection 250 is a special connection, which

transfers hydraulic oil from the uppercarriage to the under>
carriage.
Pressurized oil is led to both travel motors 200 and 201 via
four high pressure channels 1, 2 , 3 and 4.
The leak oil from both motors returns via channel O to the
tank.
The pressurized oil necessary to control the variable
displacement of the travel motors 200 and 201 flows
through the smaller rotary connection 251 in the center
(channel 6).

R 934 > 944 Li / 5001 Æ 6.69.07

Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

7. Attachment cylinders and motors

Hydraulic actuators convert hydraulic energy into
mechanical energy. We differentiate two kinds:

a) Hydraulic actuators, which transfer force in a

straight line with a limited stroke, as hydraulic
cylinders.
For a description of function or resealing of hydraulic
cylinders, see section 7.30.

b) Hydraulic actuators, which transfer torque in a

continuously rotating motion, as oil motors.
For a description, see section 7.20.
7.1 Boom cylinders 210
Both boom cylinders 210 are located on the upper>
carriage. The complete attachment is raised or lowered
via the basic and/or gooseneck boom.

7.2 Stick cylinder 220

The stick cylinder 255 is installed on the main or goose>
neck boom and moves the stick around its pivot point.
In the cylinder movement on the backhoe attachment,
the movement is limited by stops.
A restrictor check valve 222 is installed in the hydraulic
line on the rod side of the cylinder to limit the stick
lowering speed.
7.3 Bucket tilt cylinder 230
The bucket tilt cylinder 230 is mounted on the bucket
stick. With this cylinder, the bucket is tilted in or out
via a lever and linkage.
7.4 Swing motor 190
The oil motor 190, mounted on the swing gear, turns
the uppercarriage via the swing gear and swing ring.
7.5 Travel motors 200 and 201
The travel motors 200 and 201 are integrated in the
travel gears.
They turn the track chains via the travel gears and
sprockets.
The secondary pressure relief valves 129 > 130 / 131 >
132 are integrated in the travel motors 200 / 201.
The displacement from maximum to reduced swivel
angle is achieved by the servo pressure via the rotary
connection 196.
Each travel motors 200 and 201 is equiped with a brake
valve 205.
For description of brake valve 205, see sub group 7.98.

6.69.08 Issue: 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

8. The servo>control circuit

8.1 All spool valves in the control valve blocks are
hydraulically controlled.
For the attachment and swing function, two pilot
control valves 80 and 81 (joysticks) are installed on the
consoles left and right of the operatorπs seat.
The two foot pedals 82 and 83 mounted in the front of
the cab contain the pilot control valves for travel
forward and reverse function.
The pedal operated dual servo control valve 85 and 86
serve to control the additional hydraulic installations
(such as the optionaly mounted hydraulic hammer,
telescopic stick, scrap shear, ....).
The spool valves are moved hydraulically in proportion
to the level or pedal movement of valves 80 to 86,
controlling the speed of the cylinders and the oil
motors.
The pilot controls 80 to 86 are maintenance free. For a
description of function, see sub groups 7.50 and
followings.

8.2 The servo pressure oil necessary to move the control

valves is drawn by the servo oil pump 30, from the
suction fitting on the main pump and transferred to
the servo oil unit 50.
The pump 30 is a gear pump flanged to the front of the
swing pumps 10.

8.3 The servo oil unit contains a pressure relief valve 51,
which limits the servo control pressure and the servo
filter 52.
This filter has to be serviced as described in the "Main>
tenance Schedule".

In addition, three solenoid valves (Y3, Y24 and Y7) and

the regulation solenoid valve Y50 for the working
pumps horsepower regulation are installed to this unit.
In case of special equipments, the servo oil unit may be
fitted with additional regulation solenoid valves (Y51,
Y52, ... ) which control the main pumps angle
limitation.

8.4 The solenoid valve Y3 connects the servo control circuit

to the pilot control valves with the tank when the
safety lever on the left armrest is in the ™UP∫ position.
This will prevent any movement of the machine when
a servo control valve is unintentionaly moved.

R 934 > 944 Li / 5001 Æ 6.69.09

Issue: 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

8. Check and adjust the load sensing pressure

on relief valve 104

> Connect a pressure gauge (6 > 600 bar) to test point 41

for pump pressure on control valve block 100 ) .
> Set the Diesel engine to Mode P.
> SF not functioning.
> Retract the bucket cylinder all the way to stop and
compare the pressure on the pressure gauge 41 with the
pressure value for pressure cut>off valve 101, see
"Adjustment check list".
> If necessary, correct the adjustment of the pressure cut>
off 101 .
> To do so, loosen lock nut and turn the adjustment screw
with a socket wrench :
> Turn in clockwise direction = to increase pressure
> Turn in counterclockwise direction = to decrease
pressure
> After correct adjustment, counter the adjustment screw
and secure.

6.75.08 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

11. Tests and adjustments on the swing gear circuit

This paragraph only applies to models
R 914 / 6676 Æ
R 924 / 6282 Æ
and older machines, which were retrofitted to the present
condition :
> Adjustable secondary PR valves 131 / 132,
> changed TC valve 137
> external mini flow regulator 150, see reverse side
11.1 Location of valves and test points
> 131 High pressure relief valve / turn right
> 132 High pressure relief valve / turn left
> 134 PR valve / control pressure Torque Control
> 137 TC valve
> 145 Test point / High pressure > turn right
> 146 Test point / High pressure > turn left
> 147 Test point / Servo pressure Swing

Note:
The values shown in the diagram are only examples.
For detailed data, see adjustment check list.

* Should under normal circumstances be

neither checked nor readjusted
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa

z }/}max
P (bar)
a
Sec. pressure relief
a

Secondary pressure en %
working pressure > swing maximum adjustment
300 100%
Pmax +a
a

_ PTC
250
+
+ Limitation
Secondary pressure by the
200 depending on Pst _ servo pressure
_ Torque
Control
¬
150 ¡ 50%
√ +
Pbr
100 _
Secondary press.
mini adjustment

50

Pst (bar)
0
Pfb z
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
_
z Under normal circumstances, these setting do
not need to be checked or readjusted
(¡) P(Sek.) = f ( Pst) Variation of secondary pressure with servo control pressure swing
(¬) PTC = f ( Pst) Variation of working pressure with servo control pressure swing
(√) }/}max= f ( Pst) Variation of oil flow in motor (swing RPM) with servo control pressure swing

R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 6.75.13

R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Edition : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

11.2 To adjust the high pressure relief valves 131 and 132
11.2.1 To check the maximum relief pressure "Pmax" :
A check of the relief pressure of the high
pressure relief valves 131 and 132 can be
dynamic performed without modifying the
adjustment of the torque control valve 134.
Remove caps on test points 145 and 146, and
connect a 600 bar pressure gauge.
Start the engine and adjust it to Mode "P".
Swing the uppercarriage to the left (resp. to the
right) and then, while swinging, counter to the
opposite direction.
At the begin of the countering, the pressure
relief valves will respond for about two
sececonds. Read the pressure at this moment on
gauge 145 (resp. 146), and compare with the
value given on page "Adjustment check list".
The maximum relief pressure "Pmax" of the
valves 131 and 132 is adjustable via adjustment
screw 1 after loosening counternut 1a.
> Turn the adjustment screw 1 clockwise, to
increase Pmax.
> Turn the adjustment screw 1 counterclock>
wise, to reduce Pmax.
> One turn corresponds to a pressure variation
of approx. 235 bar.
11.2.2 To check or readjust the low relief pressure
"Pbr" (basic adjustment)
The basic adjustment of the high pressure relief
valves gives the pressure "Pbr" that builts up in
the swing motor during braking without
countering (joystick in neutral).
Fully actuate the swing movement and return
the joystick to neutral.
Take a pressure reading on gauge 145 (resp.
146) during the 4 or 5 first seconds of the
deceleration of the uppercarriage, and
compare it with the prescribed value "Pbr".
If necessary, modify the basic adjustment of the
high pressure relief valve, proceed as follows :
> Loosen the locknut 2a and turn the
adjustment screw 2 until the correct pressure
"Pbr" is shown on the gauge. Preferably use
the special tool to adjust!
> Turn the screw clockwise to increase the
pressure
> Turn the screw counterclockwise to reduce
the pressure
One turn corresponds to a pressure variation of
approx. 235 bar.
After adjustment, retighten the locknut 2a to
50 Nm while holding the adjustment screw 2.

6.75.14 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

11.2.3 Adjustment of charachteristic

The adjustment of the charachteristic line
Psec=f(pst) can be realized via the adjustment
screw 3 after loosening the counternut 3a.
The adjustment has been carried out at factory
according the indications of the "Adjustment
check list" (as an example, at Pst=14±0,1 bar,
the corresonding secondary pressure Psec (14 bar)
must be 215±7,5 bar). This point should not be
checked or readjusted, excepted if the Torque
Control charachteristic line PTC=f(pst) cannot be
set correctly (see ß 11.4).
During an eventual adjustment, the servo
pressure relief valve 134 must be first screwed
in, so to set the line PTC=f(pst) higher that the
point of the charachteristic Psek=f(pst) to be
adjusted.
Set the servo pressure swing to the desired
value using the joystick, and take the reading
of secondary pressure on test point 145 / 146
during the acceleration phasis of the
uppercarriage.
One turn of the adjustment screw 3 corres>
ponds to approx. 28 bar.
Torque the counternut 3a to 5 Nm after
adjustment.
11.3 Adjustment of working pressure "PTC" on control
pressure relief valve for swing
The valve 134 limits the servo pressure for swing left
and right, and thus limit, via the torque control, the
high pressure "PTC" to the swing motor.
Remove caps on test points 145 and 146 and connect
two 600 bar pressure gauges.
Lock the uppercarriage to the undercarriage with the
lock pin and apply the swing brake.
Start the Diesel engine and bring it to Mode "P".
Fully actuate the joystick for swing gear, read high
pressure on pressure gauges 145 and 146 and compare
with prescribed working pressure "PTC" (see page
"Adjustment check list").
If necessary turn the adjustment screw 134.1 until the
correct pressure "PTC" is reached.
> Turn clockwise to increase working pressure.
> Turn counterclockwise to decrease working pressure.
After adjustment, retighten locknut 134.2 to 9.5 Nm
while countering adjustment screw of the valve 134.
Remove pressure gauges and close off test points.

R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 6.75.15

R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Edition : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

11.4 Adjustment of the Torque Control charachteristic

To shift the charachteristic line PTC=f(Pst) up or down,
turn the adjustment screw 1 of the Torque Control
valve 137 after loosening the counternut 2.
Lock the uppercarriage to the undercarriage with the
lock pin and apply the swing brake.
Fit the test points 145 and 146 with two pressure
gauges 0>300 bar and test point 147 with a pressure
gauge 0>60 bar.
Slowly move the joystick so to obtain the desired servo
pressure swing (first overpass pressure and then slowly
reduce to 16 bar, as an example).
Take the reading of working pressure on 145 / 146 and
compare with the prescribed value "PTC(16 bar)".
If the pressure cannot be obtained, you must first
adjust the charachteristic Psec=f(Pst) see ß 11.2.3.
After completion of adjustment, retighten the nut 2 to
10 Nm while countering the screw 1.
Remove the pressure gauges.

11.5 Checking the function begin of the swing

The function begin has to be checked only if the slow
and precise starting of the swing motion is not
satisfying.
To check the function begin :
> slowly increase the servo pressure while actuating the
joystick .
> when reaching 8±0,5 bar, the pump high pressure
must have increased to 40±7,5 bar.
The pressure "Pfb "at function begin can be modifyed
while changing (inserting or removing) the shims 40 >41
under the regulation springs of the spool valve 133.

6.75.16 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

12. Check and adjustment of variable displacement travel

motors 200 / 201
Travel speed of the machine
Caution :
The hydraulic motors are adjusted by the manufacturer
and do not normally require a readjustment.
The maximum values for fast and slow travel speed are
depending on the manufacturer adjustment of the
travel motors and on the maximum oil flow through
the spool valves for travel.
To check the real travel speed measure the RPM of the
sprocket wheel and compare it with the prescribed
value, see pages "adjustment check list".
12.1 Slow travel speed
The slow travel speed of the machine is defined by
the maximum swivel angle of the travel motor (fixed
stop, not adjustable) and by the oil flow in the
corresponding valve spool.
Thus, a correction of the sprocket RPM can be
performed only while modifying the maximum oil
flow of the travel spool:
> The maximum opening section of the control
valve is in relation with the possible stroke of the
spool (mechanical stop > adjustment screw .1).
> First notice the protrusion "Y" (top of adjustment
screw to counternut) and compare with the value
given in the "Adjustment check list".
160.1 Stroke limitation / Travel left forward
160.2 Stroke limitation / Travel left reverse
180.1 Stroke limitation / Travel right forward
180.2 Stroke limitation / Travel right reverse
> Set the Diesel engine to mode "P".
> Bring the hydraulic oil to operating temperature
(f50 ∞C).
> Turn the uppercarriage crosswise to the
undercarriage, support and slightly lift the
sideframe from the ground using the attachment.
> Switch S21 (fast speed) must be off, (LED is off).
> Fully actuate travel left or right, forward or
reverse.
> Measure output RPM of travel gear (= sprocket
RPM) and compare with the prescribed value, see
pages "Adjustment check list".
> Remove the protection cap .3 of the concerned
stroke limitation, loosen the lock nut .2 and turn
the adjustment screw .1, until the correct RPM of
the sprocket is obtained.
> Turn the screw .1 clockwise to increase RPM
> Turn counterclockwise to reduce RPM
> Retighten the locknut and reinstall protection
cap.

R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 6.75.17

R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Edition : 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pressure check and adjustment

12.2 Fast travel speed, minimum displacement of motors

and straight travel
The fast travel speed of the machine is defined by
the minimum swivel angle of the travel motor
(adjustable) and by the oil flow in the corresponding
valve spool.
Seing that the oil flow in the valve spool is adjusted
so to have the correct slow travel speed, see ß 12.1,
the adjustment of fast travel speed could only be
done modifying the minimum motor displacement.
Notice: We advise against readjusting the minimum
displacement of the motors just to modify
the fast travel speed.
Straight travel
We recommend to readjust the minimum oil motor
displacement only in case the excavator does not travel
straight, and, seing that in the most cases a curving
travel is not due to a wrong adjustment of the travel
motors, after having previously performed following
checks:
> Verify the proper function of the servo control circuit
(especialy for travel movements)
> Check that the excavator does not travel straight
only when travel motors are sviwelled back to
reduced angle (switch S21 must be turned on).
> Check that the hydraulic oil is at operating
temperature (f50 ∞C).
Adjustment of minimum displacement
Notice : For adjustment, regard that the laster
rotating oil motor must be matched to the
slower motor.
> Remove the protective cover at the concerned
sideframe,
> Remove the protection cap, loosen the lock nut 68
and unscrew the adjustment screw 67 for reduced oil
flow, until the straight travel of the machine is
obtained.
Notice : During the adjustment of the reduced
displacement, the servo pressure must apply
continuously to the control port of the
motor.
Since the travel motors are swivelled from
maximum to reduced angle automatically
the check must either be performed in such
ground conditions that motor is kept in
reduced angle, or the hydraulic control
circuit of the motor must be modified for the
duration of test.
> After correct adjustment, retighten the lock nut 68,
fit with a new protection cap and reinstall the
protectice cover.

6.75.18 Edition : 11 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

130 Swing motor

200 Travel motor > left
201 Travel motor > right
235 Boom cylinder
255 Stick cylinder
275 Bucket tilt cylinder

195 Rotary connection for high pressure

196 Rotary connection 1 way for servo control pressure

6.81.02 Issue: 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

100 Control valve block 5 way

complete containing:

120 Spool > swing movements

160 Spool / travel right
180 Spool / travel left
220 Spool / boom cylinders
240 Spool / stick cylinders
260 Spool / bucket cylinders

104>
264 Valves, etc. , see next page

R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 6.81.03

Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. D±signation Groupe Pos. D±signation Groupe

1 Hydraulic tank 160 Spool valve/ travel right . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
2 Breather filter 161 Suction valve
3 Shut off valve 162 Suction valve
4 Return filter 164 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
5 Bypass valve / return filter 167 Restrictor check valve
6 Hydraulic oil cooler 180 Spool valve / travel left . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
7 Check valve > 5.5 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 181 Suction valve
8 Pretension valve > 7,0 bar . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 182 Suction valve
20 Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 184 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
21 Rotary group 187 Restrictor check valve
21.1 Positioning piston 195 Rotary connection > 5 way . . . . . . . . . 7.78
23 Pump regulating valve complete 196 Rotary connection > 1 way . . . . . . . . . 7.76
23.2 Horsepower regulator 200 Travel motor > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
23.5 Load Sensing regulator 201 Travel motor > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
23.6 Two way check valve 202 Positioning piston
28 Check valve 203 Control piston / travel motor displacement
29 Throttle 205 Travel brake valve complete
30 Servo oil pump 206 Hydraulic brake valve
41 Test point / high pressure main pump 207 Two>way check valve / brake control
44 Test point / positioning pressure P 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
45 Test point / LS pressure 209 Travel brake
49 Test point / servo oil pressure 210 Travel gear
50 Regulating and servo oil unit 211 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
51 Servo oil pressure relief valve 212 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
52 Servo oil filter 213 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
53 Check valve 214 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
54 Accumulator 220 Spool valve / boom cylinder . . . . . . . 7.66
56 Test point / Servo pressure 221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. extend
57 Test point / Regulating press. > Flow 222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. retract
limitation 224 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
59 Test point / Horsepower regulating 227 Restrictor check valve
pressure 233 Distributor block
70 Disrtibuteur block 235 Boom cylinder
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick . . . . 7.46 237 Shut off valve (on machines without pos.
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick . . 7.46 238)
82 Pilot control valve > travel left . . . . . 7.47 238 Load check valves (optional equipment)
83 Pilot control valve > travel right . . . . 7.47 240 Spool valve / stick cylinder . . . . . . . . . 7.66
88P Distributor block / Servo pressure 241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
88T Collector block / Hydraulic tank return 242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
100 Control valves block > 5 way . . . . . . . 7.61 244 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
102 Compensator (flow min.) 255 Stick cylinder
103 Compensator (rest flow) 260 Spool valve / bucket tilt cylinder . . . 7.66
104 Pressure relief valve / LS 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cylinder
105 Primary pressure relief valve . . . . . . . 7.84 ext.
106 Valve / Travel motors displacement control 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cylinder
107 Two way check valve retr.
120 Spool valve / swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 264 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
122 Compensator 267 Restrictor check valve
123 Check valve 275 Bucket tilt cylinder
125 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in 277 Shutt>off valves for grapple
126 Two way check valve 278 Lines to grapple cylinders
127 Restrictor check valve 279 Restrictor check valve (when quick change
128 Two way check valve adapter is mounted)
130 Swing motor 540 Spool valve / grapple, see sub group 16.40
132 Rotary group
133 Suction valve
134 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in Y3 Solenoid valve / servo control
135 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
137 Test point / swing left Y24 Solenoid v. / travel motors displac. control
138 Test point / swing right Y50 Regulation sol. valve / pump horsepower
155 Swing brake (LS)
156 Swing gear Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / flow limit (LS)

6.81.04 Issue : 12 / 2000

 Pr Tr
50
MLS
100/b1 4 57
1 83 S7 M1
T LS
49 28
7 Y51
P MLR
2 A3 59
100/a1 5
155
FAHRWERK RECHTS LR
TRAVELLING RIGHT
100/K
TRANSLATION DROITE
S17 Y7 Y50
100/T TL
100/b5 11
1
A2
81 106/c
T

51 TV
2 T
100/a4 20 S21 Y24
100/a5 12 33 18
3 P
88 P
A1 100/H
M

P
100/b4 19
4
AUSLEGER 1+3 LÖFFEL 2+4 Y3
BOOM 1+3 BUCKET 2+4 21
FLECHE 1+3 GODET 2+4 34 SP
54
6 A
53 52
88 T P1

1
100/a3 10

T 2 70
2
120/b01 7 31
100/b3 9
3
30
P
130/T2
200+201/T GLR FA ST
23 23.6
120/a01 8
4 80 4
STIEL 1+3 5
DREHWERK 2+4 LS 23.5
DIPPER 1+3 SLEW 2+4 29
BALANCIER 1+3 ROTATION 2+4
23.2

1 3
100/a2 14 1
T

7 P
MA
2
44
100/b2 13

FAHRWERK LINKS
82
TRAVELLING LEFT 21.1
TRANSLATION GAUGE S

21
30
M
FE
T
20
100/Ls A

100/P

Hydraulikanlage I Hydraulic system I Circuit hydraulique I

für Bau- und Industrieausrüstung for Earth-moving and Industrial equipement
pour Equipement de terrassement et industriel

R 900 B Li 6001 - 6092 LIEBHERR 6.81-05

R 904 Li 6001 - 6277 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Hydraulic circuit modified since machines

> R 900B / serial number 6093
> R 904 / serial number 6278

Changes in comparison with machines previous to above

mentioned serial numbers

1. Hydraulic oil cooling

Improvement:
Quicker warm up of hydraulic oil to operating temperature.
Modifications :
The previous, general flow of the hydraulic oil via the oil
cooler is now thermostatically regulated (permanent
cooling), for temperature dependent cooling.
This means that when the oil is cold (below 40 ∞ C), the
return oil flow from the user to the oil cooler 6 is shut off.
Above 40∞C, the cooler pretension valve (proportional
solenoid valve) Y53, installed on the outlet K of control valve
block 100 progressively increases the amount of oil flowing
via the oil cooler.
For function of temperature dependent cooling, see page
6.67.06.

2. Swing gear > Torque>Control > Valve 125 is now located

separately on the hydraulic tank 1
(R 900 B from SN 6106
R 904 from SN 6291)
Improvement:
Improved accessibility of valve 125
Modification:
The TC valve 125, which was previously installed in the swing
gear axle 120 on the bottom has been replaced by the
separate TC valve 125, which is installed on the hydraulic
tank 1 along with two way check valve 128 and the necessary
connections.
This improvement made accessibility for adjustment work
significantly easier .

3. Orifice 218
The orifices 218 determining the oil discharge flow of the
travel motors, previously mounted inside the oil motors,
have been displaced into the brake valve, also see subgroup
7. 98.
on R 900 B since serial number 6069
on R 904 since serial number 6400

R 900 B Li / 6093 Æ 6.81.11

R 904 Li / 6278 Æ Issue: 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. D±signation Groupe Pos. D±signation Groupe

1 Hydraulic tank 160 Spool valve/ travel right . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
2 Breather filter 161 Suction valve
3 Shut off valve 162 Suction valve
4 Return filter 164 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
5 Bypass valve / return filter 167 Restrictor check valve
6 Hydraulic oil cooler 180 Spool valve / travel left . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66
7 Check valve > 5.5 bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 181 Suction valve
8 Pretension valve > 7,0 bar . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 182 Suction valve
20 Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.13 184 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
21 Rotary group 187 Restrictor check valve
21.1 Positioning piston 195 Rotary connection > 5 way . . . . . . . . . 7.78
23 Pump regulating valve complete 196 Rotary connection > 1 way . . . . . . . . . 7.76
23.2 Horsepower regulator 200 Travel motor > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
23.5 Load Sensing regulator 201 Travel motor > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.28
23.6 Two way check valve 202 Positioning piston
28 Check valve 203 Control piston / travel motor displacement
29 Throttle 205 Travel brake valve complete
30 Servo oil pump 206 Hydraulic brake valve
41 Test point / high pressure main pump 207 Two>way check valve / brake control
44 Test point / positioning pressure P 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
45 Test point / LS pressure 209 Travel brake
49 Test point / servo oil pressure 210 Travel gear
50 Regulating and servo oil unit 211 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
51 Servo oil pressure relief valve 212 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
52 Servo oil filter 213 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
53 Check valve 214 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
54 Accumulator 220 Spool valve / boom cylinder . . . . . . . 7.66
57 Test point / Regulating press. > Flow 221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. extend
limitation 222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. retract
59 Test point / Horsepower regulating press. 224 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
70 Disrtibuteur block 227 Restrictor check valve
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick . . . . 7.46 233 Distributor block
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick . . 7.46 235 Boom cylinder
82 Pilot control valve > travel left . . . . . 7.47 237 Shut off valve (on machines without pos. 238)
83 Pilot control valve > travel right . . . . 7.47 238 Load check valves (optional equipment)
88P Distributor block / Servo pressure 240 Spool valve / stick cylinder . . . . . . . . . 7.66
88T Collector block / Hydraulic tank return 241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
100 Control valves block > 5 way . . . . . . . 7.61 242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
102 Compensator (flow min.) 244 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
103 Compensator (rest flow) 255 Stick cylinder
104 Pressure relief valve / LS 260 Spool valve / bucket tilt cylinder . . . 7.66
105 Primary pressure relief valve . . . . . . . 7.84 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cylinder ext.
106 Valve / Travel motors displacement control 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cylinder retr.
107 Two way check valve 264 Compensator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.80
109 Throttle check valve 267 Restrictor check valve
120 Spool valve / swing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.66 275 Bucket tilt cylinder
122 Compensator 277 Shutt>off valves for grapple
123 Check valve 278 Lines to grapple cylinders
125 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in 279 Restrictor check valve (when quick change
127 Restrictor check valve adapter is mounted)
128 Two way check valve 540 Spool valve /rotating device, see sub group
130 Swing motor 16.40
132 Rotary group
133 Suction valve
134 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in Y3 Solenoid valve / servo control
135 Pressure relief valve with pressure cut>in Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
137 Test point / swing left Y24 Solenoid v. / travel motors displac. control
138 Test point / swing right Y50 Regulation sol. valve / pump horsepower
155 Swing brake (LS)
156 Swing gear Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / flow limit (LS)
Y53 Regulation solenoid valve / Hyd. oil cooling

6.81.14 Issue : 12 / 2000

 Pr Tr
50
MLS
100/b1 4 57
1 83 S7 M1
T LS
49 28
7 Y51
P MLR
2 A3 59
100/a1 5
155
FAHRWERK RECHTS
LR
TRAVELLING RIGHT
100/K
TRANSLATION DROITE
S17 Y7 Y50
100/T TL
100/b5 11
1
A2
81 106/c
T

51 TV
2 T
100/a4 20 S21 Y24
100/a5 12 33 18
3 P
88 P
A1 100/H
M

P
100/b4 19
4
AUSLEGER 1+3 LÖFFEL 2+4 Y3
BOOM 1+3 BUCKET 2+4 21
FLECHE 1+3 GODET 2+4 34 SP
54
6 A
53 52
88 T P1

1
100/a3 10

T 2 70
2
120/b01 7 31

100/b3 9
3
30
P
130/T2
200+201/T GLR FA ST
23 23.6
120/a01 8
4 80 4
125 / T 5
STIEL 1+3 DREHWERK 2+4 LS
DIPPER 1+3 SLEW 2+4 29 23.5
BALANCIER 1+3 ROTATION 2+4
23.2

1 3
100/a2 14 1
T

7 P
MA
2
44
100/b2 13

FAHRWERK LINKS
82
TRAVELLING LEFT 21.1
TRANSLATION GAUGE S

21
30
M
FE
T
20
100/Ls A

100/P

Hydraulikanlage I Hydraulic system I Circuit hydraulique I

für Bau- und Industrieausrüstung for Earth-moving and Industrial equipement
pour Equipement de terrassement et industriel

R 900 B Li 6093 LIEBHERR 6.81-15

R 904 Li 6278 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Main components of Hydraulic System

1 Hydraulic tank
50 Regulating and servo oil unit

20 / 21 Variable displacement hydraulic pump

30 Servo oil pump

80 Left joystick ( stick and swing)

81 Right joystick (boom and bucket)
82 Pedal (travel left)
83 Pedal (travel right)
86 Pedals for additional equipments (hydraulic hammer,
adjustable boom, ...)
87 Pedal for positioning swing brake (option) serially
mounted on machines with "Industrial
attachment"since serial numbers:
> R 914 / 6676 and
> R 924 / 6282

R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 6.85.01

Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

130 Swing motor

195 Rotary connection for high
pressure
196 Rotary connection 1 way for
servo control pressure
200 Travel motor > left
201 Travel motor > right
235 Boom cylinder
255 Stick cylinder
275 Bucket tilt cylinder
278 Grapple cylinder

Pos. Description Group Pos. Description Group

1 Hydraulic tank 59 Test point / Horsepower regulating
2 Breather filter pressure
3 Shut off valve 71 Two way check valve / Travel left or right
4 Return filter 80 Pilot control valve > left joystick 7.46
5 Bypass valve / Return filter 81 Pilot control valve > right joystick 7.46
6 Hydraulic oil cooler 82 Pilot control valve > travel left 7.47
20 Pump P1 7.10 / 7.12 83 Pilot control valve > travel right 7.47
20.1 Positioning piston P1 88P Distributor block / Servo pressure
21 Pump P2 7.10 / 7.12 88T Collector block / Hydraulic tank return
21.1 Positioning piston P2 100 Control valves support block 7.62
23 Pump regulating valve complete 130 Swing motor 7.23
23.1 Horsepower regulator P1 155 Swing brake 9.20
23.2 Horsepower regulator P2 160 Valve block / Travel right 7.63
23.5 Load Sensing regulator 180 Valve block / Travel left
23.6 Check valve 200 Travel motor > left
28 Check valve 201 Travel motor > right
29 Orifice 220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
30 Servo oil pump 240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
41 Test point / Pump pressure 260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
43 Test point / Positioning pressure P1
44 Test point / Positioning pressure P2 Y3 Solenoid valve / Servo control
45 Test point / LS pressure Y7 Solenoid valve / Swing brake
49 Test point / Servo oil pressure Y24 Solenoid v. / Travel motors displac. control
50 Regulating and servo oil unit Y50 Regulation solenoid valve / Pump
51 Servo oil pressure relief valve horsepower
52 Servo oil filter Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / Flow limit (EV1)
53 Check valve Y78 Solenoid valve > grapple operation
54 Accumulator
57 Test point / Regulating press. > Flow Hydraulic components list is continued
limitation on page 6.85.04

6.85.02 Issue : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. Description Group Pos. Description Group

1 Hydraulic tank 180.5 Suction valve / Travel left
6 Hydraulic oil cooler 180.6 Suction valve / Travel left
20 Pump P1 180.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel left
21 Pump P2 180.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel left
183 Control valve / Travel left
23 Pump regulating valve complete 185 Pressure compensator
41 Test point / Pump pressure 186 Pressure compensator
45 Test point / LS pressure 187 Switching valve
50 Regulating and servo oil unit 188 Switching valve
71 Two way check valve / Travel left or right 195 Rotary connection
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick 196 Rotary connection > variable displacement
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick 200 Travel motor > left
82 Pilot control valve > travel left 201 Travel motor > right
83 Pilot control valve > travel right 202 Positioning piston
203 Control piston / Travel motor displacement
100 Control valves support block 205 Travel brake valve complete
101 LS pressure relief valve 206 Hydraulic brake valve
102 Pump high pressure relief valve 207 Two>way check valve / Brake control
104 Valve / Travel motors displacement control 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
105 Valve / Travelling motion 209 Travel brake
106 Valve / LS switch>off when grapple 211 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
operation 212 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
107 Pressure holding valve / Return port T 213 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
108 Pressure holding valve / Return port K 214 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
110 Valve / Return oil recovery boom + stick 220.1 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder extend
110.1 Switching valve 220.2 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder retract
110.2 Check valve 220.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. boom
110.3 Piston 220.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom
110.4 Piston 220.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom
115 Throttle / Boom cylinder 221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder
116 Throttle / Stick cylinder extend
130 Swing motor 222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder
130.1 Stroke limitation / Swing retract
223 Control valve / Boom cylinder
130.2 Stroke limitation / Swing 225 Pressure compensator
131 High pressure relief valve / Swing right 226 Pressure compensator
132 High pressure relief valve / Swing left 227 Switching valve
133 Spool valve / Swing 228 Switching valve
134 Press. relief valve / Servo pressure swing 235 Boom cylinder
135 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Swing R. 236 Distributor block
136 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Swing L. 240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
137 Press. relief valve / LS pressure swing 240.1 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder extend
138 Torque control valve 240.2 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder retract
240.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. stick
139 Replenishing valve 240.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick
140 Check valve / High pressure 240.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick
141 Check valve / LS pressure 241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
142 Check valve / Return to tank 242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
145 Test point / High pressure swing right 243 Control valve / Stick cylinder
146 Test point / High pressure swing left 245 Pressure compensator
147 Test point / Servo pressure swing 246 Pressure compensator
155 Swing brake 247 Switching valve
156 Swing gear 248 Switching valve
160 Valve block / Travel right 255 Stick cylinder
260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
160.1 Stroke limitation / Travel right 260.1 Stroke limit. / Bucket tilt cylinder extend
160.2 Stroke limitation / Travel right 260.2 Stroke limitation / Bucket tilt cylinder retr.
160.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel 260.7 PR & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt cyl ext
right 260.8 PR & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt cyl retr.
160.4 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. ext.
right 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. retr.
160.5 Suction valve / Travel right 263 Control valve / Bucket tilt cylinder
160.6 Suction valve / Travel right 265 Pressure compensator
160.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel rig. 266 Pressure compensator
267 Switching valve
160.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel rig. 268 Switching valve
163 Control valve / Travel right 275 Bucket tilt cylinder
165 Pressure compensator
166 Pressure compensator Y3 Solenoid valve / Servo control
167 Switching valve Y7 Solenoid valve / Swing brake
168 Switching valve Y24 Solenoid v. / Travel motors displac. control
180 Valve block / Travel left Y50 Regulation solenoid valve / Pump
180.1 Stroke limitation / Travel left horsepower
180.2 Stroke limitation / Travel left Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / Flow limit (EV1)
Y78 Solenoid valve > grapple operation
180.3 Restrictor check val. / Servo press. travel left
180.4 Restrictor check val. / Servo press. travel left

6.85.04 Issue: 12 / 2000

 50/A3
145
Ma
x 80/2 U 130
135

.1 137
141 LS
131
155
LS B4
T
138 140 P .4
P 83/1
A4 160
T y4 165 166
156 LS 83/2 x4 .3
133
132 162
142 T 161 167 168
A3 .1 .2
136 .2
B3
265 266
134 LS T P T LS
163 .8
261 262 .7
Mb y Mst L 50/P1
80/4 1 260 .1
267 268
LSA P3
146 147 .2
100
275 277
.7 263 LS T P T LS
.8
81/4 x3
279
81/2 y3
278 .2 .1

B2 102
A2 .3
255 245 246
.4 110
5 bar

242 241 101 T 1

247 248 107
237/238 .1 .2
240 .8 3 bar K
.7
6
108 Z3
235 243 LS T P T LS
116 Z2
y2 .3 71
80/1 104
233 105 M
238 80/3
x2
P4 50/A2
LSS
Z1 Y78/A
PS
LS
T1
106 23/LS
-xLS 45
209 -xP
41
81/3 x1 .3 21/A2
Br P2
20/A1
202 81/1 P1
206 y1 223 LS T P T LS 115 50/Tv
B T2
.7 .8
207 .1 .2
213
220 227 228 .7 .8
221 222 183 LS T P T LS
203 214 208 .1 .2
225 226
A A1
201 218
L
181
187
188 182
205 B1 .3 .4
X 195 x5
T S 82/2
4 4 y5 186
185
1 1 82/1
0 196 0 1 A5 180
3 3
X T L S 2 2
B5
205
200 218 A
211
203 208
212
207

206 B
Hydraulikanlage II Hydraulic system II Circuit hydraulique II
202
Br für Bauausrüstung for Earth-moving equipement pour Equipement de terrassement
209

R 914 Li 6001 - 6675 LIEBHERR 6.85 -07

R 924 Li 6001 - 6281
12 / 2000
 50/A3
145
Ma
x 80/2 U 130
135

.1 137
141 LS
131
155
LS B4
T
138 140 P .4
P 83/1
A4 160
T y4 165 166
156 LS 83/2 x4 .3
133
132 162
142 T 161 167 168
A3 .1 .2
136 .2
B3
265 266
134 LS T P T LS
163 .8
261 262 .7
Mb y Mst L 50/P1
80/4 1 260 .1
267 268
LSA P3
146 147 .2
100
278 .7 263 LS T P T LS
.8
81/4 x3
81/2
278 y3
.2 .1

A2 102
253
255 B2 .3
245 246
.4 110
5 bar
255
241 242 101 T 1
247 248 107
.1 .2
240 .8 3 bar
.7 K
237/238 6
108 Z3
LS T P T LS
243 116 Z2
235 x2 .3 71
80/1 104
105 M
80/3
y2
233 P4
238 LSS
50/A2
Z1 Y78/A
PS
LS
T1
106 23/LS
-xLS 45
209 -xP
41
81/3 x1 .3 21/A2
Br P2
20/A1
202 81/1 P1
206 y1 223 LS T P T LS 115 50/Tv
B T2
.7 .8
207 .1 .2
213
220 227 228 .7 .8
221 222 183 LS T P T LS
203 214 208 .1 .2
225 226
A A1
201 218 L
181
187
188 182
205 B1 .3 .4
X 195 x5
T S 82/2
4 4 y5 186
185
1 1 82/1
0 196 0 1 A5 180
3 3
X T L S 2 2 B5
205
200 218 A
211
203 208
212
207

206 B
Hydraulikanlage II Hydraulic system II Circuit hydraulique II
202
Br für Industrie - Ausrüstung for Industrial Equipement pour Equipement industriel
209

R 914 Li 6001 - 6675 LIEBHERR 6.85 -08

R 924 Li 6001 - 6281 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Swing motor on machines with

Hydraulic circuit modified since machines construction equipment
> R 914 / serial number 6676
> R 924 / serial number 6282

Changes in comparison with machines previous to above

mentioned serial numbers

1. New swing motor 130

on machines with construction equipment
R 914 from SN 6676
R 924 from SN 6282
on machines with industrial equipment
R 914 from SN xxxx
R 924 from SN xxxx
Swing motor on machines with industrial
Improvement:
attachment
Improved control of swing movement.
Adjustable secondary pressure relief valves 131 / 132.
Modifications :
> modified TC > valve 137
> modified directional valve / control axle 133
> minimum flow regulator 150, installed between LS >
connetion and connection L, see View.
> Together with these changes, the regulating valve 23 of
the double pump 20 has been modified.
> Additional restrictors were installed in the A> B
connection ( only on industrial machines, see also page
7.23>12 )
> In addition, the secondary PR valves 131 / 132 and their
adjustment has been changed, see also adjustment
guideliens and adjustment check lists.
These measures significantly improved the control behavior
of the swing circuit .

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 6.85.11

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

2. Hydraulic oil cooling

Improvement:
Quicker warm up of hydraulic oil to operating temperature.
Modifications :
The previous, general flow of the hydraulic oil via the oil
cooler is now thermostatically regulated (electronically), for
temperature dependent cooling.
This means that when the oil is cold (below 40 ∞ C), the
return oil from the users to the tank does not flow via the oil
cooler 6.
For this purpose, the pressure reducer valve 110.5 with
proportional solenoid Y53 is installed in the regeneration
plate 110.
For function of temperature dependent cooling, see page
6.68.04.

3. Orifice 218
on R 914 since serial number 6910
on R 924 since serial number 6451
The orifices 218 determining the oil discharge flow of the
travel motors, previously mounted inside the oil motors,
have been displaced into the brake valve, also see subgroup
7. 98.

4. Modification of valve 207 inside the travel brake valves

on machines
R 914 since SN 9490
R 924 since SN 9494
The valve 207, used to elaborrate the travel brakes releasing
pressure was before consisting of a single two ways check
valve with a ball.
It has been replaced by a commutation spool which connects
the higher pressure in A or B to the brake control port only
once a minimum pressure has been reached inside the travel
circuit.
See also subgroup 7.98.

5. Improvement of accuracy of servo>control for travel

on R 914 since serial number 6932
on R 924 since serial number 6461
The accuracy of travel servo>control has been improved :
> while adding fine control slots to the distributor spools
for travel control.
> while connecting together the oulets ports of both
servo>control pedals for travel with hydraulic hoses
fitted each with an orifice.

6.85.12 Issue : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. Description Group Pos. Description Group

1 Hydraulic tank 180.4 Restrictor check val. / Servo press. travel left
6 Hydraulic oil cooler 180.5 Suction valve / Travel left
20 Pump P1 180.6 Suction valve / Travel left
21 Pump P2 180.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel left
180.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel left
23 Pump regulating valve complete 183 Control valve / Travel left
41 Test point / Pump pressure 185 Pressure compensator
45 Test point / LS pressure 186 Pressure compensator
50 Regulating and servo oil unit 187 Switching valve
71 Two way check valve / Travel left or right 188 Switching valve
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick 195 Rotary connection
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick 196 Rotary connection > variable displacement
82 Pilot control valve > travel left 200 Travel motor > left
83 Pilot control valve > travel right 201 Travel motor > right
202 Positioning piston
100 Control valves support block 203 Control piston / Travel motor displacement
101 LS pressure relief valve 205 Travel brake valve complete
102 Pump high pressure relief valve 206 Hydraulic brake valve
104 Valve / Travel motors displacement control 207 Two>way check valve / Brake control
105 Valve / Travelling motion 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
106 Valve / LS switch>off when grapple 209 Travel brake
operation 211 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
107 Pressure holding valve / Return port T 212 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
108 Pressure holding valve / Return port K 213 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
214 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
110 Valve / Return oil recovery boom + stick 220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
110.1 Switching valve 220.1 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder extend
110.2 Check valve 220.2 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder retract
110.3 Piston 220.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. boom
110.4 Piston 220.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom
110.5 Pressure reducing valve 220.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom
110.6 Two way check valve 221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. extend
115 Throttle / Boom cylinder 222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. retract
116 Throttle / Stick cylinder 223 Control valve / Boom cylinder
225 Pressure compensator
130 Swing motor 226 Pressure compensator
130.1 Stroke limitation / Swing 227 Switching valve
130.2 Stroke limitation / Swing 228 Switching valve
131 High pressure relief valve / Swing right 235 Boom cylinder
132 High pressure relief valve / Swing left 236 Distributor block
133 Spool valve / Swing 240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
134 Press. relief valve / Servo pressure swing 240.1 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder extend
135 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Swing R. 240.2 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder retract
136 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Swing L. 240.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. stick
240.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick
137 Press. relief valve / LS pressure swing 240.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick
138 Torque control valve 241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
139 Replenishing valve 242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
140 Check valve / High pressure 243 Control valve / Stick cylinder
141 Check valve / LS pressure 245 Pressure compensator
142 Check valve / Return to tank 246 Pressure compensator
145 Test point / High pressure swing right 247 Switching valve
146 Test point / High pressure swing left 248 Switching valve
147 Test point / Servo pressure swing 255 Stick cylinder
150 Regulator for mini flow swing 260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
260.1 Stroke limit. / Bucket tilt cylinder extend
155 Swing brake 260.2 Stroke limitation / Bucket tilt cylinder retr.
156 Swing gear 260.7 PR & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt cyl ext
160 Valve block / Travel right 260.8 PR & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt cyl retr.
160.1 Stroke limitation / Travel right 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. ext.
160.2 Stroke limitation / Travel right 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. retr.
160.3 Restrictor check v. / Servo press. travel right 263 Control valve / Bucket tilt cylinder
160.4 Restrictor check v. / Servo press. travel right 265 Pressure compensator
160.5 Suction valve / Travel right 266 Pressure compensator
160.6 Suction valve / Travel right 267 Switching valve
268 Switching valve
160.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel rig. 275 Bucket tilt cylinder
160.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel rig.
163 Control valve / Travel right Y3 Solenoid valve / Servo control
165 Pressure compensator Y7 Solenoid valve / Swing brake
166 Pressure compensator Y24 Solenoid v. / Travel motors displac. control
167 Switching valve Y50 Regulation solenoid valve / Pump
168 Switching valve horsepower
180 Valve block / Travel left Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / Flow limit (EV1)
180.1 Stroke limitation / Travel left Y53 Regulation solenoid valve / Hyd. oil cooling
Y78 Solenoid valve > grapple operation
180.2 Stroke limitation / Travel left
180.3 Restrictor check val. / Servo press. travel left

6.85.14 Issue: 12 / 2000

 100/T2
160/y4 4
1 83 Pr Tr
T 50 MLS
57
7
P
M1 LS
2 S7
160/x4 5
49
Y51 59
FAHRWERK RECHTS A3 MLR 28
TRAVELLING RIGHT
TRANSLATION DROITE
LR

1 Y7
220/y1 11 S17 Y50 TL
81
A2
100/P3 100/P4 T

2 T TV
260/y3 20
100/K Y24 51
220/x1 12 33 18 S21
3 P
88 P 100/T
A1 M

P
260/x3 19
4 Y3
AUSLEGER 1+3 LÖFFEL 2+4
BOOM 1+3 BUCKET 2+4 21 SP
FLECHE 1+3 GODET 2+4 34 54
100/Z2 29 71 A
53 52
100/Z1 Y78
P1

88 T S19

P1

87
2 70
BR P
155
T GLR2 FA ST GLR1

130/L
200+201/T
23
LS 23.5 23.6

.
240/y2
240/x2 * 10
1 4 5 29
23.2
23.1

T
1 3

.
2
130/x 7 31
240/x2
240/y2 * 9
3 P
30
44 43

S 21.1 20.1
130/y 8
4 80 S2 21 20
STIEL 1+3 DREHWERK 2+4 P2 P1
DIPPER 1+3
BALANCIER 1+3
SLEW 2+4
ROTATION 2+4
30 M
FE
180/y5 14
1 T

T
A2 A1
7 100/Z3
P
2 100/P2
180/x5 13 100/P1
82 100/LS
FAHRWERK LINKS
TRAVELLING LEFT
TRANSLATION GAUGE
Hydraulikanlage I Hydraulic system I Circuit hydraulique I
für Bau- und Industrieausrüstung for Earth-moving and Industrial equipement

. * bei Bauausrüstung on Earth-moving equipement

bei Industrieausrüstung on Industrial equipement
pour Equipement de terrassement
pour Equipement industriel
pour Equipement de terrassement et industriel

R 914 Litronic 6676 - 6851 LIEBHERR 6.85 -15

R 924 Litronic 6282 - 6399
12 / 2000
 87/BR
145
Ma
x 80/2 U 130
135 (c)
137
.1
141 LS
131
155
LS 150
T
138 140 P B4
P
.4
156
T
LS 83/1
A4 160
y4 165 166
133 83/2 .3
132 x4
142 T 162
161 167 168
136 .2 A3 .1 .2
134 B3
265 266
LS T P T LS
163 .8
Mb y Mst L 261 .7
80/4 1 262
146 50/P1
147 260 .1
267 268
LSA P3
.2
100
275 277
.7 263 LS T P T LS
.8
81/4 x3
279 110
81/2
y3
278
.1
B2 102 .2
.3
A2
245 246 .6
255
5 bar .4 .5
242 241 101 107
247 248 Y53 U16
237/238 .1 .2 T
240 .8 3 bar 1
.7 K
6
108 Z3 (a)
235 243 LS T P T LS 116 Z2
y2 .3 71
80/1 104
233 105 M
238 80/3 x2
P4 50/A2
LSS Z1
PS Y78/A
LS
T1 23/LS
106 45
-xLS
209 -xP
41
81/3 x1 .3 21/A2
Br P2
20/A1
202 81/1 P1
206 y1 223 LS T P T LS 115 50/Tv
B T2
.7 .8
207 .1 .2
213
220 227 228 .7 .8
221 222 183 LS T P T LS
203 214 208 .1 .2
225 226
A A1
201 218
L
181
187
188 182
205 B1 .3 .4
X 195 x5
T S 82/2
4 4 y5 186
185
1 1 82/1
0 196 0 1 A5 180
3 3
X T L S 2 2 B5
205
200 218 A
211
203 208
212
207
Hydraulikanlage II Hydraulic system II Circuit hydraulique II
206 B
202
für Bauausrüstung for Earth-moving equipement pour Equipement de terrassement
Br

209
R 914 Litronic 6676 - 6851 LIEBHERR 6.85 -17
R 924 Litronic 6282 - 6399
12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. Description Group Pos. Description Group

1 Hydraulic tank 110 Spool > Summation boom cylinder
2 Breather filter 111 Spool > Summation stick cylinder
3 Shut off valve 112 Spool > Control of travel motors
4 Return filter diplacement
5 Bypass valve / Return filter 113 Spool > Parallel control travel motors
6 Oil cooler 115 Distributor block
8 Preload check valve 120 Primary pres. relief valve P2
10 Swing pump 121 Primary pres. relief valve P1
10.3 High pressure relief valve / swing left 125 Sec.pres. relief valve > boom cyl. A1
10.4 High pressure relief valve / swing right 126 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. B1
10.7 Replenishing pressure relief valve 127 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket cyl. A2
11 Replenishing pump 128 Sec. pres. relief valve> bucket cyl. B2
14 Replenishing oil filter 129 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
20 Pump P1 130 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
20.1 Positioning piston P1 131 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
21 Pump P2 132 Sec .pres. relief valve > travel right
21.1 Positioning piston P2 133 Sec. pres. rel. v. > stick or crowd cyl. A6
23 Regulating valve P1 134 Sec. pres. rel. v. > stick or crowd cyl. B6
24 Regulating valve P2 135 Sec. pres. rel. v. > special equipments A7
30 Servo pump 136 Sec. pres. rel. v. > special equipments B7
40 Test point P2 141 Suction valve
41 Test point P1 142 Suction valve
43 Test point / positioning pressure P2 143 Suction valve
44 Test point / positioning pressure P1 144 Suction valve
45 Test point / Replenishing pressure 150 Check valve (Load holding valve)
46 Test point / swing left 151 Check valve (Load holding valve)
47 Test point / swing right 152 Check valve (Load holding valve)
49 Test point / servo pressure 153 Check valve (Load holding valve)
50 Servo oil unit 162 Restrictor check valve
51 Pressure relief valve 190 Swing motor
52 Pressure filter 191 Two way check valve / discharge
53 Check valve 192 Discharge pressure flow regulator
54 Accumulator 195 Swing brake
58 Commutation valve / Qmin control 200 Travel motor > left
59 Test point / Horsepower regulation 201 Travel motor > right
pressure 202 Positioning piston
60 Pumps splitterbox 203 Control piston / travel motor displacement
71 Two way check valve / travel left or right 205 Travel brake valve complete
72 Two way check valve / attachments 206 Hydraulic brake valve
movements 207 Two>way check valve / brake control
73 Two way check valve / travel or 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
attachments 209 Travel brake
75 Two way check valve / stick movements 210 Boom cylinder
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick 211 Distributor block
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick 220 Stick cylinder
82 Pilot control valve > travel left 222 Restrictor check valve
83 Pilot control valve > travel right 230 Bucket cylinder
88P Distributor block / Servo pressure 232 Restrictor check valve
88T Collector block / Hydraulic tank return 250 Rotary connection
91 Restrictor check valve / summation stick 251 Rotary connection > travel brakes
92 Restrictor check valve / summation boom
100 Compact control valve block 8 ways
101 Spool valve > boom cylinder Y3 Solenoid valve / servo control
102 Spool valve > bucket tilt cylinder Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
103 Spool valve > travel motor left Y24 Solenoid v. / travel motors displacement
105 Spool valve > travel motor right control
107 Spool valve> stick or crowd cylinder Y50 Regul. solenoid valve / pump horsepower
108 Spool valve> reserve for special equipments Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / Flow limit (EV1)

6.87.04 Issue: 12 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic System

Pos. Description Group Pos. Description Group

1 Hydraulic tank 105 Spool valve > travel motor right
2 Breather filter 107 Spool valve> stick or crowd cylinder
3 Shut off valve 108 Spool valve> reserve for special equipments
4 Return filter 110 Spool > Summation boom cylinder
5 Bypass valve / Return filter 111 Spool > Summation stick cylinder
6 Oil cooler 112 Spool > Control of travel motors diplacement
8 Preload check valve 113 Spool > Parallel control travel motors
10 Swing pump 115 Distributor block
10.3High pressure relief valve / swing left 120 Primary pres. relief valve P2
10.4High pressure relief valve / swing right 121 Primary pres. relief valve P1
10.7Replenishing pressure relief valve 125 Sec.pres. relief valve > boom cyl. A1
11 Replenishing pump 126 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cyl. B1
14 Replenishing oil filter 127 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket cyl. A2
20 Pump P1 128 Sec. pres. relief valve> bucket cyl. B2
20.1Positioning piston P1 129 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
21 Pump P2 130 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel left
21.1Positioning piston P2 131 Sec. pres. relief valve > travel right
23 Regulating valve P1 132 Sec .pres. relief valve > travel right
24 Regulating valve P2 133 Sec. pres. rel. v. > stick or crowd cyl. A6
30 Servo pump 134 Sec. pres. rel. v. > stick or crowd cyl. B6
35(i)
Hydraulic pump / cooler fan drive 135 Sec. pres. rel. v. > special equipments A7
36(i)
Oil motor / cooler fan drive 136 Sec. pres. rel. v. > special equipments B7
37(i)
Pressure cut>off 141 Suction valve
38(i)
Pressure relief valve / cooler fan drive 142 Suction valve
39(i)
Suction valve 143 Suction valve
40 Test point P2 144 Suction valve
41 Test point P1 150 Check valve (Load holding valve)
43 Test point / positioning pressure P2 151 Check valve (Load holding valve)
44 Test point / positioning pressure P1 152 Check valve (Load holding valve)
45 Test point / Replenishing pressure 153 Check valve (Load holding valve)
46 Test point / swing left 162 Restrictor check valve
47 Test point / swing right 190 Swing motor
49 Test point / servo pressure 191 Two way check valve / discharge
50 Servo oil unit 192 Discharge pressure flow regulator
51 Pressure relief valve 195 Swing brake
52 Pressure filter 200 Travel motor > left
53 Check valve 201 Travel motor > right
54 Accumulator 202 Positioning piston
58 Commutation valve / Qmin control 203 Control piston / travel motor displacement
59 Test point / Horsepower regulation pressure 205 Travel brake valve complete
60 Pumps splitterbox 206 Hydraulic brake valve
61* Pump / splitterbox oil 207 Two>way check valve / brake control
62* Cooler / splitterbox oil 208 Brake control pressure reducing valve
63* Pressure holding valve / splitterbox oil 209 Travel brake
64* Pressure relief valve / splitterbox oil 210 Boom cylinder
71 Two way check valve / travel left or right 211 Distributor block
72 Two way check valve / attachments 220 Stick cylinder
movements 222 Restrictor check valve
73 Two way check valve / travel or attachments 230 Bucket cylinder
75 Two way check valve / stick movements 232 Restrictor check valve
80 Pilot control valve > left joystick 250 Rotary connection
81 Pilot control valve > right joystick 251 Rotary connection > travel brakes
82 Pilot control valve > travel left
83 Pilot control valve > travel right
88P Distributor block / Servo pressure Y3 Solenoid valve / servo control
88T Collector block / Hydraulic tank return Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
91 Restrictor check valve / summation stick Y24 Solenoid v. / travel motors displacement
92 Restrictor check valve / summation boom control
100 Compact control valve block 8 ways Y50 Regul. solenoid valve / pump horsepower
101 Spool valve > boom cylinder Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / Flow limit (EV1)
102 Spool valve > bucket tilt cylinder Y347(i) E.v. de r±gul. / r±gime ventilateur de refr.
103 Spool valve > travel motor left
* Only R 944 since, see previous pages.
(i) R 934 & 944 since SN ..., see previous pages.

6.87.14 Issue: 12 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

7.05. Hydraulic Pump Assembly / Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B & 904 / 6001 Æ
7.06. Hydraulic Pump Assembly / Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 & 924 / 6001 Æ
7.08. Hydraulic Pump Assembly / Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.10. Variable Displacement Pump LPVD / Construction and Function . . . . . . R 914 & R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.11. Pump LPVD with Regulating valve LR>SD>DA/
Pump regulation and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.12. Pump LPVD with Regulating valve LR>LS/
Pump regulation and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 & 924 / 6001 Æ
7.13. Variable Displacement Pump LPV / Construction and Function . . . . A / R 900 B & 904 / 6001 Æ
7.14. Pump LPV with Regulating valve LR>SD/
Pump regulation and Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B & 904 / 6001 Æ
7.17. Variable displacement pump A 10 VO > ED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 B / 9995 Æ
R 944 B / 9872 Æ
7.18. Swing Pump A 4 V > DWD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5278 Æ
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5265 Æ
7.19. Swing Pump A 4 V > TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.20. Hydraulic Motors >Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.21. Hydraulic fixed Displacement Motor FMF (Liebherr) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B & R 904 / 6001 Æ
7.23.01 Hydraulic fixed Displacement Motor HMF (Linde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 & R 924 / 6001 Æ
7.23.11 Hydraulic fixed Displacement Motor HMF (Linde) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 / 6676 Æ
R 924 / 6282 Æ
7.25. Hydraulic fixed Displacement Motor FMF with discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.28. Hydraulic variable Displacement Motor FMV (for Travel) . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B/ R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.30. Hydraulic Cylinder / Construction, Function, Repair . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.31. Hydraulic Cylinder / Extension and Retraction times . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B/ > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.34. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B / 6001 Æ
7.35. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 904 / 6001 Æ
7.36. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 / 6001 Æ
7.37. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 924 / 6001 Æ
7.38. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ
7.39. Hydraulic Cylinder > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.42. Regulating and Servo oil Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
7.43. Regulating and Servo oil Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.46. Servo Control with Joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.47. Servo Control with Foot Pedal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B/ R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.48. 2>way Servo Control for added hydraulic Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.00.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue: 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

7.61. Function of the Load Sensing Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 > 924 / 6001 Æ
7.62. Support block for Load Sensing Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 > 924 / 6001 Æ
7.63. Load Sensing Control Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 > 924 / 6001 Æ
7.64. Control Valves Blocks / Leak Oil Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B/ R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.65. Control Valves Blocks / Charts and Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B/ R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.66. Control Valve Block / Technical Data > Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B & R 904 / 6001 Æ
7.68. Control Valve Block / Technical Data > Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 & R 924 / 6001 Æ

7.72. 7>way Control Valve Block NW 22 / Technical Data > Description . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.73. 1 and 2>way Control Valve BlockNW 22 for add. Equipment . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
7.75. 1 > way Rotary Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & 944 / 5001 Æ
7.77. 5 > way Rotary Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & 944 / 5001 Æ
7.98. Brake Valve for Hydraulic Travel Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B> 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & 944 / 5001 Æ

7.00.02 Issue : 11 / 2001

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

20 Hydraulic pump complete

21.1 Positioning piston
23 Regulating valve complete
23.2 Horsepower control valve
23.5 Load Sensing control valve
30 Servo oil pump
44 Test fitting / positioning pressure

A / R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 7.05.01

Issue: 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

1 Hydraulic tank
20 Hydraulic pump complete
21.1 Positioning piston
23 Regulating valve complete
23.2 Horsepower control valve
23.5 Load Sensing control valve
30 Servo oil pump
44 Test fitting / positioning pressure
50 Servo oil unit
100 Control valve block

7.05.02 Issue: 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

TECHNICAL DATA

Machine model A / R 900 B A 904 R 904

Serial No 6001 6001 6001

Main pumps Number / Type 1 / LPV 130 1 / LPV 150 1 / LPV 150
Nominal RPM * min>1 2000 = =
Direction of rotation (seeing engine flywheel side) counterclockwise = =
Displacement cm3 130 150 150
Maxi flow * l.min>1 250 290 290
Mini flow * l.min>1 40 = =
Main pumps input * kW 82 (ÆSN>R>9185) 97 83 (ÆSN8708)
85 (SN>R>9186Æ) 90 (SN8709Æ)
Main pumps description, see sub group no 7.13 = =

Servo oil pump Type Gear pump = =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2000 = =
Displacement cm3 20 = =
Flow * l.min>1 36 = =

* This data are valid when engine runs at nominal speed

A / R 900 B > 904 Li / 6001 Æ 7.05.03

Issue: 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

20 Pump P1
21 Pump P2
23 Regulating valve complete
23.1 Horsepower control valve P1
23.2 Horsepower control valve P2
23.5 Load Sensing control valve
30 Servo oil pump
44 Test point / positioning pressure P1
45 Test point / positioning pressure P2

A/R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 7.06.01

A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

1 Hydraulic tank 23.2 Horsepower regulator valve P2

20 Pump P1 23.5 Load Sensing regulator valve
20.1 Positioning piston P1 23.6 Shuttle valve
21 Pump P2 30 Servo oil pump
21.1 Positioning piston P2 43 Test point / positioning pressure P1
23 Regulating valve complete 44 Test point / positioning pressure P2
23.1 Horsepower regulator valve P1

7.06.02 Issue: 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

TECHNICAL DATA
Machine model R 914 A 914 A / R 924
Serial No 6001 6001 6001

Main pumps Number / Type 1 / LPVD 100 = 1 / LPVD 107

Nominal RPM * min>1 2000 = =

Direction of rotation (seeing engine flywheel side) counterclockwise = =

Displacement cm3 limited to 2 ¥ 100 = 2 ¥ 107

Maxi flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 190 = 2 ¥ 214

Mini flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 25 = =

Main pumps input * kW 97 (ÆSN 8712) 109 109

kW 103 (SN 8713Æ)

Main pumps description, see sub group no 7.10 / 7.12 = =

Servo oil pump Type Gear pump = =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2000 = =

Displacement cm3 20 = =

Flow * l.min>1 36 = =

* This data are valid when engine runs at nominal speed

A/R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 7.06.03

A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

LPVD 107
Pnom 2000 min>1 Pnom (Rated power hyperbola)
P (bar) A/R 924
Pmax (=PLSmax + EPo(LS))
400

360
Power max
PLR (bar)
320
20
280

240 15

200
10
160

120 5
16
80
0
Power min
40
Q (l/min)

a
0

a
(per unit)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 210

00 >10
10 >20
20 >30
30 >40
40 >50
50 >60
60 >70
70 >80
80 >90
90 >100
100
Q /Qn*
(%)
0 Pst (bar)
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa

5 20

¡ 10 10 16

¬ 15 12

20 20 8
* Qn is the rated flow
(=flow at EPo(LS) ) for the
concerned control valve 25 4

30 30EPo(LS) 0

EP(LS)
EP(LS)=EPo(LS) >1,25Pst
Curves EP(LS)=f (Q /Qn)
>¡/ EPo(LS)= 25 bar valid for A 924 from serial number 6001
R 924 from serial number 6001
>¬/ EPo(LS)= 30 bar valid for A 924 from serial number 6086
R 924 from serial number 6065

A/R 914 Li / 6001 Æ 7.06.05

A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000
TECHNICAL DATA
Machine model R 934 LITRONIC R 944 LITRONIC
Serial No 5001 5001

Hydraulic pump Assembly

See hydraulic diagram, page no 7. 08. 04 =

Splitterbox Type PVG 350 B 381 =

Drawing no. 78 381 0000 00 ...
Direction of rotation (seeing engine flywheel side) counterclockwise =
Nominal RPM of drive shaft min>1 2000 =
Reduction ratio, splitterbox to main pumps P1 & P2 1.024 =
Reduction ratio, splitterbox to swing pump .756 =
Splitterbox description, see sub group no 5.20 =

Main pumps Number / Type 1 / LPVD 125 1 / LPVD 140

(red. to 133)
Nominal RPM * min>1 1953 =
Direction of rotation (seeing splitterbox pump side) clockwise =
Displacement cm3 2¥125 limited to 2 ¥ 133
Max flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 230 2¥252
Min flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 31 2¥13
Main pumps input * kW 132 164
Main pumps description, see sub group no 7.10 / 7.11 =

Swing pump Type A4V 56 =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2645 =
Direction of rotation (seeing splitterbox pump side) clockwise =
Displacement cm3 limited to 47 56
Max flow * l.min>1 120 144
Swing pump input * kW 72 86
Swing pump description, see sub group no 7.19 =

Servo oil pump Type Gear pump =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2645 =
Displacement cm3 11 =
Flow * l.min>1 26 =

* This data are valid when engine runs at nominal speed

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
R 934 / R 944
Ab
From
Depuis
5001
Datum Hydraulic Pumps
Edition 10.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.08.03
7.08.04
Pos. Description Pos. Description
1 Hydraulic tank 24 Regulating valve P2
4 Return filter 24.2 Horsepower control valve
10 Swing pump 24.3 Pressure cut off valve
10.2 Positioning piston 30 Servo oil pump
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left 43 Test point > positioning pressure P2
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right 44 Test point > positioning pressure P1
10.5 Check valve 45 Test point > replenishing pressure
10.6 Check valve 46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure 47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
11 Replenishing pump 48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or left
14 Replenishing oil filter 50 Servo oil unit
14.1 Bypass valve > replenishing oil filter 60 Splitterbox
15 Torque control valve 80 Pilot control valve > left joystick
15.1 Regulator valve > swing left 100 Compact control valve block 8 ways
15.2 Regulator valve > swing right 190 Swing motor
15.3 Relief valve > servo pressure > swing
15.4 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing
15.5 Shuttle valve > high pressure > swing
16 Brake valve, complete
16.1 Control valve
16.2 Brake piston X1 Positioning pressure port > right
20 Pump P1 X2 Positioning pressure port > left
20.1 Positioning piston P1 X3 Positioning piston port > right
21 Pump P2 X4 Positioning piston port > left
21.1 Positioning piston P2 X5 High pressure port > swing right
23 Regulating valve P1 X6 High pressure port > swing left
23.2 Horsepower control valve Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right
23.3 Pressure cut off valve Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Hydraulic Diagram From 5001
Datum Depuis
Edition
07.98 Pump Assembly Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.08.05
 LPVD 125 Pnom (Rated power hyperbola)
1953 min>1
Pda (Adjustment of pressure cut>off valves)
P (bar) Pprim (Adjustment of Primary relief valves)

400

360

320
Power max
PLR (bar)
280

240 20

200 15

160
10

120
5
80
Power min 0
40
Q (l/min)
0 (per unit)

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

PSD (bar)
10 10
8,6
8

4 4,15 4

2
1,4
0 0

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240

7.08.06
 LPVD 140 Pnom (Rated power hyperbola)
1953 min>1
Pda (Adjustment of pressure cut>off valves)
P (bar) Pprim (Adjustment of Primary relief valves)

400

360

320
Power max PLR (bar)
280

240 20

200 15

160
10
120
5
80

Power min 0
40
Q (l/min)
0 (per unit)
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280
PSD (bar)
10 10
9,2
8
6
4,9
4 4

2
1,4
0 0

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type

Hydraulic pumps Ab
From
Datum Depuis
Edition 11.98 Regulation curves Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.08.07
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

TECHNICAL DATA
Machine model R 934 LITRONIC R 944 LITRONIC
Serial No 5278 5265

Hydraulic pump Assembly

See hydraulic diagram, page no 7. 08. 14 =

Splitterbox Type PVG 350 B 381 =

Drawing no. 78 381 0000 00 ...
Direction of rotation (seeing engine flywheel side) counterclockwise =
Nominal RPM of drive shaft min>1 2000 =
Reduction ratio, splitterbox to main pumps P1 & P2 1.024 =
Reduction ratio, splitterbox to swing pump .756 =
Splitterbox description, see sub group no 5.20 =

Main pumps Number / Type 1 / LPVD 125 1 / LPVD 140

(red. to 133)
Nominal RPM * min>1 1953 =
Direction of rotation (seeing splitterbox pump side) clockwise =
Displacement cm3 2¥125 limited to 2 ¥ 133
Max flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 230 2¥252
Min flow * l.min>1 2 ¥ 31 2¥13
Main pumps input * kW 132 164
Main pumps description, see sub group no 7.10 / 7.11 =

Swing pump Type A4V 56 DWD =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2645 =
Direction of rotation (seeing splitterbox pump side) clockwise =
Displacement cm3 (56) limited to 47 56
Max flow * l.min>1 120 144
Swing pump input * kW 72 86
Swing pump description, see sub group no 7.18 =

Servo oil pump Type Gear pump =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2645 =
Displacement cm3 11 =
Flow * l.min>1 26 =

Cooler fan driving pump (i) Type A10VO ED 28 =

Nominal RPM * min>1 2467 =
Displacement cm3 28 =
Flow * l.min>1 66 =

* This data are valid when engine runs at nominal speed

(i) Mounted since, see modification mark (i) in subgroup 01.01.

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.08.13

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

7.08.14 Issue: 02 / 2002

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

Pos. Description Pos. Description

1 Hydraulic tank 30 Servo oil pump

4 Return filter
32* Pilote piston
10 Swing pump 35* Pump for cooler fan drive
10.2 Positioning piston 35.1* Pump positioning piston
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left 35.2* Pump return piston
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right 36* Hydraulic motor for cooler fan drive
10.5 Check valve 37* Flow regulator
10.6 Check valve
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure 43 Test point > positioning pressure P2
10.8 Pressure cut off valve 44 Test point > positioning pressure P1
11 Replenishing pump 45 Test point > replenishing pressure
14 Replenishing oil filter 46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
14.1 Bypass valve > replenishing oil filter 47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
15 Torque control valve 48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or left
15.1 Regulator valve > swing right 50 Servo oil unit
15.2 Regulator valve > swing left 60 Splitterbox
15.4 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing 80 Pilot control valve > left joystick
15.7 Bleeder and damper valve / swing left 100 Compact control valve block 8 ways
15.8 Bleeder and damper valve / swing right 190 Swing motor

20 Pump P1
20.1 Positioning piston P1 X1 Positioning pressure port > swing right
21 Pump P2 X2 Positioning pressure port > swing left
21.1 Positioning piston P2 Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right
23 Regulating valve P1 Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left
23.2 Horsepower control valve
23.3 Pressure cut off valve
24 Regulating valve P2
24.2 Horsepower control valve * Mounted since, see modification mark (i) in
24.3 Pressure cut off valve subgroup 01.01.

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.08.15

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Issue: 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Pumps Assembly

Regulation curves of main pumps

For LPVD 125 (R 934 & R934 B)
and LPVD 140 (R 944 & R944 B)
see page no. 7.08.06 and 7.08.07

7.08.16 Issue: 02 / 2002

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

1. Construction of Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

The variable displacement pump LPVD comprises two units arranged in tandem and designed as axial
piston swash plate pumps.
The pump is consisting of seven main parts:
> the central housing 3.0 with suction and pressure ports also contains the poisitioning pistons 20.1 and
21.1 for the both pump units.
> the both pump gears complete 20 and 21.
> the both pump regulators 23 and 24, which are mounted to the connector housing 3.0. (On the Load
Sensing double pumps, the both units are regulated via a single regulator 23).
> the mounting flange 13.
> the closing flange 11, which may, depending on the machine type, integrate an additional gear pump
(for servo control oil).
The pumps gears (shaft, cylinder, pistons) are driven by the Diesel engine via a vibration damper.
The variable displacement pumps are supplied with hydraulic oil via the suction port "S" in the central
housing 3.0. It delivers hydraulic oil into the working circuits via connections "A1 and A2".
The leak oil from the pumps flows via the leak oil connection "T1, T2 or T3" to the tank.
The regulators 23/24 control the swivel angle, and thus the oil delivery of the pump units via the
positioning pistons 20.1/21.1 and depending on the pump high pressure, and also on external control
pressures which are connected to the regulator and which are different according to the regulation type.

Double pump "LPVD" with two

regulating valves "LR > SD > DA"
mounted on machines A / 934
and R 944

Fig. 1

Fig. 2

R 914 & 924 6001Æ 07.10.01

R 934 & 944 5001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

The double pump LPVD for "Load Sensing" hydraulic circuit has been fitted with only one regulator. This
regulator allows to shift the charachteristic curve of the pump units (via control pressure port GLR) and
also to limit the total oil flow of the both pumps.
(See fig. 3 and 4 and subgroup 7.12).
On the double pump for "not Load Sensing hydraulic circuit" each pump unit is fitted with its regulator
LR>SD>DA.
This permits to control independently on each pump:
> the shifting of the pump power curve, via the pressure at connection GLR
> the limitation of the maximum pump flow via connection SD
> the oversteering of the pressure cut>off via connection Pst
(See fig. 1 and 2 and subgroup 7.11)

Double pump "LPVD" with one

regulating valve "LR > SD"
mounted on machines
A / 914 and A / R 924

Fig. 3

Fig. 4

07.10.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

2. Function of Pump (see section view on page no. 7.10.04)

2.1 Function of the pump power gear

The input shaft 1.10, with bearing in the mounting flange 13 and in the connector housing 11,
drives the cylinder 1.11. Nine pistons 1.9 are mounted parallel around the driving shaft in the
cylinder. The piston bottoms are ball shaped and set in the slide shoes 1.16. They are held by return
plate 1.14 and return ball 1.13 on the swiveling, but not rotating swivel crossbar 1.2 with thrust
washer 1.15.
The slide shoes 1.16, mounted hydrostatically on the thrust washer 1.15 (via bore holes in the
pistons and slide shoes) reduce the large sliding surface between the slide shoes and the thrust
washer to a minimum.
When not under pressure, the cylinder 1.11 is pressed against the control lens 1.12 by springs 1.17,
installed in the return ball 1.13. As pressure increases, cylinder and control lens are so well balanced
by hydraulic forces, that even at high loads an oil film is maintained on the surfaces of the control
lens, while at the same time leak oil is kept to a minimum. Part of the leak oil is used to lubricate all
moving parts and then flows externally to the tank.
If the cylinder 1.11 turn, the piston 1.9 move in a double stroke from the lower to the upper limit
and then reverse. The stroke is carried out in relations to the swivel angle of the swivel crossbar 1.2
and is responsible for the flow volume.
The axial piston unit moves the oil via kidney shaped control inlets in the control lens 1.12. Four of
the moving pistons draw oil through the kidney shaped oil inlets on the suction side of the pump.
The other four pistons displace the oil which is supplied via the kidney shaped oil outlets to the
pressure side of the pump, moving oil via connection A into the hydraulic system. A ninth piston is
moving either at the upper or at the lower limit, at dead center, i.e. just changing directions.

2.2 Pump displacement

The positioning piston 20.1, connected with the swivel crossbar 1.2, displaces the pump from
maximum to minimum swivel angle. The regulating piston 23.1.7 controls the displacement of the
positioning piston 20.1 while connecting its large surface either with high pressure of the pump, or
with tank pressure (the smaller surface of the piston is at pump high pressure in permanence).
According to the regulation type, the control procedure of the pump swivel angle by the
positioning piston is different.
For exact description, refer to the corresponding subgroup "LPVD pump regulation".

R 914 & 924 6001Æ 07.10.03

R 934 & 944 5001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

07.10.04 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

1.0Pump gear P1 complete (20*) 3.13 Spring ring 13.8 Shim

1.1 Pump housing 3.15 Connector sleeve 13.9 Shim
1.2 Crossbar 3.18 Guide bushing 13.10 Allen head screw
1.3 Roller bearing 3.21 Plug 13.11 Spring ring
1.4 Flange 3.23 O>Ring
1.9 Piston with slide shoe 3.24 O>Ring 20.1 Control piston *
1.10 Driving shaft 3.32 Roller bearing 20.10 O>Ring
1.11 Cylinder 3.33 Roller bearing 20.11 Turcon>Glyd>Ring
1.12 Control lens 20.12 Snap ring
1.18 Pin 8.0 Gear pump (1) ( 30 * ) 20.13 Pin
1.46 Allen head screw 8.1 Pump Housing 20.14 Connector bracket
8.3 Allen head screw 20.21 Closing element
2.0 Pump gear P2 complete 8.4 Rotor 20.22 O>Ring
(21*) 8.5 Stator 20.23 Adjustment screw (Qmin)
2.1 Pump housing 8.6 Bolt 20.24 Lock nut
2.2 Crossbar 8.10 O>Ring
2.9 Piston with slide shoe 23 Regulating valve complete*
2.10 Driving shaft 11 Closing flange cpl. 23.1 Horsepower control / P1 *
2.11 Cylinder 11.3 Roller bearing 1.1 Adjustment screw
2.12 Control lens 11.6 Snap ring 1.2 Lock nut
2.13 Return ball 11.7 Snap ring 1.4 Return rod
2.14 Return plate 11.8 Shim 1.5 Return piston
2.15 Slide plate 11.9 Shim 1.6 Lever
2.16 Slide shoe 1.7 Piston / Horsepower
2.17 Spring 13 Mounting flange control valve
2.19 Plug 13.1 Flange 1.11 Regulation spring
2.43 Pin 13.2 End ring 1.12 Regulation spring
13.3 Roller bearing 1.13 Return spring
3.0 Central housing, complete 13.4 Shaft seal ring 1.20 Fitting screw
3.10 Housing 13.5 O>ring 43 Test point / pressure "P1" *
3.11 Threaded pin 13.6 Snap ring 44 Test point / pressure "P2" *
3.12 Hex. head nut 13.7 Snap ring

* Positions of the hydraulic schematic

(1) Only for pumps with flanged gear pump (up to A/R 924)

R 914 & 924 6001Æ 07.10.05

R 934 & 944 5001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>SD>DA

1 Pump regulation
1.1 Power regulating valves with piston 23.2.7
Via internal drillings in the pump central housing 3.0 as well in the housing of regulator 23, the
system pressure of the pump is applied to the piston rod side of the positioning piston 20.1 (small
surface "s").
The piston bottom side (larger surface "S") is connected via the orifice 2.18 and the middle groove
in the regulation piston 2.7 to the pump high pressure, when the piston 2.7 is moved to the right
(high pressure applies via the open control edge "S2").
When the pump pressure is low, the spring 2.13 balances the pretension of the spring 2.11 and
shifts the piston 2.7 to the right so the control edge "S2" opens.
Because of the greater effective area "S" (in comparison "s"), the positioning piston 20.1 is pushed
so that the rotary group is at a maximum angle (max flow).

The pump high pressure is also applied between the pistons 2.31 and 2.32 via bores in the housings
23 and 2.35 and in the sleeve 2.30.
As a result a force will be applied via the rod 2.33 to the regulation springs 2.11 / 2.12 and the
piston 2.7. This force is depending on the section of the piston 2.32 and proportional to the pump
high pressure.

R 934 & R 944 SN 5001Æ 07.11.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Once this force exceeds the set preload value of springs 2.11 and 2.13, the piston 2.7 moves to the left,
the control edge "S2" closes and control edge "S1" slowly opens, which reduces the pressure at the
piston bottom side (=positioning pressure).
Due to the resulting force, the positioning piston 20.1 is moved to the left (away from Qmax), thereby
increasing, via the link 2.6, the pretension of the regulating spring 2.11.
The positioning piston 20.1 is displaced so to reduce the pump angle until a new equilibrium between
the position of the piston 20.1 and the pump high pressure is established.
When the positioning piston 20.1 is moved in the direction of the minimal flow, the return piston 2.5
first comprimes the large regulating spring 2.11 and after further travel (pressure increase) also the small
regulator spring 2.12 is compressed.
Within the whole regulating range, to each value of the pump high pressure corresponds one position of
the positioning piston 20.1 so that the regulating piston 2.7 is in balanced condition (control edges "S1"
and "S2" closed) under the pretension of the regulating springs 2.11 / 2.12, the spring 2.13 and the force
transmitted by the rod 2.33.
The regulating springs 2.11 and 2.12 define the power curve of the pump. These springs are calculated so
to determine a power curve approching as exactly as possible the curve for constant power which is an
hyperbola.
The pump angle for which the smaller spring 2.12 becomes effective determines the point where the
gradient of the pump characteristics changes.
The minimum and maximum oil flow of the pump (Qmin and Qmax) are given by the extreme positions
of the positioning piston and are not adjustable.

Increase of the cut off pressure

(from Pda to pda/1) when servo
pressure applied to port Pst

Power
regulation
controlled
by p(GLR),
via Y50

Flow limitation
controlled by
p(SD), via Y51/Y52

07.11.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>SD>DA

1.2 Power reduction stage

This stage makes it possible to change hydraulically the regulation characteristics (pump power
curve) during working.
When servo pressure is applied to chamber "B" (see fig. on page 7.11.01) via the port "GLR" of the
regulator 23, a thrust is applied to piston 2.31. The force transmitted via the rod 2.33 to the
regulating springs is then diminushed by the value of this thrust, which is proportional to the
pressure at port "GLR". The higher the pressure at "GLR" is, the higher is the pressure for which the
regulation begin will happen.
The pump regulation will further happen as described on ß 1.1. However on the P>Q diagram, the
pump power curve will be shifted towards higher pressure (i.e. towards higher power) by a value
which is directly proportional to the pressure at port "GLR".
Usually the GLR pressure is the output pressure of the power regulating solenoide valve Y50.

1.3 Flow limitation stage

This function makes it possible to shift the pump to reduced or to minimum flow even at low
pressure, as an example when operating an hydraulic hammer (reduced flow), or when no movement
is actuated (flow mini, no "B30" signal).
When the chamber "A" is at tank pressure, the sleeve 2.30 containing the pistons 2.31 et 2.32 is hold
to the stop inside the cover 2.35 by the pretension of the springs 2.11 and 2.12.
The regulation begin happens for maximal pump angle when regulation begin pressure is reached.
When a pressure is applied to chamber "A" via port "SD", the bushing 2.30 is moved to the left and a
force due to pressure "SD" on measuring area of bushing 2.30 is transmitted by the rod 2.4 to the
regulating piston 2.7, which is shifted so to obtain a reduced pump angle.
The regulating piston 2.7 can return in balanced position, in the same pressure conditions, only after
the pump angle is reduced so that the new position of the positioning piston induced via the lever
2.6 an additional pretension of the regulating springs 2.11 / 2.12 which exactly compensates the
force created by the pressure "SD" on the bushing 2.30.
The pump can no longer be swivelled in maximum angle. The reduction of the maximum possible
angle is proportional to the pressure at port "SD".
Between maximum possible and minimum angle the normal regulation described in previous section
will be maintained, i.e. every increase of pump high pressure wil be compensated by a corresponding
reduction of the pump angle.

R 934 & R 944 SN 5001Æ

07.11.03
Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

1.4 Pressure cut>off valve 23.3

The pump high pressure P applies via bores in the regulator housing 23 to the inner side of the piston
3.7.
When the pressure become higher than the value preset at adjustment screw 3.1, it shifts the piston
against the pretension of the spring 3.12. This causes the horsepower controller to be connected to
the tank pressure T via the grooves in piston 3.7 and the pump to be swivelled back to the minimum
angle, independently on the position of the horsepower control piston 2.7.
As long the pressure remains below the preset value, the piston 3.7 will remain all the way to the stop
inside the regulator housing, connecting the pump high pressure to the horsepower controller which
regulates the pump angle as described in previous sections.
Generally the pressure cut>off valve is set to a value which is lightly below the primary pressure, so to
avoid an important flow via the relief valves.
Applying a pressure to the chamber of the spring 3.12 (port "Pst"), causes the setting of the pressure
cut>off valve to the increased by about the pressure applied to "Pst".

07.11.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>SD>DA

23 Regulating valve complete 2.21 Allen head screw

23.2 Horsepower control 2.30 Sleeve
2.1 Adjustment screw 2.31 Piston
2.2 Lock nut 2.32 Piston
2.3 Axle 2.33 Rod
2.4 Return rod 2.35 Housing
2.5 Return piston 2.36 Allen head screw
2.6 Lever
2.7 Control piston / Horsepower 23.3 Pressure cut>off
2.8 Sleeve 3.1 Adjustment screw
2.9 Spring retainer 3.2 Lock nut
2.10 Spring retainer 3.4 Cover
2.11 Regulation spring 3.5 O>ring
2.12 Regulation spring 3.7 Control piston / Pressure cut>off
2.13 Return spring 3.9 Spring retainer
2.14 Collet 3.10 Spring retainer
2.15 O>ring 3.12 Spring
2.16 O>ring 3.15 O>ring
2.17 Plug 3.16 Washer
2.18 Orifice 3.17 Plug
2.19 Spring retainer 3.18 Piston
2.20 Cover 3.36 Allen head screw

R 934 & R 944 SN 5001Æ 07.11.05

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

2. Adjustment of variable displacement pump LPVD (LR>SD>DA)

2.1 Adjustment of maximum and minimum swivel angles

The maximum and minimum swivel angle and oil flow of the pump are not adjustable, since the possible
course for the positioning piston is only limited by daed thrusts.

Cut>off pressure increase

is not adjustable

Fig. 2

07.11.06 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>SD>DA

2.2 Adjustment of hydraulic regulation

begin > pump P1 ( P2)
Note :
The adjustment of the regulation
begin of the pump must happen for
the power Pmin, i. e. it must be
made sure that the pressure p(GLR)
= 0 bar (as an ex. by disconnecting
the power regulation solenoid valve
Y50 on the servo oil and regulation
unit).
Remove cap and install a pressure
gauge to the test point 44 (43) for the
positioning pressure of the pump. 3
Remove cap and install a pressure
gauge to the test point for the high
pressure on the control valve block.
Run the Diesel engine at approx. 1200 RPM.
Reduce the primary relief valve of the pump to a
pressure below the pressure at regulation begin for
minimal power prb(Pmin) to be set.
Load the pump and slowly increase the pump high
pressure. First the high pressure and the positioning
pressure are the same, exactly when the hydraulic
regulation occurs, the positioning pressure must drop
from high pressure to about half of the high pressure,
see fig. 4.
If hydraulic regulation begin does not occur at the right
pressure, it must be readjusted on ajustment screw 4
23.2.1 (24.2.1) .
Loosen lock nut 23.2.2 (24.2.2) and turn adjustment
screw 23.2.1 (24.2.1) until the positioning pressure drops Positioning pressure / high pressure

when reaching the prescribed value "prb(Pmin)", see

Pressure cut>off
pressure chart.
1
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

> Turn clockwise to set the regulation begin to lower

pressure.
> Turn counterclockwise to set the regulation begin to
a higher pressure.
1/2
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

Notes :
> Make sure regulation begin on both working pumps
must be the same !
> Only the pressure at regulation begin for minimal Plage de
r±gulation
power needs to be adjusted. If this adjustment is
correct, the pressure at regulation begin will remain High
correctly set within the whole range for the power Regulation begin pressure

regulation pressure p(GLR). Prb Pda

5

R 934 & R 944 SN 5001Æ 07.11.07

Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>SD>DA

2.3 R±glage de la r±duction de d±bit, pompe P1 (resp. P2)

(vis de r±glage 23.3.1 respectivement 24.3.1 )
Brancher un manom∞tre sur la prise de pression 44 (43)
pour la pression de positionnement de la pompe.
Brancher un manom∞tre sur la prise de pression pour la
haute pression 41 (40), situ±e sur le distributeur.
D±tarer le C.L.P. primaire 121 / 120 ° la valeur de la
pression en fin de r±duction de d±bit pda(end) (voir le
tableau des pressions).
Mettre un v±rin de l'±quipement en but±e pour charger
les pompes de travail.
6
Lire la pression de positionnement indiqu±e par le
manom∞tre 44 (43) et comparer la pression lue avec la
pression de positionnement en fin de r±duction de d±bit
ppos(end) indiqu±e dans le tableau des pressions.
Si n±cessaire, corriger la pression de positionnement en
tournant la vis de r±glage 23.3.1 (24.3.1) jusqu'° obten>
tion de la valeur prescrite.
En vissant, on augmente la pression de positionnement
(ppos(end)>).
En d±vissant, on diminue la pression de pression de
positionnement.
Pression de
positionnement
Attention !
R±duction de d±bit
> Si le r±glage ci>dessus est correct, le
350 d±but de r±gulation a ±galement lieu
pour la pression prescrite pda. Le r±glage
300 de la r±duction de d±bit est plus pr±cis en
suivant la proc±dure ci>dessus, qu'en
r±glant le d±but de r±gulation (moment
250 ou la pression de positionnement
commence ° chuter en dessous de la
200 moiti± de la haute pression).
> Lorsque l'on applique une pression de
150 D±but de commande sur le branchement Pst du
r±gulation
r±gulateur, la r±duction de d±bit est
100 bloqu±e, la pression de r±duction est
relev±e (f 380 bar) et ne peut plus ≤tre
50 Ppos(end)
contr—l±e.
Pour le r±glage de la r±duction de d±bit, le
Haute
branchement Pst doit ≤tre hors pression,
0 pression au besoin, d±connecter le flexible
0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350
hydraulique y arrivant.
Pda
Pda(end)

07.11.08 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>LS

1 Pump regulation
1.1 Power regulating valves with piston 23.1.7
Via internal drillings in the pump central housing 3.0 as well in the housing of regulator 23, the system
pressure of the pump is applied to the piston rod side of the positioning piston 20.1 (small surface "s").
The piston bottom side (larger surface "S") is connected via the middle groove of the regulation piston
1.7 to the pump high pressure, when the piston 1.7 is moved to the right (high pressure applies via the
open control edge "S2").
When the pump pressure is low, the spring 1.13 balances the pretension of the spring 1.11 and shifts the
piston 1.7 to the right so the control edge "S2" opens.
Because of the greater effective area "S" (in comparison "s"), the positioning piston 20.1 is pushed so
that the rotary group is at a maximum angle (max flow).

The pump high pressure is also applied to the rear face of the rod 1.33 via bores in the housings 23 and
1.35.
As a result a force will be applied to the regulation springs 1.11 / 1.12 and to the piston 1.7.

A/R 914 & 924 SN 6001Æ 07.12.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Once this force exceeds the set preload value of springs 1.11 and 1.13, the piston 1.7 moves to the left,
the control edge "S2" closes and control edge "S1" slowly opens, connecting the greater area S with the
tank pressure. The pressure at the piston bottom side (=positioning pressure) is reduced.
Due to the resulting force, the positioning piston 20.1 is moved to the left (away from Qmax), thereby
increasing, via the link 1.6, the pretension of the regulating spring 1.11.
The positioning piston 20.1 is displaced so to reduce the pump angle until a new equilibrium between
the position of the piston 20.1 and the pump high pressure is established.
When the positioning piston 20.1 is moved in the direction of the minimal flow, the return piston 1.5
first comprimes the large regulating spring 1.11 and after further travel (pressure increase) also the small
regulator spring 1.12 is compressed.

Hyperbola for rated

power (Pnom)

Power
regulation
controlled
by p(GLR),
via Y50

Flow limitation
controlled by ILR (Y50)
p(SD), via Y51 mA
300 800
Iel (Y51)
Q /Qn*
0 20 40 60 80 100 (%) 0 10 20 (bar)
0
Pst

20

40
¡

60
¬
* Qn is the rated flow
for the concerned 80
control valve spool
(= flow at EPo(LS) )
100
(%)
EP(LS)/EPo(LS)

07.12.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

1.3 Load Sensing Regulator > Regulation of the pressure difference EPLS
The purpose of this regulator is to adapt the oil delivery of the pump to the oil flow needed by the
supplied users. The Load Sensing Regulator 23.5 is mounted in series with the both horsepower
regulators 23.1 and 23.2.
The piston 5.7 connects the groove to the positioning piston either with tank pressure (the control edge
S3 opens and the pump is swivelled back to minimal flow), or with the pump high pressure (the control
edge S4 is then open and the pump swivelled out to maximal flow).
The pretension of the springs 5.13 and 5.14 which determines the adjustment of the EP value, and the
force created by the pressure in chamber LS acting onto the control surface of piston 5.8, push the piston
5.7 in direction Qmax.
The hydraulic force resulting from the action of the pump high pressure applied to the control surface of
piston 5.9 displaces the regulation piston 5.7 in direction Qmin.
When the piston is in neutral position, these three forces compensate each other. This means that the
piston regulates so to maintain in permanence between the chambers LS and P a pressure difference
(EP) corresponding to the pretension of the springs and which is independing on the instantaneous
pump delivery.

07.12.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>LS

1.4 Limitation of the maximal pump delivery ( EP reduction)

If applying a pressure to the connection Pst of the regulator, an additional force appears on the
piston 5.7 and acts again the pretension of the springs 5.13 and 5.14.
The piston now regulates so to maintain a new pressure difference between LS und P, and the
pump will swivel back as soon as a reduced EP value will be reached.
The pump can now only be swivelled out as for to reach a delivery Q corresponding to the EP
reduced and given by the relation Q=f(EP) of the control valve supplying the connected user.
See also the descriptions for Load Sensing control valves and hydraulic circuit.
The curves ¡ and ¬ on page 7.12.02 show the relation between control pressure at connection
Pst, EP value and maximum possible pump delivery.

A/R 914 & 924 SN 6001Æ 07.12.05

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

23 Regulating valve complete 1.11 Regulation spring 5.4 Lock nut

23.1 Horsepower control / P1 1.12 Regulation spring 5.5 Fitting screw
1.13 Return spring 5.6 Sleeve
1.1 Adjustment screw
1.15 O>ring 5.7 Control piston
1.2 Lock nut
1.16 O>ring 5.8 Piston
1.3 Axle
1.19 Spring retainer 5.9 Piston
1.4 Return rod
1.20 Fitting screw 5.10 Spring retainer
1.5 Return piston
1.33 Rod 5.11 Spring retainer
1.6 Lever
1.34 O>ring 5.13 Spring
1.7 Piston / Horsepower
control valve 1.35 Housing 5.14 Spring
1.8 Sleeve 1.36 Allen head screw 5.15 O>ring
23.2 Horsepower control / P2 5.16 O>ring
1.9 Spring retainer
5.17 Plug
1.10 Spring retainer 23.5 Load Sensing regulating 5.18 Plug
valve 5.21 Piston
5.1 Adjustment screw 5.22 O>ring
5.2 Lock nut 5.23 O>ring
5.3 Sleeve

07.12.06 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>LS

2. Adjustment of variable displacement pump LPVD (LR > LS)

2.1 Adjustment of maximum and minimum swivel angles
The maximum swivel angle of the pump is not
adjustable, since the possible course for the
positioning piston is only limited by a daed thrust in
the pump housing. By the way, the maximum oil flow
is not adjustable.
The minimum angle of each pump unit has been
adjusted at factory (adjustment screw 20.23) so that
the pump supplies just enough oil to cover its internal
leakages, (zero delivery at pump exit) and at a
pressure below the EP(LS) that has to be adjusted at
the pump.
This adjustment of the minimum swivel angle should
not be changed under normal circumstances.
2.2 Adjustment of the pressure difference EP(LS) of the
working pumps
EP(LS) =Pressure difference between:
> pumps high pressure (test point 41 on control valves
block)
> and Load Sensing pressure P(LS) (test point 45)
Notice : It is uneasy to adjust or to check the EP(LS)
alue with sufficient precision, using two 0>
600 bar pressure gauges.
The adjustment must be performed with
the regulating pressure for flow limitation
Pst = 0, if necessary disconnect the
regulation solenoid valve Y51.
Bring the engine to rated RPM (Mode P).
Reduce the secondary pressure relief valve 261 (for
bucket tilting in movement) to a pressure below the
working pressure set at load sensing pressure relief
valve 101 so the oil can flow over secondary P.R.V. 261
(unscrew the valve of about two turns).
If the measuring device for differentiel pressure
(special tool no. 7025376, see page no. 2.01.05) is used,
you must first make a compension between two
pressure sensors.
To do so, connect the difference pressure testing
device via two pressure sensors (600 bar) Id. no.
7025751 and test fittings, Id. no. 4901372 and 7002404
on test point 41 of control valve block 100.
> Extend the bucket cylinder to stop.
> Make comparaison.
> Connect then one of the pressure sensors on test
point 45 on distributor block.

A/R 914 & 924 SN 6001Æ

07.12.07
Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Take a EP(LS) reading while fully extending the bucket tilt cylinder to the stop and compare it with the
prescribed value, see page "pressure chart".
If necessary, readjust the EP(LS) at the Load Sensing Regulator 23.5 of the pump regulator 23:
> Loosen the counternut 5.2 and turn the adjustment screw 5.1 using an Allen wrench.
> Turn the screw clockwise to increase the EP(LS)
> Turn the screw counterclockwise to reduce the EP(LS)
After adjustment, retighten the counternut, while holding the adjustment screw.
Readjust the secondary P.R.V. 261, see the subgroup 6 "Hydraulic system > pressure check and adjustment".
Notice: To check the dynamic behaviour of the adjustment, observe or register the EP(LS) while slowly
lifting the extended working attachment.
During this operation, the EP(LS) must show no significant variations (<±1 bar).
Should the oil flow requested by the different users exceed the maximum pump flow ( several
users actuated at the same moment), so the EP(LS) will decrease.

07.12.08 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPVD

Pump LPVD with regulating valve LR>LS

2.3 Adjustment of hydraulic regula>

tion begin for pump P1 ( P2)
Notes :
The adjustment for hydraulic
regulation begin has to be
performed at minimum regula>
tion pressure P(GLR) =0. To fullfil
this condition, for example
disconnect the power regulation
solenoid valve Y50 on the servo
oil and regulation unit 50.
Remove cap and install a pressure
gauge to the test point 43 (44) for
the positioning pressure of the pump.
Remove cap and install a pressure
gauge to the test point 41 for pump
high pressure on the control valve
block.
Run the Diesel engine at approx. 1000 RPM*. Reduce the
secondary relief valve 261 (bucket tilt cylinder extension*)
to a pressure below the pressure at regulation begin for
minimal power prb(Pmin) to be set.
* Notice: The combination "engine RPM" / "actuated
attachment movement" must be determined so
that the maximum possible oil flow at the choosen
RPM is below the nominal flow of the spool valve
supplying the actuated movement.
Load the pump (fully extend bucket tilt cylinder) and slowly
increase the pressure of secondary relief valve 261. First the
high pressure and the positioning pressure are the same,
exactly when the hydraulic regulation occurs, the positioning
pressure must drop from high pressure to about half of the
high pressure.
If hydraulic regulation begin prb(Pmin) does not occur at the
right pressure, it must be readjusted on adjustment screw
Positioning pressure /
23.1.1 (23.2.1). high pressure
LR regulation range
Loosen lock nut 23.1.2 (23.2.2) and turn adjustment screw
1
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

23.1.1 (23.2.1) until the positioning pressure drops when LS pressure

reaching the prescribed value "prb(Pmin)", see pressure chart. limitation
EP(LS)
> Turn the screw clockwise to increase the pressure at
regulation begin.
> Turn the screw counterclockwise to reduce the pressure 1/2
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa
aaaaaaaaaaaaaaaaa

at regulation begin.
Caution :
> Make sure regulation begin on both pumps is the same !
> Only the pressure at regulation begin for minimal power
needs to be adjusted. If this adjustment is correct, the High
pressure at regulation begin will remain correctly set Regulation begin pressure
Prb Pda
within the whole range for the power regulation
pressure p(GLR).

A/R 914 & 924 SN 6001Æ 07.12.09

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

1. Construction of Variable Displacement Pump LPV

The variable displacement pump was designed as an axial piston swash plate type pump.
The pump is consisting of five main parts:
> the pump housing 1 with pump gear and pump positioning piston 21.1,
> the mounting flange 2 with driving shaft bearing,
> the regulator complete 23 with horsepower controller and Load Sensing (LS) regulator,
> the connector housing 3 with suction and pressure ports and which may, depending on the machine
type, integrated an additional gear pump 30 (for servo control oil).
The pumps gear (shaft, cylinder, piston) is driven by the Diesel engine via the splitterbox.
The variable displacement pump is supplied with hydraulic oil via the suction port "S" in the connector
housing. It delivers hydraulic oil into the working circuit via connection "A".
The leak oil from the pump flows via the leak oil connection "T1, T2 or T3" to the tank.
The regulator 23 controls the swivel angle, and thus the oil delivery of the pump units via the positioning
piston 21.1 and depending on the pump high pressure, and also on external control pressures which are
connected to the regulator.

A/R 900B & 904 SN 6001Æ 07.13.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

2. Function of Pump (see section views)

2.1 Function of the pump power gear
The input shaft 7, with bearing in the mounting flange 2 and in the connector housing 3, drives the
cylinder 8. Nine pistons 9 are mounted parallel around the driving shaft in the cylinder. The piston
bottoms are ball shaped and set in slide shoes. They are held by return plate 8.1 and return ball 8.2 on
the swiveling, but not rotating swivel crossbar 10 with thrust washer 10.1.
The slide shoes, mounted hydrostatically on the thrust washer 10.1 (via bore holes in the pistons and
slide shoes) reduce the large sliding surface between the slide shoes and the thrust washer to a
minimum.
When not under pressure, the cylinder 8 is pressed against the control lens 6 by springs 8.3, installed in
the return ball 8.2. As pressure increases, cylinder and control lens are so well balanced by hydraulic
forces, that even at high loads an oil film is maintained on the surfaces of the control lens, while at the
same time leak oil is kept to a minimum. Part of the leak oil is used to lubricate all moving parts and then
flows externally to the tank.
If the cylinder 8 turn, the piston 9 move in a double stroke from the lower to the upper limit and then
reverse. The stroke is carried out in relations to the swivel angle of the swivel crossbar 10 and is
responsible for the flow volume.
The axial piston unit moves the oil via kidney shaped control inlets in the control lens 6. Four of the
moving pistons draw oil through the kidney shaped oil inlets on the suction side of the pump. The other
four pistons displace the oil which is supplied via the kidney shaped oil outlets to the pressure side of the
pump, moving oil via connection A into the hydraulic system. A ninth piston is moving either at the
upper or at the lower limit, at dead center, i.e. just changing directions.

07.13.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

Pump LPV with regulating valve LR>LS

1. Pump regulation
1.1 Power regulating valves with piston 23.2.7
Via internal drillings in the housing of regulator 23, the system pressure of the pump is applied to the
piston rod side of the positioning piston 21.1 (small surface "s").
The piston bottom side (larger surface "S") is connected via the middle groove of the regulation
piston 2.7 to the pump high pressure, when the piston 2.7 is moved to the right (high pressure applies
via the open control edge "S2").
When the pump pressure is low, the spring 2.13 balances the pretension of the spring 2.11 and shifts
the piston 2.7 to the right so the control edge "S2" opens.
Because of the greater effective area "S" (in comparison "s"), the positioning piston 21.1 is pushed so
that the rotary group is at a maximum angle (max flow).

The pump high pressure is also applied to the rear face of the rod 1.33 via bores in the housings
23 and 1.35.
As a result a force will be applied to the regulation springs 1.13 / 1.12 and to the piston 1.7.

A/R 900B & 904 SN 6001Æ 07.14.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

Once this force exceeds the set preload value of springs 2.11 and 2.13, the piston 2.7 moves to the left, the
control edge "S2" closes and control edge "S1" slowly opens, connecting the greater area S with the
tank pressure. The pressure at the piston bottom side (=positioning pressure) is reduced.
Due to the resulting force, the positioning piston 21.1 is moved to the left (away from Qmax), thereby
increasing, via the link 2.6, the pretension of the regulating spring 2.11.
The positioning piston 21.1 is displaced so to reduce the pump angle until a new equilibrium between
the position of the piston 21.1 and the pump high pressure is established.
When the positioning piston 21.1 is moved in the direction of the minimal flow, the return piston 2.5 first
comprimes the large regulating spring 2.11 and after further travel (pressure increase) also the small
regulator spring 2.12 is compressed.

Relation between > regulating pressure PC(GLR) and power hyperbola P=f(GLR)=fILR
> regulating pressure Pst and flow limitation Q/Qn=f(Pst)=fIel

Hyperbola for rated

power (Pnom)

Power
regulation
controlled
by p(GLR),
via Y50

Flow limitation
controlled by
ILR (Y50)
p(SD), via Y51 mA
300 800
Iel (Y51)
Q /Qn*
0 20 40 60 80 100 (%) 0 10 20 (bar)
aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a

0
Pst

20

40
¡

60
¬
* Qn is the rated flow
for the concerned 80
control valve spool
(= flow at EPo(LS) )
100
(%)
EP(LS)/EPo(LS)

07.14.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

1.3 Load Sensing Regulator > Regulation of the pressure difference EPLS
The purpose of this regulator is to adapt the oil delivery of the pump to the oil flow needed by the
supplied users. The Load Sensing Regulator 23.5 is mounted in series with the horsepower regulator 23.2.
The piston 5.7 connects the groove to the positioning piston either with tank pressure (the control edge
S3 opens and the pump is swivelled back to minimal flow), or with the pump high pressure (the control
edge S4 is then open and the pump swivelled out to maximal flow).
The pretension of the springs 5.13 and 5.14 which determines the adjustment of the EP value, and the
force created by the pressure in chamber LS acting onto the control surface of piston 5.8, push the piston
5.7 in direction Qmax.
The hydraulic force resulting from the action of the pump high pressure applied to the control surface of
piston 5.9 displaces the regulation piston 5.7 in direction Qmin.
When the piston is in neutral position, these three forces compensate each other. This means that the
piston regulates so to maintain in permanence between the chambers LS and P a pressure difference
(EP) corresponding to the pretension of the springs and which is independing on the instantaneous
pump delivery.

07.14.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

Pump LPV with regulating valve LR>LS

1.4 Limitation of the maximal pump delivery ( EP reduction)

If applying a pressure to the connection Pst of the regulator, an additional force appears on the
piston 5.7 and acts again the pretension of the springs 5.13 and 5.14.
The piston now regulates so to maintain a new pressure difference between LS und P, and the
pump will swivel back as soon as a reduced EP value will be reached.
The pump can now only be swivelled out as for to reach a delivery Q corresponding to the EP
reduced and given by the relation Q=f(EP) of the control valve supplying the connected user.
See also the descriptions for Load Sensing control valves and hydraulic circuit.
The curves ¡ and ¬ on page 7.13.06 show the relation between control pressure at connection
Pst, EP value and maximum possible pump delivery.

A/R 900B & 904 SN 6001Æ 07.14.05

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

23 Regulating valve complete

23.2 Horsepower control / pump
2.1 Adjustment scew
2.2 Lock nut
2.4 Return rod
2.5 Return piston
2.6 Lever
2.7 Regulating piston
2.8 Sleeve
2.9 Spring retainer
2.10 Spring retainer
2.11 Regulating spring
2.12 Regulating spring
2.13 Return spring
2.14 Ring
2.15 O>ring
2.16 O>ring
2.18 Collet
2.19 Spring retainer
2.20 Cover
2.21 Allen head screw
2.33 Rode
2.34 O>ring
2.35 Housing
2.36 Allen head screw
23.5 Load Sensing
5.10 Spring retainer 23.6 Two way check valve cpl.
regulating valve
5.11 Spring retainer 6.1 Valve housing
5.1 Adjustment scew 5.13 Spring
5.2 Lock nut 6.2 Sleeve
5.14 Spring 6.3 Ball
5.5 Fitting screw
5.6 Sleeve 5.15 O>ring 6.4 O>ring
5.7 Control piston 5.16 O>ring 6.5 O>ring
5.8 Piston 5.17 Plug 44 Test point
5.9 Piston 5.22 O>ring

07.14.06 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

Bring the engine to rated RPM (mode P).

Unscrew the secondary pressure relief valve 261 (for bucket tilting in movement) to reduce the pressure
to a value below the working pressure set at Load Sensing pressure relief valve 101 (so the oil can flow
over secondary pressure relief valve 261).
Take a EP(LS) reading while fully extending the bucket tilt cylinder to the stop and compare it with the
prescribed value, see page "Pressure chart".
If necessary, readjust the EP(LS) at the Load Sensing regulator 23.5 of the pump regulator 23 :
> Loosen the counternut 5.2 and turn the adjustment screw 5.1 using an allen wrench.
> Turn the screw clockwise to increase the EP(LS).
> Turn the screw counterclockwise to reduce the EP(LS).
After adjustment, retighten the counternut 5.2, while holding the adjustment screw.
Readjust the secondary pressure relief valve 261, see the sub group 6. "Hydraulic System > Pressure check
and adjustment".
Notice : To check the dynamic behaviour of the adjustment, observe or register the EP(LS), while
slowly lifting the extended working attachment. During this operation, the EP(LS) must show no
significant variations (e±1 bar).
Schould the oil flow requested by the different users exceed the maximum pump flow (several users
actuated at the same moment), so the EP(LS) will decrease.

Adjusment screw 23.2.1 for pressure of regulation begin Prb (Pmin)

Adjustment screw 23.5.1 for EP(LS)

07.14.08 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Variable Displacement Pump LPV

a
a

Pump LPV with regulating valve LR>LS

2.3 Adjustment of hydraulic regulation begin for the

pump
Notes : The adjustment for hydraulic regulation begin
has to be performed at minimum regulation pressure
P(GLR) =0. To fullfil this condition, for example
disconnect the power regulation solenoid valve Y50
on the servo oil and regulation unit 50.
Remove cap and install a pressure gauge to the test point
44 for the positioning pressure of the pump.
Remove cap and install a pressure gauge to the test point
41 for pump high pressure on the control valve block.
Run the Diesel engine at approx. 1000 RPM*. Reduce the
secondary relief valve 262 (bucket tilt cylinder extension*)
to a pressure below the pressure at regulation begin for
minimal power prb(Pmin) to be set.
* Notice: The combination "engine RPM" / "actuated
attachment movement" must be determined so
that the maximum possible oil flow at the choosen
RPM is below the nominal flow of the spool valve
supplying the actuated movement.
Load the pump (fully extend bucket tilt cylinder) and slowly
increase the pressure of secondary relief valve 262. First the
high pressure and the positioning pressure are the same,
exactly when the hydraulic regulation occurs, the
positioning pressure must drop from high pressure to
about half of the high pressure.
If hydraulic regulation begin prb(Pmin) does not occur at the
right pressure, it must be readjusted on adjustment screw
23.2.1.
Loosen lock nut 23.2.2 and turn adjustment screw 23.2.1
until the positioning pressure drops when reaching the
prescribed value "prb(Pmin)", see pressure chart.
> Turn the screw clockwise to increase the pressure at
regulation begin.
> Turn the screw counterclockwise to reduce the
pressure at regulation begin.
Caution :
> After correct setting, retighten the lock nut 23.2.1
and readjust the secondary valve 261.
> Only the pressure at regulation begin for minimal
power needs to be adjusted. If this adjustment is
correct, the pressure at regulation begin will
remain correctly set within the whole range for the
power regulation pressure p(GLR).

A/R 900B & 904 SN 6001Æ 07.14.09

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

VARIABLE DISPLACEMENT SWASH PLATE PUMP A4 VG > DWD

1. CONSTRUCTION
The variable displacement pump A4 V is a reversible axial piston pump in swash plate design. It is used on
excavators for the hydrostatic drive of the swing gear motor in a closed loop.
The pump consists of following main components :
> The pump housing 10.1 containing the drive shaft and the entire rotary group.
> The pump positioning piston 10.2, which determines the change in the swivel angle of the swash plate.
The positioning piston shifts the pump from its zero position into one or the other direction in
accordance with the pump regulator.
> The pump regulator 15 elaborates the both oil flows and pressures (x1 and x2) for positioning piston
control, out of the servo oil pressures coming from the joystick for swing right and left.
> The connector plate 12 of the pump that combines various valves into one compact unit.
These valves perform all the necessary functions for optimum swing drive .
The connector plate also contains an integrated replenishing pump designed as an internal gear pump
and a drive hub for the flanged additional servo oil pump. Channels inside the connector plate connect
the replenishing pump, the replenishing oil filter and the replenishing check valves together.

10.1 Pump gear

10.2 Positioning piston
12 Connector plate
15 Pump regulator

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.18.01

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Edition : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic components

10 Swing pump cpl.

10.1 Pump gear
10.2 Positioning piston
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure
10.8 Pressure cut off valve
11 Replenishing pump
12 Connector plate
14 Replenishing oil filter
14.1 Bypass valve > replenishing oil filter
15 pump regulator
15.1 Brake valve > swing right
15.2 Brake valve > swing left
15.4 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing
15.7 Pilot operated check valve / swing left
15.8 Pilot operated check valve / swing right
45 Test point > replenishing pressure
46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or
left

Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right

Swing Pst at Pressure Suction Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left
movement connection side side
right Y1 A B

left Y2 B A

7.18.02 Edition : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

2. TECHNICAL DATA

Machine models R 934 / 5278 R 944 / 5265

Pump>Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A 4 VG 56 DWD . . . . . . . . . =

Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 / U . . . 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
reduced to 47

Displacement of replenishing pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 / U . . . 11 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =

Sense of rotation when seen onto driving shaft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =

Leak oil max.

(at 200 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min . . . . . . . .................... =

Dimensions of orifices
Orifice in actuation circuit, side y1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a 1.2 mm . . . . . . . . . . . =
Orifice in actuation circuit, side y2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . a 1.2 mm . . . . . . . . . . . =
Orifice on positioning piston, side x1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . without . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Orifice on positioning piston, side x2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . without . . . . . . . . . . . . =

Torques
All torque values on drawing below are indicated in Nm
Torque in ft.lbs=Torque in N.m¥0.7375

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.18.03

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Edition : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3. FUNCTION OF SWING PUMP "A4V"

3.1 ROTARY GROUP
In the pump housing 1, parallel to the input shaft 5, are nine circular arranged pistons 7. The pistons
move axially in the cylinder barrel 8 which in turn is firmly connected to the input shaft 5 via splines.
The end of the pistons are shaped in a ball joint which in turn is mounted in a ball socket/glide shoe
2. The glide shoes are held against the inclinable, but non>rotating swash plate 4 by the retainer
plate 84.
The swash plate 4 may be shifted from the neutral position to both sides by the guide pin 81.
The pump positioning piston 10.2, located in the pump housing and controlled by the regulator valve
15, performs the inclination of the swash plate 4 that is located on roller bearings (=adjustment of
the pump).
The control of the pump is via kidney shaped ports in the control lens 6 and the connector plate 12
(pump head). During the revolution of the barrel 8, oil corresponding to the area and stroke of the
piston is sucked in by four pistons through the kidney shaped control ports 82 on the return oil side
of the closed circuit. Four pistons supply the oil via kidney shaped control ports to the pressure side
and push the oil via the pressure port into the closed loop circuit. The ninth piston is at dead center,
which means reversing direction.
The lens twist screw 80 allows to rotate the control lens 6 around the input shaft axis. Thus the kidney
shaped ports can be slightly displaced compared to the dead center of the rotary group.

1 Pump housing
2 Glide shoe
4 Swash plate
5 Input shaft
6 Control lens
7 Piston
8 Barrel
10.2
Positioning piston
14 Replenishing oil
filter
15 Pump regulator
81 Guide pin
84 Retainer plate

7.18.04 Edition : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3.2 THE PUMP POSITIONING

The rotary group swivel angle is changed via the positioning piston 10.2 which moves the swash plate
4 via the guide pin 81. The pump is swivelled into its correct position by passing pilot oil into the
positioning chamber.
The higher the pressure difference between the two surface areas of the positioning piston, the
further the piston is moved against spring pressure and the steeper the angle of the swash plate 4
will be.
By increasing the swivel angle, the pump flow and the required drive torque are increased.
By decreasing the swivel angle, the pump flow and the drive torque are decreased.
In the zero position the pump flow is also zero.
When the swash plate 4 is shifted from one angle via the neutral position to the other angle, the
direction of flow changes, while the direction of pump rotation remains the same, meaning that the
pressure side becomes the suction side and vice versa. In this way, it is possible to change the
direction of the swing motor in a closed loop circuit.
The length of the spacer rings 83 fixes the possible stroke of the positioning piston and therefore the
maximum pump angle.
The strong centering springs withhin the positioning piston hold the pump in the zero position when
no servo control signal is being applied or they safely return the pump to its zero position if the servo
control signal fails.

On the positioning piston, the self positioning force of the rotary group together with the return
force of the positioning spring will compensate the force due to the applied servo pressure.
Since the return force of the spring is proportional to the pump flow (swivel angle) and the self
positioning force is proportional to the pump high pressure, the adjustment charachteristic of the
pump is degressive (load dependent) i. e. it behaves as a combination of torque control and of swing
speed control.

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.18.05

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Edition : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3.3 PRESSURE VALVES IN THE

CONNECTOR PLATE
10.3 High pressure relief valve >
swing left
10.4 High pressure relief valve >
swing right
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing
pressure
10.8 Pressure cut off valve

11 Replenishing oil pump

14 Replenishing oil filter
14.1 Bypass valve / replenishing oil filter

7.18.06 Edition : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3.3.1 Secondary Pressure Relief Valves 10.3 > 10.4 with

replenishing function
Function as Pressure Relief Valve > setting "Psec"
The pressure in channel A (B) also becomes
established around the valve spindle 3 and on both
sides of the spring tensionning part 4.
If this pressure reaches the value "Psec" set on valves
10.3 (10.4), the connection from canal "A" ("B") to
compartment "Psp" is established and excess pressure
is released.
The opening pressure of valve spindle 3 is given by the
preset, not adjustable pretension of spring 5.
Secondary P. R. V. 10.3 & 10.4
Function as replenishing valve (suction valve)
If pressure building up in canal "A" ("B") is less than
the pressure in canal "Psp", due to pressure
difference, the force of the oil in canal "Psp" shifts the
complete valve (parts 2, 3, 4 and 5) against the force
of the weak spring 6 and opens the connection from
canal "Psp" to canal "A" ("B").
Oil flows out of the replenishing pressure canal "Psp"
to "A" ("B") until both pressure readings are equal.
This maintains a minimum pressure and prevents
cavitation in the closed loop.

3.3.2 Pressure cut>off valve 10.8 (=pressure related flow

cut>off valve)
The pump high pressure at output port "A" or "B"
applies via bores in the connector plate 12 and in the
piston of the shuttle valve 5 to the inner side of the
piston 4.
When the pressure reaches the value preset at
adjustment screw 9, the piston 3 is shifted against the
pretension of the spring 7 in such a way that the
channel y3 (servo pressure in y1 or in y2) becomes
connected to the housing pressure. The pump
positioning pressure is by the fact reduced, the pump
swiwel angle will decrease until the corresponding
pump high pressure becomes lower then the adjusted Pressure cut>off valve 10.8
value of the pressure cut>off 10.8.
As long the pressure remains below the preset value,
the connection "y3 > T" in the piston 3 will remain
closed and the adjustment of the pump angle will
depend only on the applied servo pressure y1 or y2, as
described in previous sections.

3.3.3 Replenishing pressure relief valve 10.7

The relief valve for replenishing pressure is a fixed
setting and directly operated pressure relief valve. It is
connected to the replenishing pump pressure
connection via internals channels.
The oil flowing via the valve is used for cooling the
pump, it first passes into the pump housing and then
via the "T" connection to tank. Replenishing press. rel. valve 10.7

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.18.07

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Edition : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3.4 PUMP REGULATOR

The pump regulator 15 comprises :
> the both pilot operated check valves 15.7 and 15.8,
> the brake valves 15.1 and 15.2
> the shuttle valve 15.4 for servo pressures y1 and y2.

Hydraulic connections on the pump regulator

y1 Input for servo pressure > swing right
y2 Input for servo pressure > swing left
y3 Test fitting / servo pressure y1 or y2
x1 Output to positioning piston > swing right
x2 Output to positioning piston > swing left

7.18.08 Edition : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3.4.1 Function sequence during start up

Deflecting the joystick for swing for example to the right will cause the pressure to increase
progressively at regulator port "y1" and the swing drive to accelerate correspondingly.
During the pressure increase, the pump adjustment will happen as described thereafter
(Caution : the given pressure values are approximate values, they are housing pressure dependent)
> up to 5 bar, both brake valves are closed and no oil can return out of the positioning chamber to
the pump housing.
> at 6 bar, the both pilot operated check valves open (start of control of the check valves). the
positioning chamber, side "x1" is at the servo pressure "y1". Since this pressure is still under that of
the spring pack start of control, the pump is still in its zero position.
> at 7 bar, the positioning force is high enough to start swivelling out the pump, the return side of
the positioning piston is connected to the tank via the allready opened check valves and the return
channel of the joystick.
> at 20 bar servo pressure, the maximum positioning force to keep the pump at its maximum swivel
angle has been reached.

3.4.2 Function sequence when braking

When returning the joystick lever
against zero, the pilot operated
check valves 15.7 and 15.8 are closed
and the brake spool 15.1 is open.
The oil return from the positioning
piston is throttled according the
adjustment of the brake valve 15.1.
The anti>cavitation valves in the
brake spool are used, during
braking, to provide the necessary oil
suction to the opposite positioning
chamber.
The braking pressure is not
adjustable. It is dependent only on
the boom and the attached load.
It should be measured only to check
the return swivel time of the pump.

R 934 Li / 5278 Æ 7.18.09

R 944 Li / 5265 Æ Edition : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

4. Checks and adjustments on the swing pump

4,1 Adjustable valves and pressure settings, see group "Pressure check and adjustment"
4.2 Relief and adjustment valves & Test points
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left *
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right *
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure *
10.8 Pressure cut off valve
10.21 Adjustment screw for mechanical zero position (a)
15.1 Brake valve > swing right
15.2 Brake valve > swing left
15.7 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing left 10.8
15.8 Pilot operated check valve / swing right
45 Test point / replenishing pressure
46 Test point / high pressure> swing left
47 Test point / high pressure > swing right
10.3*
48 Test point / servo pressure >
swing right or left
10.4*

10.7*

* not adjustable
(a) Adjusted at factory, not to
be checked and readjusted 15.7 15.8
under normal circumstances

15.21(a)
15.2

15.1

7.18.10 Edition : 10 / 2000

The swing pump is a variable displacement axial piston pump in swash plate design. Included is a replenishing
pump and valves for the closed loop swing operation.

The displacement volume is in proportion to the input RPM and infinitely variable. The flow increases as the
pump is shifted from the ∫0∫ or neutral position to its maximum output.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Swing Pump "A 4 V" From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.01
A. INSTALLATION
Install the complete swing pump on the splitterbox. To install, slide the pump on the studs of the splitterbox
and line up the input shaft with the key in the input gear. Be careful to observe the correct position of the O>
ring in the adaptor flange. Secure the pump with nuts 86 and torque to 225 ft. lbs. (310 Nm).
Be certain to purge and clean the pipes and hoses prior to installation.
Connect the various pipes and hoses to the pump. (High pressure hoses, suction line for replenishing pump,
suction and pressure line for the servo pump as well as the control lines.) Make sure to observe torque values
of flange mounting on suction and pressure lines, see sub group 1.20 > 1.30.

B. POINTS TO OBSERVE DURING AND AFTER NEW PUMP

START UP (Fig. 1)
Remove bleeder screw 85 as shown in fig. 1 and fill the pump
with oil. Reinstall screw 85.
Open shut off valve at the hydraulic tank.
Crank engine with starter for approx. 10 seconds, however, do
not start the engine.
Repeat this process to allow trapped air to escape.
Loosen the bleeder screw 85 at the servo piston (do not
remove) and bleed the pump with the engine running at low
idle until clear oil free of air bubbles appears.
Retighten the screw.

1 Bring hydraulic oil to operating temperature 140∞ > 176∞ F (60∞ >
80∞ C).
Check the function of the swing circuit. If necessary, check the
swing pump adjustments as outlined on page 7.19.11.
Check system for function and leakage.

10.2 Positioning piston 30 Servo oil pump

10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left 45 Test point > replenishing pressure
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right 46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure 47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
11 Replenishing pump 48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or left
14 Replenishing oil filter
15.1 Regulator valve > swing left X5 High pressure port > swing right
16 Brake valve, complete Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right
16.1 Control valve Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left
16.2 Brake piston

7.19.02
C. DESCRIPTION
The swing pump is a variable displacement axial piston pump in swash plate design. Included is a
replenishing pump and valves for the closed loop swing operation.
The displacement volume is in proportion to the input RPM and infinitely variable. The flow increases as
the pump is shifted from the ∫0∫ or neutral position to its maximum swivel angle.
Replenishing pump 11
The gear pump 11 mounted to the front of the swing pump and driven by the swing pump shaft via an
internally splined connector serves to replenish the closed loop, i.e. this pump supplies the swing loop with
oil at constant pressure via the replenishing filter 14.
With this constant pressure cavitation in swing pump or swing motor is avoided, and a certain cooling
effect is achieved in the swing circuit, see also description of discharge in hydraullic motor in sub group for
swing motor.
Auxiliary pump
Depending on machine type, the replenishing pump may be fitted with shaft and flange to drive another
gear pump (servo oil pump 30, ...).

Valves
To protect and limit the replenishing pressure, a relief valve
10.7 is installed.
In each high pressure side, a pilot operated pressure relief
valve 10.3/10.4 is installed. The valves limit the maximum
pressure and protect the pump and motor.
Integrated in the valves are check valves 10.5 and 10.6 which
serve as suction valves.
Torque control
Depending on the preselected servo pressure (via the left
joystick) the system pressure as well as the direction of the
pressure is selected. This means that the amount and
direction of the torque at the swing motor is infinitely
variable.
This regulation, as well as the determination of the ratio
between control to high pressure takes place in the torque
control valve 15.
Brake Valve 16
Due to the brake valve 16, installed on the torque control
15, the system acts as an operating brake with the joystick 2
for the swing function in the neutral position.

3 Control plate
10.3 High pressure relief valve, swing left
10.4 High pressure relief valve, swing right
10.6 Check valve
10.7 Replenishing pressure relief valve
10.71 Adjustment screw
10.72 Lock nut
14 Filter
82 Kidney shaped control ports

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Swing Pump "A 4 V" From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.03
D. FUNCTION OF SWING PUMP "A4V"
1. Rotary group
In the pump housing 1, parallel to the input shaft 5, are nine circular arranged pistons 7. The pistons move
axially in the cylinder barrel 8 which in turn is firmly connected to the input shaft 5 via splines. The end of
the pistons are shaped in a ball joint which in turn is mounted in a ball socket/glide shoe 2. The glide shoes
are held against the variable, but non>rotating swash plate 4 by the retainer plate 84.
The swash plate 4 may be shifted from the neutral position to both sides by the guide pin 81.
The regulation of the pump via the guide pin 81 is performed by the servo piston 10.2, located in the pump
housing and controlled by the torque control valve 15.
Depending on the angle of the swash plate 4, the nine pistons have a certain stroke which in turn
determines the output (pump flow) of the swing pump.
With the swash plate in the neutral position, which means vertical in relation to the input shaft, the piston
stroke and the pump flow is theoretically zero.
The higher the pressure difference between the two surface areas of the servo piston, the further the
servo piston is moved against spring pressure and the steeper the angle of the swash plate 4 will be. The
length of the spacer 83 controls the possible stroke of the servo piston and therefore the maximum pump
angle.

7.19.04
When the swash plate 4 is shifted from one angle via the neutral position to the other angle, the direction of
flow changes, while the direction of pump rotation remains the same, meaning that the pressure side becomes
the suction side and vice versa. In this way, it is possible to change the direction of the wing motor in a closed
loop circuit.
The control of the pump is via kidney shaped ports in the control lens 6 and the pump head 3. During the
revolution of the cylinder 8, oil corresponding to the area and stroke of the piston is sucked in by four pistons
through the kidney shaped control ports 82 on the return oil side of the closed circuit. Four pistons supply the
oil via kidney shaped control ports to the pressure side and push the oil via the pressure port into the closed
loop circuit. The ninth piston is at dead center, which means reversing direction.
The lens twist screw 80 (see fig. 2 and 3) allows to rotate the control lens 6 around the input shaft axis. Thus
the kidney shaped ports can be slightly displaced compared to the dead center of the rotary group.

1* Hydraulic tank 7 Piston 15 Torque control valve

1 Pump housing 8 Cylinder 16 Brake valve complete
2 Glide shoe 10.2 Positionning piston 81 Guide pin
3 Pump head (front cover) 11 Replenishing pump 84 Retainer plate
4 Swash plate 14 Replenishing oil filter 85 Bleeder screw
5 Input shaft 14.1 Bypass valve / replenishing
6 Control lens oil filter * Items in group 6.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Ab
Datum
From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Description and Function Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.05
 2. Torque control valve 15
If the joystick for the swing is moved to the right, servo pressure builds up in chamber 52r via connection
Y1 and the piston 51r and 51l are pushed to the left.
As the piston 51r is shifted, control pressure from side A of the piston Pst>A can be vented to the tank via
the open control edge. At the same time, servo pressure shifts the piston 16.1 via internal drillings against
the force of spring 61l and the boost pressure Psp feeds unrestricted the side B of the servo piston. The
servo piston is shifted in the direction of ∫high pressure in A∫ and the pump is shifted as well.
The pump angle increases now until the high pressure at the main port A via connection X 5 and via
surface S at the piston 51 L equalizes the control pressure in chamber 52r, which means that the pistons 51l
and 51r are shifted back to the neutral position. As long as the control pressure and high pressure remain
balanced, the pump angle remains constant.
The pressure at port A and therefore the input torque at the swing motor remain constant as well and the
regulating range is in proportion to the servo pressure in line Y1 (torque control).
The ratio between high pressure/servo pressure is due to the difference in the working surface at points 52
and S.
The regulation of the system pressure (and therefore the torque on the swing drive) in reference to the
amount and direction of a preselected servo pressure remain the same, no matter if the swing drive is
accelerating or slowing down.
The valve 15.3 limits the amount of servo pressure at point Y1 and Y2 to the value "Pst(max)" via shuttle
valve 15.4. and therefore also limits the high pressure of the pump at the main ports A or B to PA,B.

PY (bar)
40

Py Servo pressure at control ports Y1, Y2

35

Pst(max) Py(rb) Servo pressure at regulation begin

30
Pst(max) Servo pressure corresponding to
the prescribed pump high pressure
25 PA
, B (max)

PA,B(20 bar) Pump high pressure at ports A, B with

20
servo pressure equal to 20 bar.

15

10
Py(rb)
5

0 PA, B (bar)
0 25 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400
PA, B (20 bar) PA, B (max)

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Ab
Datum
From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Description and Function Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.07
3. Brake valve 16
The brake piston 16.2 in the brake valve ensures that the braking action of the uppercarriage takes place at a
constant torque when the joystick for the swing function is released.
Let us assume that the pump is operating at some given pressure at connection A and the joystick for the
swing function is released.
In this case, the piston of the control valve 16.1 is shifted back to neutral and both sides of the servo piston are
connected to the brake piston 16.2 without restriction.
The servo piston is shifted towards the center position and the pump angle is reduced.
This causes the opposing pressure at connection B, present in chamber HP, to increase until the pressure via
connection X6 and shuttle valve 15.5, shifts the brake piston 16.2 against the force of spring 62 and the
connection between the two sides of the servo piston 10.2 is restricted.
Because of this restriction, the movement of the servo piston towards the center position is slowed down until
the force at piston 16.2 equalizes. This means that the opposing pressure at connection B is limited to a value
equal to the preload of spring 62.
This means that the uppercarriage is slowed down at a constant torque until it comes to a stop.

16 Brake valve complete 16.21 Adjustment screw / control valve

16.1 Control valve 61l Spring / control valve
16.2 Brrake valve 62 Spring / brake valve

7.19.08
E. ADJUSTMENTS ON SWING PUMP "A4V"
1. Adjust replenishing pressure
45 Test point > Replenishing pressure
10.7 Replenishing pressure relief valve

1.1 Remove cap on test point 45 and install 60 bar

pressure gauge.
1.2 Start engine and bring to high idle.
Take a pressure reading and compare with the
required replenishing pressure setting (see page for
pressure charts in group 6.)
Lock the swing brake, fully deflect the joystick for 3
swing left and right and take another pressure
reading.
1.3 If necessary, adjust the relief valve 10.7.
To adjust, remove the protective cap and loosen the
lock nut 10.72. Turn the adjustment screw 10.71
clock or counterclockwise until the correct pressure
setting is reached.
Turn clockwise:
Replenishing pressure increases.
Turn counterclockwise:
Replenishing pressure decreases .

Once the valve is adjusted, tighten lock nut 10.72

while holding the adjustment screw.

1.4 Remove pressure gauge and reinstall cap on test

point 45. 4

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Ab
Datum
From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Pressure Adjustment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.09
 2. Adjust high pressure relief valves
46 Test point / high pressure > swing left
47 Test point / high pressure > swing right
48 Test point / servopressure > swing left or right
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right
80 Lens twist screw

2.1 Remove caps on test point 46 and 47 and install 600 bar
pressure gauge.
2.2 Start engine and bring to appr. 1000 RPM.
Secure the uppercarriage to the undercarriage with the
mechanical swing lock.
2.3 Turn in the servo pressure relief valve 15.3 until the
pressure created by the torque control is higher than the
valve of the high pressure value to be adjusted.
2.4 Fully deflect the joystick for swing left, take a pressure
reading on test point 46 and compare with the required
pressure value. See page for pressure charts in group 6.
2.5 Repeat the test for swing right.
Important:
The pressure test in paragraph 2.4 / 2.5 should be as short
5 as possible (max. 4 seconds) to avoid overheating the oil in
the pump housing.
2.6 If necessary, adjust relief valves 10.3 and/or 10.4.
To adjust, remove caps and loosen lock nut.
Turn adjustment screw 10.31 / 10.41 clock or counter>
clockwise until the correct pressure setting is reached.
Turn clockwise to increase the pressure.
Turn counterclockwise to decrease the pressure.

Once the valve is adjusted, tighten lock nut while holding

the adjustment screw.
Notice:
If the prescribed pump high pressure can not be obtained,
this may be due to an incorrect position of the control
lens, set by lens twist screw 80.
Check if the screw position corresponds to basic
adjustment (7 hour), if necessary slightly turn the screw 80
so that the high pressure can be obtained.
2.7 Readjust pressure relief valve 15.3 as outlined in ß 3.

7.19.10
3. Adjust swing pump system pressure at the relief valve for servo pressure > swing
46 Test point > High pressure > swing left
47 Test point > High pressure > swing right
48 Test point / servopressure > swing left or right
15.3 Servo pressure relief valve for torque control
The relief valve 15.3 limits the servo pressure for swing left or right and limits at the same time, via the
torque control the two high pressures at connection A and B at the swing pump.
3.1 Remove caps on test point 46 and 47 and install 600 bar gauges.
Remove cap on test point 48 and install 60 bar gauge.
3.2 Start the Diesel engine and bring to 1000 RPM. Secure the uppercarriage to the undercarriage with
the mechanical swing lock.
3.3 Fully deflect the joystick for swing left, notice pressure on test point 46, take a pressure reading on
test point 46 and compare with the required pressure value.
(See page for∫Pressure charts∫in group 6).
3.4 Repeat the test for swing right.
3.5 If both high pressures for swing left / right are equal but incorrect (high or low), though secondary
pressures are correctly set as stated in ß 2, readjust the relief valve 15.3 as outlined in paragraph 3.6.
If both high pressures are unequal, first verify if servo pressure for swing left and right are the same
on test point 48, in this case the hydraulic neutral position must first be adjusted (as outlined in
paragraph 6).
3.6 Remove cap from valve 15.3 and loosen the lock nut.
Turn adjustment screw 15.31 clock or counterclockwise until the correct pressure setting is reached.
Turn clockwise > replenishing working pressure increases.
Turn counterclockwise > replenishing working pressure decreases.
After adjustment, retighten lock nut, counter adjustment screw.
3.7 Remove pressure gauge and close of test points.

15 Torque control valve

15.3 Relief valve > servo pressure
15.31 Adjustment screw
15.4 Shuttle valve

16 Brake valve complete

46 Test point / high pressure, swing L
47 Test point / high pressure, swing R
48 Test point / servo pressure swing

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Swing Pump "A4V" Ab
Datum
From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Pressure Adjustment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.11
 4. Brake torque adjustment
The brake torque which acts on the uppercarriage when the
joystick for the swing function is released is factory adjusted to
the best possible intermediate value and does not need to be
adjusted under normal conditions.
This "optimum adjustment" corresponds to a protrusion of
14 mm of the adjustment screw 16.21 of the brake piston.
Should it become necessary to increase or decrease the braking
effect for certain applications, the brake valve 16.2 must be
adjusted.

4.1 Loosen the lock nut and turn the adjustment screw 15.21
clock or counterclockwise until the desired braking effect
7 is reached.
Turn clockwise to reduce the brake torque.
Turn counterclockwise to increase the brake torque.

CAUTION!
The hydraulic brake is the only swing operating brake on
the machine.
For safety reasons, the brake torque should never be
adjusted too low (reduced).

4.2 Once the valve is adjusted, tighten locknut while holding

the adjustment screw.

7.19.12
5. Check mechanical neutral position
The mechanical neutral position is factrory adjusted and
does not needed to be adjusted under normal conditions.
However, should the uppercarriage turn or have a tendency
to turn, the neutral position can be checked and if necessary
adjusted.
Prior to making the adjustment, check if the uppercarriage
turns even through the servo lines are without pressure
(example: Disconnect servo lines on connection Y1 and Y2).
5.1 Start engine and bring to high idle.
5.2 Release uppercarriage (pull up swing lock).
5.3 Loosen lock nut 10.22 and carefully turn the adjust> 9
ment rod 10.21 with Allen wrench clock or counter
clockwise until the uppercarriage stops moving.
5.4 After the adjustment is completed tighten lock nut
while holding the adjustment rod 10.21.

10.2 Positioning piston 81 Guide pin

10.21 Adjustment rod / positioning piston 83 Spacer
10.22 Lock nut 85 Bleeder screw

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Swing Pump Ab
Datum "A4V" From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Pressure Adjustment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.19.13
 6. Adjust hydraulic neutral position
The hydraulic neutral position is factory adjusted and does not
need to be adjusted under normal conditions.
Checking or adjustment is only necessary if it is found that the
high pressures on test point 46 and 47 have different values
with the joystick for the swing fully deflected. Before making
adjustments, it must be certain that the servo pressure on
connection Y1 and Y2 on valve 15 is equal and approximately
within the required servo pressure value.

6.1 Remove caps on test point 46/47 and install 600 bar
pressure gauges.

10

7.19.14
 Swing pump in neutral position
refer to shematic on page no. 7.19.17

The left joystick control valve 80 is not actuated.

The pistons 51, 16.2, 16.1 and 10.2 are in rest position.
The replenishing pump 11 delivers oil via the replenishing filter 14 to the connection P of the
torque control valve 15.
The replenishing pressure is limited to the value adjusted at relief valve 10.7.
Due the throttle glattenings at the piston 16.1 replenishing oil can flow via the ports X1 and X2
to the both sides of the replenishing piston 10.2.
The replenishing pressure also applies via bores in the housing of the torque control valve 15 to
the piston 51.
The pump is in neutral position and delivers no oil to the swing motor, the swing drive is
standing.

1* Hydraulic tank 45 Test point > replenishing pressure

10 Swing pump complete 46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
10.1 Rotary group 47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
10.2 Positioning piston 48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or left
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left 50* Servo oil unit
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right 51 Torque control piston
10.5 Check valve 52 Chamber for servo pressure swing
10.6 Check valve 70* Distributor block
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure 80* Joystick control valve left
11 Replenishing pump 190* Swing motor
14 Replenishing oil filter
14.1 Bypass valve > replenishing oil filter X1 Connection / positioning pressure right
15 Torque control valve X2 Connection / positioning pressure left
15.1 Regulator valve > swing right X3 Measuring point / positioning piston right
15.2 Regulator valve > swing left X4 Measuring point / positioning piston left
15.3 Relief valve > servo pressure > swing X5 High pressure port > swing right
15.4 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing X6 High pressure port > swing left
15.5 Shuttle valve > high pressure > swing Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right
16 Brake valve, complete Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left
16.1 Control valve
16.2 Brake piston
30 Servo oil pump * Item in hydraulic schematic in group 6.

7.19.16
 Typ
Benennung/Description/D±nomination Model
Type R 934 > R
Drehwerkspumpe "A4V" Funktion "Neutral Stellung" Ab 944
From 5001
Datum
Edition
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Function "Neutralposition" Depuis

07.98 Blatt
Date Pompe d¬orientation "A4V" Fonction "Position neutre" Page
Feuille 7.19.17
 Swing pump in working position "Swing right"
refer to shematic on page no. 7.19.19

The joystick control valve 80 is moved to the right.

The corresponding control pressure arrives via connection 2 and distribution block 70 to the
control port Y1 of the torque control valve 15.
The servo pressure, limited by the relief valve 15.3 so to obtain the desired maximum working
pressure is applied to one side of the torque control piston 51 and of brake control valve 16.1.
The replenishing oil flows via P and X1 to the positioning piston 10.2 right side. The oil at the
opposite side of positioning piston 10.2 can return to the tank via the opened control edge at
position 51.
The swing pump is swivelled out of the neutral position and delivers oil to the swing motor
190. The high pressure at pump output A is brought back via an external pipe between
connections MA and X5 to the piston 51.
The high pressure acts against the servo pressure existing at the opposite side. When the high
pressure has increased enough to compensate the servo pressure (with the existing ratio servo
pressure working surface / high pressure working surface) the piston 51 is returned to a
throttle position, causing the swivell angle of the pump to keep constant.

1* Hydraulic tank 45 Test point > replenishing pressure

10 Swing pump complete 46 Test point > high pressure> swing left
10.1 Rotary group 47 Test point > high pressure > swing right
10.2 Positioning piston 48 Test point > servo press. > swing right or left
10.3 High pressure relief valve > swing left 50* Servo oil unit
10.4 High pressure relief valve > swing right 51 Torque control piston
10.5 Check valve 52 Chamber for servo pressure swing
10.6 Check valve 70* Distributor block
10.7 Relief valve > replenishing pressure 80* Joystick control valve left
11 Replenishing pump 190* Swing motor
14 Replenishing oil filter
14.1 Bypass valve > replenishing oil filter X1 Connection / positioning pressure right
15 Torque control valve X2 Connection / positioning pressure left
15.1 Regulator valve > swing right X3 Measuring point / positioning piston right
15.2 Regulator valve > swing left X4 Measuring point / positioning piston left
15.3 Relief valve > servo pressure > swing X5 High pressure port > swing right
15.4 Shuttle valve > servo pressure > swing X6 High pressure port > swing left
15.5 Shuttle valve > high pressure > swing Y1 Servo pressure connection > swing right
16 Brake valve, complete Y2 Servo pressure connection > swing left
16.1 Control valve
16.2 Brake piston
30 Servo oil pump * Item in hydraulic schematic in group 6.

7.19.18
 Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type R 934 > R 944
Drehwerkspumpe "A4V" Funktion "Drehen" Ab
From 5001
Datum
Edition
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Function "Swing" Depuis

07.98 Blatt
Date Pompe d¬orientation "A4V" Fonction "Rotation" Page
Feuille 7.19.19
 Typ
Benennung/Description/D±nomination Model
Type R 934 > R 944
Drehwerkspumpe "A4V" Funktion "Bremsen" Ab
From
Depuis
5001
Datum
Edition
07.98
Swing Pump "A 4 V" Function "Brake" Blatt
Date
Pompe d¬orientation "A4V" Fonction "Freinage" Page
Feuille 7.19.21
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motors

Hydraulic motors chart

Swing motors > A / R models

Machine type From S/N Motor size See sub group

A / R 900 B / 904 6001 FMF 45 7.21

A / R 914 / 924 6001 HMF 75>01 7.23

A 914 6194 HMF 75>02 7.24

R 914 6676 HMF 75>02 7.24

A 924 6369 HMF 75>02 7.24

R 924 6282 HMF 75>02 7.24

A / R 934 5001 FMF 64 7.25

R 942 5001 FMF 90 7.25

Travel motors > A models

Machine type From S/N Motor size See sub group

A 900 B / 904 N
6001 LMV 100 7.26
A 900 B Speeder

A 904 Speeder
A 914 N
6001 LMV 100 7.26
A 914 Speeder
A 924 N / 924 HD

Travel motors > R models

Machine type From S/N Motor size See sub group

R 900 B / 904 / 6001 FMV 75 / 31,5 7.28

R 914 / 924 6001 FMV 75 / 44,1 7.28

R 934 5001 FMV 100 / 56 7.28

R 944 5001 FMV 100 / 63,5 7.28

Cooling fan drive motors

Machine type From S/N Motor size See sub group

R 934 FMF 28 7. 2

R 944 FMF 28 7. 2

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.20.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

1. Description
The hydraulic fixed displacement oil motor FMF is used to drive the excavatorπs swing gear.
Axial piston motors are energy converters: they transform hydraulic energy into mechanical energy by
their axially directed pistons in a cylinder housing.
The motor 130 consistsof two main components:
> the motor housing 12 containing the output shaft and the entire drive gear 132;
> the connector plate 13 of the motor with suction valves 133 and pressure relief valves 134 / 135. The test
points 137 / 138 are mounted on the suction valves.
The pistons with glide shoes rotate on the swash plate. Because of the inclination of the gliding surface, a
piston stroke in the cylinder is created, and thus the constant flow volume of the oil motor.

12 Housing
13 Connector plate
130 Oil motor complet
132 Drive gear
133 Suction valve
134 Pressure relief valve
with pressure cut>off
135 Pressure relief valve
with pressure cut>off
137 Test point MA
138 Test point MB

A / R 900 B > 904 Litronic 07.21.01

6001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

2. GENERAL DATA

Machines model A / R 900 B / 6001

A / R 904 / 6001

Oil motor > type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMF 75

Max. oil volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 / U 45

Max. permissible leaf oil quantity

(at 320 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min 6

Adjustment of pressure relief valves 134 / 135 . . . . . . . . See group 6.

"Pressure chart"
and
"Pressure check and adjustment"

Torque Values

Allen head screw 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 mN

Plug 32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 mN
Pressure relief valves 134 / 135 ................................. 70 > 100 mN
Suction valves 133 ............................................... 250 mN
Test points 137 / 138 in suction valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 mN

A / R 900 B > 904 Litronic 07.21.03

6001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

2. Function of oil motor, see diagram page no. 7.21.05

The housing 12 contains nine pistons 5, which are located parallel in relation to the output shaft 3. The
pistons are contained in cylinder housing 4, which is connected by gears to the output shaft 3. The end of
each piston 5 is designed as a ball joint, which is mounted in the glide shoe 5.1. They are held against the fixed
swash plate 6 by the retainer plate 7 and the return ball 8.
The hydrostatic support (oil film) between the glide shoes 5.1 and the fixed swash plate 6 (due to drillings in
the piston 5 and glide shoes 5.1) reduces surface pressure between the glide shoe and the swash plate.

In a no load or pressureless condition, the cylinder 4 is pressed against the control lens 9 by spring 8.1, which is
installed in return ball 8. As the system pressure increases, cylinder 4 and control lens 9 are so well balanced by
hydraulic forces that even at high loads an oil film is maintained on the surfaces of the control lens as well as
on the glide shoes while at the same time leak oil is kept to a minimum. Part of the leak oil is used for
lubrication of all moving parts and then returned to the tank via an external line.
If pressurized oil enters at connection A or B, four pistons 5 are pressurized via kidney shaped inlets in the
control lens 9. On the opposite side, four more pistons 5 push the low pressure return oil through kidney
shaped inlets in control lens 9 and connection A or B to the tank. A ninth piston is at dead center, which means
at the point of reversing direction.
Once the oil pressure reaches the four pistons on the pressure side, a certain force is created by oil pressure
and piston surface. This force is transferred via piston 5 and glide shoe 5.1 onto the swash plate 6.
This radial force, which uses cylinder 4 as a lever, creates the torque which is transferred via the cylinder 4 to
the output shaft 3. The amount of torque is in direct proportion to the system pressure, which means high
pressure=high torque. By applying oil to the opposite port (connection "A" or "B"), the torque and direction
of the hydraulic motor is reversed (right or left turn).

During a complete revolution of cylinder 4, pistons 5 perform a dual stroke from the lower dead center to the
top dead center and reverse. This stroke depends on the inclination of the swash plate 6 and influences the oil
quantity.

The displacement of the hydraulic motor remains the same until the oil supply from the variable flow pumps
changes.

3. Maintenance and Repairs

Liebherr hydraulic motors are maintenance free.

For resealing and repair work see the ™Repair Instructions for Liebherr Fixed Displacement Oil Motors FMF∫.

07.21.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

2 Roller bearing 12 Housing 24 Pin

3 Gear shaft 13 Connector plate 26 Needle bearing
4 Cylinder 14 Allen head screw 27 Spacer
5 Piston 15 Cover ring 28 Spacer
5.1 Glide shoe 16 Shaft seal 32 Plug for leak oil
6 Swash plate 17 O>Ring connection
7 Retainer plate 18 O>Ring 133 Suction valve
8 Return ball 19 O>Ring 134 Pressure relief valve
8.1 Spring 22 Snap ring 135 Pressure relief valve
9 Control lens 23 Snap ring 137 Test point
10 Dowel pin 138 Test point

A / R 900 B > 904 Litronic 07.21.05

6001Æ Issue : 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

4. Function of valves in connector plate 13

4.1 Check Valves 133
These valves serve as suction valves.
If there is low pressure on connection "A" or "B" during certain working movements, poppet 41 is lifted
off its seat and is pushed against spring 42 by this pressure difference, allowing oil to flow from
connection S to suction side "A" or "B". This prevents cavitation in the motor.
4.2 Pressure relief valves with pressure cut>off 134 and 135
These valves limit the pressure on the motor between connections "A" and "B" to a value which
depends on the pressure on connections "XA" or "XB ".
> If the pilot control valve for the swing movement is in neutral position, connections "XA" and "XB" are
without pressure. The difference in pressure between A and B (pressur relif valves 134 / 135) is limited
to the lower adjustment value (see page "Hydraulic System > Pressure Chart") .
> If the pilot control valve for swing movement is actuated, connection XA or XB is pressurized by the
control pressure and the pressure limit rises to the higher adjustment value ( see page "Hydraulic
System > Pressure Chart").
For function and pressure adjustment of the pressure relief valves with pressure cut>off, see group 6.

5. Maintenance on valves in the connector plate 13

5.1 To replace o>ring 43 or spring 42 on suction valves 133
Remove plug 45 complete with test points 137 / 138, remove poppet 41, spring 42, and o>ring 43.
Check poppet 41 for easy movement and reinstall valve with new spring 42 or new seal 43.
Torque plug 45 complete with test points 137 / 138 between 70 and 100 Nm.
5.2 To seal pressure relief valves 134 and 135
Note:
f After replacing the o>ring 24 , when reinserting the cartridge, torque valve body 30 between 70 and
100 Nm .
f After replacing O>ring 19.1 or 19.2, readjust the valve pressure, see group 6.

07.21.06 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor for Swing Drive

Pressure relief valve with Stage 1=brake

pressure cut>off Stage 2=swing

MB

MA

13 Connector plate 43 O>ring

19.1 O>ring 130 Swing motor
19.2 O>ring 133 Suction valve
24 O>ring 134 Pressure relief valve / pressure in B
30 Valve body 135 Pressure relief valve / pressure in A
41 Poppet 137 Test point / high pressure A
42 Spring 138 Test point / high pressure B

A / R 900 B > 904 Litronic 07.21.07

6001Æ Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

1. Construction
The swing motor is an axial piston constant
flow swash plate motor, designed for open>
loop circuit applications.
The motor consists of two main components:
> motor housing A containing the output shaft
and the entire drive gear.
> connector plate "B" of the motor that
combines various valves into one compact
unit. These valves perform all necessary
functions for optimum swing drive:
131 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing
right
132 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing
left
133 Spool valve/ swing
134 Pressure relief valve / servo pressure
swing
135 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing right
136 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing left
137 Torque control valve
138 Compensator valve
139 Replenishing valve
140 Check valve/ high pressure
141 Check valve / Load Sensing (LS)
pressure
142 Check valve/ return to tank

A Motor housing with drive gear

B Connector plate

Location of test points

145 high pressure swing right
146 high pressure swing left
147 servo pressure swing

Direction of revolution when facing the

output shaft
right: if control pressure at "x"
left: if control pressure at "y"

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.23.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

2. Technical Data

Machine models A / R 914 / 6001

A / R 924 / 6001

Oil motor > type ........................................................... HMF 75

Displacement cm3 / U ........ 75.9

Stroke of the spool 133

Projection "Y" of the stop screw 17 mm . . . . . . . 13,7
(projection "Y" is given just for information)
Adjust to obtain correct RPM of uppercarriage RPM . . . . . . . 8 > 8.5 (914)
. . . . . . . 7.5 > 8 (924)

Leak oil max.

(at 200 bar) l/min . . . . . . . 9.0

Injector dimensions a (mm)

d1: injector in restrictor check valves 135 / 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5
d2: injector in actuation circuit of pres. rel. v. 131 / 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6
d3: injector in servo control pressure (for Torque Control) . . . . . . . . 0.8
d4: injector on Load Sensing pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9
d5: injector in Torque Control valve 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8
d6: injector housing purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6

Torques Nm
Cylinder screws for connector plate ........ 130
Secondary pressure relief valves 131 / 132 ........ 80+10
Servo pressure pressure relief valve 134 ........ 30+5
Suction valves 139 ........ 56
Cylinder screws for control cover 19 ........ 23
Counter nuts for stroke limitation adj. screws 17 ........ 60

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.23.03

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

Note : The follwing figure correspond at the figure , page no. 7.23.05.
It represent the bindings between the different valves

133 Spool
134 Servo pressure relief valve
15 Spring 135 Restrictor check valve
17 Stop screw 136 Restrictor check valve
19 Cover 137 Torque Control valve
138 Compensator valve
22 Spring
139 Replenishing valve
23 Spring
140 Check valve / high pressure
131 Sec. pressure relief valve
141 Check valve / LS pressure
132 Sec. pressure relief valve

07.23.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

3. Description
3.1 Spool valve 133
The spool valve 133 actuates the motor. In neutral, it is centered via the two regulating springs 15.
Pump pressure is supplied to motor via "P" connection. Depending on the swing direction desired,
control pressure is built up in the corresponding spring compartment via "x" or "y" connection.
Control valve 133 is displaced according to preselected control pressure and connects oil flow from "P"
to "A" ("B") and "B" ("A") to "T".
The cross section opened functions as a measuring orifice, measuring the Load Sensing pressure via
internal bore holes in control valve. LS pressure reading is then transmitted to the working pump
regulating valves via TC valve 137 and "LS" connection.
Control pressure regulates piston stroke and thus amount of oil flow (swing gear speed). Stop screws
17 limit maximum piston stroke on each side and thus determine the maximum oil flow.
Restrictor check valves 135 and 136 cushion control valve movement in both directions.

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.23.05

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

3.2 Torque Control: Torque Control valve137 and servo pressure pressure relief valve134
Control pressure "Pst" existing at either connection "x" or "y" controls not only the desired oil flow but
also the maximum operating pressure, i.e. engine torque and uppercarriage acceleration.
Pst stands by in torque control valve 137 via the internal bore holes in spring compartment "d" and
displaces piston to the right.
Load Sensing pressure (from control valve 133) stands by in canal LS(in) of valve 137. This pressure then
flows via the control edge opened on piston 32 to canal "LS(out)" and then into chamber "b" of torque
control valve 138.
Valve 138 continues opening. High pressure to motor drive and Load Sensing pressure can be increased
until the pressure in the canal "LS(out)" displaces the regulating piston of TC valve 137 back to neutral.
(This pressure also stands by at operating surface "e" of smaller valve 34.)
Ratio of operating surfaces in chambers "d" and "e" regulates ratio P high pressure / Pst control
pressure.
When Pst is reduced, piston is displaced to the left and connects Load Sensing pressure to the tank. High
pressure and Load Sensing pressure decrease until balance is restored:
Pressure force from LS pressure in chamber "e" = spring force +pressure force from servo pressure.
Pressure relief valve 134 limits control pressure, and thus high pressure of the motor as well, to a
maximum value.

138 spring side LS (pump)

3.3 Torque Control valve 138 (or input pressure>maintaining valve )

Torque control valve138 is mounted in canal "P" and has switching priority to valve block 133.
Pressure existing in canal "Pa" (output to valve block 133) is also exerted in chamber "c" via the internal
bore holes in the piston. This pressure acts against the pretension of the springs 22 and 23 and against the
force of the pressure existing in spring compartment "b".
Torque Control valve 137 creates this pressure, depending on the control pressure standing by, see torque
control.
When in regulating position, the following balance has been obtained at torque control valve 138:
Output pressure Pa = LS pressure in "b" + constant pressure given by pretension of springs 22 and 23.

07.23.06 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

Pressure reduction at control edge of piston 138 only depends on pressure standing by at input "P" and
on the pressure created in TC valve 137.
If, for example, a motor is operating at a pressure value of 150 bar and, at the same time, a movement
is actuated with greater pressure, like e.g. raising the boom at 250 bar, then torque control valve 138
compensates for this pressure difference by causing pressure reduction of approx. 100 bar.
3.4 Secondary Pressure Relief Valves 131 > 132 with suction function
Function as Pressure Relief Valve > Basic Setting "Pbr"
If pressure in canal A (B) reaches the set value "Pbr" of valve cone 46 via bore holes in needle piston 42
in compartment "c", it opens. The oil found behind valve cone 46 in compartment"d" can flow into
canal "T" via internal bore holes.
This results in pressure reduction in compartment "c" and piston 41, together with needle piston 42, is
displaced downward by the pressure "A" ("B") exerted on the effected surface of the piston.
Connection from canal "A" ("B") to compartment "T" is established and excess pressure is released.
The opening pressure of valve cone 46 is given by pretension of spring 45 that can adjusted via
adjustment screw 47.
If pressure in "c" falls below set value, cone 46 closes and pressures in canal "A" ("B") and in
compartment "c" compensate. Springs 43 and 44 move cone 41 back to starting position. Connection
from canal "A" ("B") and canal "T" is closed.
Function of pressure switching stage > Maximum pressure limitation "Pmax"
If canal "x"("y") is supplied with servo pressure, this pressure also builds up in compartment "e". If this
value exceeds a value of 5 bar, piston 49 is displaced toward the pretension of spring 50 to the stop in
valve housing 4.
Pretension of spring 45 increases and consequently, release pressure of the valve switches from basic
setting"Pbr" to maximum setting "Pmax".

This shift to maximum pressure of the secondary

pressure relief valves occurs during the acceleration
phase of the uppercarriage or when braking by
countering.
If, on the other hand, the excavator operator desires
a soft stop, he has to keep the joystick in the neutral
position.
The uppercarriage decelerates at a reduced braking
torque corresponding to the basic setting on the
secondary relief valves.
Pressure Pmax is not adjustable, it can only be
changed via the thickness of washer plates 48.
Function as Suction valve
If pressure building up in canal "A" ("B") is less than
the pressure in canal "T", the force of the oil in canal
"T" acts on the active ring face "Sn" of the piston
due to pressure difference. The piston is displaced
against the force of springs 43 and 44 and opens the
connection from canal "T" to canal "A" ("B").
Oil flows out of the pretensioned tank return canal
"T" to "A" ("B") until both pressure readings are
equal. This prevents cavitation in canal "A" ("B").

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.23.07

Issue: 09 / 2001
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulik Constant Flow Motor HMF

Pressure valves to be set and pressure adjustments

131 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing right
132 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing left
Only the basic adjustment Pbr can be set on the valves.
The maximum secondary pressure Pmax is not
adjustable. It is not influenced by the adjustment of
Pbr.
134 Pressure relief valve / servo pressure swing
This valve limits the servo pressure swing (left or right)
Pst and thus the working pressure swing PTC given by
the torque control regulator.
137 Torque control valve
Via this valve the charachteristic curve (¬) PTC = f
( Pst) can be set (shifted up or down). A high
pressure is set for a given servo press. value (As
an ex. 200 bar at Pst = 16 bar)

Test points
145, 146 Test points for working press. (Pmax, PTC, Pbr, )
147 Test point for servo control pressure Pst

Adjustment values
Refer to the pages "Pressure Chart" of the chapter
6 > Hydraulic system.
}/}max
in %
P (bar)
100
250 Pmax
+
PTC
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa

aaa
+

aa
Secondary pressure

a
a
a
maximum adjustment _
200 limitation 80
_ by the
¡ servo pressure

150 60
¬
Torque
control
100 40 +
Pbr

√ _
Secondary press. 20
50 basic adjustment

Pst (bar)
0

0 5 10 15 20 25

(¡) P(Sek.) = f ( Pst) Variation of secondary pressure with servo control pressure swing

(¬) PTC = f ( Pst) Variation of working pressure with servo control pressure swing

(√) }/}max= f ( Pst) Variation of oil flow in motor (swing RPM) with servo control pressure swing

07.23.08 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

1. Construction
The swing motor HMF 75>02 is an axial piston constant flow swash plate motor, designed for open>loop
circuit applications.

The motor consists of two main components:

> motor housing A containing the output
shaft and the entire drive gear.
> connector plate "B" of the motor that
combines various valves into one compact
unit. These valves perform all necessary
functions for optimum swing drive:
A) Execution I > Oil motor for machines with
earthmoving attachment
131 Sec. pressure relief valve / swing right
132 Sec. pressure relief valve / swing left
133 Spool valve/ swing
134 Pressure relief valve / servo pressure
swing
135 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing right
136 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing left
137 Torque control valve
138 Compensator valve
139 Replenishing valve
140 Check valve/ high pressure
141 Check valve / Load Sensing (LS)
pressure
142 Check valve/ return to tank

A Motor housing with drive gear

B Connector plate

Location of test points

145 high pressure swing right
146 high pressure swing left
147 servo pressure swing

Location of orifices
d1 > d5: see page no. 7.23.14
d7 : see page no. 7.23.14

Direction of revolution when facing

the output shaft
right: if control pressure at "x"
left: if control pressure at "y"

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 7.23.11

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

B) Execution II > Oil motor for machines with

industrial attachment
131 Sec. pressure relief valve / swing right
132 Sec. pressure relief valve / swing left
133 Spool valve/ swing
134 Pressure relief valve / servo pressure
swing
135 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing right
136 Press. relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure swing left
137 Torque control valve
138 Compensator valve
139 Replenishing valve
140 Check valve/ high pressure
141 Check valve / Load Sensing (LS)
pressure
142 Check valve/ return to tank

A Motor housing with drive gear

B Connector plate

Location of test points

145 high pressure swing right
146 high pressure swing left
147 servo pressure swing

Location of orifices
d1 > d5: see page no. 7.23.14
d7 : see page no. 7.23.14
d8 : see figure above

Direction of revolution when facing

the output shaft
right: if control pressure at "x"
left: if control pressure at "y"

7.23.12 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

2. Technical Data

Machine models R 914

R 924
Earthmoving attachment Industrial attachment

Oil motor > type ........................................................... HMF 75>02 .......... =

Displacement cm3 / U ........ 75.9 ................. =

Oil flow max. at EP=30 bar (R 914) . . . . . . . . . . . l/min ........

at EP=30 bar (R 924) . . . . . . . . . . . l/min ........

Stroke of the spool 133

Projection "Y" of the stop screw 17 mm ........ 13,7 ................. =
(projection "Y" is given just for information)
Adjust to obtain correct RPM of uppercarriage RPM ........ 8 > 8.5 (914) ......... =
........ 7.5 > 8 (924) ......... =

Leak oil max.

(at 200 bar) l/min ........ 9.0 .................. =

Dimensions of orifices a (mm)

d1: Orifice in restrictor check valves 135 / 136 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d2: Orifice in actuation circuit of pres. rel. v. 131 / 132 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d3: Orifice in servo control pressure (for Torque Control) . . . . . . . . . 0.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d4: Orifice in LS pressure line to compensator 138 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d5: Orifice in LS pressure line to TC valve 137 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d6: Orifice housing purge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d7: Orifice for connection with LS channel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
d8: Orifice for A>B connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . without (a=0) . . . . . . . . . a=1.2 *

Torques in Nm
Cylinder screws for connector plate ........ 130 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Secondary pressure relief valves 131 / 132 (cartridge) ........ 80+10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo pressure pressure relief valve 134 (cartridge) ........ 30+5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Servo pressure pressure relief valve 134 (counternut) ........ 9.5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Torque Control valve 137 (cartridge) ....... 100 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Torque Control valve 137 (insert) ....... 47 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Torque Control valve 137 (counternut) ....... 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Pressure relief and deaeration valves 135 / 136 ....... 9 ..................... =
Suction valves 139 ........ 56 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Cylinder screws for control cover 19 ........ 23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =
Counter nuts for stroke limitation adj. screws 17 ........ 60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . =

* For retrofit modification a 2.5 mm on machines with

older oil motor version, see page 7.23.01 > 7.23.08
on R 914 to S/N 6675 and R 924 to S/N 6281

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 7.23.13

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

Note : The following figure corresponds to the figure , page no. 7.23.15.
It shows, drawn in the cutting plane, the hydraulic connections between the different valves.

133 Spool
134 Servo pressure relief valve
135 Restrictor check valve
15 Spring
136 Restrictor check valve
17 Stop screw
137 Torque Control valve
19 Cover
138 Compensator valve
22 Spring
139 Replenishing valve
23 Spring
140 Check valve / high pressure
131 Sec. pressure relief valve 141 Check valve / LS pressure
132 Sec. pressure relief valve

7.23.14 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

3. Description
3.1 Spool valve 133
The spool valve 133 actuates the motor. In neutral, it is centered via the two regulating springs 15.
Pump pressure is supplied to motor via "P" connection. Depending on the swing direction desired,
control pressure is built up in the corresponding spring compartment via "x" or "y" connection.
Control valve 133 is displaced according to preselected control pressure and connects oil flow from "P"
to "A" ("B") and "B" ("A") to "T".
The cross section opened functions as a measuring orifice, measuring the Load Sensing pressure via
internal bore holes in spool valve 133.
LS pressure reading is then limited to a value wich is depending on the servo pressure for swing and
transmitted to the working pump regulating valves via TC valve 137 and "LS" connection. It is also
connected via injector d4 to the operating surface of the compensator valve 138.
Control pressure regulates piston stroke and thus amount of oil flow (swing gear speed). Stop screws
17 limit maximum piston stroke on each side and thus determine the maximum oil flow.
Restrictor check valves 135 and 136 cushion control valve movement in both directions.

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 7.23.15

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

3.2 Torque Control: Torque Control valve137 and servo pressure pressure relief valve134
Control pressure "Pst" existing at either connection "x" or "y" controls not only the desired oil flow
but also the maximum operating pressure, i.e. engine torque and uppercarriage acceleration.
Pst stands by in torque control valve 137 via the internal bore holes in spring compartment "d" and
displaces piston 32 to the right.
Load Sensing pressure (from spool valve 133) stands by in canal LS of valve 137. Via radial bores, the
pressure LS also stands by in the middle bore of piston 34 and creates a force onto the cone shaped
end of the piston 32. Should it exceed the forces exerted to piston 32 by adjustment spring and servo
pressure pst, so the piston is moved and some oil can flow from canal "LS" canal back tothe tank.
The resulting lower Load Sensing pressure is transmitted to the pump regulator via check valve 141.
High pressure to motor drive and Load Sensing pressure will be reduced until the regulating piston 32
closes the connection between "LS" and "T".
Ratio of operating surfaces in chambers "d" and "e" regulates ratio Load Sensing pressure / Pst
control pressure.
When "Pst" is reduced, piston is displaced to the left and connects Load Sensing pressure to the tank.
High pressure and Load Sensing pressure decrease until balance is restored:
Pressure force from LS pressure in chamber "e" = spring force +pressure force from servo pressure.
Pressure relief valve 134 limits control pressure, and thus high pressure of the motor as well, to a
maximum value.

3.3 Torque Control valve 138 (or input pressure>maintaining valve )

Torque control valve138 is mounted in canal "P" and has switching priority to valve block 133.
Pressure existing in canal "Pa" (output to valve block 133) is also exerted in chamber "c" via the internal
bore holes in the piston. This pressure acts against the pretension of the springs 22 and 23 and against
the force of the pressure existing in spring compartment "b".
Torque Control valve 137 creates this pressure, depending on the control pressure standing by, see
torque control.
When in regulating position, the following balance has been obtained at torque control valve 138:
Output pressure Pa = LS pressure in "b" + constant pressure given by pretension of springs 22 and 23.

7.23.16 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

Pressure reduction at control edge of piston 138 only depends on pressure standing by at input "P"
and on the pressure created in spool valve 133.
If, for example, a motor is operating at a pressure value of 150 bar and, at the same time, a movement
is actuated with greater pressure, like e.g. raising the boom at 250 bar, then torque control valve 138
compensates for this pressure difference by causing pressure reduction of approx. 100 bar.
3.4 Secondary Pressure Relief Valves 131 > 132 with suction function
Function as Pressure Relief Valve > Basic Setting "Pbr"
If pressure in canal A (B) reaches the set value "Pbr" of valve cone 76 via bore holes in needle piston 71
in compartment "c", it opens. The oil found behind valve cone 76 in compartment"d" can flow into
canal "T1" via internal bore holes.
This results in pressure reduction in compartment "c" and piston 70, together with needle piston 71, is
displaced downward by the pressure "A" ("B") exerted on the effective surface of the piston.
Connection from canal "A" ("B") to compartment "T" is established and excess pressure is released.
The opening pressure of valve cone 76 is given by pretension of spring 77. If the channel x (y) is without
servo pressure, the pretension of the spring 77 is depending only on the position of the adjustment
screw 124 (the spring 115 pushes the stop screw 120 against the adjustment screw 124).
If pressure in "c" falls below set value, cone 76 closes and pressures in canal "A" ("B") and in
compartment "c" compensate. Springs 72 and 73 move piston 70 back to starting position. Connection
from canal "A" ("B") and canal "T" is closed.

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 7.23.17

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

Function of pressure switching stage > Maximum pressure limitation "Pmax"

If canal "x"("y") is supplied with servo pressure, this pressure also builds up in compartment "e". If this
value exceeds as an example 8 bar, piston 116 is displaced progressively toward the pretension of spring
115, until the stop screw 120 comes into contact with the adjustment screw 119 (as an example when "Pst"
reaches 20 bar). In this contact position, the pretension of the valve spring 77 determines the limitation for
maximum pressure "Pmax", and is depending only on the position of the adjustment screw 119.
Between as an example 8 bar and 20 bar, the stop screw 120 is in intermediate position.
To each servo pressure in "x" ("y") corresponds a position of stop screw 120, a pretention of spring 77 and
thus a value for pressure limitation.
The pressure relief valves 131 > 132 are shifted to maximum secondary pressure "Pmax" during the
acceleration phase of the uppercarriage or when braking by countering.
If, on the other hand, the excavator operator desires a soft stop, he has to keep the joystick in the neutral
position.
The uppercarriage decelerates at a reduced braking torque corresponding to the basic setting "Pbr"on the
secondary relief valves.

Adjustment of the charachteristic line Servo pressure / Relief valve

The force of the spring 121 which acts onto the stop screw 120 can be changed via the adjustment screw
126.
This allows to shift the charachteristic curve Psek=f(Pst) so to reach a desired relief pressure for a given
servo pressure value.

Function as Suction valve

If pressure building up in canal "A" ("B") is less than the pressure in canal "T", the force of the oil in canal
"T" acts on the active ring face "Sn" of the piston due to pressure difference. The piston is displaced
against the force of springs 72 and 73 and opens the connection from canal "T" to canal "A" ("B").
Oil flows out of the pretensioned tank return canal "T" to "A" ("B") until both pressure readings are
equal. This prevents cavitation in canal "A" ("B").

7.23.18 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Motor "HMF 75 > 02"

Pressure valves to be set and pressure adjustments

131 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing right
132 Secondary pressure relief valve / swing left
Three different adjustments can be set on these valves:
> the minimum secondary pressure Pbr
> the maximum secondary pressure Pmax
> the position of the characteristic (¡) Psek. = f ( pst) z
133 Spool valve / Swing
Pfb, the servo pressure at function begin of swing can
be changed by adding or removing shims inside the
regulators covers. z
134 Pressure relief valve / servo pressure swing
This valve limits the servo pressure swing (left or right)
Pst and thus the working pressure swing PTC given by
the torque control regulator.
137 Torque control valve
Via this valve the charachteristic curve (¬) PTC = f
( Pst) can be set (shifted up or down). A high
pressure is set for a given servo press. value (As
an ex. 200 bar at Pst = 16 bar)
Test points
145, 146 Test points for working press. (Pmax, PTC, Pbr, )
147 Test point for servo control pressure Pst
Adjustment values
Refer to the pages "Adjustment check list" of the
chapter 6 > Hydraulic system.

z Should under normal circumstances be neither

checked nor readjusted.

z }/}max
P (bar) Limitation of sec. pressure Secondary pressure en %
Working pressure swing maximum adjustment
300 100%
Pmax +
_ PTC
250
+
+ Limitation
by the
200 Secondary pressure
depending on Pst
_ servo pressure
_ Torque
¬ control
150 ¡ 50%
√ +
Pbr
100 _
Secondary press.
mini adjustment

50

Pst (bar)
0
Pfb z
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
_ +

(¡) P(Sek.) = f ( Pst) Variation of secondary pressure with servo control pressure swing
(¬) PTC = f ( Pst) Variation of working pressure with servo control pressure swing
(√) }/}max= f ( Pst) Variation of oil flow in motor (swing RPM) with servo control pressure swing

R 914 Li / 6676 Æ 7.23.19

R 924 Li / 6282 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor with Discharge

General Data

Machine
See "Hydraulic motors Chart on page no. ........... 7.20.01 . . . . . . . 7.20.01

Hydraulic motor type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FMF 64 . . . . . . . FMF 90

Max. oil volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cm3 / U 64 . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Max. permissible leak oil quantity

(without discharge at 300 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min 8.0 . . . . . . . . . . . 10.0

Discharge quantity
(at a EP=12 bar) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . l/min 11.0 . . . . . . . . . 11.0

Tightening Torque
Allen head screws 14 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 180 . . . . . . . . . . 180

Tightening Torque
Discharge two way check valve 191 . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 70 > 100 . . . . . . 70 > 100

Tightening Torque
Discharge pressure > flow regulator 192 . . . . . . . . . Nm 90 . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Tightening Torque
Inductive impulse transmitter 51 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Nm 10 > 12 . . . . . . . 10 > 12

14

R 934 > R 944 Litronic SN 5001Æ 07.25.01

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor with Discharge

1. Description
The FMF fixed displacement motor is used to drive the excavatorπs travel or swing gear.
The axial piston motor is designed as a swash plate type motor.
Axial piston motors are energy converters: they transform hydraulic energy into mechanical energy by their
axially directed pistons in a cylinder housing.
The pistons with glide shoes rotate on the swash plate. Because of the inclination of the gliding surface, a
piston stroke in the cylinder is created, and thus the constant flow volume of the oil motor.

2. Function of oil motor, see diagram

Housing 12 contains nine pistons, which are located parallel to the output shaft 3. The pistons are contained
in cylinder 4, which is connected by gears to the output shaft 3.
The end of each piston 5 is designed as a ball joint, which is mounted in glide shoe 5.1. They are held against
the fixed and angular mounted swash plate 6 by the retainer plate 7 and the return ball 8.
The hydrostatic support (oil film) between the glide shoes 5.1 and the fixed swash plate 6 (due to drillings in
piston 5 and glide shoes 5.1) reduces surface pressure between the glide shoe and the swash plate.
In a no load or pressureless condition, the cylinder 4 is pressed against the control lens 9 by spring 8.1, which
is installed in return ball 8. As the system pressure increases, cylinder 4 and control lens 9 are so well balanced
by hydraulic forces that even at high loads an oil film is maintained on the surfaces of the control lens as well
as on the glide shoes while at the same time leak oil is kept to a minimum. Part of the leak oil is used for
lubrication of all moving parts and then returned to the tank via an external line.
If pressurized oil enters at connection "A" or "B", four pistons 5 are pressurized via kidney shaped inlets in
the control lens 9. On the opposite side, four more pistons 5 push the low pressure return oil through kidney
shaped inlets in control lens 9 and connection "A" or "B" to the tank. A ninth piston is at dead center, which
means at the point of reversing direction.
Once the oil pressure reaches the four pistons on the pressure side, a certain force is created by oil pressure
and piston surface.
This force is transferred via piston 5 and glide shoe 5.1 onto the swash plate 6.
This radial force, which uses cylinder 4 as a lever, creates the torque which is transferred via cylinder 4 to the
output shaft 3. The amount of torque is in direct proportion to the system pressure, which means high
pressure=high torque. By applying oil to the opposite port (connection "A" or "B"), the torque and direction
of the hydraulic motor is reversed (right or left turn).
During a complete revolution of cylinder 4, pistons 5 perform a dual stroke from the lower dead center to
the top dead center and reverse. This stroke depends on the inclination of the swash plate 6 and influences
the oil quantity.
The displacement of the hydraulic motor remains the same until the oil supply from the variable flow pumps
changes.

3. Maintenance and Repairs

Liebherr hydraulic motors are maintenance free.
For resealing and repair work
see the ™Repair Instructions for Liebherr Fixed Displacement Oil Motors FMF∫.

07.25.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor with Discharge

13 Connector plate 192 Discharge pressure > Flow regulator

191 Discharge two way check valve 192.1 Piston
191.1 Piston 192.2 Flow regulator
191.2 Spring 192.3 Spring
191.3 Bushing 192.4 Bushing

07.25.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator FMF Motor with Discharge

4. Function of discharge valves in connector plate

The discharge valves 191 and 192 allow a small amount of oil from the low pressure connection on the
motor to escape into the motor housing.
This small amount of discharge quickly replaces the oil in the motor housing which was lost to leakage by
the new motors, keeping the motor cool.

4.1 Two way check valve 191

The two ends of the piston 191.1 are connected via bore holes in the connector plate via kidney
shaped slits in the control plate 9.
If at actuation the pressure rises on connection A on the motor, the pressure PA acts on the piston
surface SA and moves the piston against the preload of spring 191.2.
Pressure PB on connection B on the motor now reaches via internal bores in the valve sleeve 191.3
into the ring shaped chamber L, where it actuates the replenishing pressure regulator.
However, if high pressure is applied on connection B of the motors, piston 191.1 is pushed into the
opposite direction and low pressure PA is applied on L .
4.2 Discharge pressure regulator 192
Valve 192 functions as a restricted, pilot controlled pressure relief valve.
Pressure on L, via a restrictor bore hole in the flow regulator 192.2, actuates the main piston 192.1
and, when the minimum pressure is reached, moves it towards the force of spring 192.3.
The oil can now reach chamber T via the restrictor bore hole and internal bores in valve sleeve 192.4
and flows from there via a connector bore in connector plate 13 into the pump housing.
5. Repairs and adjustments on discharge valves
The repairs in valves 191 and 192 are limited to checking easy movement and resealing.
The discharge quantity is set at the factory and cannot be readjusted. If problems occur, replace the
complete valve.

R 934 > R 944 Litronic SN 5001Æ 07.25.05

Issue: 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic motor "FMV"

1. Description
The FMV variable displacement motor is used to drive the excavatorπs travel gear. The axial piston motor
is designed as a swash plate type motor.
Axial piston motors are energy converters: they transform hydraulic energy into mechanical energy by
their axially directed pistons in a cylinder housing.
The pistons with glide shoes rotate on the swash plate. Because of the inclination of the gliding surface, a
piston stroke in the cylinder is created, and thus the flow volume of the oil motor.
2. Function of oil motor
2.1 Function of rotary group
Housing 12 contains nine pistons, which are located parallel to the output shaft 3. The pistons are
contained in cylinder 4, which is connected by gears to the output shaft 3.
The end of each piston 5 is designed as a ball joint, which is mounted in glide shoe 5.1. They are held
against the fixed swash plate 6 by the retainer plate 7 and the return ball 8.
The hydrostatic support (oil film) between the glide shoes 5.1 and the fixed swash plate 6 (due to
drillings in piston 5 and glide shoes 5.1) reduces surface pressure between the glide shoe and the
swash plate.
In a no load or pressureless condition, the cylinder 4 is pressed against the control lens 9 by spring
8.1, which is installed in return ball 8. As the system pressure increases, cylinder 4 and control lens 9
are so well balanced by hydraulic forces that even at high loads an oil film is maintained on the
surfaces of the control lens as well as on the glide shoes while at the same time leak oil is kept to a
minimum. Part of the leak oil is used for lubrication of all moving parts and then returned to the tank
via an external line.
If pressurized oil enters at connection "A" or "B", four pistons 5 are pressurized via kidney shaped
inlets in the control lens 9. On the opposite side, four more pistons 5 push the low pressure return oil
through kidney shaped inlets in control lens 9 and connection "A" or "B" to the tank. A ninth piston
is at dead center, which means at the point of reversing direction.
Once the oil pressure reaches the four pistons on the pressure side, a certain force is created by oil
pressure and piston surface.
This force is transferred via piston 5 and glide shoe 5.1 onto the swash plate 6.
This radial force, which uses cylinder 4 as a lever, creates the torque which is transferred via cylinder 4
to the output shaft 3. The amount of torque is in direct proportion to the system pressure, which
means high pressure = high torque. By applying oil to the opposite port (connection "A" or "B"), the
torque and direction of the hydraulic motor is reversed (right or left turn).

During a complete revolution of cylinder

4, pistons 5 perform a dual stroke from the
lower dead center to the top dead center
and reverse.
This stroke depends on the inclination of
the swash plate 6 and influences the oil
quantity.
The pressure relief valves 129 > 132 integra>
ted in the connector plate 13 limit the
pressure between the hight pressure
130 connections A and B of the motor.
131
The construction and function of these
129 valves correspond to the description in sub
132 group 7.81.

237

7.28.02 Edition : 12 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic motor "FMV"

2 Roller bearing 19 O>ring 85 Seal ring

3 Drive shaft 23 Lock ring 86 Seal ring
4 Cylinder 26 Needle bearing 87 Allen head screw
5 Piston 67 Adjustment screw 88 Plug
5.1 Glide shoe 68 Lock nut 129 Sec. pressure relief valve
6 Swash plate 69 Spring 130 Sec. pressure relief valve
7 Return plate 70 Cover / Pump angle 131 Sec. pressure relief valve
8 Return ball adjustment 132 Sec. pressure relief valve
8.1 Spring 71 Plug 202 Oil motor positioning
9 Control plate 72 Plug 202.1 Small positioning piston
10 Stop pin 73 Plug 202.2 Large positioning piston
12 Housing 75 Allen head screw 202.3 Positionning rod
13 Connector plate 80 O>ring 202.4 Lever
14 Allen head screw 81 O>ring 203 Control piston
15 End ring 82 O>ring 237 Check valve
16 Shaft seal 83 O>ring 238 Orifice
17 O>ring 84 O>ring 239 Check valve
18 O>ring 240a Orifice (1)

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.28.03

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic motor "FMV"

3. Adjustment of the variable displacement motors

The hydraulic variable displacement motor is adjusted by manufacturer and should not be readjusted
under normal conditions. Problems with the regulation function or minimal fluctuations in the basic
adjustment can lead to an uneven reduced oil flow on both travel motors (the excavator will not travel
straight).
In the most cases a curving travel is not due to a wrong adjustment of the travel motors. Thus, before
attempting to readjust the travel motors, always perform following checks :
> Verify the proper function of the servo control circuit (especialy for travel movements)
> Make sure the regulation begin on both main working pumps is exactly the same.
> Check that the excavator does not travel straight only when travel motors are sviwelled back to
reduced angle.

3.1 To adjust the reduced displacement of the motors

> Hydraulic oil should be at operating temperature (between 50 and 70∞C).
> Remove the protective cover at the concerned sideframe, regarding that the laster rotating oil
motor must be matched to the slower motor.
> Loosen the lock nut 68 and unscrew the adjustment screw 67 for reduced oil flow, until the straight
travel of the machine is obtained.

Notice : During the adjustment of the reduced displacement, the servo pressure must apply
continuously to the control port of the motor.
For the machines on until the travel motors are swivelled from maximum to reduced angle
automatically the check must either be performed in such ground conditions that motor is kept in
reduced angle, or the hydraulic control circuit of the motor must be modified for the duration of test.

> After correct adjustment, retighten the lock nut 68 and reinstall the protectice cover.

4. Secondary pressure relief valves 129 to 132

These secondary pressure relief valves have been set at the factory and should not be readjusted, but in
case of real necessity.
If the prescribed pressure can no longer be obtained (refer to "Adjustment check list" in group 6.) the
complete relief valves must be replaced.
5. Irrigation of the "FMV" travel motors
The port L of the hydraulic motor is connected to the chamber S of the travel brake valve 205 which is at a
pressure somewhat higher then the motor housing > (port T).
Up to about 07 > 2000, the travel motors were fitted ex factory with an orifice 240a, to obtain a correct oil
flow for motor irrigation, see the modification mark (g) in subgroup 1.01 for exact serial numbers.
Since that date, the orifice is no longer installed in the motor, but, on the other hand, an orifice 240b has
been installed between chamber S and port L inside the brake valve 205, see subgroup 7.98.
6. Repairs and adjustments on hydraulic variable displacement motors "FMV"
Liebherr>hydraulic variable displacement motors "FMV" are maintenance free.
For resaling and repair work see the "Repair Instructions for Liebherr variable displacement oil motors
FMV".

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.28.05

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Edition : 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

Hydraulic cylinder

¡ Design of hydraulic cylinders, see also diagram on page 7.30>11

Liebherr hydraulic cylinders for earthmoving equipment are classified as differential cylinders.
The hydraulic cylinder extends when hydraulic oil is pumped to the piston bottom side and retracts
when oil is on the piston rod side.
The hydraulic cylinder consists of a cylinder housing 10 with welded cylinder bottom and bearing
mount, piston rod bearing 13.1, which is mounted with screws and is also the cylinder head and piston
rod 8 with bearing mount and piston 12.1, which is also mounted with screws.
To seal the pressure chambers towards the inside and the outside, O>rings with support rings as well as
glyd / rim seal and step seal rings are installed in piston 12.1 and piston rod bearing 13. The wiper ring
in the piston rod bearing 13.1 protects the piston rod 8 from contamination.
Guide rings are installed on the piston 12.1 and in piston rod bearing 13.1 to safely guide the piston rod.

A / R 900 B > R 944 7.30>01

Litronic
Issue: 02 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavator Hydraulic components

¬ Function

The maximum forces exerted during the operation of the cylinder are directly proportional to the
maximum working pressure and to the surface onto which the pressure is acting.
The speed of the extending or retracting cylinder is proportional to the the oil flow supplying the
working surface and inversely proportional to the working surface.
Cylinder extension Æ pressure is applied to front face of piston Æ greatest force & reduced speed
Cylinder retraction Æ pressure applied to ring surface of piston Æ reduced force & faster speed

Liebherr hydraulic cylinders differ in the required stroke, diameter (force) and damper or cushioning
system (end position damper).
We use cushioned and non>cushioned hydraulic cylinders in our excavators.
The non>cushioned hydraulic cylinders ( Variation III on page 7.30>11 ) are mainly used in the outrigger
support system and as certain (little used) attachment cylinders, such as grapple and adjustable
cylinders for on road travel.
Cushioned hydraulic cylinders can be single or dual cushioned, see also diagram on page 7.30>11
Variation I ( single ), or Variation II ( dual ).
On single cushioned cylinders (only when extending the piston rod), the cushioned sleeve 9 moves
shortly before the piston 12 stops on the piston rod bearing 13 into the piston rod bearing and reduces
the flow diameter of the displaced oil.
This greatly reduces the extension speed, see also description of function.
On dual cushioned cylinders, when extending the piston rod 8, the cushioning sleeve 9 is actuated, see
single cushioning above. When retracting the piston rod 8, the cushioning pin 31 moves into the
cylinder bottom shortly before the piston 12 stops on the cylinder bottom 10 and reduces the flow
diameter of the displaced oil. This reduces the retraction speed, see also description of function.

02 / 2000
7.30>02
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

Function of hydraulic cylinders with cushioning devices, see also diagram on page 7.30>11
1. With single cushioned cylinders
1.1 To extend piston rod 8
The hydraulic oil coming from the control valve block flows to the bottom side of cylinder 10 and
actuates piston 12. The piston rod extends and displaces the hydraulic oil in the piston rod side via
the control valve block to the tank.
Shortly before the end of the stroke, the cushioning sleeve 9 moves into the cushioning bore on
the piston rod bearing 13 .
When the cushioning sleeve 9 moves into the bore, the diameter is reduced, i.e. the oil returns
from the hydraulic cylinder to the control valve via three grooves around the circumference of the
sleeve 9.
Because of the restriction of the return oil, the piston rod movement is slowed down and
cushioned.
1.2 To retract the piston rod 8
The hydraulic oil coming from the control valve block flows via the connection to the piston rod
bearing 13, pushes on the front surface the cushioning sleeve 9 via the gap ( between the
cushioning sleeve 9 and the piston rod 8 or piston rod bearing 13 ), radial bore holes and grooves
in the cushioning sleeve on piston 12.
The piston rod retracts and displaces the hydraulic oil on the piston bottom side via the control
valve block to the tank.

2. With dual cushioned cylinders

2.1 To extend piston rod 8
The hydraulic oil coming from the control valve block flows via the connection into the cylinder
botom and actuates the cushioning pin 31, and > via the length groves > the piston 12.
The piston rod 8 extends > for additional function, see description 1.1.
2.2 To retract piston rod 8
The hydraulic oil coming from the control valve block flows via the connection into the piston rod
bearing 13, pushes on the front surface of the cushioning sleeve 9 via the gap (between the
cushioning sleeve and the piston rod 8), radial bore holes and grooves in the cushioning sleeve 9
on piston 12.
The piston rod retracts and displaces the hydraulic oil on the piston bottom side to the tank.
Shortly before the end sof the stroke, the cushioning pin 31 is pushed into the bottom of cylinder
10. When the cushioning sleeve 9 moves into the bore, the diameter is reduced, i.e. the oil returns
from the hydraulic cylinder to the control valve via two grooves around the circumference of the
sleeve 31.
Because of the restriction of the return oil, the piston rod movement is slowed down and
cushioned.

A/R 900 B > R 944 7.30>03

Litronic
Issue: 02 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

ƒ Removal and installation of the hydraulic cylinder

Note
Before removing the hydraulic cylinder, special safety measures must be taken to prevent injury to the
service technician and other personnel:
> Park the machine on level ground and lower the attachment or outriggers to the ground (situate the
cylinder to facilitate installation or removal).
> Turn the Diesel engine off, relieve the hydraulic pressure in the hydraulic lines (by actuating the
joysticks several times to the stop > with ignition turned on and servo control / safety lever ) .
> Relieve the hydraulic tank pressure (by loosening the bleeder filter in the maintenance cover. )
> Secure the hydraulic cylinder by attaching it to a lift.
If necessary, secure the attachment sections accordingly.

1. Removal
1.1 Remove the hydraulic hoses and catch the hydraulic oil in an appropriate container.
If ncessarz, remove the connector block with pressure line on the piston rod bearing and cylinder
bottom. Close off lines with plates or screw fittings / plugs.

1.2 For resealing work on the excavator :

Release the bearing pin on the piston rod and knock it out or use a pin puller, if necessary.

1.3 For complete removal :

Release both bearing pins and knock them out or use a pin puller, if necessary.

2. Installation
2.1 Set the hydraulic cylinder into the bearing with a lift, aligning the bores of the cylinder and the
attachment or outrigger.
Lightly grease the bearing pin and knock it in or use the tool, if necessary.
2.2 Bleed the hydraulic cylinder .
Connect the piston bottom side line and slowly extend the cylinder (at low idle RPM) and extend
it carefully all the way, so that the air in the cylinder can fully escape on the rod side ( make sure
to catch any emerging oil ).
Then connect the piston rod side line and slowly retract and extend the cylinder several times )at
low idle RPM), so that the remaining air in the cylinder can be relieved to the tank. Then tighten
all lines and / or screw connections of the flange and check for the correct tightening torque.
2.3 Start the Diesel engien and extend or retract the hydraulic cylinder to the point where the
bearing bore holes of the piston rod and the attachment or outriggers align. Lightly grease the
bearing pin and knock it in or use the tool for installation.
2.4 Secure both bearing pins accordingly.
2.5 Move the attachment or outriggers and check the function and for leaks between the cylinder
and the hydraulic connections. Connect the line.

02 / 2000
7.30>04
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

ƒDisassembly, assembly and resealing works on

the hydraulic cylinder
Remove the hydraulic cylinder partly or all the
way from the attachment or outrigger, see
Removal and Installation, in ß √.
Note :
The following drawings are partial drawings
from the diagram on page 7.30>11.

1) Removal
1
Remove the hex head screw 20 with
washer 33 and pull the piston rod bearing
13.1 complete with piston rod 8 and piston
12 from cylinder 10.
Prepare a clean area for the piston rod an
dmake sure it is not damaged during
placement.
Remove the piston guide rings 12.2 / 12.6
and the piston nut 4 .
Attach a piston wrench (special tool, see
page 2.05.08) on the piston 12.1 and
remove the piston from the piston rod 8 .
On hydraulic cylinders with cushioning:
Pull off the cushioning sleeve 9.
2
Pull the piston rod bearing 13.1 from the
piston rod 8 .
Remove all seals from the piston and the
piston rod bearing.

A / R 900 B > R 944 7.30>05

Litronic
Issue: 02 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

Installation of piston onto the piston rod Piston 12.1 Install. and spreader sleeve
Pull the O>ring 12.3 and Turcon>Glyd>ring 12.4 with
an installation and spreader sleeve (speical tool, see
page 2.05.06 ) onto the piston 12.1 .
Note :
Lightly heat the turcon Glyd>ring 12.4 for easier
installation in oil or water (max. 120∞ C) .
Use a piston ring compressore to retighten the glyd>
Ring 12.4 immediately after installation. O>ring 12.3
Set the first support ring 12.7, O>ring 12.8 and the 6
Turcon Glyd>Ring 12.4
second support ring in this order into the piston.
Lubricate the O>ring lightly with oil.
Set the piston wrench (special tool, page 2.05.08 ),
onto the piston and tighten it.

Note:
The previously available or in>house made piston
wrenches did not feature the required square to
insert a torque wrench.
For safety reasons, we advise against modifying these
wrenches, as an example welding on a socket wrench
die.
Afterwards available wrenches are already equipped 7
with the square cut out, as shown in the drawing on
page 2.10.01.
Carefully clean all contact surfaces (thread and
mounting surface between piston rod, piston and
piston nut ) and make sure to lubriate them with
"Gleitmo 800" lubricant ( see service fluids, page
1.50.05 ) thinly on both sides .

Note:
If the parts are installed without lubrication, the 8
correct torsional path according to factory standard
cannot be reached and as a result, they cannot be Piston wrench 8
disassembled at a later date (parts seize up).
Attach the piston 12.1 with a torque wrench onto
the piston rod 8. Attach the torque wrench as
Piston 12
shown in fig. 9 and install the piston with the correct
pre>torque, see factory standards 4121 on page
7.30>09 onto the piston rod.
MV
Then mark the piston rod thread and piston, see fig.
Torque wrench
11, and install the piston with a torque wrench with
the correct torsional path, see factory standard 4121
on page 7.30>09 onto the piston rod. FV
Remove the piston wrench and torque wrench.
Piston wrench

A / R 900 B > R 944 7.30>07

Litronic
Issue: 02 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

≈ Tightening values and procedures

Tightening values for cylinder pistons and piston nuts

Factory standard Piston Piston nut

4121 Pre>torque Torsional path Torsional angle Torsional path Torsional angle
nb (in mm) ( l∞) (in mm) ( l∞)
071 100 11+1 30 21+1 57
072 100 21+1 57 21+1 57
073 100 18+1 49 19+1 52
075 100 19+1 52 21+1 57
079 100 11+1 30 21+1 57
091 100 13+1 30 18+1 41
092 100 25+1 57 18+1 41
093 100 24+1 55 18+1 41
095 100 13+1 30 18+1 41
096 100 10+1 23 18+1 41
112 150 17+1 35 15+1 31
121 150 15+1 29 20+1 38
123 150 17+1 32 20+1 38
151 150 15+1 27 19+1 34
152 150 20+1 35 19+1 34
171 150 12+2 20 23+1 39
173 150 19+2 32 23+1 39
174 150 25+2 42 23+1 39
175 150 25+2 42 23+1 39
179 150 11+2 19 23+1 39
201 200 20+2 30 23+1 35
202 200 26+2 39 23+1 35
203 200 27+2 41 23+1 35
204 200 27+2 41 23+1 35
205 200 13+2 20 > >
231 200 8+2 11 16+1 22
232 200 17+2 23 16+1 22
261 250 20+2 25 10+1 12
281 250 20+2 23 13+1 15
301 300 21+3 22 12+2 13
303 300 20+3 21 12+2 13
305 300 9+3 9 > >
331 400 23+3 22 20+2 19
361
405

Tightening torques for screws 20 (piston rod bearing > mounting)

SCREW TIGHTENING TORQUE (N.m)

Screw Screw
Coated
without with
Size Type screw
washer washer
M12 10.9 106 110
M16 10.9 290 270
12.9 340
M20 10.9 565 510
M24 10.9 900
12.9 1200

A / R 900 B > R 944 7.30>09

Litronic
Issue: 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators Hydraulic components

∆ Exploded and section views

Version I

Version Z2
Version Z1

Version II

Version I Hydraulic cylinder with one > sided cushioning

( without Pos. 30, 31 and 32 )

Version II Hydraulic cylinder with dual sided cushioning

Various piston
Version III Hydraulic cylinder without cushioning
nut versions
In this case, positions 9, as well as Pos. 30, 31 and 32 are not applicable.

1 Bushing 13 Piston rod bearing, compl. 15 Radial seal ring

4 Piston nut 13.1 Bearing head 16 Bearing
8 Piston rod 13.3 Scraper ring, complete with 18 Sicherungsring
O>ring
9 Cushioning sleeve 20 Hex head screw
13.6 Scraper ring, one sided
10 Cylinder (new) 25 Ring
12 Piston, complete 13.7 O>ring 30 Split ring with O>ring
12.1 Piston 13.8 Spiral ring 31 Cushioning pin
12.2 Guide ring 13.9 Zurcon>Rimseal>Ring (dark 32 Threaded bushing
12.3 O>ring gray, shiny, see also page 33 Washer
7.30>06 )
12.4 Turcon Glyd>Ring 990 Socket wrench for Pos. 32,
13.10 Turcon>Stepseal>Ring (light see special tools on page
12.6 Guide ring gray, matte finish)
2.05>08
12.7 Support ring 13.11 O>ring
12.8 O>ring 13.12 O>ring
13.13 Guide ring

02 / 2000
7.30>10
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Regulating and Servo Oil Unit

The purpose of the servo oil unit is to generate a servo pressure at a constant value, regulating pressures for
the working pumps and also pressure signals to control various components or working procedures.
Generation of servo pressure
> The unit is supplied with hydraulic oil via its connection P from the gear pump 30..
The cartridge type pressure relief valve 51 is mounted to the unit and limits the servo pressure to a certain
value (see subgroup ∫Pressure Chart™, in section 6).
The oil flows from there via filter 52 and check valve 53 to the accumulator 54. This accumulator
maintains the servo pressure and makes it possible to apply a few functions after the engine is turned off
or if gear pump 30 is not functioning.
> The connection P1, right behind the filter 52, serves to feed the regulating unit of the working pumps
with servo pressure.

Function of the switching solenoid valves

> Via internal bores in the servo oil unit, the
servo pressure flows in addition to the
solenoid valves Y3, 24 and Y7, to the
commutation valve 58 and to the
regulating solenoid valves Y50 and Y51.
> When the solenoid valves Y3, Y24 and Y7
are actuated electrically, the outlets A1,
resp. A2 and A3 are connected with servo
pressure. If the solenoid valves are not
actuated, the outlets A1, A2 and A3 are
connected with tank pressure.

The solenoid valve Y3 switches the servo

pressure to the joystick and pedals control valves
(servo control system).

The solenoid valve Y24 applies the servo

pressure to the circuit controlling the swivel
angle of the hydraulic travel motors.
The solenoid valve Y7 controls the multi discs
brake in the swing gear.
The solenoide valve Y78 which is flanged to the
oil unit 50 controls the cut>off for the LS pressure
"close grapple" when the grapple operation is
turned on.

A / R 900 B 07.42.01
A / R 924 Litronic Issue : 09 / 2001
6001Æ
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Regulating and Servo Oil Unit

Regulating solenoid valves for power control and oil

flow limitation of the working pumps

> The regulating solenoid valves (RSV) deliver at their

exit a pressure which is related to their solenoid
valve current.
> The exit "LR" of the RSV Y50 on the regulating unit
is further connected to the connection "GLR" of the
working pumps (port for the power regulating
pressure) .
In the usual execution of the machines, the
regulation of the working pumps is performed by
only one RSV for power regulation Y50 and one RSV
for flow limitation Y51 .
> The RSV Y51 controls the pressure at exit "LS",
determining the flow limitation on the working
pumps. This pressure is further connected to the
port Pst of the pump regulator, where it causes via
the LS regulator, a reduction of the preadjusted
Fig. 3 pressure EP(LS), and as a consequence of the
maximum possible pump flow.
This pressure is thus called p(EPLS) in the remaining
subgroups of this book.
> In the usual execution of the machines, the
regulation of the working pumps is performed by
only one RSV for power regulation Y50 and one RSV
for flow limitation Y51 .
In some cases, the mounting of various special
attachments makes it necessary to fit the servo oil
unit with additional RSV, after removal of the end
plates 50.5 and 50.6.

Fig. 4

07.42.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Regulating and Servo Oil Unit

Safety position of regulating solenoid valves

The solenoid valves Y50 and Y51 can be turned to a

fixed preadjusted safety position, by pulling out the pin
2 and tilting the lever 3 into horizontal position.
During operation with solenoid valve in safety position,
disconnect the connector 1, to cancel a possible
preponderent action of the regulating current.
Adjustment of safety position
To set the regulation pressure with valve in safety
position to a desired value, proceed as follows:
> Attach a pressure gauge to the fitting 59 (resp. 57) ,
> While the engine is running and with the lever 3 tilted
to safety position, loosen the counternut 5, and turn
the adjustment nut 4 until the pressure gauge shows
the prescribed value.
> Retighten the counternut 5 while holding the
adjustment nut 4. Check the pressure again after
adjustment completion.

07.42.04 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pedal Operated Servo Control Valve

3. Disassembly and Assembly of the pilot control valve

3.1 To disassemble

3.1.1 Remove the foot pedal 35 from housing 1.

Remove dust cover 32. remove screw 18.
Remove retainer plate 33 and plunger guide 4 with plunger 3 from housing 1.

3.1.2 Remove spring cup 6 with spool 8, regulating spring 9 and return spring 10 from housing 1.
Remove two piece shim 5, pull spool 8 from spring cup 6 and remove regulating spring 9.
Remove o>rings 11 and 12. Check all parts for damage and wear.

3.2 To assemble

3.2.1 Install support ring 7 and regulating spring 9 onto spool 8, push spool 8 into the spring cup 6 and
insert two piece shim 5. Insert return spring 10 and spool 8 complete into the housing 1.
Insert plunger guide 4 complete with o>rings 11 and 12 and plunger 3 into housing 1.

3.2.2 Reinstall retainer plate 33 and screw 18 ( secure with Loctite), pull dust cover 32 over plunger 3.
Mount foot pedal 35 onto housing 1.

4. To adjust pilot control valve in neutral position

In neutral position, screw 37 and plunger 3 must be adjusted in a way so that there is no play between screw
37 and the top of plunger 3.To adjust, remove rubber pad 36 from pedal 35.
Loosen lock nut 38 and turn adjustment screw 37 until both plungers are in neutral position and there is no
play between screw 37 and plunger 3.
After the adjustment is completed, tighten lock nut 38 and reinstall rubber pad 36.

1 Housing 33 Retainer plate

3 Plunger 34 Guide jacket
4 Plunger guide 35 Foot pedal
6 Two piece shim 36 Rubber pad
7 Support ring 37 Adjustment screw
8 Spool 38 Lock nut
9 Regulating spring 50 Plug
10 Return spring 52 Sleeve
11 O>ring 54 Seal
12 O>ring 55 Plug
18 Hex head screw 56 Seal
19 Two way check valve 57 Plug
32 Dust cover (rubber boot)

07.47.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Pedal Operated Servo Control Valve

3. Disassembly and Assembly of the pilot control valve

3.1 To disassemble
3.1.1 Remove the foot pedal 35 from housing 1.
Remove dust cover 32. remove screw 18.
Remove retainer plate 33 and plunger guide 4 with plunger 3 from housing 1.
3.1.2 Remove spring cup 6 with spool 8, regulating spring 9 and return spring 10 from housing 1.
Remove two piece shim 5, pull spool 8 from spring cup 6 and remove regulating spring 9.
Remove o>rings 11 and 12. Check all parts for damage and wear.
3.2 To assemble
3.2.1 Install support ring 7 and regulating spring 9 onto spool 8, push spool 8 into the spring cup 6 and
insert two piece shim 5. Insert return spring 10 and spool 8 complete into the housing 1. Insert
plunger guide 4 complete with o>rings 11 and 12 and plunger 3 into housing 1.
3.2.2 Reinstall retainer plate 33 and screw 18 ( secure with Loctite), pull dust cover 32 over plunger 3.
Mount foot pedal 35 onto housing 1.

1 Housing 19 Two way check valve

3 Plunger 32 Dust cover (rubber boot)
4 Plunger guide 33 Retainer plate
5 Two piece shim 34 Guide jacket
6 Retainer plate 35 Foot pedal
7 Support ring 37 Adjustment screw
8 Spool 38 Lock nut
9 Regulating spring 52 Sleeve
10 Return spring 54 Seal
11 O>ring 55 Plug
12 O>ring 56 Seal
18 Hex head screw 57 Plug

07.48.02 09 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator LSC Load Sensing Control Valves

1. Function description of the Load Sensing control valves

With piston rod in neutral position
All connections between the different canals are closed
Canal P: Pump pressure
Canal A: User pressure, e. g. cylinder pressure due to attachment load
Canal T: Return to tank
Canal LS: Load Sensing pressure signal
If all other piston rods are in neutral position at the same time, then all pressure readings in load
compensator 225 and in switching valve 227 equal tank pressure.

When control valve opens

When control valve 223 is switched slowly, first the connection between LS canal and switching valve 227 is
opened.
LS pressure (equalling tank pressure if no other piston rod is actuated simultaneously) also builds up in
chamber (c) via internal bore holes in valve 227.
After continued switching of control valve, control edge SA opens the connection from user canal A to
compensator 225. Pressure from A builds up in chamber (d) and continues into chamber (b) behind the
compensator via switching valve 227 and via the internal bore holes in the compensator.
The compensator 225 remains in its bore hole at the stop, and control edge SK remains closed (no
connection between chamber (a) and canal A > Load holding function).

A / R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 07.61.01

Issue : 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator LSC Load Sensing Control Valves

Position "Control valve switched"

If continued switching of rod 223 causes control edge Sp to open, then pump pressure builds up in chamber
(a) and also in the LS canal via bore holes in compensator 225.
As soon as pressure in (a) slightly exceeds pressure in user canal A and in chamber (b), it displaces compensator
to the left and edge SK opens connection to user.
Working pump now supplies oil to user. Pump regulating valve increases flow so that the EP between P and
LS (that is the EP on edge SP between P and A) remains at set value.
Oil flowing past the control valve is proportional to the cross section of the opening (edge P) and thus to the
servo pressure at the connection.

2. When two Load Sensing Control Valves are actuated simultaneously

Let us now consider the case when control valve 223 supplies oil to user ¡ (for example at pressure of P1=200
bar), and a second control valve 243 is also switched to supply user ¬ when pressure is reduced (e. g. P2=150
bar).
In the piston rod 223 that has previously been switched, the pressures in LS canal and at user ¡ is equal.
This amount of pressure also exists in LS canal of control valve 243. Switching control valve causes pressure to
build up via compensator 245 and switching valve 247 into chamber (c).

07.61.02 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator LSC Load Sensing Control Valves

Switching valve 247 is displaced to the right and LS pressure also actuates chamber (b) via bore holes in
compensator 245. Compensator is also displaced to the right (control edge SK closed).
If valve 243 is displaced further, then user pressure from canal A can expand to chamber (d) of switching
valve 247. This valve, however, was not displaced due to the higher pressure in (c).
Continued switching of valve 243 opens control edge SP and pressure in chamber (a) increases
progressively. As soon as this pressure slightly exceeds LS pressure in (b), compensator 245 is moved to the
left and control edge SK opens the way for pressure oil to user!¬.
Compensator 245 is now in regulating position and occasions at control edge SK a pressure reduction EP
equal to LS>P2 .
Whenever pressure variations in user ¬ occur, compensator 245 moves so that the pressure in (a) remains
equal to the pressure in LS. EP at edge Sk changes, but remains equal to the pressure difference P1 > P2
between users ¡ and ¬.

A / R 914 > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 07.61.03

Issue : 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Support Block for Load Sensing Valve Blocks

Valve 101
Besides, support block 100 contains the following valves,
for pressure limitation or to perform various operating
procedures (dependent on stage of operation):
101 LS pressure relief valve
102 Pump high pressure relief valve
104 Switching valve / travel motors displacement
control (fig.8 is decaying for "A" machines)
105 Switching valve/ Travel movements
(fig.8 is decaying for "A" machines)
105.3 Throttle (fig. 8 and 9)
105.4 Check valve (fig. 8 and 9)
106 Valve / LS switch>off during grapple operation
106.4 Check valve (fig. 8 and 9)
107 Pressure holding valve / Return to tank T (fig. 8)
108 Pressure holding valve/ Return to K (fig. 8)
110 Valve / Return oil recycling boom + stick
110.1 Switching valve (fig. 8)
110.2 Check valve (fig. 8)
Fig.6
110.3 Piston
110.4 Piston
115 Throttle boom cylinder (fig. 3) 1 Valve cartridge
116 Throttle stick cylinder (fig. 3) 2 Seal nut
3 Adjustment screw
4 Spring plate
2. Valve function on support block 100 5 Spring
6 Valve insert
LS pressure relief valve 101
7 Valve cone
Maximum LS pressure is limited internally in support block
to a preadjusted value via the pressure relief valve.
Valve 102
Thus maximum pump high pressure is limited to maximum
pressure value plus EP(LS) via pump regulating valve .
If, for instance, a user is displaced to the stop, then the
working pump is swivelled back by its LS regulating valve
so that only oil leakage is covered and maximum pressure
is maintained (secondary pressure relief valves set at
higher values do not activate).

Pump high pressure relief valve 102

Valve 102 limits pressure difference between pump high
pressure and LS pressure to a value above the adjusted
EP(LS) on the pumps.
The valve limits pressure peaks occurring due to the
dynamic behavior of the pumps without being reduced by
EP regulating valve (e. g. during jerky close of spool rod,
when starting drive motors, ...).
Fig.7 1 Valve cartridge
The valve is set ex works and cannot be checked or
readjusted. 2 Adjustment
screw
3 Spring
4 Spring plate
5 Valve insert
6 Valve cone

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.62.03

Issue : 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Support Block for Load Sensing Valve Blocks

Switching valve 104 for travel motor adjustment

This valve controls the adjustment of the travel motors between maximum and reduced displacement.
The switching rod of valve 104 connects:
> either connection "M" (connected to the control connection of the travel motors) and connection "P4" of
the support block, where servo pressure is standing by. The hydraulic travel motors are positioned for
reduced flow (i. e. maximum travel speed) in this case.
> or connection "M" to the tank. In this case, travel motors are adjusted to maximum flow.
NOTE: Servo pressure stands by at connection "P4" only if high>speed travel is preselected via push button
S21 (rabbit symbol) .
The switching rod of the valve is controlled by pressure "LS Travel".
If pressure in the LS canal increases until the rod is displaced toward pretension spring 30, then the rod
connects "M > Tank".
"LS Travel"pressure sharply decreases so that the rod can be switched back to neutral position (connection
"M > P4"). (See pressure values for switching on and off on "Technical Data" page.)

Fig.8

07.62.04 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Support Block for Load Sensing Valve Blocks

07.62.06 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Support Block for Load Sensing Valve Blocks

Pressure Holding Valves 107 and 108 (fig.8)

These valves maintain a certain amount of counter>pressure in the return circuit of the valve blocks (to
avoid cavitation).
At normal operating temperatures, oil flows back to the hydraulic oil cooler via pressure maintaining valve
108. When the hydraulic oil is cold, counter>pressure in the return circuit increases. Valve 107, set slightly
higher, opens and permits the oil to flow back to the tank, in part directly. The hydraulic oil cooler is thus
protected from pressure peaks.
Pistons 110.3 and 110.4 in valve 110 can increase the response pressure of valves 107 and 108 for specific
working procedures.

Valve110 for return oil Boom and Stick (fig.8)

Servo pressures at "y1" of valve block 220 (retract boom cylinder) as well as at connection "x2" of valve
block 240 (extend stick cylinder) are connected to valve 110 via internal bore holes in support block 100.
When actuating any of the above mentioned movements, switching valve 110.1 is switched via switching
valve 110.2 . Servo pressure standing by at connection "P3" of support block 100 builds up at the outer
surfaces of valves 110.3 and 110.4.
These valves then supply the cones of valves 107 and 108 with force that acts in the same direction as the
pretensioned springs in the valves.
The resulting counter>pressure increase in the tank canal of the support block facilitates oil suction at the
rod side of the boom cylinder (or at the piston bottom of the stick cylinder). Any cavitation is thus
prevented when oil is returned from both sides of the cylinder.

Solenoid valve Y53 for thermostatic regulation of hydraulic oil cooling

serially mounted since machines A 914 n∞ 6198, R 914 n∞ 6676, A 924 n∞ 6367 and R 924 n∞ 6282.
see fig. 11 et 12 and subgroup 6.68,
Since above mentionned serial numbers, the valve block 110 has been fitted with a regulation solenoid
valve Y53 and a two way check valve 110.6 which regulate, depending on the hydraulic oil temperature,
the pressure inside piston 110.4 and, by the fact, the counterpressure in holding valve 108, and also the oil
flowing throug the cooler 6.
As the oil is cold, Y53 connects the piston 104 with the servo control pressure and the opening pressure of
holding valve 108 is high. The whole amount of oil flows back to tank via the holding valve 107, the cooler
is bypassed.
When the oil is hot, Y53 connects the piston 104 with tank pressure, the opening pressure of valve 108 is
reduced to approx. 3 bar. All the oil flows back to tank over the cooler 6.

Throttle for Boom Cylinder 115 (fig.4)

This throttle is mounted at piston bottom on boom cylinders and limits the retraction speed of the boom
cylinder.

Throttle for Stick Cylinder 116 (fig.4)

This throttle is mounted at rod side on boom cylinders and limits the extension speed of the stick cylinder.

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.62.07

Issue : 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Load Sensing Valve Blocks

1. Mounting Valve Blocks

The valve blocks come in a plate valve version. They are flanged directly to the valve board, either at the
front (valve blocks 220, 240 and 260) or laterally (valve blocks 160 / 280 and 180).
In case special equipment is used, the valve blocks additionally required are flanged between valve 160 or
180 and end plates 123.
T, P and LS connections between the valve block and valve board occur via internal canals and bore holes in
the flange on the connection surface.
Both user connections "A" and "B" are located at the front (as seen from direction of travel).
In the case of valve blocks actuating the hydraulic cylinders, connection "A" is always connected to the
large piston surface and connection "B" to the rod side of the cylinder.

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.63.01

Issue: 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Load Sensing Valve Blocks

19 Control cover
20 Control spring
21 Washer

220 Valve block / boom cylinder

220.1 Adjustment screw/ stroke limitation
(control pressure in "y")
220.2 Adjustment screw / stroke limitation
(control pressure in "x")
220.3 Restrictor check valve / control
pressure in "x"
220.4 Restrictor check valve/ control
pressure in "y"
220.7 Pressure relief & deaeration valve/
control pressure in "x"
220.8 Pressure relief & deaeration valve/
control pressure in "y"
221 Secondary pressure relief valve /
output "A"
222 Secondary pressure relief valve /
output "B"
223 Control valve
225 Pressure compensator (PÆA)
226 Pressure compensator (PÆB)
227 Switching valve
228 Switching valve
240 Valve block / stick cylinder
260 Valve block / bucket tilt cylinder

07.63.02 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Load Sensing Valve Blocks

2. Valve Blocks for Drive of Working Cylinder

The following describes valve block 220 for the boom.
The same description applies to the following valve blocks:
> 240 for stick movements
> 260 for bucket tilt movements
> 280 for outrigger movements (only "A" machines)
> 500 for the hydraulic hammer
> 520 for additional cylinder

Control valve 223 contains the two pressure compensators 225 and 226 where the switching valves 227 and
228 are located.
The control valve regulates the oil flow to the connected user depending on the pressure standing by at
connection "x" or "y". This also depends on the pressure in the LS canal and the total flow of the working
pumps. For exact function description of control valve, see sub>group 7.61.
Stop screws 220.1 and 220.2 limit piston stroke and thus also the flow amount when the nominal value
EP(LS) is reached in the piston rod.
Due to washer 21, pretensioning of regulating springs 20 and thus control pressure can be adjusted for
opening .
Depending on the user and the replenished user side, control pressure connections "x" and "y" (thread
bore holes) may come with restrictor check valves, e. g. position 220.3 in the following cross section. (The
charts in sub>group 7. 68 provide the elements and nominal values of the pressure relief valves for the
individual valve blocks).
Valves 220.7 and 220.8 limit pressure and vent the servo oil in both covers 19 .
Secondary pressure relief valves 221 and 222 come with cartridges and are screwed in opposite each user
connection on the valve block housing. They limit the pressure arising between the control valve and the
user on the secondary side to adjustable maximum values. They also possess an integrated suction
function, i.e. they permit the oil to flow from the tank connection to the user connection as soon as the
pressure in "A" or "B" falls below the pressure in "T".
Suction valves 281 and 282 come with cartridges and are screwed into the valve block underside and
upperside of the user connections on the valve block housing.They permit, if necessary, the oil flow from
"T" to the user connections "A" or "B", avoiding so the cavitations.

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.63.03

Issue: 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Load Sensing Valve Blocks

19 Control cover
20 Control spring
21 Washer

160 Valve blocks / Travel right

160.1 Adjustment screw / Stroke
limitation (control pressure in "y")
160.2 Adjustment screw / Stroke
limitation (control pressure in "x")
160.3 Restristor check valve / control
pressure in "x"
160.4 Restristor check valve / control
pressure in "y"
160.5 Suction valve / output "A"
160.6 Suction valve / output "B"
160.7 Pressure relief & deaeration valve /
control pressure in "x"
160.8 Pressure relief & deaeration valve/
control pressure in "y"
163 Control valve
165 Pressure compensator valve (PÆA)
166 Presssure compensateur valve (PÆB)
167 Switch
168 Switch
180 Valve blocks / Travel left

07.63.04 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Load Sensing Valve Blocks

3. Valve Blocks for the Drive of Hydraulic Motors

The following describes valve block160 for the right travel gear.
The following description also applies to the valve block:
> 180 for left travel gear
Control valve 163 contains the two pressure compensators 165 and 166 where the switching valves 167 and
168 are located.
The control valve limits oil flow to the user connected depending on the control pressure standing by at
connectioon "x" or "y". This also depends on the pressure in the LS canal and the total oil flow from the
working pumps. For exact function description of control valve, see sub>group 7.61.
Stop screws 160.1 and 160.2 limit the piston stroke and thus regulate flow when the nominal value EP(LS) is
reached in the piston rod.
Due to washer 21, the pretensioning of regulating springs 20 and thus control pressure can be adjusted for
opening.
Depending on the user and replenished user side, control pressure connections "x" and "y" (thread bore
holes) may come with restrictor check valves, e. g. position 160.4 in the following cross section. (Charts in
sub>group 7.68 provide elements and nominal values of the pressure relief valves for the individual valve
blocks).
Valves 160.7 and 160.8 limit pressure and vent the servo oil in both covers 19 .
Suction valves 160.5 and 160.6 come with cartridges and are screwed in opposite each user connection in
the valve block housing. They permit oil flow from the tank connection to the user connection as soon as
the pressure in "A" or "B" falls below the pressure in "T".

A / R 914 > 924 SN 6001Æ 07.63.05

Issue: 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Leak Oil Check > Control Valve Blocks

The amount of leak oil in a spool valve of a control valve block is determined by measuring the extension
or retraction speed of a hydraulic cylinder connected to this spool valve.
The maximum permissible leak oil quantity in the control valve should be checked at a load pressure of 150
bar and at a temperature of 50∞ C (122∞ F).
Before any leak oil test on the control valves, always check the secondary valves and the attachments
cylinders separately, since the quantity given in the leak oil chart is only for leakage of the control valves.
To check, install a 0>600 bar pressure gauge in the appropriate line > between the attachment cylinder and
the control valve. Actuate the attachment cylinder several times all the way and extend the cylinder until
a pressure of 150 bar is shown on the pressure gauge (if necessary, add weight). Mark the piston rod and
measure the piston rod travel per minute.
Compare the measurement with the maximum permissible piston rod travel given on the chart.
Use the chart overleaf to determine the maximal allowable speed of the hydraulic cylinder, and / or the
actual leak oil amount in the spool valve.
For the maximal allowable leak oil quantity, refer to the page "General Data" of the corresponding
control valve block.

Notice : The chart overleaf can be used directly everytime one hydraulic cylinder receives oil via one
spool valve.
If one and only hydraulic cylinder is connected in parallel with two spool vales, double the
maximum allowable extension or retraction speed.
If two hydraulic cylinders are fed by only one spool valve, the maximum allowable speed
must be cut in two.

A / R 900B > 924 SN 6001Æ

A / R 934 > 944 SN 5001Æ
07.64.01
Issue : 10 / 2001
 Extension speed of hydraulic cylinder
Retraction speed of hydraulic cylinder

Example 1
On R 914 the stick cylinder (piston diameter D=140 mm and rod diameter d=95 mm) is controlled by the spool
valve 220 (with nominal size 25).
For this control valve block (NW 25) maximum permissible leak oil per spool valve is 100 cm3 / min.
The chart above indicates a maximum allowable retraction speed of the cylinder of 6.5 mm / min.
The chart above indicates a maximum allowable extension speed of the cylinder of 12 mm / min.
Example 2
On R 954 the stick cylinder (piston diameter D=180 mm and rod diameter d=125 mm) is controlled by two spool
valves of a 7 way control valve block NS 32.
For this control valve block (NS 32) maximum permissible leak oil per spool valve is 210 cm3 / min.
The chart above indicates a maximum allowable retraction speed of the cylinder of 16.5 mm / min.
The chart above indicates a maximum allowable extension speed of the cylinder of 32 mm / min.

07.64.02 10 / 2001
 Control Valves R 900 B > R 904 > R 914 > R 924 > R 934 > R 944

Load Sensing Control Valves Fa. Rexroth

Machine from Serial Control Valve / Description,
type number Nominal Size see sub group ....

R 900 B 6001 Æ 5 way / NW 22 > 16 7.66

R 904 6001 Æ 5 way / NW 22 > 16 7.66

Load Sensing Control Valves Fa. Linde

Machine from Serial Control Valve / Description, see sub group ....
type number Nominal Size Technical Data Support Bloc Control Valve

R 914 6001 Æ 5 way / NW 22 > 16 7.68.01 7.62 7.61 / 7.63

R 924 6001 Æ 5 way / NW 22 > 16 7.68.01 7.62 7.61 / 7.63

Control Valves for Throttle Control Fa. Rexroth

Serially mounted

Machine from Serial Control Valve / Description,

type number Nominal Size see sub group ....

R 934 5001 Æ 7 way / 22 7.72

R 944 5001 Æ 7 way / 22 7.72

For additional attachment

Machine from Serial Control Valve / Description,

type number Nominal Size see sub group ....

R 934 5001 Æ 1 & 2 way / 22 7.73

R 944 5001 Æ 1 & 2 way / 22 7.73

Typ
Benennung/Description/D±nomination
Model R 900 B > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valves > Chart From
Depuis
SN 5001 / 6001
Edition
09.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.65.01
Service manual Hydraulic Excavators LSC > Control Valve

LSC > Control valve block

Type M7 > 1168>00 M7 > 1171>00 M7 > 1209>00

Mounted on machines R 900 B z R 904 z R 904 zz

220 240 260 160 180 120

Control piston Hoist cylinder Stick cylinder Bucket cylinder Travel motor Travel motor Swing gear
for
Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Forward Reverse left right

Nominal width Block mm 22 22 22 22 22 20

User connection (") (3/4") (3/4") (3/4") (3/4") (3/4") (3/4")

e Spool (mm) 25 25 25 25 25 25

Spool stroke mm 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 9 9
Dimension Y mm 17,0 15,5 15,8 15,8 16,0 15,7 15,5 15,5 15,5 15,5 16,0 16,0
17,0 15,7 15,8 15,8 17,0 16,5 15,5 15,5 15,5 15,5 15,8 15,8

p1 (bar) ±0.5 7,0 7,0 7.0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7,0 7.0 7.0 7.0 7.0

p2 (bar) ±0.5 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6 20,6

Qn (A) / Qn (B)
R 900 B z (l/min>1) 250 70 250 145 180 140 125 125 125 125 120 120
R 904 z (l/min>1) 300 70 300 260 225 175 150 150 150 150 120 120
R 904 zz (l/min>1) 300 70 300 110 225 175 150 150 150 150 120 120

PR valves
on connection a (mm) 0,8 0,8 > > 0.8 0.8
on connection b (mm) 0,8 0,8 > > 0.8 0.8

Leak oil, max. cm3/ min 60 60 60 60 60 60

at load pressure 150 bar
and oil temperature 50 ∞C

Qn (A) / Qn (B) = Nominal flow on outlet A / B at Ep= Nominal valve

p1 = Control pressure at control begin
p2 = Control pressure in end position

For procedure and instructions to check the leak oil quantity with spools in
neutral position, refer to sub group 7.64.

z Machines with "construction" attachment

zz Machines with "industrial" attachment

Adjustment value Y is only a standard value!

A 900 B > A 904 Li 7.66>01

from 6001
Issue: 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavators LSC > Control Valve

Pos Description
7 Pretension valve ( 3.5 bar )
8 Pretension valve ( 7. 0 bar )
41 Test point/ pump pressure
45 Test point / LS pressure
100 Control valve block, 5 > way
102 Pressure balance, minimum flow
103 Pressure balance, remaining flow
104 LS pressure relief valve (pr. cut
off)
105 Primary pressure relief valve
107 Shuttle valve
120 Spool valve / swing
122 Inlet pressure balance
123 Check valve
125 PR valve with pressure cut in
stage
126 Shuttle valve
127 Restrictor check valve
160 Control spool / Travel right
161 Suction valve
162 Suction valve
164 Pressure balance
167 Restrictor check valve
180 Control spool / Travel left
181 Suction valve
182 Suction valve
184 Pressure balance
187 Restrictor check valve
220 Control spool / Hoist cylinder
221 Sec. PR valve / out
222 Sec. PR valve / in
224 Pressure balance
227 Restrictor check valve
240 Control spool / Stick cylinder
241 Sec. PR valve / in
242 Sec. PR valve / out
244 Pressure balance
247 Restrictor check valve
260 Control spool / Bucket cylinder
261 Sec. PR valve / in
262 Sec. PR valve / out
264 Pressure balance

10 / 2000
7.66>02
2. General
The new LIEBHERR > Litronic excavator generation is equipped with a LSC hydraulic control.
The control valve block necessary for the LS control has been designed as a compact block 100 with 5
piston axles and the corresponding valves. For additional working movements, additional elements with
one axle each can be flanged on: for example axle > swing gear 120 and axle > grapple rotary drive 540.

3. Set up of control valve block

3.1 Input area :
Connection "P" for flow from variable displacement pump
Connection "K" for return oil to hydraulic oil cooler
Connection "MP" for working pressure test
Connection "MLS" for external LS > Signal from left control valve block side and added axles ( for
example: swing gear )
Connection "LS" with Shuttle valve 107 for LS Signal line to LS > Regulator 23.5 of pump
Pretension valve 7 in Block for return back> up pressure
Input pressure balance 102 for stabilization of LS > pressure
Unloading> / Open Center Valve 103 for quick and direct response behavior in system
Pressure cut off 104 as pressure limiting valve for working pressure (load Sensing pressur limitation)
Primary pressure relief valve 105 to secure the systems (limitation of the prssure peaks at pump
output, as for example when closing a spool)
Control and distribution area:
Connections A1 > A5 and B1 > B5 for supply and return flow of users
Connection T for return oil to hydraulic oil tank 1
Connection S for direct suction line of swing motor 130
Connection H for servo oil from servo oil unit 50
Connection LS1 for LS > Signal to right control valve block side
Pretension valve 8 in block for return and cooler relief
Control piston 160, 180, 220, 240, 260 for working movements of boom, stick, bucket, travel gear.
Restrictor check valves 167, 187, 227, 247 for fine control of control piston 160, 180, 220 and 240.
Control caps 15 for various axles with stroke limitation of control piston 160 / 180 / 220 / 240, control
pressure > connections a1 > a5 and b1 > b5 and Regulating and Return spring 91.
Pressure balance 164, 224, 244, 264, for LS > Signal > report and compensation of various axles.
Secondary > pressure relief valves 221, 222, 241, 242, 261, 262 to secure user circuit in closed
condition.
Suction valves 161, 162, 181, 182 to prevent cavitation of travel drive.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B > R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve Block "LSC" From
Depuis
6001
Edition
06.99 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.66.03
4. Function
4.1 Neutral position
All control pistons are held in neutral position by the regulating and return spring.
Connection pump connection > user is shut off.
Connection user > tank is shut off.
Pressure balances are in neutral position ( connections are shut off )
Open Center Valve 103 is open > preset flushing quantity from pump 20 flows to tank.
4.2 Working position
4.2.1 Working position of one control piston
Connection from section P to P' opens > oil flows
Pressure balance 73 is actuated and fully opened.
Drop in pressure (E>p ) between pump exit and load pressure at user (LS line) arises > pump supplies
oil.
Oil flows via the control edge of the pressure balance and the load holding valve 27 > 29 to section
PA or PB, to user connection A or B and to the user.
Open Center Valve 103 closes > oil from pump is available for the user.
4.2.2 Working position of several control pistons
Connection from section P to P' opens > oil flow.
Pressure balance is actuated and moved, depending on the available LS pressure on the spring side.
This means:
The user with the highest load pressure determines the LS> pressure.
Therefore the pressure balance of each control piston induces between its P' section and the user
connection a pressure drop which is equal to the difference between the highest load pressure and
the user load pressure.
The pressure in the P' section before each pressure balance is thus the same, and the pressure drop
EP(LS) in each main spool valve is the same as the spool valve for the user at the highest load
pressure.
The pump supplies oil depending on the oil requirement of all actuated users.
Oil flows via the control edge of the corresponding pressure balance and load holding valves 27 > 29
to section PA or PB, to user connections A or B and to the users.
Open Center Valve 103 closes > oil from pump is available for users.
4.3 Significant advantage of Load Sensing Control
4.3.1. Pump supplies only the oil requirement for the individual users.
4.3.2. The speed of the user is only determined by the control pressure applying to the control piston
and remains constant > independent of the load pressure of the individual user.

7.66.04
5. Repairs on control valve block
Caution : Before starting a repair on the control valve block, the tank pretension pressure must be
relieved.
To do so, slowly turn the bleeder filter on the hydraulic tank by a few turns.
In addition, back up pressures must also be relieved. To do so, turn the Diesel engine off
and bring the ignition key to contact position and move all pilot controls in all directions.
External leaks
In case of external leaks on control valve blocks, install new seal rings on screw fittings, cover and
valves.
Control piston
Unscrew the required control line. Unscrew the Allan head screws 20 and lift off the cover 15 .
Remove the spring 91 and pull the control pistons 40 > 44 from the housing.
Note : If several control pistons must be removed at the same time, make sure to install them in the
same bore hole. Mark them if necessary.
Before installation of the control pistons, check the condition of the o>rings in the housing
and check the condition of the control pistons (no grooves on the surface).
Install in reverse order.
Valves :
To repair the valves, unscrew them completely from the housing. Refer to section 7.80 > 7.99 for
description of disassembly.
After removal of the secondary pressure relief valves, the load holding valve 29 can be unscrewed
from the housing.
When installing the valves, make sure the outer seal rings are in immaculate condition.
To prevent damage, distortion and loosening up, the valves / plugs must be tightened with the given
tightening torque.

Tightening torques :
Allen head screw 20 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Nm
Load holding valve 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Nm
Plug 51 on pressure balance103 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 Nm
Pressure balance 164, 224, 244, 264, 284 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Nm
Pressure cut off 104 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Nm
Plug 77 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm
Suction valves 161, 162 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Nm
Pressure relief valves 105, 221, 222, 241, 242, 261, 262 . . . 120 Nm

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve block From
Depuis
6001
Edition
06.99 Repair Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.66.05
5.1 Installation notes
1. The installation surface must be absolutely level.
2. The mounting screws must be tightened evenly in crosswise direction.
3. The installation surfaces for the SAE connections must be clean.
4. Pipe and hose lines must be routed without tension.
5. Observe tightening torques for screws, fitting, etc., see section 1.20.

5.2 Maintenance
The control valve block must be checked regularly for leaks.
Pressure cut off 104 and secondary pressure relief valves must be checked regularly according to the
maintenance plan to ensure the adjustment is correct.
For the control procedure of the secondary pressure relief valves 105, 221, 241, 261, increase the
adjustment value of the pressure cut off 104 over the expected relief pressure, see "operating pressures"
and pressure adjustment instructions for hydraulic system, section 6.

7.66.06
6. Added control axles
6.1 Swing gear element
6.1.1 General
The swing gear has priority over other working functions, to raise the total design concept of
the LITRONIC excavator .
The swing gear element 120 is equipped with a control piston and the required valves for
priority control. The LUDV pressure balance, which is utilized in the other axles, is not required.
However, the element does include the 2 way pressure balance 122.
The E> p of this working circuit is significantly under that of the regular > E> p of the pump.
6.1.2 Set up of element
Connections A01 and B01 for supply and return of swing gear
Connection LSDR for LS > Signal to right control valve block side
Connection PstDR for control pressure connection of left pilot control
The Control spool 120 for swing movements of the uppercarriage
The Two way input pressure balance 122
Restrictor check valves 127 for fine control of control piston 120.
Coontrol caps 15 for axle with stroke limitation of control piston 120, control pressure
connections a01 and b01 and regulating and return spring 91.
The check valve 123 in the LS line eliminates influence on the swing gear by other, higher load
users who are actuated at the same time.
If the swing gear is accelerated, i.e. if the swing gear pressure is higher that that of other users,
the swing gear LS > pressure is reported to the pressure balance of the auxiliary users and the
pump, and as a result the swing gear still receives a sufficient amount of oil, even at higher
pressure.
The pressure relief valve 125 with control pressure actuation makes stepless pressure
regulating in the swing circuit possible (momentum control ).
For the fine control of the working piston, the control caps of the element also have restrictor
check valves.
6.1.3 Repairs on the control valve block
External leaks
In case of external leaks on the housing, install new seal rings into screw fittings, cover and
valves.
Control piston
Unscrew the required control line. Unscrew the allan head screws 20 and remove the cover 15.
Remove the spring 91 and pull the control piston 120 from the housing.
Valves
To repair the valves, remove them completely from the housing.
For possible disassembly, refer to section 7.80 > 7.99 .

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve Block From
Depuis
6001
Edition
06.99 Repair Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.66.07
6.2. Rotating device
6.2.1 General
For R > models, the element 540 is flanged on on the control valve block behind the swing gear
element. The working movement ™turn grapple™ is therefore supplied with oil via the main
working pump. The installed pressure balance creates the LS > signal for the system regulation.
Installed behind the control piston are the secondary pressure relief valves 541, 542 .
The piston is controlled electrically via solenoid valves Y22 and Y23 and the maximum servo
pressure from the servo oil unit.

7.66.08
Service manual Hydraulic Excavators LSC > Control Valve

R 900 B > 904 Litronic 07.66.09

6001Æ Issue : 10 / 2001
Service manual Hydraulic Excavators LSC > Control Valve

a
a

7 Pretension valve (3,5 bar) 115 Plug

8 Pretension valve (7 bar) 120* Spool valve / swing
10 End plate 121 Housing > Section swing
13 Housing > Section Grapple rotary drive 122* Inlet pressure balance
14 End plate 122.1 Valve body / Pressure balance
15 Control cap 122.2 Spring / Pressure balance
20 Allan head screw 122.3 Spring plate / Pressure balance
21 Allan head screw 122.4 Piston / Pressure balance
27 Poppet / Load holding valve 125* PR valve with pressure cut in stage
28 Pressure spring / Load holding valve 126* Shuttle valve
29 Valve insert / Load holding valve 127* Bleeder and damper valve
30 O> ring 160* Control piston / Travel drive
32 O> ring 161* Suction valve
33 O> ring 162* Suction valve
34 O> ring 164* Pressure balance
35 Plug 167* Bleeder and damper valve
36 Plug 180* Control piston / Travel drive
37 Orifice 181* Control piston / Travel drive
38 Plug 182* Suction valve
51 Plug 184* Pressure balance
61 Allan head screw 187* Bleeder and damper valve
62 Lock washer 220* Control piston / Boom cylinder
64 Allan head screw 221* Sec. pressure relief valve
67 Plug 222* Sec. pressure relief valve
90 Spring plate 224* Pressure balance
91 Regulating and return spring 227* Bleeder and damper valve
100 Control valve block 5 > way 240* Control piston / Stick cylinder
102 241* Sec. pressure relief valve
103 Pressure balance, remaining flow 242* Sec. pressure relief valve
103.1 Piston / Pressure balance (remaining flow) 244* Pressure balance
103.2 Spring / Pressure balance (remaining flow) 247* Bleeder and damper valve
103.3 Spring plate / Pressure balance (remaining 260* Control piston / Bucket cylinder
flow)
261* Sec. pressure relief valve
104 LS pressure relief valve (pr. cut off)
262* Sec. pressure relief valve
105 Primary pressure relief valve
264* Pressure balance
106 Valve > Travel motors displacement control
107 Shuttle valve
* Positions are ex hydraulic schema tic

07.66.10 10 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

3. Input area / input element

The input element contains the central functions of the system, such as primary relief (valve 79 ), LS >
pressure limitation (pressure cut off 74 ), acceleration behavior of the machine, LS flushing valve 52,
LS > relief 65, LS > central nozzle 37, as well as cooler pretension 103.
3.1 Pressure balance minimum flow ( input pressure balance ( LS > relief / LS >drain valve ) 65
see also drawing on page 7.66>16 and 7.66>17
The valve 65, which is screwed from below into block 11 continuously allows a small amount of oil
(approx. 0.7 l) to flow from the LS line to the tank, which relieves steep pressure increases in the
LS line, caused by impacts. In addition, if users are not actuated ( control spool in neutral
position), the LS line is relieved via valve 65 to the tank.
The 2>way flow limitation valve consists of a test orifice and a pressure balance with regulating
piston 65.2. The pressure balance keeps the drop in pressure Ep and thereby the flow of oil
contant, independent of the LS pressure. The Ep results from the selected cross section of the
test orifice (control spool).
The valve is not adjustable and is maintenance free. In case of problems, remove and check the
valve for contamination or broken spring. Replace the valve, if necessary.
In case of external leaks, reseal the valve with a new seal kit ( Pos 65.14 > 65.16 ) .
3.2 Pressure balance > remaining flow ( flushing valve / relief valve ) 52
see also drawings on page 7.66>16 and 7.66>17
The oil volume Qmin ( ca. 30 l / min ), which is continuously supplied in idle, creates the Ep of the
valve (spring 53 ) if the user is not actuated, and > due to the additional tank pretension > a stand
by pressure in the pump connection LS. The system pressure in this operating condition sets itself
to approx. 40 bar .
The stand by pressure moved the piston 52 via the integrated channels against the force of spring
53. The LS channel is relieved at the same time to the tank, via valve 65. This establishes the
connection from the pressure side P to the tank side T and the set amount flows off.
The valve in connection with the LS pump regulator ensures that in idle a volume flow of Qmin in
stand by pressure is set. The resulting output loss in this operating condition is correspondingly
low.
When a user is actuated, the load pressure of the user reaches piston 52. Pressure and spring force
move the piston 52 in proportion to the required amount and reduce the cross section of the
orifice to the tank.
If VQUser < Qmin, then the assigned quanity flows via the test orifice of the control spool with
priority to the user, due to the lower Epcontrol spool . The difference (Qmin > VQUser ) continues to
flow via the regulated control edge to the tank side.
As soon as the required quantities exceed Qmin on one or several control spools ( VQUser >
Qmin), valve 52 closes off completely und it closes off the connection to the tank side.
The system works above this quantity in " Closed Center " principle with the variable
displacement pump and sets the required quantity via the LS regulator. The LS regulator keeps
the adjusted Ep at a constant lvel, as long as the output required by the opened test orifice cross
section (control spool) and the highest load pressure remains under the set output hyperbole.
The system falls below satiation, as soon as this point is exceeded. The LS regulator on the pump
can no longer keep the adjusted Ep via the test orifice. The pump can no longer build up the
required pressure, since the maximum pump angle has been reached. The LS regulator has no
more power and the pump supplies the possible quantity at the exisiting load pressure within the
power regulation.

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>13

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > control valve block

The valve is not adjustable and is maintenance free. In case of problems, check all parts for
reucse, remove and check the valve for contamination or defects by removing the plug 51 and
removing items 52 > 54 from the housing 11. Replace as necessary.

3.3 Pressure cut off ( LS pressure cut off valve ) 74

see also drawings on page 7.66>16 > 7.66>18
The LS pressure cut off corresponds to a pressure regulation, which is adjusted back to Qmin after
reaching the set nominal pressure of the flow volume of the pump. This function is set above the
power and flow regulation of the pump, which means that below the set nominal pressure and
the output hyperbole, the flow regulation is load pressure dependent.
The reported LS pressure is determined by the user with the highest load pressure. If a user runs
against a mechanical stop (hoist end), then the reported load pressure increases suddenly and
moves the pump according to the power regulation back in direction of zero stroke ( Q>min ) .
The valve 74 prevents increase of load pressure to a theoretically infinitely high value and limits
thereby at the same time the maximum working pressure, which the pump creates. Due to the
pressure cut off, a certain pump flow remains available within the power regulation.
Valve 74 thereby prevents a standstill of parallel operated users, as soon as one or more users hit
the stop.
The valve must be checked and adjusted regularly, according to the maintenance schedule.

3.4 LS shuttle valve 76

see also drawings on page 7.66>16 and 7.66>17
The orifices of the LS shuttle 76 limit the flow to the LS regulator of the pump. The spread of an
abrupt pressure impulse to the regulator and therefore the pump regulation is prevented by the
cooperation of the different orifices with the pick up capacity of different cross sections in the LS
line. It smoothes out pressure impulses via the pulsation of the hose or the compressibility of the
oil volume. Due to this, the pump reacts not agressively and undesirably to short and steep
pressure peaks and is stable in its operating behavior.
In case of any problems, the valve 76 can be checked for contamination or correct function by
removing the valve insert and pulling out the dual sided poppet. Replace as necessary.

3.5 Primary pressure relief valve 79

see also drawings on page 7.66>16 and 7.66>27
The pilot controlled primary pressure relief valve is installed in the control valve block and > as a
safety valve > limits the maximum system pressure to the set value. It reduced pressure peaks
between the control valve block and the pump. The additional replenishing function is not
utilized on the primary side.
This valve is identical in function and type to the secondary pressure relief valves in the control
axles boom > stick > bucket.
For additional description, see page 7.66>26 and 7.66>27

11 / 2000
7.66>14
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC >Control valve block

Input area /
Input element

new version
from KW 50 / 99

11 Compact valve block 65.3 Spring 103.8 Shim

36 Plug 65.4 Plug 103.9 O>Ring
37 LS central nozzle 65.14 O>ring 106 Cover
51 Plug 65.15 O>ring
52 Piston / Pressure balance 65.16 Prop ring Additional positions
53 Spring 74 Pressure cut off 109 LS signal from user with
54 Spring plate 76 Shuttle valve highest load
65 Pressure balance > min flow 103 Pretension valve 110 Pump pressure
65.1 Valve insert 103.6 Poppet 111 LS signal to LS regulator
65.2 Piston 103.7 Spring

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>17

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

LS > Pressure cut off 74

Positions in parts list

74 Pressure cut off 74.11 Prop ring

74.1 Valve insert 74.12 Prop ring
74.4 Adjustment screw 74.13 Prop ring
74.5 Spring palte 74.14 O>ring
74.6 Spring 74.15 O>ring
74.7 Washer 74.16 O>ring
74.8 Lock nut 74.999 Seal kit ( contains the
74.10 Snap ring Pos. marked with * )

11 / 2000
7.66>18
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valvev block

4. Control and distribution area

Control axles
Each control axle contains the required spool valve for the corresponding function, with control (control
cover, regulating springs ), the pressure balance and the corresponding connections with secondary
relief.
4.1 Spool valves 40 > 44
The geometry of the spool valves and their test orifices are especially matched to the characteristics
of the corresponding user. The control of the user in the LUDV system occurs independently of the
load pressure. The volume flow results at constant Ep through the change of the cross section of
the test orifice via the piston stroke of the spool valves. Therefore, the maximum volume flow to the
user results correspondingly from the maximum opening cross section.
For additional description of function of the " LUDV control ", see section 6.67.
In case of problems, the spool valve 40 > 44 can be checked for contamination, damage etc. by
removing the upper cover 15 and pulling out the spool. Check for reuse and correct function or
replace complete valve.
4.1.1 Removal of spool valves 40/41/42/43/44
see drawings on page 7.66>22 > 7.66>24
Remove the required servo pressure line, remove screws 20 and remove cover 15 with O>ring.
Caution:
Cover 15 is under spring tension.
Remove the spring 91 and spring plate 90 and pull the spool valves 40/41/42/43/44 from the
control valve block 11.

4.1.2 Installation of spool valves

When installing / replacing the pistons, note the following:
> The individual spool valves are matched to corresponding requirements of working
function (boom, stick, etc. ) and for that reason, they cannot be interchanged.
> If several spool valves must be removed at the same time, make sure that they are
reinstalled in the same housing bore.
> For replacement > the axle desciption ( A1 > A5 ) of the spool is engraved on the front side
opposite the spring assembly and on the shaft of the spring assembly.
> The bores of the control valve blocks are normally machined to zero dimension. If this
applies for all bores of the control valve block, then the entry in the data tag of the block is
marked with numbers ending in "000" .
Zero dimension means that the diameter of the bore is sized exactly to ± 1 om . This means
that spools valves sent for replacement are in a tolerance range of 8 > 10 om and the leak
oil amount is within the normal range.
> If one or more bores of the control valve block are outside the zero test range, then this is
shown on the data tag, for example: the numbers are ending in 145. In any case, the bore
dimensions are registered at Rexroth.
To be able to check which bores are affected, remove the upper cover of the corresponding
spool valve.
> In this case, the dimension, for example 10 = 10 om is marked on the control valve front
surface of the affected bore.
For that reason, it is not possible to replace the spool valves with the spare parts catalog,
since a spool valve must be made for the tolerance dimension of the bore. If no mark is
available, then this bore is at zero dimension. In this case, the spool valve can be replaced
from the parts catalog.
Lubricate the matching spool valve lightly with oil and push it carefully into the control
valve block 11. Set the spring plate 90 and spring 91 onto the spool valve.
Set the cover 15 with O>ring onto the control valve block 11 and attach with screws 20.

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>19

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

4.2 Control cover 15

see drawings on page 7.66>24
The control cover 15 is located on both sides of the spool valve and on the compact block 11. The
required servo oil to actuate the spool valve is supplied via connection a / b of the control cover
15 .
In the inlet of the control connections, at certain control axles, a shuttle damper is installed. It
affects a restriction of the oil displaced by the spool valve in the opposite control cover and
therefore a reduction of the shifting speed of the spool valve. Due to this reduction, a softer start
of movement of the user and therefore better control or fine control is reached.
The damping action of the corresponding user movement ( A ) is made via the shuttle 108 in the
opposite control cover ( B ). The oil supply (a ) into the control cover occurs via the check valve of
the shuttle 108. The oil (b) displaced from the spool valve must flow via the orifice of the shuttle.
The cross section of the orifice and therefore the shifting speed is matched to the characterics of
the individual users. Due to the restiction in the line to the tank, the damping action is effective
in case of sudden actuation as well as sudden relief.
In addition, the control cover is equipped with a hoist limitation .21 for the spool valve, which
can be used to limit the maximum speed of the user.
The adjustment is made by the supplier / manufacturer and may normally not be changed. The
set screws .21 are secured with lock nut .22 and protected from damage with a cap .24 .
The dimension Y can be checked for a rough adjustment. See data on page 7.66>01. An exact
adjustment of the absolute maximum quantity to the user can only be made via a flow test unit
on the outlet of the control valve block.
An exact note can also be made via a comparison check of the extension / retraction speed of the
user or on the output RPM of the connected oil motor, see adjustment check list or adjustment
guidelines of the hydraulic system, section 6. ( Universal drive shaft speed adjustment ).
The flushing grooves 40.2 > 44.2 of the spool valves 40 > 44 are a connection from tank to control
cover 15. The tank pretension of the control valve block allow a constant oil flow if the pilot
control is not actuated, making a certain amount of oil available to warm up the servo oil circuit.

4.3 Pressure balance 73

see drawings on page 7.66>23 and 7.66>25
The control of the oil requirement on the machine is made through the opening cross section of
the corresponding spool valve axle and the LS pressure on the pump regulator.
To do this, pressure balances are installed in the control valve block and connected on each spool
valve axle.
The LUDV pressure balance of individual sections is switched after the test orifice of the spool
valves. It consists of the piston 73.2 and the spring 73.7 (for the defined initial position).
The pressure of the corresponding user is reported to the pump regulator via this pressure
balance. At the same time, the pressure balance compensates the existing load pressure of the
user with the LS pressure, for load pressure independence.
This LS pressure is created from the highest load pressure of the actuated users.

11 / 2000
7.66>20
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

In neutral position of the spool valves, the connection from the pump to the p' channel is closed
off by the spool. The pressure in the p> channel and behind the load holding valves is reduced in
this position almost to the tank level, via the piston play . The user connections are shut off by the
overlap of the spool in the housing. The user is therefore tensioned and affixed between two oil
columns.

4.3.1 High pressure

If the spool valve is moved, the orifice of the spool valve opens the connection from the
pump connection p to the channel p'. The resulting pressure in this area moves the
pressure balance 73 and is also available on the rear side of the load holding valves 27 > 29
via the internal channels in the pressure balance.
The user pressure pc of connection A is on the front side of the left load holding valve, via
channels in the spool valve. With the increase in pump pressure p' over the user pressure
pc, the load holding valve 27 opens. The connection from pump to user is established and
initiates the movement. The displaced oil from B flows via the discharge orifice back to the
tank. The secondary pressure relief valves 79 remain closed as long as the pressure in the
user connection is below the pressure setting.
4.3.1.1 User with highest load actuated
In single movement or if the load pressure of the user pc is the highest in the
system, the LS pressure is generated from the spring chamber of the corresponding
pressure balance 73. The pick up from this point is ensured since only the highest
load pressure is reported, because the pressure balances for the additional sections
shut off the influence of other users.
This LS signal is reported on the flow regulator ( LS regulator ) of the variable
displacement pump as well as to the spring chambers of additional LUDV > pressure
balances. The pressure balance is fully open. The p' channel is connected without
loss of pressure with the user connection pc .
The supply of the LS signal in front of the load holding valves ensures the shut off
of the user connection until the necessary working pressure is obtained and
prevents a short term drop in case of negative (pulling) load.

4.3.2 Low pressure

4.3.2.1 LS > Function
In saturated range, the LUDV system functions as a clear LS system. The control of
the user speed is made independent of the load pressure by the opening cross
section of the test orifice (spool ).
In overlap of several movements is the load pressure of the user with the highest
pressure via the central LS line in the spring chamber of other LUDV pressure
balances. The resulting pressure in the p' channel of this section results from the
reported highest LS pressure ( p' = LS + spring force ). The LUDV pressure
balances regulate the size of the p' pressure of individual axles by automatically
limiting the flow cross section to the user channel to the same value. The Ep via
the test orifice is the same and the user speed is therefore independent of the
difference of the load pressures.

4.3.2.2 LUDV > Function

The LUDV system also functions during under>saturation. In this case, the
demanded oil quantity via the sum of the open test orifice cross sections at the
exisiting Ep exceeds the maximum flow of the pump within the power regulation.
The LS regulator of the pump is no longer able to build up the adjusted Ep
through further pump action. The Ep which is set on the regulator collapses.

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>21

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

The LUDV system keeps in this condition the Ep via all opened test orifices at the same
value. In the LUDV system, at under>saturation, the user with the highest load does not
come to a standstill. The speed of all actuated users is reduced proportionally to the
opened cross sections.
If the pressure balance is in a balance
> the LS system pressure is the same in all spring chambers of the pressure balances
> the p ' in front of the test orifices of the section with the lowest load corresponds to
the LS pressure.
Ep Intake orifice = pPump > p'
The Ep via the intake orifices of all users is always the same, however, it is not a a fixed,
preset value. The pressure differences Ep intake orfices between p' and each individual user
pressure pc are automatically regulated by matching the opening cross sections and
therefore the flow is distributed proportionally.
4.3.2.3 Negative load
The speed control of the user via the oping of the intake orifice is not possible with
negative (pulling) loads. In this case, the user is controlled load dependent via the output
orifices.

aa
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a
a

51 Plug
72 Switching valve
73 Pressure balance
10 Cover plate 34 O>ring 78 Replenishing valve
11 Compact control valve block 38 Plug 79 Sec. PR valve
15 Control cover 40 Spool valve / travel gear 90 Spring plate
20 Allen head screw 41 Spool valve / outriggers 91 Regulating spring
27 Poppet / load holding valve 42 Spool valve / bucket 105 Check valve
28 Spring / load holding valve 43 Spool valve / stick 108 Servo pr. > Shuttle
29 Plug 44 Spool valve / boom 115 Plug

11 / 2000
7.66>22
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

Control axles for boom, stick and bucket for travel gear

a Servo pressure connection

b Servo pressure connection
A Working pressure conn.
B Working pressure conn.
11 Compact control valve block
15 Control cover
27 Poppet / load holding valve 73 Pressure balance
28 Spring / load holding valve 78 Replenishing valve
29 Plug 79 Sec. PR valve
40 Spool valve / travel gear 44 Spool valve / boom 108 Control pressure
41 Spool valve / travel gear 44.3 Piston machining (check valve Shuttle
and bores ) 115 Plug
42 Spool valve / bucket
only one sides in piston > A>side
43 Spool valve / stick

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>23

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

Control cover 15
Version R 900 B Æ 6105
R 904 Æ 6290

Hoist limitation screw

Version Version Version R 900 B / 6106 Æ

R 900 B Æ 6105 R 900 B / 6106 Æ R 904 / 6291 Æ
R 904 Æ 6290 R 904 / 6291 Æ

a1 > a5 Servo pressure connections >

bottom
b1 > b5 Servo pressure connections > top

11 Compact control valve 40 Spool valve 90 Spring plate

block 41 Spool valve 91 Regulating spring
15 Control cover 42 Spool valve 108 Check valve / Shuttle >
15.21 Set screw / Hoist limit 43 Spool valve damper
15.22 Lock nut 44 Spool valve 108.1 Shuttle
15.23 O>ring 40.2 > 108.2 Orifice
15.24 Cap 44.2 Flushing groove 115 Plug

11 / 2000
7.66>24
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

Pressure balance 73

73.1 Valve insert

73.2 Piston
73.3 Plug
73.7 Spring
73.23 O>ring
73.24 Prop ring

73.25 O>ring 73.30 O>ring

73.27 O>ring 73.31 Prop ring
73.32 Prop ring

Pressure balance
in neutral position

no LS>Signal

pc high

Pressure balance
in high pressure position

pc = LS Signal to pump regulator

pc high = LS
p' = ca. LS

Pressure balance
in low pressure position

LS> Signal from user with highest load

pc low
11 Control v. bl. 73.F Spring
40 Spool chamber LS = pc high
40.M Orifice 73.R Reg. orifice

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>25

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

4.4 Pressure and replenishing valves 79

The cartridge design pilot controlled pressure limiting valves 79 of the various user connections are
screwed directly into the control valve block 11. They limit the pressure between pump, control
vavle block and working units (primary function, see page 7.66>14 ) or between working units and
control valve block at closed spools (secondary function).
If the pressure increases in the circuit of the working units to an undesirable level, then the weekest
point, such as fittings or hydraulic hoses would be destroyed.
To prevent this, an artificual weak point is installed, an intentional breaking point. The increasing
system pressure in the hydraulic system acts onto an installed hydro unit.
This unit is a pressure limiting valve. It limits the maximum pressure in the user and its connection to
the set value.
Since large flows actuate the pressure valves in the hydraulic system, indirect (pilot controlled)
pressure limiting valves are used for design and technical reasons. With these valves, a direct acting
PR valve is used as a pilot control valve, which triggers an impulse to actuate the second, larger
valve.
At the same time, the PR valves act as replenishing valves. Different flow speeds of the inflowing
and outflowing oil into the working cylinder causes a vacuum.
This happens especially due to externally pulling loads, for example when extending the stick
cylinder, in case of long sticks. In this case, the speed of the user is not controlled via the supply of
the test orifice, but load dependent, via the outflow edge of the spool valve.
To prevent this, the valves connect the return side with the corresponding vacuum / low pressure
side, so that oil can be drawn and replenished.

4.4.1 Function, see diagram on page 7.66>27

4.4.1.1 Pressure limitation
The available pressure (P) in the user acts on the front surface of the main poppet
79.3 and via bore D1 on the rear side of the main poppet 79.3. At the same time,
pressure is available on the pilot contorl poppet 79.4.
Due to the springs 79.8/ 79.9 and 79.5, the main poppet 79.3 and the pilot control
poppet 79.4 are pushed into closing position (static condition).
When the pressure in the user circuit reaches a value above the adjustment value of
the pressure and adjustment spring 79.5, then the pilot control poppet 79.4 lifts off
and allows some oil to flow into the return channel.
Due to the different cross sections of the bores D1 in main poppet 79.3 and D2 in
valve insert 79.2, a drop in pressure is created between the front side and the rear
side of the main poppet 79.3.
This pressure difference makes it possible that the main poppet 79.3 is moved against
the springs 79.8/ 79.9 and that a large amount of oil can flow off to the pressureless
return side T .
4.4.1.2 Replenishing function
If a vacuum is created in the working circuit, the highest pressure in the hydraulic
tank acts via bores T of housing 79.1 and onto the ring surface of the main poppet
79.3.
Due to this pressure difference, the effective surface of the main poppet 79.3 is lifted
off its seat against the force of springs 79.8/ 79.9, so that the missing amount of oil
can flow via bore T to the corresponding side of the user.

11 / 2000
7.66>26
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > control valve block

Pressure and replenshing valve 79

79.1 Housing 79.9 Spring

79.2 Valve insert 79.10 Cap
79.3 Main poppet 79.31 Piston seal
79.4 Pilot controlled poppet 79.32 O>ring
79.5 Spring 79.33 O>ring
79.6 Set screw 79.34 Prop ring
79.7 Lock nut 79.35 O>ring
79.8 Spring 79.37 O>ring

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>27

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

5. Swing gear element

The control of the swing gear occurs in the LUDV system circuit via a special module, which fulfills the
characteristic requirements of the rotational movement.
> Priority of swing movement in case of movement overlap (for example attachment and swing
gear ).
> The speed control overlapping momentum control for sensitive regulation and control of
acceleration.
> Acceleration free of loss
The 1>way swing gear module is flanged onto the 5>way compact block and is connected with the
central pressure, LS and tank connections. Additional user axles for added functions, such as
installation kit AS1, can be installed on the swing gear element.
5.1 Swing gear priority
In the 1> circuit LUDV system, all users are parallel switched and supplied by a common working
pump. The swing gear in the LUDV system has proprity and can be controlled independent of all
other users.
The question of priority occurs as soon as the system works in undersaturation and the LUDV
system automatically influences the speed of the movement, depending on the degree of
undersaturation, see also paragraph 4.
The proprity of the swing gear is necessary, since the automatic influence of the swing speed by
other movements is not considered to be acceptable by the machine operator. In addition, an
automatic acceleration due to the LUDV principle is also not acceptable.
The priority of the swing gear resulting from the requirements during combined movements is
ensured by the following measures:
The module works in the system as a single user with 2>way pressure balance in the intake to the
test orifice. The sectional pressure balance in front of the test orifice compares the load pressure
LS Swing gear plus setting of pressure balance spring with the pressure p in front of the test orifce.
The Eptest orifice is held constant according to the placed spring value and makes a speed control
independent of the load pressure possible. Only a change of the test orifice increases or reduces
the quantity, or the speed.
5.1.1 Attachment section is user with highest load pressure
The control of the swing gear cannot be influenced through the check valve in the LS connector
line of the module to the system by the parallel operated user with higher load. The difference
of pump pressure pSystem to working pressure p of the swing gear element is regulated down
also by the strongly fluctuating user pressures on the pressure balance in front of it. The
regulating cross section of the pressure balance, for rapid regulation at high differences between
pSystem and p is small and increases or opens with falling pressure difference. The pump flow not
required within the power regulation by the swing gear is distributed according to the LUDV
principle proportionally to the parallel operated users.
5.1.2 Swing gear section is user with highest load pressure
The LSSwing gear is reported as highest system pressure via teh check valve in the LS line of
the compact control valve block and acts onto the reverse side of the LUDV pressure
balances and the Ep regulator of the variable displacement pump.
The pump flow not required within the power regulation by the swing gear is distributed
according to the LUDV principle to the parallel operated users.

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>31

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic exacavators LSC > Control valve block

5.1.3 Swing gear priority is lifted

The priority of the swing gear is no longer applicable as soon as the degree of
undersaturation is reached. The pressure balance of the swing gear opens all the way and
the swing gear speed is taken back proportionally as the other LUDV users .
In a machine typical working cycle, the load case occurs seldomly and only under certain
conditions and due to the parameters, it is not considered to be a problem .

5.2 Swing gear momentum control

see also drawings on page 7.66>33, 34 and 35
For sensitive acceleration of the swing gear, a momentum control is necessary to influence the
value of the acceleration, because the working pressure in the swing gear is the only
influenceable hydraulic factor to control this size.
The swing gear requires only a small amount of oil during acceleration from the standstill.
However, in a clear LS control, it generates the maximum load pressure in the swing gear and
therefore the maximum rotational acceleration. The clear speed, independent of the load
pressure via the 2>way intake pressure balance 94>97 is therefore superposed by a momentum
control 125 .
The direct controlled torque control valve 79 allows the operator to steplessly control the
permissible pDrehwerk , depending on the pServo pressure and therefore the available rotational
momentum. The corresponding working pressure is set proportionally to the servo pressure, i.e.
the deflection of the pilot control. The operator can therefore control the value of the rotational
acceleration by the deflection of the pilot control valve, which allows for a sensitive acceleration
of the swing movement.

5.3 Acceleration free of loss

The torque control valve 79 is installed in block 12* and is in the pressure balance of the LS line of
the module. The swing gear receives the amount which is necessary to build up the required
working pressure, because the preset pressure balance regulates down as soon as the preselected
pswing gear is reached and only the amount is supplied which is needed to hold the pressure. Due
to this combination, the acceleration of the swing gear is free of loss. The maximum permissible
acceleration pressure on the torque control valve 79 is therefore approx. 30 bar under the upper
setting of the 2>stage swing gear pressure valves in the oil motor. Actuation of the secondary
valves with resulting losses will therefore not occur. Due to the momentum control, at falling
pswing gear , the amount to the swing motor increases, until the pressure has adjusted itself
accordign to the set Epspring via the test orifice.

5.4 Swing gear delay

The slow down of the swing gear occurs via the discharge orifices of the spool to the tank as well
as the pressure relief valves to the motor. the maximum delay results from the lower pressure
setting of the two stage slwing gear pressure valves. They are tuned to a slight level to obtain a
soft delay action. Due to the control of the permissible acceleration pressure via the torque
control valve and the delay via the brake valves on the motor, an independent adjustment of
both values is possible.
In neutral position of the spool, the swing gear is hydraulically fixed by the shut off user
connections A and B .
The valve 79 is fixed. Should a correction be required, proceed as outlined in the adjustment
guidelines or adjustment protocol in Hydraulic System, section 6.
In case of problems, the valve can be checked for contamination or damage (broken spring).
Remove and disassemble the valve or replace it, as necessary. In case of leaks, reseal the valve
with new sealing elements, see parts list.
* The location of the valve 79 has been changed in series, see page 7.66.33

11 / 2000
7.66>32
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

12 Block/ swing gear segment 79.23 Prop ring

15 Control cover * 79.24 O>ring
24 Check valve 79.25 O>ring
25 O>ring 79.26 O>ring D1 Intake test orifice
26 Plug 79.33 O>ring D2 Outflow orifice
27 Poppet / Load holding v. 93 Shuttle valve pV User pressure
28 Spring 94 Reducer section PM Pressure in front of test
orifice
39 Spool v. / Swing gear 95 Spring
* see also page 7.66>24
79 TC > Valve | 96 Spring plate
79.21 Prop ring 97 Piston
79.22 Prop ring 108 Restrictor check valve

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>35

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

Added control valve block for AS1 Positions in parts list

2 Control valve block 1>way
(AHS 11)
5 Control valve block 1>way
(AHS 12)
10 End plate
11 Compact control valve
block
13 Control valve block 1>way
13.13 Pressure / replenishing v.
14 End plate
40 Spool valve
73 Pressure balance
Added control valve block for AHS 11 79 Pressure / replenishing v.
1stage
80 Pressure / replenishing v.
2stage
112 Restrictor check valve

* Positions in hydraulic schematic

Added control valve block for AHS 12
23 from LS > Regulator
41 Test point MP
45 Test point LS
85 From added pilot control
88P Pressure distributor
88T Return flow > collector pipe
100 Compact control valve
block
104 Pressure cut off
105 Prsssure limitation valve
500 Spool valve/ hydr. hammer
501 Sec. PR valve > extend
502 Sec. PR valve > retract
504 Pressure balance
507 Restrictor check valve
520 Spool valve/
control cylinder etc..
521 Sec. PR valve > retract
522 Sec. PR valve > extend
524 Pressure balance
527 Restrictor check valve
540 Control valve/ AS1
541 Sec.> PR valve
542 Sec. PR valve
544 Pressure balance
* Positions in electr. schematic
S5L/RButton, turn left / right
S19 Switch > rotary drive
Y22 Solenoid valve
Turn grapple left
Y23 Solenoid valve
Turn grapple right
Y61 from solenoid valve
change over
Y91 from solenoid valve
Sec. pr. > hammer

10 / 2000
7.66>42
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

6. Added control axles

Added control valve block for attachment kits
To control additional working movements, an additional 1>way added element on the compact
valve block 11 can be installed.
Each control axle (added control valve block) contains the required spools with control for the
corresponding function (control cover, regulating springs), the pressure balance and the
correspoinding connections with secondary relief. It is hydraulically connected with block 100 via
pressure, return and LS channels. The channels are sealed on the flange surfaces with O>rings.
The geometry of the control valves and their test orifices are especially tuned to the characteristics
of the corresponding users. The control of the user occurs in the LUDV system independent of the
load pressure. The volume flow results, at constant Ep, through the change of the cross section of
the test orifice via the piston stroke of the spool valve. The maximum volume flow to the user is
therefore determined by the maximum opening diameter.
For additional description of the added axle with spool, cover and pressure balance, see page 7.66>
19 > 7.66>25.
For retrofit installation of one or more added axles, remove the end plate 10 and install the axle
between block 11 and plate 10 .

6.1 Added control valve block for installation kit AS 1

see also drawings on page 7.66>44 and 7.66>45
The individual segment for working movements > grapple rotary drive is equipped with a
magnetic hydraulic control of the control valve spool. This means, that the proportional
control of the piston is not designed as the two other added axles, but in a so>called " black >
white " control.
The max. servo pressure on connection a / b is only forwarded to the spring chamber of the
spool valve 13.45 after a certain solenoid 13.12 ( Y22/Y23 ) has shifted, which shifts the spool
valve all the way. The pressure balance 13.73 fulfills the same task as the other pressure
balances 73 in the compact valve block 11, see page 7.66.20 > 7.66>22.
The hoist limitation of the piston must be set as noted in section 16.40 .
The secondary relief is the same in function and adjustment as shown on page 7.66.26 and
section 16.70.

6.2 Added control valve block for installation kit AHS 1

see also drawings on page 7.66>46 and 7.66>47
The individual segment for working movement " hydr. boom control, etc. " is the same
design as the boom, stick and bucket axle of the compact valve block.
For description of function or adjustment of control valve 40, cover 15, pressure balance 73
and PR valves 79, see page 7.66>19 > 7.66>26.

6.3 Added control valve block for installation kit AHS 11

see also drawings on page 7.66>46 and 7.66>47
The individual segment for working movement " Hydraulic hammer " is the same design as
the boom, stick and bucket axle of the compact valve block.
Only the function to "actuate the hydraulic hammer " has a 2>stage secondary PR valve.
For description of function or adjustment, maintenance and adjustment of control valve 40,
cover 15, pressure balance 73 and PR valves 79, see page 7.66>19 > 7.66>26.
For description of function or adjustment of PR valve 80, see page 7.66>48 and 7.66>49.
The external control of the valve is described in section 16.74 .

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>43

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulix excavators LSC > Control valve block

Added control axle View C>C

for AS 1

13.30* O>ring 13.70* Seal lock nut 14 End plate

13.40* O>ring 13.73 Pressure balance 63 Allen head screw
13.45 Spool / Grapple rotary 13.80* O>ring * Seal kit 999
drive 13.90 Spring plate
13.50* Seal ring 13.91 Spring For additional positions,
13.60* O>ring see page 7.66>44

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>45

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulix excavators LSC > Control valve block

Added axle for AHS 11

Added axle for AHS 12

2 Block / Segment AHS1 / AHS11

5 Block / Segment AHS12
10 End plate
11 Compact block
15 Control cover
20 Allen head screw
27 Poppet
28 Spring
29 Plug
30 O>ring
62 Washer
31 O>ring
73 Pressure balance
32 O>ring
79 Pressure and 90 Spring plate
33 O>ring replenishing valve > 91 Spring
34 O>ring 1stage
112 Restrictor check valve
40 Piston 80 Pressure and
999 Seal kit
61 Allen head screw replenishing valve
2stage | see also page 7.66>24

11 / 2000
7.66>46
Service Manual Hydraulix excavators LSC > Control valve block

Added control axles

for AHS 11 for AHS 12

2 Added control valve block AHS11 80 Sec. PR valve with replenishing

5 Added control valve block AHS12 function, 2>stage
15 Control cover 90 Spring plate
27 Poppet / Load holding valve 91 Spring
28 Spring / Load holding valve 112 Restrictor check valve
29 Plug / Load holding valve a / b Servo pressure connection
34 O>ring A / B User connection
40 Spool / Support
73 Pressure balance
79 Sec. PR valve with replenishing function,
1>stage

R 900 B > R 904 Li 7.66>47

from 6001
Issue: 11 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic excavators LSC > Control valve block

5. Pressure and replenishing valve 80

The cartridge>type pilot controlled pressure relief valve 80 of the user connection is directly installed in
the control valve block 13. The valve is equipped with a hydraulic pressure cut in stage / pressure boost
and can therefore be utilized for 2 different pressure ranges. It limits the pressure between pump,
control valve block and working units (stage 1 > primary function > hammer operation) or between
workign units and control valve block with closed spools (stage 2 > secondary function > control cylinder
relief ).
If the pressure increases in the circuit of the working units to an undesirable level, then the weekest
point, such as fittings or hydraulic hoses would be destroyed.
To prevent this, an artificual weak point is installed, an intentional breaking point. The increasing
system pressure in the hydraulic system acts onto an installed hydro unit.
This unit is a pressure limiting valve. It limits the maximum pressure in the user and its connection to
the set value. .
Since large flows actuate the pressure valves in the hydraulic system, indirect (pilot controlled)
pressure limiting valves are used for design and technical reasons. With these valves, a direct acting PR
valve is used as a pilot control valve, which triggers an impulse to actuate the second, larger valve.
At the same time, the PR valve 80 acts as replenishing valves. Different flow speeds of the inflowing
and outflowing oil into the working cylinder causes a vacuum.
This happens especially due to externally pulling loads, for example with control cylinders. In this case,
the speed of the user is not controlled via the supply of the test orifice, but load dependent, via the
outflow edge of the spool valve.
To prevent this, the valves connect the return side with the corresponding vacuum / low pressure side,
so that oil can be drawn and replenished.
5.1 Function, see diagram on page 7.66>49
5.1.1 Pressure limitation
The available pressure (P) in the user acts on the front surface of the main poppet 80.5
and via bore D1 on the rear side of the main poppet 80.5. At the same time, pressure is
available on the pilot control poppet 80.15.
Due to the springs 80.7 and 80.18 , the main poppet 80.5 and the pilot control poppet
80.15 are pushed into closing position (static condition).
When the pressure in the user circuit reaches a value above the adjustment value of the
pressure and adjustment spring 80.15, then the pilot control poppet 80.15 lifts off and
allows some oil to flow into the return channel.
Due to the different cross sections of the bores D1 in bushing 80.6 and ring surface D2 in
valve insert 80.2, a drop in pressure is created between the front side and the rear side of
the main poppet 80.5.
This pressure difference makes it possible that the main poppet 80.5 is moved against the
spring 80.7 and that a large amount of oil can flow off to the pressureless return side T .
5.1.2 Pressure cut in
Stage 1 ( low pressure > to secure the hydraulic hammer )
Connection X is connected with the tank, the spring 80.18 is less pretensioned.

Stage 2 ( higher pressure > to secure the control cylinder )

Connection X is actuated with servo pressure. This pretensions the spring 80.18 more via
control piston 80.9 and piston 80.8 and therefore a higher relief pressure is obtained.

11 / 2000
7.66>48
 Control Valve Unit for: R 914 / SN 6001 & R 924 / SN 6001 composed of:

Type Support block VT5 LS Control Valves

Description, see page no. 7.62.01 7.63.01

220 240 260 160 180

Control Valve Boom cylinder Stick cylinder Bucket cylinder Travel left Travel right
for
Extend Retract Extend Retract Extend Retract Vorw. Reverse Vorw. Reverse

Control Valve Size mm (") 25 (1") 25 (1") 18 (3/4") 18 (3/4") 18 (3/4")

e Piston rod (mm) 32 32 25 25 25

Description, see page 7. 63.03 7. 63.03 7. 63.03 7. 63.05 7. 63.05

Piston stroke mm 12.1 12.1 12.3 12.3 10.1 10.1 10.0 10.0 10.0 10.0

Projection "X" mm 48.1 48.1 48.3 48.3 41.1 41.1 41.0 41.0 41.0 41.0

Projection "Y" mm 12.1 12.1 12.1 12.0 9.3 9.3 9.2 9.2 9.2 9.2

D (Shims) (mm) 1.6 1.6 1.6 1.8 2.3 2.3 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0

p1 (bar) ±0.5 8.5 8.5 9.0 8.5 8.5 8.5 8.0 8.0 8.0 8.0

p2 (bar) ±0.5 25.5 25.5 26.8 26.2 24.5 24.5 23.2 23.2 23.2 23.2

Qn (A) / Qn (B)
R 914 (l/min>1) 360 80 360 220 250 150 200 200 200 200
R 924 (l/min>1) 400 100 400 230 260 165 200 200 200 200

Throttle check valves

on Port "x" (mm) 1.15 1.15 > 0.8 0.8
on Port "y" (mm) > > > 0.8 0.8

Max. permissible leak oil at

150 bar and 50∞ C cm3/min 75 75 70 90 90

Qn (A) / Qn (B) = Rated oil flow at outlet A / B with Ep= Rated value
p1 = Control pressure at regulation begin
p2 = Control pressure with piston in end position

Shims thickness "D" : 1.0 mm; 0.5 mm; 0.3 mm

The projection "Y" is given just for information

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 914 > R 924
Type
Control Valve Unit Ab
From
Depuis
6001
Datum
Edition
Technical Data
10.01 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.68.01
7.68.02
100 Control valves support block 220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
101 LS pressure relief valve 220.1 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder extend
102 Pump high pressure relief valve 220.2 Stroke limitation / Boom cylinder retract
104 Valve / Travel motors displacement control 220.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo pressure
105 Valve / Travelling motion 220.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom cylinder
106 Valve / LS switch>off when grapple operation extend
107 Pressure holding valve / Return port T 220.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Boom cylinder
108 Pressure holding valve / Return port K retract
110 Valve / Return oil recovery boom + stick 221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder extend
110.1 Switching valve 222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder retract
110.2 Check valve 223 Control valve / Boom cylinder
110.3 Piston 225 Pressure compensator
110.4 Piston 226 Pressure compensator
110.5 Pressure reducing valve (z) 227 Switching valve
110.6 Two way check valve (z) 228 Switching valve
115 Throttle / Boom cylinder
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
116 Throttle / Stick cylinder
240.1 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder extend
240.2 Stroke limitation / Stick cylinder retract
Control valves for standard equipment
240.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo pressure
160 Valve block / Travel right
240.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick cylinder
160.1 Stroke limitation / Travel right reverse
retract
160.2 Stroke limitation / Travel right forward
240.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Stick cylinder
160.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel right
extend
160.4 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel right
241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
160.5 Suction valve / Travel motor right
242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
160.6 Suction valve / Travel motor right
243 Control valve / Stick cylinder
160.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel right
245 Pressure compensator
160.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel right
246 Pressure compensator
163 Control valve / Travel motor right
247 Switching valve
165 Pressure compensator
248 Switching valve
166 Pressure compensator
167 Switching valve
168 Switching valve 260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
260.1 Stroke limitation / Bucket tilt cyl. extend
180 Valve block / Travel left 260.2 Stroke limitation / Bucket tilt cyl. retract
180.1 Stroke limitation / Travel left reverse 260.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt
180.2 Stroke limitation / Travel left forward cylinder extend
180.3 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel left 260.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Bucket tilt
180.4 Restrictor check valve / Servo press. travel left cylinder retract
180.5 Suction valve / Travel motor left 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. extend
180.6 Suction valve / Travel motor left 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. retract
180.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / Travel left 263 Control valve / Bucket tilt cylinder
forward 265 Pressure compensator
180.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / travel left 266 Pressure compensator
reverse 267 Switching valve
183 Control valve / Travel motor left 268 Switching valve
185 Pressure compensator
186 Pressure compensator
187 Switching valve Y53 Regulation solenoid valve / Hydraulic oil
188 Switching valve cooling (z)

(z) Since R914 SN 6676 and R924 SN 6282

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 914 > R 924
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve Unit From
Depuis
6001
Edition
10.01 Technical Data Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.68.03
 180 Valve block / Travel left
100 Control valves support block
180.5 Suction valve / Travel left
101 LS pressure relief valve 180.6 Suction valve / Travel left
102 Pump high pressure relief valve
220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
115 Throttle / Boom cylinder
221 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder extend
116 Throttle / Stick cylinder
222 Sec. pres. relief valve > boom cylinder retract
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
241 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder extend
Control valves for standard equipment 242 Sec. pres. relief valve > stick cylinder retract
160 Valve block / Travel right 260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
160.5 Suction valve / Travel right 261 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. extend
160.6 Suction valve / Travel right 262 Sec. pres. relief valve > bucket tilt cyl. retract

7.68.04
7.68.06
 100 Control valves support block Control valves for optional equipment
101 LS pressure relief valve 500 Valve block / AHS 11 (hammer > hydr. cylinder)
102 Pump high pressure relief valve
500.1 Stroke limitation / hammer operation or extend
104 Valve / Travel motors displacement control
additional cylinder
105 Valve / Travelling motion
500.2 Stroke limitation / retract additional cylinder
106 Valve / LS switch>off when grapple operation
500.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / retract
107 Pressure holding valve / Return port T
additional cylinder
108 Pressure holding valve / Return port K
500.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / hammer
110 Valve / Return oil recovery boom + stick
operation or extend additional cylinder
110.1 Switching valve
501 Sec. pres. relief valve / hammer operation or
110.2 Check valve
extend additional cylinder
115 Throttle / Boom cylinder
502 Sec. pres. relief valve / retract additional
116 Throttle / Stick cylinder
cylinder
503 Control valve / hammer or additional cylinder
Control valves for standard equipment
505 Pressure compensator
160 Valve block / Travel right 506 Pressure compensator
507 Switching valve
180 Valve block / Travel left
508 Switching valve
220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
520 Control valve / AHS 12 (additional cylinder)
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
520.1 Stroke limitation / retract additional cylinder
260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder
520.2 Stroke limitation / extend additional cylinder
520.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / extend
additional cylinder
Control valves for special equipment
520.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / retract
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder "Industrie" additional cylinder
240.1 Stroke limitation / extend Stick cylinder 521 Sec. pres. relief valve / extend add. cylinder
"Industrie" 522 Sec. pres. relief valve / retract add. cylinder
240.2 Stroke limitation / retract Stick cylinder 523 Control valve / additional cylinder
"Industrie" 525 Pressure compensator
240.7 Press. relief & deaeration valve / retract Stick 526 Pressure compensator
cylinder "Industrie" 527 Switching valve
240.8 Press. relief & deaeration valve / extend Stick 528 Switching valve
cylinder "Industrie"
241 Sec. pres. relief valve > extend stick cylinder 540 Control valve / AHS 1 (grapple drive)
"Industrie"
540.1 Stroke limitation / grapple drive to right
242 Sec. pres. relief valve > retract stick cylinder
540.2 Stroke limitation / grapple drive to left
"Industrie"
543 Control valve / grapple drive
243 Control valve / Stick cylinder "Industrie"
544 Primary pres. relief valve / grapple drive
245 Pressure compensator
545 Pressure compensator
246 Pressure compensator
546 Pressure compensator
247 Switching valve
547 Switching valve
248 Switching valve
548 Switching valve
549 Input compensator

Y22 Solenoid valve / grapple drive to left

Y23 Solenoid valve / grapple drive to right

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 914 > R 924
Type
Ab
Datum Ensemble de distribution From
Depuis
6001
Edition
06.99 Caract±ristiques Techniques Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.68.07
100 Control valves support block Control valves for optional equipment
500 Valve block / AHS 11 (hammer > hydr. cylinder)
Control valves for standard equipment
501 Sec. pres. relief valve (two stage) / hammer
160 Valve block / Travel right
operation or extend additional cylinder
180 Valve block / Travel left 502 Sec. pres. relief valve / retract add. cylinder
220 Valve block / Boom cylinder
520 Control valve / AHS 12 (additional cylinder)
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder
521 Sec. pres. relief valve / extend add. cylinder
260 Valve block / Bucket tilt cylinder 522 Sec. pres. relief valve / retract add. cylinder

540 Control valve / AHS 1 (grapple drive)

Control valves for special equipment
Y22 Solenoid valve / grapple drive to left
240 Valve block / Stick cylinder "Industrie" Y23 Solenoid valve / grapple drive to right
241 Sec. pres. relief valve > extend stick cylinder
"Industrie"
242 Sec. pres. relief valve > retract stick cylinder
"Industrie"

7.68.08
General Data
Spool valves control range
Spool Spool Spool stroke p1 p2
No. e (mm) (mm) (bar) (bar)
p1: Servo pressure at beginning of fine control
12 p2: Servo pressure with spool at end position
101, 102,107 32.4 3 23.7
both sides

12
108 32.4 3 23.7
both sides

12
103,105 32.4 3.8 21
both sides

110
12
Boom flow 32.4 4.5 28.9
up side
summation

111
12
Stick flow 32.4 4.5 28.9
down side
summation

Commutation valves Commutation pressure

113
parallel flow spools 3 > 5 bar
103 and 105

112 300 bar >

Travel motor control 150 bar =

Nominal Pressure
Connections
width range

P1, P2 SAE 1"

6000 PSI
A6, B6 NW 25

A1 to A5, A7 SAE 3/4"

6000 PSI
B1 to B5, B7 NW 22

SAE 3/4"
C 6000 PSI
NW 22

K SAE 1 1/4" 3000 PSI

NW 38

T SAE 1 1/2" 3000 PSI

NW 40

Leak Oil > Control valve NW 22

Maximum permissible leak oil at 150 bar and 50∞ C :
90 cm3 / min
For procedure and instructions to check the leak oil
quantity with spools in neutral position, refer to sub
group 7.75.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
7>way Control Valve NW 22 Ab
Datum
From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 General Data Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.72.01
1. Construction
The control valve block 100 contains, in a compact housing, all directional valves necessary for the various
movements of the machine and also all pressure relief valves for the various circuits, such as:
f Six hydraulically actuated spool valves, designed as 6>way directional valves (101, 102,103,105,107
and 108), which distribute the hydraulic flow from the double pump to the various attachments /
components.
f Two additional, hydraulically actuated spool valves 110 (3>way valve) and 111 (2>way valve) , which
allow flow summation for the boom and stick cylinder.
These two spool valves are actuated independently from one another, even though they are located
behind each other in the same housing bore.
f Two primary pressure relief valves 120 and 121 control the pressure between the double pump and
the control valves. The primary, cartridge type, pressure relief valves are installed on the upper
housing, directly above the both high pressure connections.
f The different secondary pressure relief valves, located on both sides of the spools, limit the secondary
pressure ( as between control block and attachments) to the adjusted maximum pressure settings.
The cartridge type secondary pressure relief valves (125 to 136) are designed with suction function.
f The check valves 150 to 153 (description and function described later).
In addition, the following valves are mounted externally on the control valve block:
f The distributor valve 115 with integrated commutation valves 112 and 113, and pretension valve 8.
f The check valve 163.
f The control lines are mounted to covers 12 and 13. The longer covers include springs, which return
the spools into neutral position if there is not pressure.
2. Function
2.1 Spool valves in neutral position
In neutral position, the connections between user and pumps and user and tank are closed.
The hydraulic oil from pump P1 flows via the left ( seen in travelling sense ) pressure port of the
control valve block and , nearly without pressure, via spool valve 101 > channel P2A, spool valve 102>
channel P2B, spool valve 103> channel P2C and valve 111 to connection T.
The hydraulic oil from pump P2 flows via the right pressure port of the control valve block and ,
nearly without pressure via spool valve 108> channel P1A, spool valve 107> channel P1B, spool valve
105> channel P1C, and via internal piston bores in spool valve 110 to connection T of the control valve
block.
Both return flows combine in the control valve block and flow through the distributor valve 115
either via the stop valve 7 and connection K, via the cooler to the tank or, depending on the pressure,
via pretension valve 8 and connection T directly to the tank.
2.2 Working position of spool valves
If a spool valve is moved from its neutral position, the connection from pump to user is open and
restricts at the same time the flow to the tank.
The pump pressure rises until it reaches the pressure on the user connection.
Oil starts to flow to the user.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve NW 22 From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.72.03
 When the spool valve moves further, the connection from pump to tank closes off and opens the
connection for the returning oil from the user to the tank. The total oil flow from the pump is now
available for the user.
The movement of the spool valve depends only on the available control pressure. This control pressure
can be changed continuously depending on the movement of the appropriate joystick (see description
and function of the servo control, paragraph 7.41).
Due to a negative spool overlap, together with metering notches, the oil flow to the users and thus all
working and travel movements, can be controlled by pistons in the control blocks
The piston stroke is about 30% overlap and about 60% fine control. The remaining stroke is used to
regain the nominal diameter.
Springs, which are installed on the upper end of the spool, return the spools to neutral position if
control pressure is not available.
Internal leakages on a user connection under pressure are influenced by the overlap and the play
between housing and piston.
The max. permissible leak oil quantities are given in the paragraph "General Data".

Depending on control pressure actuation, the following connections are possible.

Spool valves Control Connections

pressure on Spool moved ...
Pos Function connection... Pressure side Return side

101 Boom cylinders a1 up P2>A1 B1>T

b1 down P2>B1 A1>T

a2 up P2>A2 B2>T
102 Bucket cylinder
b2 down P2>B2 A2>T

a3 up F2>A3 B3>T
103 Travel left
b3 down F2>B3 A3>T

a5 up F1>A5 B5>T
105 Travel right
b5 down F1>B5 A5>T

107 Stick cylinder a6 up PS>A6 B6>T

b6 down PS>B6 A6>T

108 Additional a7 up P1>A7 B7>T

equipment b7 down P1>B7 A7>T

110 Summation a4 up P1C>C P1C>T

travel closed

Summation P2C>T
111 b4 down >>>
stick cylinder closed

Travel motors a>b

112 >>> down b>L
displac. control closed

Parallel shifting
113 Pst down F1>F2 >>>
travel

7.72.04
 Since spool valves 101 and 102 are simultaneously supplied with hydraulic oil via connection P1 ,
boom and bucket tilt cylinders can be moved at the same time.
Spool valve 103 is only supplied with hydraulic oil if spool valves 101 and 102 are in neutral position.
Spool valve 107 is only supplied with hydraulic oil if spool valve 108 is in neutral position.
Spool valve 105 is only supplied with hydraulic oil if spool valves 108 and 107 are in neutral position.
Control pressure connections a4 and b1 are actuated at the same time, and the boom cylinders can be
moved with the combined flow from pump P1 and P2, if spool valves 105, 107, and 108 are in neutral
position.
Control pressure connections a6 and b4 as well as b6 and b4 are actuated at the same time, and the
stick cylinder can be moved with the combined flow from pump P1 and P2, if spool valves 101, 102
and 103 are in neutral position.
If one of the four spool valves 101, 102, 107 or 108 is moved into working position, spool 113 is also
actuated via connection Pst .
Both spool valves 103 and 105 are supplied with hydraulic oil simultaneously, and the machine can
continue to travel straight .
When high pressure is present in the travel circuit, so it acts via F1 and (or F2) onto the commutation
valve 112 which is shifted in working position. This connects connection "b" to tank pressure causing
the travel motors to return to maximum swivel angle.
2.3 Function of the three ways commutation valve 112, see page no. 7.72.12
3. Repairs
Caution : Before any repair, release hydraulic tank pressure by unscrewing breather filter on the
tank !
Release system pressure by turning off the engine, turn the ignition key to contact position, move
joysticks in all directions.)
Remove cover 12 and 13, replace seals 89 and seals 84 if external leaks are found.
If external leaks are found on the primary or secondary pressure relief valves, remove them and
replace their seals rings.
3.1 Spool valves 101,102,103,105,107, 108, 110 and 111
3.1.1 To remove spool valves
Release tank pressure. Disconnect or if necessary remove the control pressure line.
Remove screws 69 and lift off cover 13 with o>ring 89.
Pull spool from control valve housing.
3.1.2 To install spool valves
Lightly lubricate the spool and carefully insert it into valve housing 11.
Install cover 13 with o>ring 89 on the valve housing and tighten with screws 69.
Connect the hydraulic lines and bleed the servo control on screw 53.
NOTE !
> In case more than one spool is removed, care must be taken that the spools are installed in
their original location.
3.1.3 Load check valves 60
The load check valves 60 in spool valves 101, 102 and 108 cannot be replaced, since pin 61 and
the spools are precision ground and cannot be separated.
3.2 Replacing regulating springs 58 / 59
Remove the affected spool valve, see paragraph 3.1.1. or 3.1.2.
Compress the springs, using an adaquate compressing device and remove the snap ring 39.
Relieve the spring tension.
Replace the springs 58, 59, the plate 14 (and the washer 38 if mounted) with new parts.
NOTICE : As spare parts,only the complete regulation spring set 20 is available (it comprises springs,
plates, snap ring, ...)
Different spool valves have different regulation spring sets, refer to ß "General Data > Spool valves
control range".
Compress the springs and install the snap ring and install the spool as described in paragraph 3.1.2

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve NW 22 From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.72.05
3.3 Check valves 152 , 153 ...
3.3.1 To remove check valves
Remove plugs 95 with o>ring 86 and remove spring 63 with poppet 152, 153...
3.3.2 To install check valves 152, 153 ...
Fit the poppet guide 95 with o>ring, insert the poppet 152, 153, ... with the spring 63, screw in the
complete guide and torque it to the prescribed value.
3.4 Distributor block 115
3.4.1 To remove the complete distributor block 115
Remove the eight screws 75 and remove the distributor block 115. Remove the seal rings 87, 42
and 43.
3.4.2 To install the complete distributor block 115
Insert the seal rings 87, 42 and 43 into the corresponding grooves and mount the distributor block
with screws 75 .
3.4.3 Removal and installation of the pretension valve 8.
Remove the fitting 48 with O>Ring 44 and remove spring 50 and poppet 52 .

3.4.4 Removal and installation of the valve 113

Remove both fittings 46 (Connections Pst and L)
with o>rings 45 and remove spring 47 .
Push out the piston of the distributor valve 113 and
hold it in its installation position to make sure it is
installed in the right direction.
For installation, lightly grease piston 113 and push
it into the valve housing 10, insert spring 47 and
install both fittings 46 with o>rings 45.
3.4.5 Removal and installation of the valve 112
Notice :
This work is to be done preferably with distributor
bloc 115 in horizontal position.
> Unscrew the plug 28 and the spring guide 29.
Remove the spring 30, the rod 25 and push out
the sleeve 27 complete with pistons 26 and 112.
Caution :
The exact position of mounting parts 25, 26 and
112 must be noticed, so to avoid wrong position
during reinstallation.
> Check that pistons 26 and 112 move freely inside
sleeve 27 and that rod 25 moves freely inside plug
28.
> Fit the sleeve 27, the guide 29 and the plug 29
with new seal rings, lubricate all this parts with oil
and reinstall them.
> Retighten plug 28 and spring guide 29 to prescri>
bed torque.

7.72.06
 3.5 Removal and installation of check valves 150 and 151
With distributor block 115 removed (see ß 3.4.1), the complete check valves 150 and 151 ( Fittings 97
with springs 63 and poppets 150 / 151) can be taken out of the control valve body 11.
Before installation, check the poppets for easy movement.
3.6 Primary pressure relief valves 120 / 121
The complete valve 120 or 121 can be removed from the control valve block 11. When reinstalling
the valve, make sure the O>rings 81 and 82 and the support ring 83 are seated correctly.
Torque the primary pressure relief valve to 80 Nm.
For function and pressure adjustment, see page 7.81.01 or 7.83.01.
3.7 Secondary pressure relief valve 125/.../134
For description of construction, pressure adjustment, removal and installation, see page no. 7.85.01.

4. Control valve installation

1. The control valve mounting surface must be clean and absolutely even .
2. The mounting screws must be tightened evenly and crosswise.
3. The mounting surfaces of the SAE connections must be clean.
4. Pipes and hoses must be routed so no tension is created.
5. Tighten screws, fittings, etc. according to torques listed in section 1.

5. Maintenance
The control valves used in Liebherr hydraulic systems are maintenance free. Only the pressure settings of
the primary and secondary pressure relief valves must be checked periodically.
To check the secondary pressure relief valves, increase the adjustment value of the primary pressure relief
valves by the expected relief pressure, see page "Pressure settings" and ™Pressure Adjustment for the
Hydraulic System.™ in group 6.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Control Valve NW 22 From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 7.72.07
Torque values to be noted at installation :
Plug 28 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Nm
Guide 29 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 Nm
Fitting 46 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm
Fitting 48 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250 Nm
Screw 75 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Nm
Relief valves 120 and 121 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm
Relief valves 125 up to 134 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm
Suction valves 141 up to 144 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Nm

8 Pretension valve* 95 Plug

10 Housing / Distributor block 115 97 Fitting
11 Housing / Control valve block 100 Compact control valve block *
12 Short cover 101 Spool valve > boom cylinder *
13 Long cover 102 Spool valve > bucket cylinder *
14 Spring plate 103 Spool valve > travel motor left *
19 Snap ring 105 Spool valve > travel motor right *
20 Regulation spring set 107 Spool valve> stick cylinder *
25 Rod 108 Spool valve > additional equipment (option) *
26 Piston 110 Spool > Summation boom cylinder *
27 Sleeve 111 Spool > Summation stick cylinder *
28 Plug 112 Spool> Travel motors displacement control
29 Spring guide 113 Spool > Parallel control travel motors *
30 Spring 115 Distributor block *
38 Washer 120 Primary pressure relief valve *
39 Snap ring 121 Primary pressure relief valve *
40 Test point P2 * 125 Sec.pressure relief valve > boom cylinder A1 *
41 Test point P1 * 126 Sec. pressure relief valve > boom cylinder B1 *
44 O>ring 127 Sec. pressure relief valve > bucket cylinder A2 *
45 O>ring 128 Sec. pressure relief valve> bucket cylinder B2 *
46 Fitting 133 Sec. pressure relief valve > stick cylinder A6 *
47 Spring 134 Sec. pressure relief valve > stick cylinder B6 *
48 Fitting 135 Sec. pres. relief v. > additional equipment A7 *
50 Spring 136 Sec. pres. relief v. > additional equipment B7 *
52 Pretension valve / poppet 141 Suction valve
53 Bleeder screw 142 Suction valve
58 Regulating spring 143 Suction valve
59 Regulating spring 144 Suction valve
60 Poppet 150 Restrictor check valve *
61 Pin 151 Restrictor check valve *
63 Spring 152 Restrictor check valve *
69 Screw 153 Restrictor check valve *
81 O>ring 154 Check valve : poppet *
82 O>ring 155 Check valve : poppet *
83 Supporting ring 156 Check valve : poppet *
84 Seal ring 157 Check valve : poppet *
87 O>ring 163 Check valve > summation boom *
89 O>ring

7.72.08
 Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
7>fach Steuerblock NW 22 Ab
From
Depuis
5001
Datum
Edition
Control Valve Nw 22
07.98 Blatt
Date
Distributeur 7 voies GN 22
Page
Feuille 7.72.09
7.72.10
 Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
7>fach Steuerblock NW 22 Ab
From
Depuis
5001
Datum
Edition
Control Valve Nw 22
07.98 Blatt
Date
Distributeur 7 voies GN 22
Page
Feuille 7.72.11
 Function of the three ways commutation valve 112
This valve controls the displacement of the travel motors
between maximum and reduced flow.
The piston 112 of the valve connects:
> either, the port b (connected to the control port of the
travel motors) and the port a, where the servo pressure is
applied. The hydraulic motors are in this case switched to
reduced displacement (= maximum travel speed).
> either the port b to L, which is at tank pressures via bores
inside the valve bloc 100. The travel motors are now at
maximum displacement.

If the pressure existing at

port "F" (= pressure of the
travel motors circuit, taken
at spool 113) increases so to
push back the piston 112
against the pretension of
the spring 30 and the force
due to the servo pressure in
chamber of spring 30, the
piston establishes the
passage b>L.

Since the chamber of the

spring 20 is now at tank
pressure, the piston will be
shifted back to rest position
(connection a>b) only after
the pressure in "F" has
decreased to a much lower
value (see the page
"Technical Data" in this
subgroup).

7.72.12
 Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
7>fach Steuerblock NW 22 Ab
From
Depuis
5001
Datum
Edition
Control Valve Nw 22
07.98 Blatt
Date
Distributeur 7 voies GN 22
Page
Feuille 7.72.13
7.72.14
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

1 way rotary connection

1. Construction of 1 way rotary connection,

The rotary connection is located at the center of rotation between the upper and the undercarriage. It
connects the hydraulic system of the uppercarriage with the components in the undercarriage.
The stator 2 is fixed to the undercarriage via the stator of the 5 way rotary connection.

The rotor 1 is connected via the entrainer 25 to the rotor of the 5 way rotary connection, which turns with
the uppercarriage.

The radial bore in stator 2 and the axial bore in the rotor 1 direct the hydraulic oil through the totary
connection to undercarriage.

The grooved seal rings 12 seal the rotary connection from penetration of outer dirt.

A/R 900B > A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.75.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2000
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

2. Hydraulic connection to one way rotary connection

Connection A Variable displacement travel motors
In the line from solenoid valve Y24 to the
control port "X" of the variable
displacement travel motors.

3. Sealing works on 1 way rotary connection

It is not necessary, to remove the rotary connection 30
completely from rotary connection 20 for resealing.
Remove the fitting 40 from the rotor 1.
If necessary, remove hex head screw 26 and entrainer 25 .
Unscrew the mounting nut 4 (secured with Loctite).
Pull rotor 1 out from stator 2.
Remove the grooved rings 12 from nut 4 and stator 2.
Take off the sliding ring 3 and the seal rings 11 from rotor
1.

Install new seal rings 11 and a new sliding ring 3 into rotor
1.
Install new grooved rings 12 on mounting nut 4 and stator
2.
1 Rotor Thorougly clean the threads on stator 2 and nut 4, and coat
2 Stator with Loctite 270.
Reinstall the nut 4 and tighten with 30 Nm.
3 Sliding ring
Mount entrainer 25 with hex head screw 26 and washers 27
4 Mounting nut on rotary connection 20 .
11 Seal ring * Reinstall the fitting 40 in the rotor on rotary connection 30.
12 Grooved ring *
20 5 ways rotary connection complete
25 Entrainer
26 Hex head screw
27 Washer
30 1 way rotary connection complete
40 Fitting
999 Sealing kit

* Part of sealing kit

7.75.02 Edition : 10 / 2000

 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

A/R 900B > A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.75.03

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2000
 Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

5 ways rotary connection

1. Construction of 5 way rotary connection, see diagram on page 7.77.05

The rotary connection is mounted at the center of rotation between the upper and undercarriage. It
connects the hydraulic system of the uppercarriage with the components of the undercarriage .
The stator 10 is mounted to the undercarriage. The rotor 11 is held axially by the cover 3, which also
protects from contamination by dust or dirt. The entrainer bracket 19 holds the rotor 11 to the
uppercarriage.
Oil passages lead from connections 0>4 or 0>6 in the rotor 11 to the annular chambers, which are indivi>
dually separated by seals (which are comprised in the complete sealing kit 98).
Each annular chamber is connected via radial and axial drillings to connections 0>4 or 0>6 in the stator 10.
Two outer seals (also comprised in sealing kit 98) seal the rotor 11.
The rotary connection is maintenance free.

A/R 900B > A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.77.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

2. Hydraulic connections on the 5 way rotary connection (R Models)

Machines R 900 B et R 904

Connection 0 Leak oil line
Return line for leak oil from travel motors to hydraulic tank
Connection 1 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B1") to right travel motor (reverse)
Connection 2 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A2") to left travel motor (reverse)
Connection 3 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B2") to left travel motor (forward)
Connection 4 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A1") to right travel motor (forward)

Machines R 914 et R 924

Connection 0 Leak oil line
Return line for leak oil from travel motors to hydraulic tank
Connection 1 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B4") to right travel motor (reverse)
Connection 2 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A5") to left travel motor (forward)
Connection 3 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B5") to left travel motor (reverse)
Connection 4 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A4") to right travel motor (forward)

Machines R 934 et R 944

Connection 0 Leak oil line
Return line for leak oil from travel motors to hydraulic tank
Connection 1 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B5") to right travel motor (reverse)
Connection 2 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "B3") to left travel motor (reverse)
Connection 3 Left travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A3") to left travel motor (forward)
Connection 4 Right travel motor
Line from spool (outlet "A5") to right travel motor (forward)

7.77.02 Issue : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

3. Removal of 5 way rotary connection for resealing

Label and disconnect the lower hydraulic lines to rotary
connection 1 and 20.
Remove L>fitting 25 from the rotary connection 20.
Label and disconnect the upper hydraulic lines from rotary
connection 1 and 20.
Remove hex head screw 42 and pull rotary connection 20
from rotary connection 1.
Remove screw 41 and remove entrainer bracket 40.
Remove hex head screws 16 and lift complete rotary
connection 1 from undercarriage.

4. Installation of 5 way rotary connection after resealing

works
Position complete rotary connection 1 into the under>
carriage and insert screws 16 with lock washers 17, tighten
to 220 Nm.
Position entrainer bracket 19 on the bracket lip on rotary
connection 1 and fasten with screws 18, tighten to 220 Nm.
Fasten bracket 40 with screw 41 on rotary connection 1 and
tighten to 50 Nm.
Align rotary connection 20 and insert it into rotary
connection 1. Fasten with screw 42.
Reconnect upper hydraulic lines (note labels).
Install L>fitting 25 on the bottom of the pipe of rotary
connection 20.
Reconnect lower hydraulic lines (note labels!)

A/R 900B > A/R 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.77.03

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Hydraulic Components

1 Rotary connection 5 ways complete 10 Stator

3 Cover 11 Rotor
5 Washer 98 Sealing kit
6 Hex head screws comprising 7 seals:
(2 outer seals at top / at bottom and
7 Plug
5 inner seals)
8 Plug

7.77.04 Issue : 10 / 2000

Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Brake Valve for Travel Motor

Brake Valve for Hydraulic Travel Motor

1. Use
The brake valve 205 which is flanged to each hydraulic
travel motor has the 3 following functions:
> the hydraulic spool 206 prevents the hydraulic motor from
overspeeding when travelling downhill.
> the two ways check valve 207 and the pressure reducing
valve 208 generate the control pressure necessary to vent
the mechanical multi disc brake in the travel gear, as soon
the pressure in the travel circuit reaches about 30 bar.
> it discharges a small amount of oil from the low pressure
side of the travel circuit into the housing of the travel
motor, helping to maintain a lower motor temperature.
2. Function
2.1 Function of the hydraulic brake spool 206
Notice:
The following description applies for a pressure build up and a pressure decrease at the connection A
of the brake valve. Pressure variations at connection B will lead to a symetric action of the valve.

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 7.98.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Edition : 10 / 2001
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900B > R 944

8.55. Components of the Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B / R 904 / R 914, R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ
8.56. Reference of wires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ

8.71. Monitoring Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B / R 904 / R 914, R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ

8.74. Control Unit R 900 B ... R 944 / 5001 Æ

8.81. Electrical Diagrams > Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B / 6001 Æ

8.85. Electrical Diagrams > Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / R 914, R 924 / 6001 Æ
8.87. Electrical Diagrams > Basic Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ

8.95. Electrical Diagrams > Optional Equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / R 914, R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 & R 944 / 5001 Æ

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ R 900 B, ...

Model
Type R 944
Ab
From
Datum
Electrical System Depuis
Edition 06.00 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.50.00
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Components of the electrical circuit

aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
E52

aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
/ S5L
15

17
15

15 Control units for optional attachments S2 Control unit

17 Control units for air conditioner S5L Switch / rotating device to left
A3 Radio (A) S5R Switch / rotating device to left
A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01 S6L Switch left in joystick right / horn
A1009 Added printplate (for installation kits) S6R Switch right in joystick right / horn
A1010 Printplate / Fuses S7 Safety switch / servo cut off
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments S55 Switch / control of special equipments
B19 Sensor / joystick left > right S57 Switch / swing brake (934 > 944) or control of
B40 Proximity switch / travel pedal left special equipments (900B > 924)
B41 Proximity switch / travel pedal right S71 Switch / engine RPM adjust. in safety mode
E8 Cigarette lighter S72 Switch / RPM adjustment (+/> ) manu
E10 Air conditioner S73 Switch / servo control in safety mode
E52 Electric box / safety control engine T1 Voltage transformer(A)
H1 Monitoring display U16 Centry monitoring system Bst
H10 Buzzer
M2 Heater blower (A) Optional equipment
P5 Indicator / operating hours (T) Only for bach hoe equipment
S1 Key switch / contact > starting (L) Only for bottom dump equipment

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.01

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Monitoring display

H1 H1 Monitoring display
H2 Indicator light / engine oil pressure
H12 Indicator light / battery charge
H19 ndicator light / blinker *
H20 Indicator light / parking brake *
H23 Indic. light / accumulator press. *
H24 Indicator light / steering oil *

P2 Indicator / engine coolant

temperature
P3 Indicator / fuel level

P2>1 LED / indication for engine

overheat
P3>1 LED / indication for fuel reserve

200 LCD monitor **

S349 Switch / "RETURN" on LCD monitor
S350 Switch / "DOWN" on LCD monitor
S351 Switch / "UP" on LCD monitor
S352 Switch / "MENU" on LCD monitor

* only for A machines

** see sub>group 8.71

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.03

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Control unit

R 900 B 6001 Æ 6134 R 924 6001 Æ 6399

R 904 6001 Æ 6369 R 934 5001 Æ 5344
P4 Indicator / engine RPM
R 914 6001 Æ 6851 R 944 5001 Æ 5328
S10 Switch / floodlights
S11 Switch / winshield washer *
S12 Switch / not used
S14 Switch / windshield wiper
S17 Switch / swing brake
S18 Switch / overload warning
device *
S19 Switch / rotating device *
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed
S21 Switch / travel motors speed
control
S22 Switch / additional floodlights /
E5 *
S41 Switch / beacon / E9 *
S56 Switch / pressure cut>in stage
(only R 934 > R 944) *
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode
selection
S87 Switch / not used
S228 Switch / RPM >
S229 Switch / RPM =
S354 Switch / Superfinish selection
(excepted R 934 > R 944)
61 LED for mode selection
indication

z Optional installation

(M) The function of the push

bottons marked with (M) are
memorized when stopping
the excavator.
This means that the
controled function recovers
the previous state (on, off,
1/2, L / H, ...) before the
machine had been turned
off.

8.55.04 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Control unit

R 900 B 6135 Æ R 924 6400 Æ

R 904 6370 Æ R 934 5345 Æ P4 Indicator / engine RPM
R 914 6852 Æ R 944 5329 Æ S10 Switch / floodlights
S11 Switch / winshield washer *
S14 Switch / windshield wiper
S17 Switch / swing brake
S18 Switch / overload warning
device *
S19 Switch / rotating device *
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed
S21 Switch / travel motors speed
control
S22 Switch / additional floodlights /
E5 *
S36 Switch / not used
S41 Switch / beacon / E9 *
S56 Switch / pressure cut>in stage
(only R 934 > R 944) *
S85 Switch / grapple operation
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode
selection
S228 Switch / RPM >
S229 Switch / RPM =
S354 Switch / Superfinish selection
(excepted R 934 > R 944)
61 LED for mode selection
indication

S36

z Optional installation

(M) The function of the push

bottons marked with (M) are
memorized when stopping
the excavator.
This means that the
controled function recovers
the previous state (on, off,
1/2, L / H, ...) before the
machine had been turned
off.

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.05

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

A1001 > Printplate ESP>01

Control relays V37 . . . . Amplifier / Grapple swing right

K1 Relay / Windshield wiper H40 LED green / " > Input signal
H41 LED green / " > Output signal
K2 Relay / Battery charge
H43 LED red / " > Default (R+L)
K3 Relay / Reserve V44 . . . . Amplifier / Pressure cut > off
K4 Relay / Reserve H37 LED green / " > Input signal
H38 LED red / " > Default
H39 LED green / " > Output signal
Location of final stages and light diodes V57 . . . . Amplifier / Windshield wiper
H42 LED green / " > Input signal
V2 . . . . . Amplifier / Pressure cut>in stage V83 . . . . Amplifier / Grapple swing left
H1 LED green / " > Input signal
H44 LED green / " > Input signal
H3 LED green / " > Output signal
H45 LED green / " > Output signal
V3 . . . . . Amplifier / Travel brakes
H4 LED green / " > Input signal
H5 LED red / " > Default
H6 LED green / " > Output signal
V4 . . . . . Amplifier / Swing brake
H7 LED green / " > Input signal
Connectors on printplate A1001
H8 LED red / " > Default
H9 LED green / " > Output signal
V5 . . . . . Amplifier / Solenoid v. > Control pressure X1 Connector 5 pole Æ U16
H10 LED green / " > Input signal X2 Connector 37 pole Æ S2
H11 LED green / " > Output signal X3 Connector 10 pole Æ A1100
H12 LED red / " > Default
X4 Connector 4 pole Æ E1
V6 . . . . . Amplifier / Travel speed increase X5.1 Connector 8 pole
H13 LED green / " > Input signal X5.2 Connector 3 pole
H14 LED green / " > Output signal
X6.1 Connector 6 pole
H15 LED red / " > Default
X6.2 Connector 8 pole
V7 . . . . . Amplifier / Windshield washer X7 Connector 3 pole Æ B19L
H16 LED green / " > Input signal
X8 Connector 3 pole Æ B19R
H17 LED green / " > Output signal
X9 Connector 2 pole Æ B40
V8 . . . . . Amplifier / Heater > stage 1 X10 Connector 2 pole Æ B41
H19 LED green / " > Input signal
X11 Connector 4 pole Æ safety lever
H20 LED green / " > Output signal
X12 Connector 4 pole Æ S1
V12 . . . . Amplifier / Heater > stage 2 X13 Connector 2 pole Æ S57
H22 LED green / " > Input signal
X14 Connector 3 pole Æ S2
H23 LED green / " > Output signal
X16 Connector 2 pole
V21 . . . . Amplifier /Headlight on uppercarriage X17 Connector 3 pole
H25 LED green / " > Input signal
X18 Connector 6 pole
H26 LED green / " > Output signal
X19 Connector 6 pole
V24 . . . . Amplifier / Floodlight on cab deck X20 Connector 10 pole ÆM3, M4, E2, E7, E9
H28 LED green / " > Input signal
X21 Connector 3 pole Æ S5
H29 LED green / " > Output signal
X22 Connector 2 pole Æ E52
V26 . . . . Amplifier / Beacon X23 Connector 2 pole
H31 LED green / " > Input signal
X30 Connector 9 pole (diagnostic)
H32 LED green / " > Output signal
X31 Connector 9 pole (Service connector)
V32 . . . . Amplifier / Flam glow plug X32 Connector 9 pole Æ U2
H35 LED green / " > Input signal
X33 Connector 9 pole (diagnostic)
H36 LED green / " > Output signal

8.55.06 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

R 900 B 6001 Æ 6157 R 924 6001 Æ 6475

R 904 6001 Æ 6422 R 934 5001 Æ 5405
R 914 6001 Æ 6939 R 944 5001 Æ 5375

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.07

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

A1001 > Printplate ESP>01

Control relays
K1 Relay / Windshield wiper V37 . . . . Amplifier / Grapple swing right
K2 Relay / Battery charge H40 LED green / " > Input signal
K3 Relay / Reserve H41 LED green / " > Output signal
H43 LED red / " > Default (R+L)
K4 Relay / Reserve
V44 . . . . Amplifier / Pressure cut > off
K5 Relay / Safety functions H37 LED green / " > Input signal
H38 LED red / " > Default
Location of final stages and light diodes H39 LED green / " > Output signal
V57 . . . . Amplifier / Windshield wiper
V2 . . . . . Amplifier / Pressure cut>in stage H42 LED green / " > Input signal
H1 LED green / " > Input signal
H2 LED red / " > Default V83 . . . . Amplifier / Grapple swing left
H3 LED green / " > Output signal H44 LED green / " > Input signal
H45 LED green / " > Output signal
V3 . . . . . Amplifier / Travel brakes
H4 LED green / " > Input signal V92 . . . . Amplifier / Transmitters
H5 LED red / " > Default H46 LED green / " > Input signal
H6 LED green / " > Output signal
V4 . . . . . Amplifier / Swing brake
H7 LED green / " > Input signal
H8 LED red / " > Default Connectors on printplate A1001
H9 LED green / " > Output signal
V5 . . . . . Amplifier / Solenoid v. > Control pressure X1 Connector 5 pole Æ U16
H10 LED green / " > Input signal
H11 LED green / " > Output signal
X2 Connector 37 pole Æ S2
H12 LED red / " > Default X3 Connector 10 pole Æ A1100
X4 Connector 4 pole Æ E1
V6 . . . . . Amplifier / Travel speed increase
H13 LED green / " > Input signal
X5.1 Connector 8 pole
H14 LED green / " > Output signal X5.2 Connector 3 pole
H15 LED red / " > Default X6.1 Connector 6 pole
V7 . . . . . Amplifier / Windshield washer X6.2 Connector 8 pole
H16 LED green / " > Input signal X7 Connector 3 pole Æ B19L
H17 LED green / " > Output signal X8 Connector 3 pole Æ B19R
H18 LED red / " > Default X9 Connector 2 pole Æ B40
V8 . . . . . Amplifier / Heater > stage 1 X10 Connector 2 pole Æ B41
H19 LED green / " > Input signal X11 Connector 4 pole Æ safety lever
H20 LED green / " > Output signal X12 Connector 4 pole Æ S1
H21 LED red / " > Default
X13 Connector 2 pole Æ S57
V12 . . . . Amplifier / Heater > stage 2 X14 Connector 3 pole Æ S2
H22 LED green / " > Input signal X16 Connector 2 pole
H23 LED green / " > Output signal
X17 Connector 3 pole
H24 LED red / " > Default
X18 Connector 6 pole
V21 . . . . Amplifier /Headlight on uppercarriage X19 Connector 6 pole
H25 LED green / " > Input signal
X20 Connector 10 pole ÆM3, M4, E2, E7, E9
H26 LED green / " > Output signal
H27 LED red / " > Default
X21 Connector 3 pole Æ S5
X22 Connector 2 pole Æ E52
V24 . . . . Amplifier / Floodlight on cab deck X23 Connector 2 pole
H28 LED green / " > Input signal
H29 LED green / " > Output signal
X30 Connector 9 pole (diagnostic)
H30 LED red / " > Default X31 Connector 9 pole (Service connector)
X32 Connector 9 pole Æ U2
V26 . . . . Amplifier / Beacon
H31 LED green / " > Input signal
X33 Connector 9 pole (diagnostic)
H32 LED green / " > Output signal X43 Connector
H33 LED red / " > Default
V32 . . . . Amplifier / Flam glow plug
H34 LED green / " > Input signal
H35 LED red / " > Default
H36 LED green / " > Output signal

8.55.08 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

R 900 B 6158 Æ R 904 6423 Æ R 914 6940 Æ

R 924 6476 Æ R 934 5406 Æ R 944 5376 Æ

Control LEDs

green

yellow

red

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.09

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

A1010 > Printplate Fuses > Relays

F1 Fuse / reserve
F2 Fuse / reserve
F3 Fuse / reserve
F4 Fuse / reserve
F5 Fuse / windshield wiper &
washer motor > & control circuit
for preglow, beacon*, rotating
device*
F6 Fuse / reserve
F7 Fuse / control unit and display
F8 Fuse / safety lever, solenoid
valves for servo circuit, swing
brake, travel motors control &
pressure cut > off *
F9 Fuse / control circuit for engine
RPM adjustment
F10 Fuse / floodlights on
uppercarriage> and cab deck
F11 Fuse / reserve
F12 Fuse / reserve
F13 Fuse / ignition key > starting
circuit
F14 Fuse / dome light, cigarettes
lighter, horn, additional
floodlights *, reserve
F15 Fuse / heater blower

H1 LED / output F1 X152 Connector / 15 pole

H2 LED / output F2 X153 Connector / 15 pole
H3 LED / output F3 X154 Connector / 15 pole
H4 LED / output F4 X155 Connector / 15 pole
H5 LED / output F5 X156 Connector / 15 pole
H6 LED / output F6 X157 Connector / 15 pole
H7 LED / output F7 X158 Connector / 15 pole
H8 LED / output F8 X159 Connector / 9 pole
H9 LED / output F9 X160 Connector / 15 pole
K5 Relay / stop engine X161 Connector / 15 pole
K6 Relay / horn X163 Connector / 2 pole
K7 Relay / additional floodlights *, reserve X164 Connector / 2 pole
K8 Relay / attachment float position * X165 Connector / 2 pole
K9 Relay / reserve X166 Connector / 2 pole
Kl15 Connection +24 Volts (contact) X167 Connector / 2 pole
Kl30 Connection +24 Volts (permanent) X168 Connector / 2 pole
X169 Connector / 2 pole
MP1 Electronic earthing print plate A1010
MP61.1 Earthing point print plate A1010
MP61.2 Earthing point print plate A1010

8.55.10 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

DEUTZ Engine
on R 900 B

B2 Temperature switch / engine

coolant

B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level

B12 Transmitter / engine speed

B16 Transmitter / engine oil pressure

G1 Alternator

M1 Starter

M5 Motor for engine RPM

R60 Flam glow plug

Y12 Solenoid valve / starting injection

Y29 Solenoid valve / engine stop

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.11

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

LIEBHERR Diesel Engine on R 904 Æ R 944 Li

aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
aaaa
R934 & R944

B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant

B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level
B12 Transmitter / engine speed
B16 Transmitter / engine oil pressure
G1 Alternator
M1 Starter
M5 Motor for engine RPM
R51 Flam glow plug
Y1 Solenoid valve / preglow
Y14 Solenoid valve / Synchrostart > Engine stop *
Y17 Solenoid valve / starting injection *
Y29 Solenoid valve / engine stop
* only on machines R 934 / R944, see also on
next page

8.55.12 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant R51 Flam glow plug (not on R 900 B)
B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level S9 Batteries switch
B5 Transmitter / engine oil temperature X125 Connector 4 pole
B8 Transmitter / hydraulic oil temperature X179 Connector 2 pole
B12 Transmitter / engine speed Y1 Solenoid valve / preglow (not on 900 B)
B14 Transmitter / hydraulic oil level Y3 Solenoid valve / servo>control
B16 Transmitter / engine oil pressure Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
B21 Pressure switch / overload warning device Y14 Solenoid valve / Synchrostart > Engine stop
B39 Transmitter / fuel level (only on 934 et 944)
E2 Floodlight on cab roof Y17 Solenoid valve / starting injection (only on 934
and 944)
E3 Floodlight / uppercarriage right
Y20 Solenoid valve / air conditioner (not on 900 B)
E4 Floodlight / uppercarriage left
Y24 Solenoid valve / travel speed
E50 Power electric box
Y50 Regulation solenoid valve / power regulation
G1 Alternator
Y51 Regulation solenoid valve / flow limitation
G2 Batteries
Y53 Regulation solenoid valve / hydr. oil cooling
H9 Horn
Y78 Solenoid valve / grapple operation
M5 Motor for engine RPM

For the components and the connectors inside the cab, see pages nb 8.10.01 to 8.10.10

Arrangement of earthing connections

MP10 Electronic earthing battery circuit breaker
MP12 Electronic earthing print plate A1001
MP50 Earthing engine on uppercarriage
MP60 Earthing under cab on the middle
MP61 Earthing M5 > screw left console
MP61>1 Earthing of print plate A1010 to chassis > left console
MP61>2 Earthing of print plate A1010 to chassis > left console
MP62 Earthing under cab right on the front
MP63 Earthing uppercarriage to the cab
MP64 Earthing shielded between printplate A1001 and control unit S2
MP65 Earthing screw size M5 > on left console
MP82 Earthing uppercarriage (rear side of tank)
MP85 Earthing uppercarriage (area of attachment support)
MP86 Earthing at reat of cab
MP87 Earthing front of fuel tank
MP88 Earthing of cooler
MP89 Earthing of battery circuit breaker
MP90 Earthing in the electric box E50 / fuses

8.55.16 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Arrangement of components and earthing points on uppercarriage

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.17

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2000
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTATION

FOR OPTIONAL EQUIPMENTS
Right side control desk
H31 b Control light / Swing brake closed (in semi automatic mode)
H32 b Control light / Trouble in semi automatic swing brake circuit
H40 Control light / Pre>selection hydraulic circuit
H292 Control light / Special control system
S26 Touch / Fuel preheater
S40 Touch / Frequency commutation for hydraulic hammer
S45 b Touch / Priority for special equipment
S46 Touch / Lifting magnet
S47 Key switch / Quick disconnecting device
S53 Touch / Special control circuit
S54 Key switch / Unlocking of hydraulic cylinder end position
S74 Code key / Start locking device
S76 Touch / Travel brakes
S77 Touch / Pressurized driver's cab
S79 ~ Touch / Flow divider for special attachment
S84 Push button / Centralized lubrication
S88 Key switch / Commutation hammer and additional cylinder
S98 Touch / Low pressure protection for boom cylinders
S104 Touch / Width adjustable undercarriage
S114 Rotating switch / Control of special attachments
with the rocker switch S55 on joystick
S117 Rotating switch / Pre>selection hydraulic circuit
S210 Push button / Cold start aid
S218 Touch / Cab roof window wiper
S247 Key switch / Commutation of control system
Normalized control / Special control
S275 Touch / Additional floodlight rear of cab roof
S276 Touch / Additional floodlight on counterweight
S357 b Touch / Boom height compensation during grapple closing motion
S358 Push button / Cab roof window washer
Left side control desk
S78 Push button / Height adjustable cab > emergency down
S80 Push button / Height adjustable cab > locking device on / off
S200 Push button / Height adjustable cab > up
S201 Push button / Height adjustable cab > down
S232 Control unit / Standstill cab heater
z
The location of these controls may differ, depending on the other installed
optional equipments .
b Only for R 900B > R 924
~ Only for R 934 > R 944

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.19

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Control light H31 > Swing brake applied

On the machines R 904, R 914 and R 924 fitted with the special equipment "semi>automatic swing
brake", this control light goes on to indicate that the swing brake has applied in semi>automatic
mode.
Control light H32 > Default in semi>automatic swing brake control circuit
On the machines R 904, R 914 and R 924 fitted with the special equipment "semi>automatic swing
brake", this control light lights up when a default has been detected in the electronic control
circuit of the swing brake.
Control light H40 > Pre>selection hydraulic circuit
This lamp reports pre>selection of a certain consumer via rotating switch S117.
Control light H292 > Sp±cial control system
This control light lights up to indicate that a special, non standart lever arrangement has been
turned on via the key switch S247.
Touch S26 > Fuel preheater
This button turns on the installed fuel heating system (Thermoline fuel hose, or heater resistor
inside the fuel filter).
The Control light inside the push button shows when the heating system is on.
Touch S40 > Frequency commutation for hydraulic hammer
This touch allows to increase the cycle frequency of an hydraulic hammer.
Touch S45 > Priority for special equipment
If an hydraulic actuator ( cylinder, hydraulic motor, ) of a special attachment requires a constant
oil flow, the speed of the remaining attachment movements can be reduced by depressing the
push button S45 (the control light inside the button must light).
The necessary oil flow for the hydraulic actuator is maintained, even by simultaneous actuation of
other attachment movements.
Touch S46 > Operation with a lifting magnet
This button turns on the generator which supplies the lifting magnet, and also switches on the
control circuit of the magnet (push buttons S6 at the top of the right joystick handle, see also
page 4. 17).
The control light inside the touch lights up when the control circuit is on.
In this case, the engine idle automatic is deactivated; the engine RPM is automatically set to a
fixed value and can not longer be set using the buttons S228, S229 and S86.
Key switch S47 > Quick change adapter
The key switch S47 turns on the control circuit for the quick change adapter for the working tool.
The locking pins of the adapter can then be retracted and inserted using the both push buttons S5
on the top of the left joystick handle.
Touch S53 > Special control circuit supply
When this touch is actuated, an additional control circuit for a special equipment is made alive.
The green indicator light in the touch lights up to show that the additional servo control circuit is
under pressure.
Key switch S54 > Unlocking of cylinder end position
On some special working attachments, or on attachment showing particular kinematic capacities
(as example on industrial attachment), certain movement(s) may be stopped automatically by
electrical end switches.
The main purpose of this movement limitation is to prevent possible damages due to components
frequently reaching their end stops.
With the key switch S54 turned to the left into position I, the automatic limitation can be
unlocked temporarily while tilting up or down the rocker switch S55 mounted to the left joystick
handle.
Notice : on machines destined to the north>american market and also fitted with a lifting
magnet controlled via the rocker switch S55, the both push buttons S5 at top of the left
joystick handle must be used to unlock the limitation.
Should a special attachment comprise two different automatic stops of movement, so the key
switch S54 must be turned to the right into position II to be able to release from the second
automatic limitation.
No unlocking is possible with the switch S54 in neutral position.

8.55.20 12 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Code key switch S74 > Anti>theft protection system

The Auto>Scan protection unit interrupts the current supply of the excavator about 30 seconds
after shut down of the machine (ignition key in 0>position), the red LED lights up.
To restart the machine, a code key must be stuck briefly in the anti>theft system S74 to unlock the
protection. The red LED will then turn off and the electrical system must be energized
immediately thereafter (ignition key in contact position).
Touch S76 > Travel parking brake
This touch controls the travel parking brake on the machines fitted with a special undercarriage,
or on machines mounted on a loading bridge, a waggon, ...
When the red indicator light in the touch lights up, the travel brake is applied.
On machines with a standart undercarriage, the travel brakes are controlled directly via the travel
pedals and the touch S76 does not exist.
Touch S77 > Pressurized driver's cab
Depressing this button start the air fan for the pressurization of the driver's cab.
The entering of dust or no filtered air into the cab is then almost prevented.
Touch S79 > Flow divider for special attachment
Should a certain user (cylinder, hydraulic motor, ...) has to be fed with a constant oil flow
during the actuation of a special attachment, so the necessary oil flow can be reserved to give
priority to this user while depressing the touch S79.
The indicator light in the touch is then lighting up.
The velocity of the other simultaneously actuated working movements is correspondingly
reduced.
Push button S84 > Central lubrication system
On machines fitted with a central lubrication system, an additional lubrication cycle of the
attachment bearing points and swing ring can be started by depressing the button S84.

Key switch S88 > Commutation hammer > additional cylinder

This key switch is mounted on machines fitted with a special hydraulic circuit for the supply and
the control of either a hydraulic hammer or an additional hydraulic cylinder.
The switch S88 must be turned into the position corresponding to the operated working tool.
In position hydraulic hammer, the pump flow reduction which is actually set for the hammer at
the monitoring display is activated.
Touch S98 > Low pressure protection for boom cylinders
If the touch S98 is actuated, the pressure protection of pressure relief valve in the circuit for
retraction of the boom cylinders is reduced, so to limit the possible downward thrust exerted by
the working attachment onto the materials to be digged out.
This safety device must be turned on, as an example, when unloading a boat or a barge, so to
avoid damage to its bottom.
Touch S104 > Hydraulic width adjustment of undercarriage
This button concerns excavators fitted with an undercarriage with adjustable track gauge. The
button must be actuated before moving the side frames.
> On machine type HV (excavators with fully hydraulic actuated track gauge adjustment),
pushing the button commutes the high pressure circuit in the undercarriage from travel
control to the width adjustment cylinders.
Rotating switch S114 > Control of special attachments with the rocker switch S55 on joystick
The purpose of this rotating switch is to commute the control over pedals for some special
attachments into a control via the rocker switch S55 on the left joystick.
When the switch is in position "joystick", special attachments as hydraulik hammer or scrap shear
are controlled via the three positions rocker switch S55.
With the switch turned to position "pedal", these attachments are controlled using the pedals 7c
and 7d, as described on pages 4.15 and 4.16 of operation and maintenance manual.

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 8.55.21

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ 12 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Rotating switch S117 > Pre>selection hydraulic circuit

With machines featuring several additional consumers, two different consumers can be
allocated to the same hydraulic circuit (servo control circuit and consumer output on the spool
valve).
Switch>over of the hydraulic circuit from one consumer to the next is resulted via rotating
switch S117.
Should it be necessary to supply both consumers with different amounts, the necessary
adaptation of flow limitation is resulted simultaneously upon pre>selection with the rotating
switch.
In one position of the rotating switch (turn symbol, example for the drive of a swivel bearing),
control light H40 lights up simultaneously.
Push button S210 > Cold start aid "startpilot"
The Push button S210 controls the cold start system.
When the button is depressed, an ether based starting fluid is sprayed into the air inlet
manifold of the Diesel engine.
At the same time, the green control light inside the push button will light up.
The cold start system cannot be actuated if the engine is running or at operating temperature.
Touch S218 > Cab roof window wiper
Depressing this push button alternately causes the wiper to be turned on in continuous and to
be stopped.
Key switch S247 > Commutation Nomalized control system / Special control system
This key switch allows to commute electrically from a Standart lever arrangement (ISO > PCSA)
into a Special lever arrangement (LIEBHERR, other lever arrangement, ...).

Touch S275 > Additional floodlight on rear of cab roof

Actuating the touch will turn on and off above mentioned floodlight. At the same time, the
control light inside the button will light up and go out.
Touch S276 > Additional floodlight on counterweight
Same control as for S275.
Touch S357 > Boom height compensation during grapple closing motion
For some applications (as unloading a barge or a freight car, ...) the teeth of the grapple may
generate a non acceptable downward thrust onto the bottom of the boat or the car, each
time the grapple is closed into the material to be unloaded.
With the touch S357 turned on, this effect is avoided : when closing the grapple, the boom is
slightly and automatically lifted, so to compensate the downward movement of the grapple
teeth.
Push button S358 > Washer for cab roof window
The button turns on the electric window washer system. Washer fluid will be sprayed to the
window and the cab roof window wiper will be actuated as long as the push button S358 is
depressed.

Control unit S232 > Standstill cab heater

This unit controls an eventually installed standstill heater for the cab or other circuits on
the uppercarriage.
Refer to the special issued operation and maintenance manual of the maker of the
additional heater.

8.55.22 12 / 2001
No. wire Color /Section Connection No. wire Color /Section Connection

0001 ......... X161/1 Æ X179/1 6025 . .......... X135/25 Æ X153/2

0002 ......... X161/1 Æ X177/1 6026 . .......... X1/10 (U16) Æ X44/2 (A1001)
6027 . .......... X135/27 Æ X153/11
1003 rt 6 mm2 . . . F20/AÆX45/UÆA1100 / Kl.30 6028 . .......... X1/11 (U16) Æ X44/3 (A1001)
1004 rt 2,5 mm2 . . K288/88 Æ K16/88 6029 . .......... X135/29 Æ X152/1
1004 rt 6 mm2 . . . F20/A Æ K288/88 6031 . .......... X135/31 Æ X153/7
1005 ......... K288/88 Æ F32 6034 . .......... X135/34 Æ X153/8
1005 10 mm2 . . K288/88 Æ X45/R 6035 . .......... X135/35 Æ X153/9
Æ A1100/Kl.15 6039 . .......... X135/39 Æ X152/2
1006 rt 6 mm2 . . . F19/A Æ K302/88 6040 . .......... X135/40 Æ X152/12
1009 ......... F20/A Æ F32 6041 . .......... X1/1 (U16) Æ X1/5 (A1001)
1010 ......... X159/4 Æ K69/4 Æ K16/86 6042 . .......... X1/2 (U16) Æ X1/1 (A1001)
1010 ......... K16/86 6046 . .......... X1/6 (U16)
1012 ......... X159/1 Æ x69/1 6047 . .......... X1/7 (U16) Æ X1/4 (A1001)
1013 ......... X159/3 Æ x69/3 Æ K288/86 6053 . .......... X1/13 (U16) Æ X1/2 (A1001)
1013 ......... K288/86 6059 . .......... X1/19 (U16) Æ X1/3 (A1001)
1014 rt ......... F22 Æ X69/5 Æ X229/1 6061 . .......... X190/1 Æ X152/3
6062 . .......... X190/2 Æ X152/4
5002 ......... X159/5 Æ X311/2 Æ Y29 6063 . .......... X190/3 Æ X152/5
5004 rt 10 mm2 . . G2/24V Æ X170 Æ E50/Kl/30 6064 . .......... X157/1 Æ X189/1
5005 2,5 mm2 . . K16/88a Æ X45/V Æ X311/6 6066 . .......... X11/1 Æ X74/1
Æ M1/50 6067 . .......... X11/4 Æ S7/2
5006 ......... X154/6 Æ X311/5 Æ X187/3 6068 . .......... X11/3 Æ S7/1
5007 ......... X154/4 Æ X311/3 Æ X187/1 6069 . .......... X157/3 Æ X4/3
5008 ......... X154/5 Æ X311/4 Æ X187/2 6070 . .......... X158/10 Æ X4.1
5014 ......... X154/9 Æ X174/B 6071 . .......... X5>1/4 Æ X158/2
5015 rt 4 mm2 . . . G1/30 Æ M1/30 6072 . .......... X5>1/3 Æ X158/1
5016 ......... G1/61D Æ X311/18 Æ X154/12 6073 . .......... X157/4 Æ X5.1/2
5022 ......... X154/10 Æ X311/9 Æ X186/1 6074 . .......... X20/2 Æ X3>1/3
5024 ......... X154/14 Æ X311/10 Æ X185/2 6075 . .......... X20/3 Æ X3>1/5
5028 6 mm2 . . . U52/9 Æ X45.S Æ X311/1 Æ R51 6076 . .......... X20/4 Æ X3>1/4
5030 ......... X154/7 Æ X311/11 Æ X176/1 6077 . .......... X158/5 Æ X3/10
5031 ......... X154/1 Æ X311/12 Æ X188/A 6078 . .......... X6>1/6 Æ X158/13
5032 ......... X154/3 Æ X311/13 Æ X188/B 6079 . .......... X20/8 Æ X3>2/5
5033 ......... X154/2 Æ X311/14 Æ X188/C 6080 . .......... X6>1/1 Æ X157/15
5034 ......... X79/2 Æ X311/15 >Y20 6081 . .......... X20/9 Æ X3>1/8
5035 ......... K154/13 Æ X311/16 Æ X185/1 6082 . .......... X6>1/15 Æ X158/9
5999 ......... X159/5 Æ X174/A 6083 . .......... X6>2/1 Æ X158/11
6084 . .......... X5>2/3 Æ X157/8
6001 ......... X135/1 Æ X152/6 6085 . .......... X5>1/6 Æ X157/7
6002 ......... X135/2 Æ X173/3 6086 . .......... X157/9 Æ X6>2/7
6004 ......... X135/4 Æ X153/10 6087 . .......... X157/12 Æ X6>2/3
6006 ......... X135/6 Æ X153/4 6088 . .......... X157/13 Æ X6>2/6
6007 ......... X135/7 Æ X153/3 6089 . .......... X157/14 Æ X6>2/8
6009 ......... X135/9 Æ X153/1 6090 rt .......... X20/10 Æ X3>1/1 Æ X3>3/1
6010 ......... X135/11 Æ X152/15 6091 . .......... X156/4 Æ X3/1
6013 ......... X135/13 Æ X153/11 6092 . .......... X156/7 Æ X3/2
6014 ......... X135/14 Æ X152/10 6093 . .......... X156/1 Æ X3/3
6016 ......... X135/16 Æ X153/12 6094 . .......... X156/8 Æ X3/4
6018 ......... X135/18 Æ X153/9 6095 . .......... X156/6 Æ X3/5
6020 ......... X135/20 Æ X153/14 6097 . .......... X156/10 Æ X3/7
6021 ......... X135/21 Æ X153/6 6098 . .......... X156/11 Æ X3/8
6023 ......... X135/23 Æ X173/1 6099 . .......... X156/2 Æ X3/9
6024 ......... X1/4 (U16) Æ X44/1 (A1001) 6100 . .......... X9/1 Æ X196/1

Typ
Benennung/Description/D±nomination
Model R 934 & R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Electrical System From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.99 Reference of wires Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.56.01
No. wire Color /Section Connection No. wire Color /Section Connection

6101 . .......... X9/2 Æ X196/3 6148 . .......... F31 Æ X69/12 Æ X84>2/1

6102 . .......... X10/1 Æ X197/1 6149 . .......... X3>3/1 Æ X167/1
6103 . .......... X10/2 Æ X197/3 6150 . .......... X3>3/3 Æ X168/2
6104 . .......... X156/13 Æ X74/1 6151 . .......... X3>4/1 Æ X166/1
6105 . .......... X156/14 Æ X74/2
6110 . .......... X6>1/4 Æ X158/8 7000 . .......... X160/3 Æ Y3/1
6111 . .......... X6>1/3 Æ X158/7 7001 . .......... X160/2 Æ Y7/1
6114 . .......... X6>1/12 Æ X158/6 7002 . .......... X161/3 Æ X125/1
6115 . .......... X5>1/5 Æ X158/3 7003 . .......... X161/7 Æ Y22/1
6116 . .......... X8>2/4 Æ X157/10 7004 . .......... X155/8 Æ Y53
6117 . .......... X8>2/5 Æ X157/11 7005 . .......... X161.8 Æ Y23/1
6118 . .......... X12/2 Æ E8 7006 . .......... X155/6 Æ Y52
6119 . .......... S1/58 Æ X65/2 7007 . .......... X155/1 Æ Y51
6120 . .......... S1/17 Æ X12/4 7008 . .......... X234/3 Æ Y78
6121 . .......... S1/19 Æ X12/3 7009 . .......... X155/3 Æ Y50
6122 rt .......... X156/3 Æ S1/30 7010 . .......... X6>1/1 Æ X246/8
6123 . .......... X158/15 Æ X5>1/2 7012 . .......... X6>1/5 Æ X246/2
6124 . .......... X21/3 Æ X15>1/2 7014 . .......... X161/4 Æ X83/2
6125 . .......... X21/2 Æ X15>1/1 7015 . .......... X160/7 Æ X83/1
6126 . .......... X21/1 Æ X15>1/3 7016 . .......... X155/11 Æ Y52
6127 . .......... X14/2 Æ X14>1/3 7017 . .......... X160/11 Æ X129/1
6128 . .......... X14/3 Æ X14>1/1 7018 . .......... X155/7 Æ Y50
6129 . .......... X66/2 Æ X67>1/2 7019 . .......... X161/6 Æ X129/4
6130 . .......... X66/1 Æ X67>1/1 7020 . .......... X161/15 Æ X125/3 Æ H9
6131 . .......... X67>2/+ Æ X3>2/1 7021 . .......... X155/4 Æ X134/3
6132 . .......... X67>2/> Æ X3>2/2 7022 . .......... X161/10 Æ X122/1
6133 . .......... X67>2/+ Æ X3>2/3 7023 . .......... X161/11 Æ X122/2
6134 . .......... X67>2/> Æ X3>2/4 7025 . .......... X155/2 Æ Y53
6135 . .......... X49/1 Æ H10 7027 . .......... X155/10 Æ Y51
6136 . .......... X157/4 Æ X189/3 7030 . .......... X20/5 Æ E3
6137 . .......... X157/6 Æ X181 7031 . .......... X155/9 Æ X134/1
6138 . .......... S1/50 Æ X156/12 7032 . .......... X160/1 Æ X128/1
6139 . .......... S1/15 Æ X156/9 7034 . .......... X160/14 Æ X130/1
6143 . .......... X15>3/3 Æ X15>2/1 7035 . .......... X160/13 Æ X130/3
6144 . .......... X15>3/2 Æ X15>2/2 7038 . .......... X125/4 Æ X122/3
6145 . .......... X15>3/3 Æ X29>1/1 7040 . .......... X160/11 Æ X129/1
6146 . .......... X154/12 Æ X192 Æ P5 7041 . .......... X161/6 Æ X129/4
6147 . .......... F32 Æ X69/11 Æ X84>3/1

8.56.02
N∞ o. wirel Color /Section Connection No. wire Color /Section Connection

A ... .......... E50 Æ X69/2 Æ console G. sw .......... B39/4 Æ X122/4 Æ MP85

C ... .......... E50 Æ X69/6 Æ console G. sw .......... M3 Æ MP62 Æ X3>1/7
E ... .......... E50 Æ X69/7 Æ console G. sw .......... E2 Æ MP82
F ... .......... E50 Æ X69/9 Æ console G. sw .......... E3 Æ MP62
G ... .......... E50 Æ X69/10 Æ console G. sw .......... E4 Æ MP85
H ... .......... E50 Æ X69/8 Æ console G. sw .......... E5 Æ E7 Æ M4 Æ X3>1/9
bl>gn . . . . . . . . . . E52/S71 Æ X190/3 sw .......... E8 Æ MP60
bl>rt .......... E52/S71 Æ X190/1 sw .......... X197/2 Æ MP60
bl>sw . . . . . . . . . . E52/S71 Æ X190/2 sw .......... X196/2 Æ MP60
bl>sw . . . . . . . . . . X122/1 Æ B39/1 sw .......... X128/2 Æ MP60
bl>ge .......... X185/1 Æ B5 sw .......... X125/4 Æ MP85 Æ H9
bl>ge>sw . . . . . . . . X185/2 Æ B5 sw .......... K16/85 Æ MP90
br . .......... X174/A Æ B3+ sw .......... K288/85 Æ MP90
gn . .......... X174/B Æ B3 sw .......... Æ MP90
ws . .......... X174/C Æ B3 sw .......... P5/31 Æ MP61
ws>rt .......... X186/1 Æ B40+ sw .......... S6L Æ X74/2
ws>rt .......... X187/1 Æ B41+ sw .......... S6R Æ X74/3
gr>bl .......... X186/3 Æ B40 sw .......... X3>2/6 Æ MP65
gr>bl .......... X187/3 Æ B41 sw .......... X3>1/7 Æ MP60
br . .......... X122/3 Æ B39/3 sw .......... X3>1/9 Æ MP60
br . .......... E7 Æ M4 Æ E9 Æ X3>1/9 sw .......... X65/1 Æ MP60
ge . .......... X7/3 Æ B19L sw .......... X84>2/2 Æ MP61
ge . .......... X8/3 Æ B19R sw .......... X84>3/2 Æ MP61
gr . .......... X7/1 Æ B19L sw .......... X177/2 Æ MP82
gr . .......... X8/1 Æ B19R sw .......... X179/2 Æ MP82
gr>gn . . . . . . . . . . X173/3 Æ E52.S71 sw .......... Y3 Æ MP85
gr>rt .......... X173/1 Æ E52.S71 sw .......... Y7 Æ MP85
gr>sw . . . . . . . . . . X173/2 Æ E52.S71 sw .......... Y22/2 Æ MP82
gn>rt .......... X83/1 Æ S57 sw .......... Y23/3 Æ MP82
gr . .......... X15>1/2 Æ S5L sw .......... Y24 Æ MP85
rt . . .......... X15>1/1 Æ S5R/S6L sw .......... Æ X195/2 Æ MP86
ge . .......... X15>1/3 Æ S6R sw 0,5 mm2 . . X3>2/2 Æ B50
rt . . .......... X15>3/1 Æ S55 sw 0,5 mm2 . . X3>2/4 Æ B50
ge . .......... X15>3/2 Æ S55 sw 2,5 mm2 . . MP90 Æ X45/T Æ MP89
gr . .......... X15>3/3 Æ S55 sw 4 mm2 . . . . G1/31 Æ undercarriage
rt . . .......... E52/Kl.15 Æ X189/1 sw 6 mm2 . . . . S9 Æ S9
rt . . .......... X3>1/1 Æ E7 sw 6 mm2 . . . . MP65 Æ MP61>1
rt . . .......... X7/2 Æ B19L sw 6 mm2 . . . . MP65 Æ MP60
rt . . .......... X8/2 Æ B19R sw 70 mm2 . . . M1/70 Æ undercarriage
rt . . 2,5 mm2 . . E50/Kl.30 Æ F22/E sw 70 mm2 . . . MP88 Æ MP89
rt . . 2,5 mm2 . . F20/A Æ F option sw 70 mm2 . . . S9 Æ G2/0V
rt . . 50 mm2 . . . G2 Æ G2 sw>ge .......... S6 Æ X74/1
rt . . 6 mm2 . . . . E50/Kl.30 Æ F19/E sw>rt 0,5 mm2 . . X3>2/1 Æ B5
rt . . 6 mm2 . . . . E50/Kl.30 Æ F20/E sw>rt 0,5 mm2 . . X3>2/3 Æ B5
rt . . 70 mm2 . . . G2/24V Æ M1/30 sw>ws .......... X122/2 Æ B39/2

Typ
Benennung/Description/D±nomination
Model R 934 & R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Electrical System From
Depuis
5001
Edition
07.99 Reference of wires Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.56.03
No. wire Color /Section Connection No. wire Color /Section . . . . Connection

ws GND ....... X121/2 Æ MP82 ws GND ....... X135/36 Æ X152/7

ws GND ....... X3>1 Æ X20/1 ws GND ....... X135/38 Æ X152/8
ws GND ....... E52/S71 Æ X22/2 ws GND ....... X135/30 Æ X152/13
ws GND ....... B20 Æ MP1 ws GND ....... X160/12 Æ X129/2
ws GND ....... X49/3 Æ X309/14 ws GND ....... X160/15 Æ X130/2
ws GND ....... H10>1 Æ X309/14 ws GND ....... X155/15 Æ MP1
ws GND ....... H10>2 Æ X309/14 ws GND ....... X174/C Æ MP10
ws GND ....... X14>1/4 Æ X14/3 ws GND ....... X6>2/2 Æ X158/2
ws GND ....... X157/2 Æ X189/2 ws GND ....... X249/3 Æ MP1
ws GND ....... X135/11 Æ X153/5 ws GND ....... X176/2 Æ MP10
ws GND ....... X155/5 Æ X134/4
ws GND ....... X155/15 Æ X134/2 ws GND 6mm2 . . A1100/MP1 Æ A1100/MP12
ws GND ....... X154/11 Æ X311/17 Æ X186/2 ws GND 6mm2 . . A1100/MP1 Æ MP10
ws GND ....... X135/32 Æ X153/13 ws GND 6mm2 . . MP60 Æ MP63
ws GND ....... X135/37 Æ X153/14

8.56.04
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

62 LED INDICATOR
63 RANGE

Monitors Diesel
engines

LCD
Matrix indicator

LCD > SCREEN

Menu control for

LCD indicator

LED INDICATOR RANGE

Engine coolant temperature gauge P2

During operation, the indication must remain in the green range.
If the engine coolant overheats (coolant is above 98∞C = 204∞F), the red LED indicator light 63 starts to
light up on the right end of the indicator.

Simultaneously, the buzzer will sound in the cab and the warning signal E503 will appear on the LCD
screen. **

Stop working soon and keep the engine running at high idle.
If the default persists for over 60 seconds, lower the engine RPM to low idle and turn the engine off
after 3 >5 minutes.
Locate the reason for the trouble and get it repaired.

** On R 964 up to R984 the working pumps are at the same time swivelled back to minimal flow Qmin.
On other machine types, the automatic return to Qmin may be installed as an option , at customer's
wish.

Fuel gauge P3
The LED indicator lights show the fuel level. When the both red LED 62 light up, about 10% to 20%
(depending on machine type) fuel are left in the tank as reserves.

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ
08.71.01
Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MAIN SCREEN
The main screen appears after
the unit is turned on and
remains in place until the
"MENU" key is pressed to
change to the menu selection.

Main screen view (Fig. 3)

SY field: The upper field of the monitor shows warning and indicator symbols, up to maximum 4 symbols at
the same time. If more than 4 symbols must be shown, then every 10 seconds, the symbols move
to the left by one symbol.
The following list shows all symbols which can appear in this field.
EC field: The EC window displays any applicable error codes for any electrical errors in the excavator
electronics, (line errors, sensor errors, ...). Max. 7 error codes can be displayed at the same time.
If more than 7 errors occur, an arrow next to the error code window points to additional error
codes on the list.
Press the arrow keys "UP" et "DOWN" to move the error code window in the selected direction
on the error code list.
For detailed error code list, refer to page no. 8.71.06.

INF field: The INF field on the right hand side of the main screen
displays temporary information, also in graphic form.
If more than 3 symbols must be shown, then every 10
seconds, the symbols move to the left by one symbol.
Displays are shown as graphics or text to show actuated
flow reduction or emergency operation of Diesel
engine or hydraulic pumps.

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.03

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue: 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

TI field: This field, at the bottom right of the screen displays the main hourmeter and the daily hourmeter of
the machine.
The symbol is displayed when a flow limitation is activated for the pumps.
During the display start>up phase, the operator will be alerted about a possible upcoming service
interval, by a graphic symbol displayed instead of the machine hourmeter (see example on fig. 4).
The recalling of upcoming service interval lights up to about 8 seconds.
Control of the screen at error recognition
In case a new error, displayed in field SY, is recognized, the presentation will return to main screen,
and the corresponding symbol is displayed.
Depending on the default (urgency step), the buzzer will alert accousticaly at the same time, either
buzzing in continuous or emitting intermittent sounds.

The symbol signals that the Buzzer of the control unit is activated. Using the key
it is possible to quit the defaults indicated by a continuous buzzing.

Symbols for operating errors displayed in field SY

Each one of the following symbols for operating errors has one error code in the form "E 5xx"
assigned to it. As soon as an error appears, the control unit enters the corresponding error code in
the stored error statistics.

Low coolant level

This symbol appears if the coolant level drops below the minimum level. At the same time the
buzzer will sound in the cab.
E 502 Bring the engine to low idle, and turn it off after about 5 seconds. *
Find and repair the coolant loss.
* On R 964 up to R984 the engine is turned off automatically. On other machine types, the
automatic engine stop may be installed as an option , at customer's wish.

Engine coolant overheat

This symbol appears simultaneously with the lightning of the red LED 63 on the engine coolant
E 503 temperature gauge P2, see on page 8.71.01.

Low hydraulic oil level

This symbol appears if the oil level in the hydraulic tank drops below the minimum level.
Simultaneously an audible signal alerts the operator to this fact. **
Turn the engine off, find and repair the cause of the oil loss.
E 504
Add hydraulic oil only via the return filter.
** On R 964 up to R984 the working pumps are at the same time swivelled back to minimal flow
Qmin. On other machine types, the automatic return to Qmin may be installed as an option ,
at customer's wish.

Hydraulic oil overheating

This symbol appears if the hydraulic oil temperature in the tank exceeds 98∞C (208∞ F).
E 505 Turn the engine off, find and correct the problem (oil cooler dirty, blower or thermostat
defective, ...).

Splitterbox oil overheating (on machines R 934 and above)

This symbol appears if the oil temperature in the splitterbox exceeds 85∞C (185∞ F).
Turn the engine off, find and correct the problem (splitterbox cooler dirty, ...).
E 506

Overvoltage in electrical system

This symbol appears if, during operation, the system voltage exceeds 30 Volt during at least 0,5
seconds.
E 511

08.71.04 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

Locking default of the quick change coupler

This symbol shows that the locking pin of the quick change coupler is not fully out to the stop
(Locked position, checked by the end position switch B26). No error code is assigned to this
problem!

Operating errors displayed in field SY Error code

Low engine oil pressure * E 501
Low coolant level E 502
Engine coolant overheat E 503 * Error indicated by the LED H2 on the
Low hydraulic oil level E 504 monitoring display
Hydraulic oil overheating E 505 ** Only for wheel excavators
Splitterbox oil overheating (on machines R 934 E 506
and above)
Low oil flow (Steering oil indicator) ** E 509
Low oil press. in accumulator (service brake) ** E 510
Overvoltage in electrical system 24 V E 511

Indicator symbols displayed in field INF

Preheat
This symbol appears as long as a preheat action is activated.

End of preheat
After about 20 seconds, the preheat action will be stopped automatically and the symbol "end
of preheat" will be displayed on the LCD screen.

Warming up of Diesel engine coolant

This symbol appears if the engine coolant temperature is below 30 ∞C (86 ∞F), and also if the
hydraulic oil temperature is below 30 ∞C (86 ∞F).
In the first case the engine will automatically increase to RPM stage 3 (approx 1200 RPM).The
warming up procedure will continue until the coolant reaches 30 ∞C, however it will not exceed
3 minutes.
In the second case, the operation mode will be set automatically to F, modes E and P becoming
possible again only when the hydraulic oil temperature reaches 30 ∞C.
Reset the buzzer
This symbol appears if the buzzer has been activated by a corresponding error report. This
signal (continuous or interval sound) can be stopped by pressing the S349 key, see page 8.71.01
or 8.71.04 .
Upcoming service interval
This symbol appears to alert that the working hours for the next service interval have been
reached.
The symbol will go out after the corresponding service works have been carried out and
confirmed using the menu "set service" of the display (see thereafter).

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.05

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

Indicator symbols displayed in field INF (continued)

Diesel engine RPM in safety mode

The symbol informs the excavator's operator that the Diesel engine RPM control has been turned
into safety control, via the switch S 71 of the safety control box E52.
Q min
This symbol comes up when an operating error (as for example the engine coolant overheating)
automatically swivells back the working pumps to Q min.
(Only for machines R 934 and above)
Servo pressure circuit in safety mode
These symbols show that the servo pressure circuit has been turned into emergency
mode, via the switch S 73 of the safety control box E52.

Overload warning device

On machines with overload warning device: when this device is turned on via the push button
S18, this symbol appears when the load limit has been reached.
At the same time an audible signal alerts the operator to this fact.

No overload warning device

This symbol appears when switching on the overload warning device via the push button S18 and
if no overload warning device has been installed or correctly initialized on the machine.

Symbols specific for wheel excavators

Travel forward

Travel reverse

Oscillating axle lock active

Oscillating axle lock automatic active

Outrigger support

Function Reserve 2, 3 or 4

08.71.06 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

ERROR CODES FOR ELECTRICAL ERRORS OF THE ELECTRONIC CONTROL SYSTEM

Detected errors Error code

> Engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 001

Error Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 002
Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 003
> Engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 004
in Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 005
Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 006
the > Coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 007
Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 008
Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 009
circuit > Hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 010
Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 011
Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 012
of the > Hydraulic oil temperature Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 013
Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 014
sensor Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 015
> Gear oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 016
Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 017
which Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 018
> Diesel engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Short to ground . . . . . . . . . E 022
monitors : Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . E 023
Broken wire . . . . . . . . . . . . E 024

Error > Solenoid valve for power control LR Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 027

in the > Solenoid valve for flow limitation EV 1 Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 036
( Hydraulic pump 1)

regulating
> Solenoid valve for flow limitation EV 2 Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 039
( Hydraulic pump 2)
circuit > Solenoid valve / cooling regulation Y53 Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 042
for : > Solenoid valve / cooler fan RPM regulY347 Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 045
> Motor M5 for engine RPM adjustment Default on wire . . . . . . . . . E 046

> Coding plug is missing ............................. E 302

O > No CAN 1 Connection between control unit and circuit board BST . . . . . . . E 303
(Error detected also if BST is not operative, as an
example no power supply, ...)
t
> No CAN 2 Connection between control unit and circuit board ESP01 . . . . . E 305
h (Error detected also if ESP01 is not operative)
> No CAN 2 Connection between control unit and circuit board ESP02 . . . . . E 306
e (Error detected also if ESP02 is not operative)
> No CAN 2 connection Control unit S2 to Display
r or no function of the Control unit ............................. E 308
> No Software compatibility Control unit / Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 309
> Left travel pedal Default on wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 437
> Right travel pedal Default on wire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 440
e > Sensor in joystick handle 1 Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 442
Short to ground / Broken wire . . . . . . . E 443
r > Sensor in joystick handle 2 Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 445
Short to ground / Broken wire . . . . . . . E 446
r
> Transmitter for swing gear RPM Short circuit + 24 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 454
o Short to ground / Broken wire . . . . . . . E 455
> Transmitter in fuel tank Short to ground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 456
r Short circ. + 24 V / Broken wire . . . . . . . E 458
> State of final stages on ESP01 Connection default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 601
s > State of final stages on ESP02 Connection default . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E 602

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.07

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 02 / 2002
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

INFORMATIONS PROVIDED IN THE MENUS OF THE

LCD SCREEN
The following description concerns the machines with:
> Display Nr 989158001
> Control unit Nr 989157801
> BST regulator Nr 989157101

MENU SELECTION

Depressing the "MENU" key when the main screen is displayed

shows the list of the accessible menus (see fig. 5).
The current menu selection can be changed by pressing the "UP"
5 and "DOWN" keys (the selected menu is inverse displayed, as an
example in fig. 5 the menu "reset hours" is selected).
When depressing the "MENU" key again, the inverse displayed
function is branched out.

ACCESS TO THE VARIOUS MENUS OF THE

LCD SCREEN
The completion of the various functions is divided into various service
levels. This division makes it possible to make functions, which require
certain knowledge about various components on the excavator, only
accessible to those who have been well informed about the effects.

The division is separated in three levels.

The first level is generally accessible. The 2nd. and 3rd. level requires a
coded plug on "X30" or "X31" of the final stage circuit board.

LEVEL 1 1st. level : > Reset of the day hourmeter

(Excavator > Adjustment of pump flow for SF function
operator) (this menu "set SF" only appears on machines with
Load Sensing hydraulic circuit)
> Confirms completed service tasks on the excavator
> Shows given hydraulic pump outputs to auxiliary
components
> Information about operating hours
> Information about electrical functions
and hydraulic pumps
> Information about default memory.

2nd. level : > All functions of 1st. level

( Mechanic ) > Information about Diesel engine
LEVEL 2 (Acces using > Output of hourmeters, adjustment values and error
key plug Nb. statistic via the serial port of the control unit
9684328) > Adjustment of nominal values (flow reduction) for
hydraulic pumps for external users (hammer,
grapple, ...)
> Output of pump control values (perfomance test of
Diesel engine)
> Setting values for performance test
> Deactivation of the monitoring of choosen inputs
> Deletion of test error memory.

3rd. level : > All functions of 2nd. level

> Adjustment of nominal values for hydraulic pumps
( Inspector)
of system users (swing drive, travel drive, ...)
> Adjustment of hour meter.
LEVEL 3

08.71.08 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENUS IN LEVEL I
(GENERALLY ACCESSIBLE)

MENU ( "i!>!hours")

Information about operating hours for various components

and movements

The Information screens 1 to 3 (fig. 6 to 8) shows an overview

about operating hours for various components, functional
6
flows and operating modes.

As an example, the screen fig. 6 indicates the operating hours

for:
> Diesel engine in mode P
> Diesel engine in mode E
> Diesel engine in mode F
> Diesel engine in mode L
> Diesel engine at maximum RPM
> Diesel engine at low idle
> Manual operation for Diesel engine RPM control
7
the screen fig. 7 the operating hours for:
> Attachment movements
> Travel movements
indication for > normal speed
> increased speed

and the screen fig. 8 the operating hours for:

> swing movements (this information is not displayed on
machines up to R 924)
> additional attachment movements.
8

The screen fig. 9 gives informations about the machine type

and serial number and about the software version actualy
mounted to the machine.
The two indications behind " Nom" are for the rated RPM
and for the number of teeth of the flywheel of the Diesel
engine.
These both indications are determined by the position of a
codage bridge on the print plate U16 (BST regulator).
The last line provides indication for the momentaneous
operating voltage.
9

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.09

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU

a) NFORMATION ABOUT THE HYDRAULIC PUMP

information screens 1 and 2 (fig. 10 and 11)

This screen gives information about the operating position of

the hydraulic pump.

The screen 1 (fig. 10) gives following indications for the

working pump:
> if a flow limitation is activated for the pump.
10
If it occurs, the symbol "R" is displayed in the field TI, see
main screen.
The fig. 10 shows an example with the flow limitation I1
activated, which limits the pump to 75% of the maximum
flow.
Should several flow limitations be actuated at the same time,
so the one with the smallest flow value has priority.
> the graphic bar with electric current value indicates for the
pump the amount of the momentary flow control signal.
Notice : On machines with Load Sensing hydraulic circuit, only
the signal EV1 is displayed, which limits both pumps at
the same time.
On other machines, each pump can be limited by its
11 own signal EV1 or EV2.
The present LR solenoid current (current value for power
control) is showed on screen 2 (fig. 11).

b) INFORMATION ABOUT THE STATUS OF INPUT TERMINALS >

information screens 3 and 4
(fig. 12 and 13)
This screen shows an overview about the status of different
electrical inputs.

The sign """ means "Input not active".

The sign "#" means "Input active".
The indication "NC" under the terminal description means that
the corresponding input is deactivated in the software.
12 The status of the inputs can be changed using the menu "set
data" > "set E>code".
For the frequency inputs B53 and B12, the sign "#" means that
a significant frequency is recognized by the system.
The sign "#" at "service" means that a key plug is recognized
on the connector X30 or X31 of print plate A1001.
The sign "#" at "MEM OFF" means that the update procedure
for the data copy in the codage plug is not activated.
M1, M2, ...correspond to machine specific (internal) oil flow
limitation.
Presently only M1, M2 and M3 are assigned to the flow
limitation for tarvel motions, respectivaly for pressure increase
and bottom dump shovel.
The durations indicated on the last line M4/Time, resp.
B19/Time correspond to the time lags for the intermittent
13 operation of the windshield wiper, resp. for the engine idle
automatic.

08.71.10 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU ("i!>!errors")
INFORMATION ABOUT DETECTED ERRORS (OPERATING AND
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ERRORS)

In this menu (fig.14):

> select "list Exxx" to list all the operating errors detected by
the switches and sensors for machine parameters
monitoring (fig. 15),
14
> select "list S>Exxx", to show a listing of the above
mentioned errors which occured during service operation,
> select "list E>elec.", to show a listing of all the electrical
errors (system errors) detected during operation of the
machine,

When selecting the operating errors "list Exxx" all the errors
according to the list on pages no. 8.71.04 are listed, with error
code and number of occurence (fig. 15).
Move the arrow keys "UP" and "DOWN" to select the desired
error.
15

By pressing the "MENU" key, the overview of the selected

error appears (fig. 16), with the indication of the operating
hour and duration for the 10 first and the 10 lest occurences
of the error.

Move the arrow keys "UP" and "DOWN" to page in this

overview.

16

When selecting the electrical errors "list E>elec" all the system
errors according to the list on page no. 8.71.06 are listed, with
error code and number of occurence (fig. 17 and 18).

17

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.11

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

The column "Sum" shows the number of all errors which were ever
noted.
The column "Test" shows the number of errors occured since the
last deletion of this test error memory listing.
The operating hours above the test column show the operating
hour when the last test memory was deleted (reset).

18

Selecting "list S>Exxx" also shows the errors according to the list in
pages no. 8.71.04, but this time only the errors which occured
during "service operation" (fig. 19 and 20).

For each error, an overview can be shown and paged in just like for
the "list Exxx" selection (fig. 21).

19

20

21

08.71.12 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU ("set SF")

ADJUSTMENT OF FLOW ADAPTATION BY KEY SF
(This menu only appears on machines with Load Sensing hydraulic
circuit)
This function allows to set the control speed of the excavator
attachment (or of special attachment) to a defined value (fig. 22).
The adjustment is performed using the key "UP" and "DOWN" .
The limitation value adjusted in this menu is activated and
deactivated via the push button S16. 22

MENU ("set option")

ALLOCATION OF FLOW LIMIT OPTIONS TO EXTERNAL INPUT I1 (Special
attachment input; as an example when operating a hammer pedal)
In this menu, pre>defined flow limitations (options) are allocated
to the hardware input I1.
The arrow near the Symbol gives the actual allocation.
In example fig. 23, the option 3 is active for the input I1, this
means, if the external hardware input I1 is activated, then the
nominal pump values allocated in option 3 for the excavator
control are given as maximum nominal values.
If another option must be allocated to input I1 (as an example due 23
to a modification of the working attachment), so first select
another attachment in the vertical symbol range via the key "UP"
or "DOWN".
Confirm the selected option by pressing the "MENU" key, the new
option must then appear in the column.
The right part of the screen provides indication for the currently
set pump values corresponding to the option shown in the
selection window.
The pump selection EV2 is displayed only on machines without a
Load Sensing hydraulic circuit.

24
MENU ("set service")
INFORMATION AND CONFIRMATION OF SERVICE INTERVAL
This screen is an information screen and can be used to confirm a
completed service interval.
The screen shows the operating hour for the next service interval
(in example fig. 24 ="500 hrs") and the current operating hours
("174 hrs").
An upcoming service interval can be confirmed within max. 50
operating hours before the next service interval (fig. 25).
When this time frame is reached, the screen will display a question
regarding completion of the service works for this interval.
If the question is answered with "OK" then this menu will be 25
discontinued.
If it is answered with "OK", then the current operating hour will
be stored as the last confirmed service interval.

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ
08.71.13
Issue: 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU ("reset data")

DELETION OF THE DAILY HOURMETER

This menu allows to reset the daily hourmeter (fig. 26).

To reset the daily hourmeter, first select "OK" via the key "UP" or
"DOWN", and then confirm this choice by pressing the "MENU"
key.
26

08.71.14 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENUS ACCESSIBLE FROM 2nd LEVEL

MENU " i > engine ",

INFORMATION ABOUT DIESEL ENGINE

This information screen displays data coming from the BST

regulator.
Operating conditions for Diesel engine and hydraulic oil tempe>
rature are shown (fig. 29). 29

MENU " i > data ",

PRINTING OF MACHINE DATA

This menu allows to activate the printing of the operating hours

list, resp. of the memorized system parameters and of both errore
lists.
The data are transmitted to the serial port of the control unit
(fig. 30 and 31). 30

31

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.15

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU "set pumps"

SETTING THE EXTERNAL FLOW LIMIT VALUES
In the "set pumps" function, the maximum nominal values for the
hydraulic pumps are defined, which are effective after activation of
an external flow limit entry.
This entry can be activated by the operation of a special attach>
ment, the activation of a given movement, ...
To set the nominal pump values, certain conditions must be
entered, under which the pump value is valid in operation.

34 In the first step, the electrical input is determined, whose activation

results in the desired flow limitation (fig. 34).

Electrical input I1 :
In the next step, the option selection attachment is made for the
input I1 (fig.35).

Via the options selection, it is possible to allocate up to 4 nominal

pump values for this electrical input. The allocation input > option is
determined in the "set option" function.
The option selection is only displayed for electrical input I1.

35
In the 3rd step, the pump selection is made.
After determining the pump, the nominal pump values are shown.
The nominal values are the momentary set values for the
conditions determined by the first two selection criteria.
The value behind the selected pump is highlighted. Use the arrow
key to change this value.
The indicated values are forwarded directly to the pumps during
adjustment. A value change is effective immediately.
On machines with Load Sensing hydraulic circuit only the pump
choice EV1 is displayed.

Electrical input I2, I3 and I4 :

36 No option selection is possible for these inputs. Pump determining
and pump value setting are made according to above description
for input I1 (fig. 37 & 37a).

37 37a

08.71.16 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU "reset data"

DELETING THE DAILY HOURMETER OR THE ERROR MEMORIES

Via this function, the daily hourmeter may be deleted (fig. 38 and
39), as described before in first level menus (operator).

38

39
In addition, this menu lets you delete selectively the error listing
memories.

In the 2nd service level you can:

> delete the column "Test" of electrical errors (see menu "i>
Exxx", 'list E>elec.'), using the choice "reset elec. test errors"
(fig. 40 and 41).

40

41

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.17

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

> reset the errors occuring during service operation (errors "S>Exxx"), using the choice "reset service data", see
fig. 42 and 43.
Notice: in figures 40 to 43, the representation is for Level √, level ¬ offers the choice only between "reset
day hours", "reset elec. test errors" and "reset service data".

42 43

In addition, in level √ you can:

> delete the electrical error list with the function "reset elec. wire errors", (fig. 44 and 45).

44 45

> reset the memory for the operating errors detected by the switches and the sensors for machine parameters
monitoring, if you confirm the choice "reset machine data" (fig. 46 and 47).

46 47

08.71.18 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

> reset all hourmeters of the machine with the function "reset machine hours" (fig. 48 and 49).

48 49

> using the function "reset machine param", recover the parameters that had been set at machine
delivery and reset them as the standart parameters.
The concerned parameters are those which are set using the menus "set option", "sut pump" and "set
data" (only functions "set E>code", "set info" and "set pump").

50 51

> reset the memory of the confirmed service intervals with the choice "reset service interval"
(fig. 52 and 53).

52 53

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ
08.71.19
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU "power test",

SETTING A DEFINED HYDRAULIC PUMP OUTPUT

This function is used to set the power regulator of the hydraulic

pumps to a defined value.
The lower part of the screen 54 shows the actual RPM of the Diesel
engine.
The screen displays the value for the current I(LR) in percent.
The value is the currently valid nominal value for the horsepower
54 regulators of the pumps. Use the arrow key to change the value on
the selected horsepower regulator.
When entering the menu, the value is set to 100%.
The changed value will return to 100% after leaving the menu.

Usually the menu "power test" is usued to check the maximum

hydraulic output allowed by the Diesel engine (test for engine
output).
For the test, I(LR) is set to 100%, this ensure that the pumps will
remain in maximum angle, even at pressures above the expected
regulation begin pressure.

08.71.20 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENU "set data"

SETTING MACHINE SPECIFIC DATA
In the "set data" function, machine specific adjustments are made.
The adjustments in a), b), c) and e) are possible from Level ¬, those in d), f) and g) only in Level √.
a) The function "set E>code" (fig. 61 to 64) allows to switch off the monitoring of choosen inputs (=to
deactivate the inputs ) .
"OFF" means that the corresponding input is deactivated, "ON" means that it is monitored and that the
corresponding error code is active.
The selection of the input to be modified is made using the arrow keys, the change of the status ON / OFF
using the key "MENU".

61 62 63

64

List of the possible settings (SD= State at machine Delivery)

> B19 > X2/32 Monitoring of the connection wire to the sensorplate in the left joystick (SD = ON)
> B19 > X2/33 Monitoring of the connection wire to the sensorplate in the right joystick (SD = ON)
> EV1 > X135/7 Monitoring of the connection wire to the solenoid valve EV1
(SD allways = ON for LS>machines; for non LS>machines SD= ON only if EV1 is installed)
> EV2 > X135/6 Monitoring of the connection wire to the solenoid valve EV2
(SD allways = OFF for LS>machines; for non LS>machines SD= ON only if EV2 is installed)
> EV3 > X135/25 Monitoring of the connection wire to the solenoid valve EV3
(SD allways = OFF for LS>machines; for non LS>machines SD= ON only if EV3 is installed)
> B5 > X135/20 Monitoring of the connection wire to the engine oil pressure transmitter B5
(SD=OFF in normal circumstance, = ON only if B5 installed, i. e. on machines R 964 from
SN 5001).

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ
08.71.21
Issue /11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

b) The choice "set info" allows to eliminate the display of the symbols allocated to the different electrical inputs.
In the example (fig. 66) "K5 > X2/27"set to OFF means that the graphic symbol "Stop Engine" will not appear
on the screen when the corresponding electrical output is activated.

65 66 67

Liste of symbols that can be eliminated

> K5 > X2 / 27 Symbol "Engine Stop" (SD = OFF, connexion wire to the relay K5 for engine Stop is not
serially installed
(engine Stop following to low engine oil pressure or low engine coolant level).
> Y78 > X6.1 / 6 Symbol "Pump to flow min" (SD = allways OFF on LS>machines, SD = ON on not LS>machines
only if a solenoid valve Y78 for minimum oil flow is installed).

c) The function "set config"permits to activate or deactivate some specific function in the control of the
machine (fig. 68 to 73).

68 69 70

71 72 73

08.71.22 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

e) In the function "set time" (fig. 77) following time lags can be displayed and adjusted:
> the time lag for low idle automatic if selecting "sensor B19",
If no low idle automatic system is installed on the machin, the screen for adjustment of the time lag will
not appeat.
> the time lag for intermittent mode of the windshield wiper (choice "wiper M4").

77 78 79

Both above mentioned time lags can also be adjusted using the push buttons controlling the low idle
automatic and the windshield wiper, also see the description of the control unit.

80 81

> the RPM stage that is automically selected for the Diesel engine when a lifting magnet installation is
mode alive (choice "magnet (step)", appears only in level III).
In the example of figure 83, the stage 8 is set, turning on the lifting magnet installation will adjust the
engine to this RPM step. The step can no more be changed using the switches S228, S229 and S86,
more by the low idle automatic system.

82 83

08.71.24 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

f) In the function "set type" (fig. 84 to 86), the excavator's type number can be changed .
After selecting the function, the presently Type No. will appear in the lower section of the screen.
After function start, the first digit is shown inversely. Use the arrow key to change the inversely displayed
position. Use the "MENU" key to change the inversely displayed number to the next higher number.
When the highest number has been reached, it will start over with the lowest number.
After setting the numbers, press the "RETURN" key to leave the function and to store the set number.
The confirmation "update xxxx" will appear momentarily on the screen.

84 85 86

g) In the function "set serie" (fig. 87 to 89), the excavator can be given an identification number.
After selecting the function, the presently set identification number will appear in the lower section of
the screen.
Set the new number as described in part f).

87 88 89

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 08.71.25

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue: 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Monitoring display

MENUS ACCESSIBLE ONLY IN LEVEL III

MENU "set hours"

ADJUSTMENT OF THE HOUR METERS

All the hour meters mentioned in the menu "i>hours" can be set
separately in this function.
Use the arrow keys to select the component, whose operating
hours must be displayed or changed (fig. 90).
90
Confirm the choice using the "MENU" key.
The screen fig. 91 will appear with the indication of the desired
operating hours.
Press the arrow key to change the operating hours by one digit.
Press the arrow key and the "MENU" key at the same time to
change the operating hours by 10 digits at a time.

91

If trying to change the hours for "engine" to a value smaller than

the last service interval, then the question will appear on the
screen if you really want to do this (fig. 92).
If the question is answered with "OK", then the hour meter
remains at the present setting.
The operating hours can be let as they are or changed upward.
Confirmation with "OK" permits a further downward change.
At the same time, the next to last stored confirmed service
interval will be entered as the last confirmed service interval.

92

08.71.26 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical System

A. Function of the codage plug

The control unit S2, (also called BBT in following text), is
fitted on its connector X42 with a codage plug which
carries out the following functions :
1) Codage function
The excavator type will be recognised via a hardware>
coding in the 15 pole plug X42. If no valid codage plug is
inserted, operation of the control unit will be blocked.
2) Memory function
The actual machine data listed below is to be stored in a
data storage unit (serial EEPROM) in the codage plug.
Due to this storing, data can be transferred from the
codage plug through the new control unit, should the old
one be replaced.
Stored data:
> Machine type, serial number and adjustments from the
menu "set config"
> actual reading of the operating hour counter
> actual operating times (indicated in menu i>hours)
> actual values of the flow limitations (internal as well as
external values)
> actual selection of the flow limitation option,
> error storage of the low water level (E502),
> error storage of the high water temperature (E503),
> error storage of the low hydraulic oil (E504),
1 > error storage of the high hydraulic oil temperature
(E505),
1 Control unit S2 > error storage of the low engine oil pressure (E501),
2 Micro>processor Storing of the data from the control unit into the codage
3 Plug connector X42 plug occurs :
4 Monitoring display H1 > automatically and at regular intervals about every 30
minutes,
6 Codage plug (X42)
> manually, using the keys "MODE" and "SF", see next
7 EEPROM > storage of the paragraph.
operating data The purpose of the manually started copy is to secure the
8 Coding of excavator type data contained in the codage plug, as an example before
replacing the control unit.
Notice : The manual storing of data is possible only
from the software>version 2.2 of the control
unit (since approx. may 2000).

08.74.02 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical System

B. Replacing the control unit

1) Preparing for replacement.

Checking data in the codage plug
With ignition key turned off, insert the service plud
"green" into the connector X31 of the circuit board A1001
(ESP01), see fig. 2.
Before beginning the replacement, the important
parameters of the control unit should be read from the
monitoring display and noticed (serial>no, operating
hours, flow limitations, number of operating errors E5xx in 3
the error storage, ...). Use the menus "i>hours (fig. 3), i>
errors and set SF".

2) Securing the data in the codage plug

The procedure is as follows :
f With ignition key turned off and service plug inserted
into X31, press the "MODE" and "SF" keys (fig. 4) and
keep depressed while simultaneously switching on the
ignition key to contact position.
f The control unit now compares its data with those in
the codage plug :
> if the data is ok, the information "X42 > OK" appears
on the display (fig. 5).
> if the data is not ok, storage of the data from the
control unit into the codage plug will be carried out
automatically (recognisable from the moving light
on the LED>display for the speed adjustment, fig. 6).
Thereafter the information "X42 > OK" will appear 4
on the display.

A/R 900 B > A/R 924 6001Æ

R 934 > R 924 5001Æ
08.74.03
11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical System

Particular case : replacing a BBT with a software version 2.1

and older by a BBT with version 2.2 and
more recent.
On control units with software version up to 2.1 included
(machines delivered up to may 2000) the above described
data securing procedure is not possible.
When replacing a BBT with software version e2.1,
proceed as follows to secure data:
f Remove the rear control cover of the new BBT
(versionf2.2 from june 2000), and take off the both
EEPROMs marked "high" and "low"from the printplate,
using the special tool no. 60 (fig. 7).
f with ignition key turned off and batteries switch
7 disconnected, remove the same EEPROMs from the BBT
on the excavator and plug into this control unit (use
special tool no. 61, see fig. 8) the EEPROMs removed
from the new one.
f secure the data in the codage plug as described above.
f disconnect the batteries switch and reinstall all the
EEPROMs to their original control unit.

3) Replacing the control unit S2

Before unplugging the plug connectors, it is imperative that
the battery's main switch is switched off.
Remove the plug connections from the control unit to be
replaced and insert them in the new control unit (taking
note of assignment!) and secure with the screws (fig. 9).
8

08.74.04 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical System

4) Automatic return transfer of data from the codage plug

Following the start of control (self>check) the data in
EEPROM is checked, and if valid, data from the codage
plug will be automatically transferred into the new
control unit.
This will be signalled via the moving light in the speed
indicator on the control unit S2.
When this procedure is complete, all important data as
listed in ß 1 are available in the new control unit.

5) Examination of data returned to control unit

Using the menus of the monitoring display, compare the
data with the values noticed at the begin of the
replacement.

A/R 900 B > A/R 924 6001Æ

R 934 > R 924 5001Æ
08.74.05
11 / 2001
Pos. Description Step Implantation Page / Fig.no.
A3 Radio(A) ........................................... 3 Left console
A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>22 Right console
A1010 Printplate / Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1>19 Left console
A1011 Printplate / optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Engine fan cooler side
B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Expansion reservoir
B5 Transmitter / engine oil pressure(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil filter
B8 Temperature switch / hydraulic oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 up to hydraulic tank
B12 Transmitter / engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flywheel housing
B14 Transmitter / hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 up to hydraulic tank
B16 Switch / engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Engine housing
B19L Sensor / joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Left joystick
B19R Sensor / joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right joystick
B21 Pressure switch / overload warning device (A) . . . . . . . . 18 Support boom, left side
B33.2 Pressure switch / flow reduction (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Additional pedal
B39 Transmitter / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fuel tank
B40 Proximity switch / travel pedal left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal left
B41 Proximity switch / travel pedal right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal right
B43 Temperature switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
B45 Transmitter / air conditioning temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
B50 Speaker (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cab
E2 Floodlights on working attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Equipment
E3 Headlight > uppercarriage > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage
E4 Headlight > uppercarriage > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage
E5 Additional floodlights (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cab
E7 Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cab
E8 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Left console
E9 Beacon(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cab
E25 Light control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control unit
E50 Electric box / circuit breakers & relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1>3 Battery box
E52 Electric box / safety control engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
F1 Fuse 7,5A / heather, windshield wipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F2 Fuse 7,5A / control unit and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F3 Fuse 15A / servo circuit, swing brake,
travel motors control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F4 Fuse 15A / beacon, rotating grab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F5 Fuse 15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F6 Fuse 7.5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console
F7 Fuse 7.5A / BST power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F8 Fuse 7.5A / safety lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F9 Fuse 15A / power safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console
F10 Fuse 15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F11 Fuse 7.5A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Left console
F12 Fuse 15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F13 Fuse 15A / ignition key > starting circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F14 Fuse 15A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F15 Fuse 25A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
F19 Circuit breaker 70A / glow plug and preglow
solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F20 Circuit breaker / main circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F22 Fuse 7,5A / emergency blinker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F31 Fuse 7.5A / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric box E50
F32 Fuse 15A / air conditioner evaporator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric box E50
F33 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F34 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F35 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F36 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
F37 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
G1 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Diesel engine
G2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
R 900 B
Ab
Electrical System From
Depuis
6001
Datum
Edition 07.99 Basic Equipment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.81.03
Pos. Description Step Implantation Page / Fig. no.
H1 Monitoring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Right console
H2 Indicator light / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
H9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 under the cab
H10 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console
H12 Indicator light / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
H19 Indicator light / blinker (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
H20 Indicator light / fault in swing brake circuit . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
H23 Indicator light / accumulator press. (not used) . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
H24 Indicator light / steering oil (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on LCD screen
A1001 / K1 Relay /windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Printplate A1001
" / K2 Relay / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Printplate A1001
" / K3 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001
" / K4 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001
A1010 / K5 Relay / engine stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printplate A1001
" / K6 Relay / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printplate A1001
" / K7 Relay / additional floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printplate A1001
" / K8 Relay / float position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printplate A1001
" / K9 Relay / fuel pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Printplate A1001
E50 /K16 Relay / starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
" /K288 Relay / terminal 15 (contact position) . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
M1 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
M3 Windshield washer system(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 right in the cab
M4 Windshield wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 on the windshield
M5 Motor for engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Diesel engine
M12 Motor for outside air lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
M13 Evaporator fan / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
MP1 Electronic earthing print plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5/8/22 Left console
MP10 Electronic earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . 1/7/8 Battery box
Mp12 Electronic earthing print plate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/7/8 Right console
MP50 Earthing of alternator (engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
MP51 Earthing of engine starter (engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
MP52 Earthing of engine starter (uppercarriage) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
MP53 Earthing of alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
MP60 Earthing under cab on the middle . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14/17/22 Diesel engine
MP60>1 Electronic earthing print plate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
MP60>2 Electronic earthing print plate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
MP62 Earthing under cab right on the front . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15/19 Under cab
MP63 Earthing uppercarriage to the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/22 Uppercarriage
MP64 Earthing shielded A1001 / S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/25 Right console
MP65 Earthing M5 > screw left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/14 Left console
MP82 Earthing uppercarriage (rear side of tank) . . . . . . . . . 18/20 Uppercarriage
MP85 Earthing uppercarriage (equipment) . . . . . . . . . 4/16/17/19 Boom support
MP86 Earthing cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Rear side of cab
MP87 Earthing Diesel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Front of Diesel tank
MP88 Earthing cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Uppercarriage
MP89 Earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
MP90 Earthing in the electric box / fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
P2 Indicator / engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display
P3 Indicator / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display
P4 Indicator / engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
P5 Indicator / operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
R60 Flam glow plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
S1 Starter and preglow switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Right console
S2 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23>25 Right console
S4 Switch / Horn (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cab floor
S5L Switch / Grapple left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left
S5R Switch / Grapple right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left
S6L Switch left in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right
S6R Switch right in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right
S7 Safety switch / servo cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Left console
S9 Batteries switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
S10 Switch / floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S11 Switch / winshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S12 Switch / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S14 Switch / windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S17 Switch / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S18 Switch / overload warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S19 Switch / grapple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S21 Switch / travel motors speed control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S22 Switch / additional floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S41 Switch / beacon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console

8.81.04
Pos. Description Step Implantation Page / Fig.no.
S55 Reserve switch on left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left joystick
S56 Switch / pressure cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S57 Switch / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left joystick
S71 Switch / RPM control in (mode) manu>auto . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console, rear side
S72 Switch / RPM adjustment (+/> ) manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console, rear side
S73 Switch / safety switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console, rear side
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S87 Switch / reserve SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on switching unit right console
S92 Switch / outside air> inside air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
S93 Switch / warm>up regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
S94 Switch / fan speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
S95 Switch / temperature adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
S228 Switch / RPM > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S229 Switch / RPM = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console
S349 Switch / "RETURN" on LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 bellow LCD screen
S350 Switch / "DOWN" on LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 bellow LCD screen
S351 Switch / "UP" on LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 bellow LCD screen
S352 Switch / "MENU" on LCD monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 bellow LCD screen
S354 Switch MODE super Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on switching unit right console

T1 Voltage transformer (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Right console

U16 Centry monitoring system Bst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console
U28 Thermotronic unit / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
U29 Control unit / heater valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
U31 Control unit / evaporator fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
U52 Control unit / preglow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
V1 Diode / air conditioner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
V2 Diode / air conditioner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
V2 End stage / pressure cut in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 on A1001 >right console
V3 Diode / air conditioner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
V3 End stage / travel brake Y6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 on A1001 >right console
V4 Diode / air conditioner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
V4 End stage / travel brake Y7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 on A1001 >right console
V5 Diode / air conditioner control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
V5 End stage / servo Y3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 on A1001 >right console
V6 End stage / inghing gear Y24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 on A1001 >right console
V7 End stage / windschield washer M3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 on A1001 >right console
V8 End stage / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 on A1001 >right console
V12 End stage / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 on A1001 >right console
V21 End stage / floodlights on cab E2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 on A1001 >right console
V24 End stage / floodlights on equipment E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 on A1001 >right console
V26 End stage / beacon E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 on A1001 >right console
V32 End stage / preglow K302, Y1, R60 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 on A1001 >right console
V37 End stage / grapple swing right Y23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 on A1001 >right console
V44 End stage / grapple swing Y78 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 on A1001 >right console
V57 End stage / windschield wipper M4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 on A1001 >right console
V83 End stage / grapple swing left Y22 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 on A1001 >right console
X1 Connector A1001 > U16 / 24 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9>10 Right console
X2 Connector S2 > A1001 / 37 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22>23 Right console
X3 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13/19 Right console
X3>1 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/11/15/21 Right console
X3>2 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/14 Right console
X3>3 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X3>4 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X4 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>11/21 Right console
X5>1 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/16/18 Right console
X5>2 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Right console
X6>1 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/15/17/18 Right console
X6>2 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17>20 Right console
X7 Connector A1001 > B19L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console
X8 Connector A1001 > B19R / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console
X9 Connector A1001 > B40 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
R 900 B
Ab
Electrical System From
Depuis
6001
Datum
Edition 07.99 Basic Equipment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.81.05
 Pos. Description Step Implantation Page / Fig. no.
X10 Connector A1001 > B266 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console
X11 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/12 Right console
X12 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20/22 Right console
X13 Connector A1001 > S57 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X13>1 Connector A3 > B50 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Loud speaker
X13>2 Connector A3 > B50 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Loud speaker
X14 Connector S2 > A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console
X14>1 Connector A1001 > S2 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/24 Right console
X15>1 Connector S5L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X15>2 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Left console
X15>3 Connector S55 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X16 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console
X17 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console
X18 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Right console
X19 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Right console
X20 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . 11/14/15/18/19 Right console
X21 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Right console
X22 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X23 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console
X29>1 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Left console
X30 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X31 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X32 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X33 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X40 Connector S2 > H1 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Right console
X42 Connector on S2 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console
X44 Connector BST / 3 poles (code plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Right console
X45 Connector on E50 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Battery box
X49 Connector S2 > H10 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Control unit
X50 Connector S2 / 25 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25/27 Right console
X69 Connector / 12 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Battery box
X74 Connector / reserve/ 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/10/11 Right console
X83 Connector S57 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X84>2 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X84>3 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
X86 Connector / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X87 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X88 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X93 Connector B53 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Left console
X94 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X121 Connector B21 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boom support, right
X122 Connector B39 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Diesel tank
X125 Connector B39 > H9 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Diesel tank
X128 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X129 Connector / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X130 Connector / reserve B30 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
X134 Connector B8 > B14 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic tank
X135 Connector BST / 40 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console
X152 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>7 Left console
X153 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Left console
X154 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3>8 Left console
X155 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>8 Left console
X156 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>4 Left console
X157 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/5/15/18>20 Left console
X158 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/14/16 Left console
X159 Connector on A1010 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>3 Left console
X160 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console
X161 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/16/17>20 Left console
X163 Connector on A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left console
X164 Connector A1010 > F1 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165 Connector A1010 > F2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166 Connector A1010 > F3 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X167 Connector A1010 > F4 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X168 Connector A1010 > F11 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X169 Connector A1010 > F12 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X170 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X172 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X173 Connector E52 > U16 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X174 Connector B3 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Diesel engine water cooler
X176 Connector B16 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Space of Diesel engine
X177 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X179 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support

8.81.06
Pos. Description Step Implantation Page / Fig.no.
X181 Connector / reserve/ 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X185 Connector B5 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil pressure transmitter
X186 Connector B2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hydraulic oil temp. transmitter
X187 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Indicator operating hours
X188 Connector M5 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Motor for engine RPM
X189 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X190 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X191 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X192 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console
X195 Connector reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Servo unit
X196 Connector B40 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left pedal
X197 Connector B41 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right pedal
X229 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
X310 Connector preglow / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X311 Connector on engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
X359 Connector preglow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine space
Y3 Solenoid valve / servo pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Servo unit
Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Servo unit
Y22 Solenoid valve / grapple drive left (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y23 Solenoid valve / grapple drive right (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y24 Solenoid valve / travel motors control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Servo unit
Y29 Solenoid valve / enginr Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Injection pump
Y46 Solenoid valve / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 under cab
Y50 RSV / power adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Servo unit
Y51 RSV / flow reduction (Load Sensing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Servo unit
Y52 RSV / flow reduction(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit
Y53 RSV / flow reduction(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit

(A) Optional attachment

RSV Regulation solenoid valve

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
R 900 B
Ab
Electrical System From
Depuis
6001
Datum
Edition 07.99 Basic Equipment Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 8.81.07
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

A3 Radio(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01

A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>07>09
A1010 Printplate / Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>10
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine fan cooler side . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Expansion reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B5 Transmitter / engine oil pressure(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B8 Transmitter / hydraulic oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 top to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B12 Transmitter / engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flywheel housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B14 Transmitter / hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 up to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B16 Switch / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Engine housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
B19L Sensor / joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B19R Sensor / joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B21 Pressure switch / overload warning device (A) . . . . . . 18 Boom support, left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B33 Pressure switch / flow reduction (A) hammer . . . . . . . 18 Additional pedal
B33.1 Pressure switch / reserve (bottom dump shovel, ...)(A) 18 Additional pedal
B33.2 Pressure switch / flow reduction (A) hammer . . . . . . . 18 Additional pedal
B39 Transmitter / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B40 Proximity switch / travel left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B41 Proximity switch / travel right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B43 Temperature switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B44 Pressure switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B45 Transmitter / air conditioning temperature . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
B50 Speaker (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cab
E2 Floodlights on working attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E3 Headlight > uppercarriage > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E4 Headlight > uppercarriage > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E5 Additional floodlights (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cab roof
E7 Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cab
E8 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
E9 Beacon(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cab roof
E25 Lighting of control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control unit
E50 Power electric box / circuit breakers & relays . . . . . . . 2>3 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
E52 Electric box / safety control engine, servo . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
F1 Fuse2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F2 Fuse 2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F3 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F4 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F5 Fuse 15A / windshield wiper & washer motors, control
circuits for preglow, beacon, rotating device . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F6 Fuse 15A / manual adjustment of engine RPM . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F7 Fuse 15A / control unit and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F8 Fuse 7,5A / safety lever, solenoid valves for servo
circuit, swing brake, travel motors control &
pressure cut in stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F9 Fuse 7,5A / BST power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F10 Fuse 7,5A / floodlights, additional floodlights . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F11 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F12 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F13 Fuse 15A / ignition key > starting circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F14 Fuse 15A / dome light, cigarettes lighter, horn . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F15 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F19 Circuit breaker / glow plug and preglow
solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F20 Circuit breaker / circuit principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F22 Fuse 7,5A, / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14

R 900 B Li / 6158 Æ 08.81.35

Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

F31 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F32 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner evaporator > M2 . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F33 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F34 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F35 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F36 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F37 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
G1 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
G2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
H1 Monitoring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 > 24 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H2 Indicator light / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 on hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
H10 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
H12 Indicator light / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H19 Indicator light / blinker (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H20 Indicator light / parking brake (not used) . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H23 Indicator light / accumulator press. (not used) . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H24 Indicator light / steering oil (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
K1 Relay /windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K2 Relay / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K3 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K4 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K5 Relay / engine stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K6 Relay / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K7 Relay / additional floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K8 Relay / float position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K9 Relais / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K16 Relay / starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K288 Relay / terminal 15 (contact position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
M1 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
M3 Windshield washer system(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 right in the cab
M4 Windshield wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 on the windshield
M5 Motor for engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
M12 Motor for outside air lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
M13 Evaporator fan / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
MP1 Electronic earthing print plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5/8/22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
MP10 Electronic earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . 1/7/8 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP12 Electronic earthing print plate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP50 Earthing engine on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP60 Earthing under cab on the middle . . . . . . . . 1/14/17/22 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP61.1 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP61.2 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP62 Earthing under cab right on the front . . . . . . . . . . 15/19 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP63 Earthing uppercarriage to the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/22 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP64 Earthing shielded printpl. A1001 & control unit S2 22/25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP65 Earthing screw left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP82 Earthing uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18/32 Rear side of tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP85 Earthing equipment to uppercarriage . . . . 4/16/17/19 Boom support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP86 Earthing cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/18 Rear side of cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP87 Earthing fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Front of fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP88 Earthing cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP89 Earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP90 Earthing in the power electric box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17

08.81.36 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

P2 Indicator / engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03

P3 Indicator / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
P4 Indicator / engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.04>05
P5 Indicator / operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
R51 Flam glow plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
S1 Starter and preglow switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S2 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23>25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S4 Switch / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Cab floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5L Switch / rotating device left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5R Switch / rotating device right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6L Switch left in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6R Switch right in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S7 Safety switch / servo cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S9 Batteries switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
S10 Switch / floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S11 Switch / winshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S12 Switch / SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S14 Switch / windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S17 Switch / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S18 Switch / overload warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S19 Switch / rotating device Y22, Y23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S21 Switch / travel motors speed control / Y24 . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S22 Switch / additional floodlights / E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S36 Switch / SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S41 Switch / beacon / E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S55 Reserve switch / special equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S56 Switch / pressure cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S71 Switch / engine RPM control in mode manu . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S72 Switch / RPM adjustment (+/> ) manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S73 Switch / servo>control in mode manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
(e) S85 Switch / grapple fonction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . . . 8.55.
S87 Switch / Special function (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . . . 8.55.
S92 Switch / outside air> inside air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S93 Switch / warm>up regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S94 Switch / fan speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S95 Switch / temperature adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S228 Switch / RPM > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S229 Switch / RPM = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S349 Switch / "RETURN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S350 Switch / "DOWN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S351 Switch / "UP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S352 Switch / "MENU" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S354 Switch MODE super Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
T1 Voltage transformer (A) .......................... 3 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U16 Centry monitoring system Bst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U28 Thermotronic unit / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U29 Control unit / heater valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U31 Control unit / evaporator fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
U52 Control unit / preglow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50
X1 Connector A1001 > U16 / 24 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9>10 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X2 Connector S2 > A1001 / 37 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22>23 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13/19 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3>1 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 3/11/15/21 Right console
X3>2 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/14 Right console
X3>3 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X3>4 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X4 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>11/21 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5>1 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/16/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5>2 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>1 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 14/15/17/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>2 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17>20 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X7 Connector A1001 > B19L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X8 Connector A1001 > B19R / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X9 Connector A1001 > B40 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09

R 900 B Li / 6158 Æ 08.81.37

Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location

X10 Connector A1001 > B266 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09

X11 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/12 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X12 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20/22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X13 Connector A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14 Connector S2 > A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14>1 Connector A1001 > S2 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/24 Right console
X15>1 Connector S5L / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X15>2 Connector (reserve) / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Left console
X15>3 Connector S55 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X16 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X17 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X18 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X19 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X20 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . 11/14/15/18/19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X21 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X22 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X23 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X29>1 Connector (reserve) / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Left console
X30 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X31 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X32 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X33 Connector RS232 on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X40 Connector S2 > H1 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Right console
X42 Connector > codage S2 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console
X44 Connector BST / 3 poles (code plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Right console
X45 Connector on E50 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/3 Battery box
X49 Connector S2 > H10 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Control unit
X50 Connector S2 / 25 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25/27 Right console
X65 Connector on T1 (+24V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X66 Connector on T1 (+12V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>1 Connector on A3 (+12V) 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>2 Connector on loud speaker / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X69 Connector on E50 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Battery box
X74 Connector / reserve / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/10/11 Right joystick
X79 Connector on air conditioner / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
X83 Connector S57 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X84>2 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X84>3 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X86 Connector / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X87 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X88 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X93 Connector B53 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 To swing motor
X94 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner
X120>1 Connector Y22 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 22
X120>2 Connector Y23 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 23
X121 Connector B21 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boom support, right
X122 Connector B39 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Diesel tank
X125 Connector B39 > H9 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Diesel tank
X128 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X130 Connector / reserve B30 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
X134 Connector B8 > B14 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic tank
X135 Connector BST / 40 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console
X141 Connector for refueling pump / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Electric box E42
X152 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X153 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X154 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X155 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>8/14 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X156 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>4 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

08.81.38 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. D±signation Pas Implantation Page / Fig. Nb

X157 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . 2/5/15/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

X158 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 4/14/16>19 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X159 Connector on A1010 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X160 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X161 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X163 Connector on A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164 Connector A1010 > F1 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165 Connector A1010 > F2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X165.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166 Connector A1010 > F3 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X166.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X167 Connector A1010 > F4 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X168 Connector A1010 > F11 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X169 Connector A1010 > F12 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X170 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X173 Connector E52 > U16 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X174 Connector B3 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Diesel engine water cooler
X176 Connector B16 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Space of Diesel engine
X177 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X179 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X181 Connector / reserve/ 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X185 Connector B5 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil pressure transmitter
X186 Connector B2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hydraulic oil temp. transmitter
X187 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Indicator operating hours
X188 Connector M5 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Motor for engine RPM
X189 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X190 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X192 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X196 Connector B40 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left pedal
X197 Connector B41 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right pedal
X229 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
X233 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X310 Connector preglow / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X311 Connector on engine : 18 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine
X359 Connector preglow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine space
X422 Contact connection on windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Windshield
Y1 Solenoid valve / preglow injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
Y3 Solenoid valve / servo pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y20 Solenoid valve / magnetic clutch air conditioner . . . 26 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y22 Solenoid valve / rotating device left (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y23 Solenoid valve / rotating device right (A) . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y24 Solenoid valve / travel motors control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y29 Solenoid valve / fuel injection> engine stop . . . . . . . . . 4 Fuel injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
Y46 Solenoid valve / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y50 Regul. solenoid valve / power adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 8 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y51 Regul. SV / flow reduction EV1 (Load Sensing) . . . . . . 6 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y52 Regul. solenoid valve / flow reduction EV2 (A) . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit
(a) Y53 Regul. solenoid valve / hydraulic oil cooling . . . . . . . . 7 Control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.13
Y78 Solenoid valve / grapple drive (not for R 904) . . . . . 14 Servo unit
(i)Y347 Regul. solenoid valve / option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ................................... 8.55.13

(A) = Option

R 900 B Li / 6158 Æ 08.81.39

Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

A3 Radio(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01

A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>07>09
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigt console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
A1010 Printplate / Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>10
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine fan cooler side . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Expansion reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B5 Transmitter / engine oil pressure(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B8 Transmitter / hydraulic oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 top to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B12 Transmitter / engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flywheel housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B14 Transmitter / hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 up to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B16 Switch / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Engine housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
B19L Sensor / joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B19R Sensor / joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B21 Pressure switch / overload warning device (A) . . . . . . 18 Boom support, left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
(e)B33.1 Pressure switch / reserve (bottom dump shovel, ...)(A) 18 Additional pedal
B33.2 Pressure switch / flow reduction (A) hammer . . . . . . . 18 Additional pedal
B39 Transmitter / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B40 Proximity switch / travel left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B41 Proximity switch / travel right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B43 Temperature switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B44 Pressure switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B45 Transmitter / air conditioning temperature . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
B50 Speaker (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cab
E2 Floodlights on working attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E3 Headlight > uppercarriage > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E4 Headlight > uppercarriage > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E5 Additional floodlights (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cab roof
E7 Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cab
E8 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
E9 Beacon(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cab roof
E25 Lighting of control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control unit
E50 Power electric box / circuit breakers & relays . . . . . . . 2>3 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
E52 Electric box / safety control engine, servo . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
F1 Fuse2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F2 Fuse 2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F3 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F4 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F5 Fuse 15A / windshield wiper & washer motors, control
circuits for preglow, beacon, rotating device . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F6 Fuse 15A / manual adjustment of engine RPM . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F7 Fuse 15A / control unit and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F8 Fuse 7,5A / safety lever, solenoid valves for servo
circuit, swing brake, travel motors control &
pressure cut in stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F9 Fuse 7,5A / BST power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F10 Fuse 7,5A / floodlights, additional floodlights . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F11 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F12 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F13 Fuse 15A / ignition key > starting circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F14 Fuse 15A / dome light, cigarettes lighter, horn . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F15 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F19 Circuit breaker 70A / glow plug and preglow
solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F20 Circuit breaker 50A / circuit principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F22 Fuse 7,5A, / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14

R 904 Li / 6001 Æ
R 914 > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ
08.85.01
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

F31 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F32 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner evaporator > M2 . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F33 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F34 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F35 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F36 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F37 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
G1 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
G2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
H1 Monitoring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 > 24 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H2 Indicator light / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 on hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
H10 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
H12 Indicator light / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H19 Indicator light / blinker (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H20 Indicator light / parking brake (not used) . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H23 Indicator light / accumulator press. (not used) . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H24 Indicator light / steering oil (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
K1 Relay /windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K2 Relay / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K3 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K4 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
(f) K5 Relay / servo>control in safety mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K5 Relay / engine stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K6 Relay / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K7 Relay / additional floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K8 Relay / float position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K9 Relais / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K16 Relay / starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K288 Relay / terminal 15 (contact position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K302 Relay / terminal 19 (preglow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
M1 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
M3 Windshield washer system(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 right in the cab
M4 Windshield wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 on the windshield
M5 Motor for engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
M12 Motor for outside air lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
M13 Evaporator fan / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
MP1 Electronic earthing print plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5/8/22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
MP10 Electronic earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . 1/7/8 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP12 Electronic earthing print plate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP50 Earthing engine on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP60 Earthing under cab on the middle . . . . . . . . 1/14/17/22 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP61.1 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP61.2 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP62 Earthing under cab right on the front . . . . . . . . . . 15/19 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP63 Earthing uppercarriage to the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/22 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP64 Earthing shielded printpl. A1001 & control unit S2 22/25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP65 Earthing screw left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP82 Earthing uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18/32 Rear side of tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP85 Earthing equipment to uppercarriage . . . . 4/16/17/19 Boom support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP86 Earthing cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/18 Rear side of cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP87 Earthing fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Front of fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP88 Earthing cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP89 Earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP90 Earthing in the power electric box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17

08.85.02 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

P2 Indicator / engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03

P3 Indicator / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
P4 Indicator / engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.04>05
P5 Indicator / operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
R51 Flam glow plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
S1 Starter and preglow switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S2 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23>25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5L Switch / rotating device left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5R Switch / rotating device right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6L Switch left in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6R Switch right in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S7 Safety switch / servo cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S9 Batteries switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
S10 Switch / floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S11 Switch / winshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S14 Switch / windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S17 Switch / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S18 Switch / overload warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S19 Switch / rotating device Y22, Y23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S21 Switch / travel motors speed control / Y24 . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S22 Switch / additional floodlights / E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S36 Switch / SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S41 Switch / beacon / E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S55 Reserve switch / special equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S56 Switch / pressure cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S57 Switch / swing brake (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S71 Switch / engine RPM control in mode manu . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S72 Switch / RPM adjustment (+/> ) manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S73 Switch / servo>control in mode manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
(e) S85 Switch / grapple fonction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . . . 8.55.
S92 Switch / outside air> inside air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S93 Switch / warm>up regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S94 Switch / fan speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S95 Switch / temperature adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S228 Switch / RPM > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S229 Switch / RPM = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S349 Switch / "RETURN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S350 Switch / "DOWN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S351 Switch / "UP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S352 Switch / "MENU" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S354 Switch MODE super Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
T1 Voltage transformer (A) .......................... 3 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U16 Centry monitoring system Bst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U28 Thermotronic unit / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U29 Control unit / heater valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U31 Control unit / evaporator fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
X1 Connector A1001 > U16 / 24 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9>10 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X2 Connector S2 > A1001 / 37 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22>23 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13/19 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3>1 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 3/11/15/21 Right console
X3>2 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/14 Right console
X3>3 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X3>4 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X4 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>11/21 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5 Connector on A1001 / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Left console
X5>1 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/16/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5>2 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>1 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 14/15/17/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>2 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17>20 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X7 Connector A1001 > B19L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X8 Connector A1001 > B19R / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X9 Connector A1001 > B40 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09

R 904 Li / 6001 Æ
R 914 > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ
08.85.03
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location

X10 Connector A1001 > B266 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09

X11 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/12 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X12 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20/22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X13 Connector A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14 Connector S2 > A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14>1 Connector A1001 > S2 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/24 Right console
X15>1 Connector S5L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X15>3 Connector S55 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X16 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X17 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X18 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X19 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X20 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . 11/14/15/18/19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X21 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X22 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X23 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X30 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X31 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X32 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X33 Connector RS232 on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X40 Connector S2 > H1 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Right console
X42 Connector > codage S2 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console
(f) X43 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09
X44 Connector BST / 3 poles (code plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Right console
X45 Connector on E50 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/3 Battery box
X49 Connector S2 > H10 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Control unit
X50 Connector S2 / 25 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25/27 Right console
X65 Connector on T1 (+24V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X66 Connector on T1 (+12V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>1 Connector on A3 (+12V) 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>2 Connector on loud speaker / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X69 Connector on E50 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Battery box
X74 Connector / reserve / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/10/11 Right joystick
X79 Connector on air conditioner / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
X83 Connector S57 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X84>2 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X84>3 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X86 Connector / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X87 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X88 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X93 Connector B53 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 To swing motor
X94 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner
X120>1 Connector Y22 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 22
X120>2 Connector Y23 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 23
X121 Connector B21 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boom support, right
X122 Connector B39 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Diesel tank
X125 Connector B39 > H9 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Diesel tank
X128 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X129 Connector / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 to B33>2
X130 Connector / reserve B30 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
X134 Connector B8 > B14 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic tank
X135 Connector BST / 40 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console
(e)X141 Connector for refueling pump / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Electric box E42
X152 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X153 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X154 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X155 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>8/14 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X156 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>4 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

08.85.04 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. D±signation Pas Implantation Page / Fig. Nb

X157 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . 2/5/15/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

X158 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 4/14/16>19 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X159 Connector on A1010 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X160 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X161 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X163 Connector on A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164 Connector A1010 > F1 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165 Connector A1010 > F2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X165.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166 Connector A1010 > F3 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X166.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X167 Connector A1010 > F4 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X168 Connector A1010 > F11 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X169 Connector A1010 > F12 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X170 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X172 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X173 Connector E52 > U16 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X174 Connector B3 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Diesel engine water cooler
X176 Connector B16 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Space of Diesel engine
X177 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X179 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X181 Connector / reserve/ 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X185 Connector B5 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil pressure transmitter
X186 Connector B2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hydraulic oil temp. transmitter
X187 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Indicator operating hours
X188 Connector M5 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Motor for engine RPM
X189 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X190 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X191 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X192 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X195 Connector reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Servo oil unit
X196 Connector B40 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left pedal
X197 Connector B41 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right pedal
X229 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
(i)X435 Connector / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
Y1 Solenoid valve / preglow injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
Y3 Solenoid valve / servo pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y20 Solenoid valve / magnetic clutch air conditioner . . . 26 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y22 Solenoid valve / rotating device left (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y23 Solenoid valve / rotating device right (A) . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y24 Solenoid valve / travel motors control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y29 Solenoid valve / fuel injection> engine stop . . . . . . . . . 4 Fuel injection pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
Y46 Solenoid valve / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y50 Regul. solenoid valve / power adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 8 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y51 Regul. SV / flow reduction EV1 (Load Sensing) . . . . . . 6 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y52 Regul. solenoid valve / flow reduction EV2 (A) . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit
(a) Y53 Regul. solenoid valve / hydraulic oil cooling . . . . . . . . 7 Control valve block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.13
Y78 Solenoid valve / grapple drive (not for R 904) . . . . . 14 Servo unit
(i)Y347 Regul. solenoid valve / option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 ................................... 8.55.13

(A) = Option
(a), (e), (f), (i) Components have been introduced during the series, see the corresponding modification
mark on page 1. 01. 01

R 904 Li / 6001 Æ
R 914 > R 924 Li / 6001 Æ
08.85.05
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

A3 Radio(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01

A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>07>09
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rigt console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
A1010 Printplate / Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01>10
A1011 Printplate / optional equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B2 Temperature switch / engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine fan cooler side . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B3 Transmitter / engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Expansion reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B5 Transmitter / engine oil pressure(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B8 Transmitter / hydraulic oil temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 top to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B12 Transmitter / engine speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Flywheel housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09>12
B14 Transmitter / hydraulic oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 up to hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B15 Temperature switch / splitterbox oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 On splitterbox
B16 Switch / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Engine housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
B19L Sensor / joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B19R Sensor / joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B21 Pressure switch / overload warning device (A) . . . . . . 18 Boom support, left side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
(e)B33.1 Pressure switch / reserve (bottom dump shovel, ...)(A) 18 Additional pedal
B33.2 Pressure switch / flow reduction (A) hammer . . . . . . . 18 Additional pedal
B39 Transmitter / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
B40 Proximity switch / travel left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B41 Proximity switch / travel right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Travel pedal right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
B43 Temperature switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B44 Pressure switch / air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
B45 Transmitter / air conditioning temperature . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
B50 Speaker (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Cab
B53 Impulse transmitter / swing motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 On swing motor
E2 Floodlights on working attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E3 Headlight > uppercarriage > right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E4 Headlight > uppercarriage > left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Front on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
E5 Additional floodlights (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Cab roof
E7 Dome light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Cab
E8 Cigarette lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
E9 Beacon(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Cab roof
E25 Lighting of control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Control unit
E50 Power electric box / circuit breakers & relays . . . . . . . 2>3 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
E52 Electric box / safety control engine, servo . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
F1 Fuse2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F2 Fuse 2A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F3 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F4 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F5 Fuse 15A / windshield wiper & washer motors, control
circuits for preglow, beacon, rotating device . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F6 Fuse 15A / manual adjustment of engine RPM . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F7 Fuse 15A / control unit and display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
F8 Fuse 7,5A / safety lever, solenoid valves for servo
circuit, swing brake, travel motors control &
pressure cut in stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F9 Fuse 7,5A / BST power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F10 Fuse 7,5A / floodlights, additional floodlights . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F11 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F12 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F13 Fuse 15A / ignition key > starting circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F14 Fuse 15A / dome light, cigarettes lighter, horn . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F15 Fuse 7,5A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console, on A 1010 .............. 8.55.10
F19 Circuit breaker 70A / glow plug and preglow
solenoid valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F20 Circuit breaker 50A / circuit principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14
F22 Fuse 7,5A, / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ
R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
08.87.01
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

F31 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F32 Fuse 7,5A / air conditioner evaporator > M2 . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F33 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F34 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F35 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F36 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
F37 Fuse 15A / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 .................... 8.55.14.
G1 Alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
G2 Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
H1 Monitoring display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 > 24 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H2 Indicator light / engine oil pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H9 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 on hydraulic tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
H10 Buzzer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
H12 Indicator light / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H19 Indicator light / blinker (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H20 Indicator light / parking brake (not used) . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H23 Indicator light / accumulator press. (not used) . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
H24 Indicator light / steering oil (not used) . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03.
K1 Relay /windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K2 Relay / battery charge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K3 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K4 Relay / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
(f) K5 Relay / servo>control in safety mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Printplate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
K5 Relay / engine stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K6 Relay / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K7 Relay / additional floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K8 Relay / float position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Printpl. A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K9 Relais / reserve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Printpl. A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
K16>1 Relay / starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K16>2 Relay / solenoid valve "Synchrostart" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K288 Relay / terminal 15 (contact position) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
K302 Relay / terminal 19 (preglow) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14
M1 Starter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
M3 Windshield washer system(A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 right in the cab
M4 Windshield wiper motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 on the windshield
M5 Motor for engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12>17
M12 Motor for outside air lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
M13 Evaporator fan / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
MP1 Electronic earthing print plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/5/8/22 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
MP10 Electronic earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . 1/7/8 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP12 Electronic earthing print plate A1001 . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP50 Earthing engine on uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP60 Earthing under cab on the middle . . . . . . . . 1/14/17/22 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP61.1 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP61.2 Earthing printplate A1010 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10>17
MP62 Earthing under cab right on the front . . . . . . . . . . 15/19 Under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP63 Earthing uppercarriage to the cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/22 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP64 Earthing shielded printpl. A1001 & control unit S2 22/25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP65 Earthing screw left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP82 Earthing uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17/18/32 Rear side of tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP85 Earthing equipment to uppercarriage . . . . 4/16/17/19 Boom support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP86 Earthing cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14/18 Rear side of cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP87 Earthing fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Front of fuel tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP88 Earthing cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Uppercarriage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP89 Earthing battery circuit breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
MP90 Earthing in the power electric box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Electric box E50 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17

08.87.02 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location Page / Fig. Nb

P2 Indicator / engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03

P3 Indicator / fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
P4 Indicator / engine RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.04>05
P5 Indicator / operating hours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
R51 Flam glow plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
S1 Starter and preglow switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S2 Control unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23>25 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5L Switch / rotating device left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S5R Switch / rotating device right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Joystick left . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6L Switch left in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S6R Switch right in joystick right / horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Joystick right . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S7 Safety switch / servo cut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S9 Batteries switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.14>17
S10 Switch / floodlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S11 Switch / winshield washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S14 Switch / windshield wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S17 Switch / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S18 Switch / overload warning device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S19 Switch / rotating device Y22, Y23 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S20 Switch / automatic idle speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S21 Switch / travel motors speed control / Y24 . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S22 Switch / additional floodlights / E5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S25 Pressure vswitch / servo>control circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic tank
S36 Switch / SF1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S41 Switch / beacon / E9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 25 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S55 Reserve switch / special equipments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S56 Switch / pressure cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S57 Switch / swing brake (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Left joystick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S71 Switch / engine RPM control in mode manu . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S72 Switch / RPM adjustment (+/> ) manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
S73 Switch / servo>control in mode manu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Rear control board, rightside . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
(e) S85 Switch / grapple fonction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . 8.55.05
S86 Switch / engine RPM mode selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . . . . . . 8.55.
S92 Switch / outside air> inside air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S93 Switch / warm>up regulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S94 Switch / fan speed adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S95 Switch / temperature adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
S228 Switch / RPM > . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S229 Switch / RPM = . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
S349 Switch / "RETURN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S350 Switch / "DOWN" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S351 Switch / "UP" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S352 Switch / "MENU" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on monitoring display H1 . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.03
S354 Switch MODE super Fine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 on control unit S2 right console . . . . 8.55.04>05
T1 Voltage transformer (A) .......................... 3 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U16 Centry monitoring system Bst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.01
U28 Thermotronic unit / air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U29 Control unit / heater valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
U31 Control unit / evaporator fan speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioning circuit
X1 Connector A1001 > U16 / 24 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9>10 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X2 Connector S2 > A1001 / 37 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22>23 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/13/19 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X3>1 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 3/11/15/21 Right console
X3>2 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3/14 Right console
X3>3 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X3>4 Connector 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Right console
X4 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10>11/21 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5 Connector on A1001 / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Left console
X5>1 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/16/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X5>2 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>1 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 14/15/17/18 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X6>2 Connector on A1001 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17>20 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X7 Connector A1001 > B19L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X8 Connector A1001 > B19R / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09
X9 Connector A1001 > B40 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console .................... 8.55.07>09

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ
R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
08.87.03
Issue : 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. Designation Step Location

X10 Connector A1001 > B266 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09

X11 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11/12 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X12 Connector on A1001 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20/22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X13 Connector A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14 Connector S2 > A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X14>1 Connector A1001 > S2 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22/24 Right console
X15>1 Connector S5L / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X15>3 Connector S55 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Left console
X16 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X17 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X18 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X19 Connector on A1001 / 6 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X20 Connector on A1001 / 10 poles . . . . . . . 11/14/15/18/19 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X21 Connector on A1001 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X22 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X23 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X30 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X31 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X32 Connector on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X33 Connector RS232 on A1001 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.07>09
X40 Connector S2 > H1 / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Right console
X42 Connector > codage S2 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Right console
(f) X43 Connector on A1001 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Right console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.09
X44 Connector BST / 3 poles (code plug) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Right console
X45 Connector on E50 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2/3 Battery box
X49 Connector S2 > H10 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Control unit
X50 Connector S2 / 25 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25/27 Right console
X65 Connector on T1 (+24V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X66 Connector on T1 (+12V) 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>1 Connector on A3 (+12V) 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X67>2 Connector on loud speaker / 8 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X69 Connector on E50 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/2 Battery box
X74 Connector / reserve / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/10/11 Right joystick
X79 Connector on air conditioner / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
X83 Connector S57 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Right console
X84>2 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X84>3 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1/26 Left console
X86 Connector / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X87 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X88 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Control air conditioning
X93 Connector B53 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 To swing motor
X94 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Air conditioner
X103 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 To air conditioner
X120>1 Connector Y22 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 22
X120>2 Connector Y23 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Upperc. to Y 23
X121 Connector B21 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Boom support, right
X122 Connector B39 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Diesel tank
X125 Connector B39 > H9 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4/19 Diesel tank
X128 Connector / reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X129 Connector / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 to B33>2
X130 Connector / reserve B30 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
X134 Connector B8 > B14 / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Hydraulic tank
X135 Connector BST / 40 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>9 Right console
X137 Connector to Y160 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 On uppercarriage
(e)X141 Connector for refueling pump / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Electric box E42
X152 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X153 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6>8 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X154 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3>7 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X155 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5>8/14 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X156 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>4 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

08.87.04 11 / 2001
Service Manual Hydraulic Excavator Electrical circuit

Pos. D±signation Pas Implantation Page / Fig. Nb

X157 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . 2/5/15/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10

X158 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . . . 4/14/16>19 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X159 Connector on A1010 / 9 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2>3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X160 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X161 Connector on A1010 / 15 poles . . . . . . . . . 4/15>16/18>20 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X163 Connector on A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164 Connector A1010 > F1 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X164.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X164.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165 Connector A1010 > F2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X165.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X165.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166 Connector A1010 > F3 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X166.1 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.2 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.3 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X166.4 Connector A1011 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X167 Connector A1010 > F4 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X168 Connector A1010 > F11 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X169 Connector A1010 > F12 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.10
X170 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X172 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Battery box
X173 Connector E52 > U16 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X174 Connector B3 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Diesel engine water cooler
X176 Connector B16 > A1010 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Space of Diesel engine
X177 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X179 Connector E2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Boom support
X181 Connector / reserve/ 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Left console
X185 Connector B5 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Engine oil pressure transmitter
X186 Connector B2 / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Hydraulic oil temp. transmitter
X187 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Indicator operating hours
X188 Connector M5 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Motor for engine RPM
X189 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X190 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X191 Connector / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Right console
X192 Connector / 1 p—le . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Left console
X194 Connector Y14 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Engine compartment
X195 Connector reserve / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Servo oil unit
X196 Connector B40 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Left pedal
X197 Connector B41 / 3 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Right pedal
X198 Connector / 4 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
X229 Connector / 2 poles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Left console
(i)X435 Connector / 1 pole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Left console
Y1 Solenoid valve / preglow injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.12
Y3 Solenoid valve / servo pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y14 Solenoid valve / "Synchrostart" engine stop . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.13
Y17 Solenoid valve / starting injection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Diesel engine space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.13
Y20 Solenoid valve / magnetic clutch air conditioner . . . 26 Diesel engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y22 Solenoid valve / rotating device left (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y23 Solenoid valve / rotating device right (A) . . . . . . . . . . 20 Control valve block
Y24 Solenoid valve / travel motors control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y46 Solenoid valve / heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 under cab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.15
Y50 Regul. solenoid valve / power adjustment . . . . . . . . . . 8 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y51 Regul. solenoid valve / flow reduction EV1 (A) . . . . . . . 6 Servo unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.17
Y52 Regul. solenoid valve / flow reduction EV2 (A) . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit
Y53 Regul. solenoid valve / flow reduction EV3 (A) . . . . . . . 7 Servo unit
Y160 Solenoid valve / pressure cut>in stage (A) . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Control valve block
(i)Y347 Regul. solenoid valve / cooling fan RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 Fan drive pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.55.13

(A) = Option
(a), (e), (f), (i) Components have been introduced during the series, see the corresponding modification
mark on page 1. 01. 01

R 934 Li / 5001 Æ
R 944 Li / 5001 Æ
08.87.05
Issue : 11 / 2001
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

9.10. Swing Gear "SAT" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900B / 6001 Æ

A / R 904 / 6001 Æ
A / R 914 / 6001 Æ
A / R 924 / 6001 Æ
A / R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

9.20. Swing Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900B / 6001 Æ

A / R 904 / 6001 Æ
A / R 914 / 6001 Æ
A / R 924 / 6001 Æ
A / R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

A/R 900 B >A/R 924 / 6001 Æ 9.00.00

A/R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2001
 1. CONSTRUCTION OF SWING GEAR
The two stage planetary gear is driven by the attached HMF (914 > 924) or FMF (900 B > 904 > 934 > 944)
hydraulic oil motor.
It moves the uppercarriage via the output shaft and the internally geared swing ring. The integrated disk
brake acts directly on the gear drive. It is used as a spring applied brake and is vented hydraulically, i.e. if
there is no brake pressure, the disks are pressed together by springs and the brake is mechanically closed.)
A housing around the output pinion of the swing gear contains all the necessary lubrication reserve for the
lubrication of the output pinion and swing ring teeth.
Lubricating the gear partially replaces this reserve.

A / R 900 B and 904

A / R 914 and 924

A / R 934 and R 944

A/R 900 B >A/R 924 / 6001 Æ 9.10.01

A/R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2001
2. TECHNICAL DATA

Litronic

Machine Model A / R 900 B A / R 904 A / R 914

Serial number 6001 6001 6001

Gear Type SAT 225 / 220 SAT 225 / 220 SAT 250 / 231
Max. Speed 2400 min>1 2400 min>1 2172 min>1
Max. Torque 4850 Nm 4850 Nm 8500 Nm
Gear Ratio 1 : 31,7 1 : 31,7 1 : 31,7
Weight 108 kg 108 kg 154 kg
Oil Quantity in Gear 4.4 ltr. 4.4 ltr. 5.5 ltr.
Oil Quality API > GL > 5 API > GL > 5 API > GL > 5
Oil Viskosity SAE 90 W SAE 90 W SAE 90 W
or SAE 80 W 90 SAE 80 W 90 SAE 80 W 90
(or if swing brake actuated via foot pedal) SAE 90 LS SAE 90 LS SAE 90 LS

Brake Disk brake hydr. vented

Air pressure min. 20 bar 20 bar 28 bar
Air pressure max. 35 bar 35 bar 35 bar

Axial play and Torques :

A) Measurement of control of sun gear 5 93,5 +0,5 mm 93,5 +0,5 mm 9,0 +0,5 mm
( measured from mounting surface )

B) Friction of tapered roller bearing 57/ 58 20 > 25 Nm 20 > 25 Nm 35 > 40 Nm

C) Torque screw 60 49 Nm 49 Nm 49 Nm

D) Torque screw 61 135 Nm 135 Nm 210 Nm

E) Torque screw 63 86 Nm 86 Nm 210 Nm

F) Torque screw 101 310 Nm 310 Nm 310 Nm

H) Torque screw 104 310 Nm 310 Nm 310 Nm

9.10.02 Issue : 12 / 2001

TECHNICAL DATA

Litronic

Machine Model A / R 924 A / R 934 R 944

Serial number 6001 5001 5001

Gear Type SAT 275 / 233 SAT 275 / 222 SAT 300 / 213
Max. Speed 2172min>1 1943 min>1 1550 min>1
Max. Torque 9000 Nm 10500 Nm 13460 Nm
Gear Ratio 1:36 1 : 31,7 1 : 31,7
Weight 175 kg 200 kg 260 kg
Oil Quantity in Gear 6,0 ltr. 6,0 ltr. 8,0 ltr.
Oil Quality API > GL > 5 API > GL > 5 API > GL > 5
Oil Viskosity SAE 90 W SAE 90 W SAE 90 W
or SAE 80 W 90 SAE 80 W 90 SAE 80 W 90
(or if swing brake actuated via foot pedal) SAE 90 LS SAE 90 LS SAE 90 LS

Brake Disk brake hydr. vented

Air pressure min. 28 bar 20 bar 20 bar
Air pressure max. 35 bar 35 bar 35 bar

Axial play and Torques :

A) Measurement of control of sun gear 5 9,0+0,5 mm 93,5 mm 111,7 mm

( measured from mounting surface )

B) Friction of tapered roller bearing 57/ 58 35 > 40 Nm 45 > 50 Nm 55 > 60 Nm

C) Torque screw 60 49 Nm 49 Nm 49 Nm

D) Torque screw 61 135 Nm 210 Nm 210 Nm

E) Torque screw 63 210 Nm 210 Nm 210 Nm

F) Torque screw 101 310 Nm 310 Nm 620 Nm

H) Torque screw 104 310 Nm 310 Nm 620 Nm

A/R 900 B >A/R 924 / 6001 Æ 9.10.03

A/R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2001
 3. FUNCTION AND POWER FLOW, see also ß 6.
The input torque is transferred to the sun gear 5 by the
hydraulic oil motor 190.

The sun gear 5 drives the sun gear 6 via the planetary gears
10 and the planetary carrier 15 with the reduced speed by
planetary stage I.

The sun gear 6 drives at the same time via planetary gear 11
and the planetary carrier 16 the output shaft 17 with the
reduced speed by planetary gear II.

The gear ratio > see also ß "Technical Data"> is combined by

both planetary gears. The output torque increases in the
same ratio as the output speed is reduced.

Function of lubrication system

The grease cap 26, mounted on the housing 2, covers the
pinion of the drive shaft 17 to the connection on the swing
ring. The cap is filled with grease via a lubrication line.
It releases grease to the pinion and swing gears every time
the uppercarriage turns.

Gear maintenance
The gear has to be checked regularly > in intervals given in
maintenance guide lines in section 3 > for leaks and oil level
as well as mounting tightness of gear and oil motor.
The gear oil also has to be changed in certain intervals.

Maintenance of lubrication system

The grease in the grease cap has to be replaced or added to
in certain intervals, see also maintenance guidelines in
section 3.

9.10.04 Issue : 12 / 2001

4. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF SWING GEAR
4.1 Removal of swing gear
Lower attachment to the ground.

Remove cap on drain valve 105, attach oil drain hose

(in the excavatorπs tool kit) and drain the gear oil in an
appropriate container.

Remove oil drain hose and attach cap on drain valve

105.

Remove the appropriate hydraulic lines and parts,

which might be in the way when removing the gear.

Remove hydraulic, leak oil and brake lines from the oil
motor and gear.

Remove screws 104 and lift the gear with a lifting

device from the upper carriage.

4.2 INSTALLATION OF SWING GEAR

Coat the lower part of the gear in the area of
centering in the lower uppercarriage sheet with
anticorrosive grease (preferably use "Optimol White
T", ident no. 8500307).
Lift the gear into the upper carriage (watch that it is
positioned correctly because of the oil drain plug).

Install screws 104 and torque to prescribed value, see

"Technical Data".

Connect the brake, leak oil and hydraulic lines to the

oil motor and gear.

Remove the cover 97 and add gear oil, see lubrication

chart in section 1. via the filler tube until the level
reaches the upper mark on the dipstick 13.
Reinstall the cover 97.
3
Check gear and function and pinion mesh into the
swing ring.

Replace the grease for the swing ring teeth

lubrication on grease fitting 106 and check the swing
ring lubrication.

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 09.10.05

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001
 5. TO SEAL THE GEAR
Note:
The work described in paragraph 5.1 and 5.2 can be
completed when the gear is installed.

Important:
Check and carefully clean all parts before installation.
All seals should be lightly oiled or greased before installation.

5.1. Sealing in the area of the swing motor

Remove all lines which might be in the way.
6
The hydraulic and leak oil lines and control lines on the
oil motor can possibly stay connected.

Remove screws 101 and lift oil motor 190 from the gear.

Replace the o>ring 102 on the oil motor.

Set the oil motor 190 again into the gear. Reinstall the
screws 101. For torque values, see "Technical Data".

5.2. Sealing in the area of the multi>disks brake

Note:
Before removing the brake, make sure the attachment is
lowered to the ground.
Description : The sealing operation is described in the ß
"Repair on the brake" in the subgroup "Swing Brake".
7

09.10.06 12 / 2001
A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 09.10.07
A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue : 12 / 2001
 6. Exploded view, parts list,
sectional view

2 Output shaft housing 43 Spring 82 O>ring

5 Sun gear 44 Spring 83 O>ring
6 Sun gear 45 Retainer 84 O>ring
10 Planetary gear 46 Retainer 88 Groove ring
11 Planetary gear 47 Grooved nut 89 Groove ring
13 Dipstick 49 Support ring 90 Shaft seal
15 Planetary carrier 57 Tapered roller bearing 91 Nilos ring
16 Planetary carrier 58 Tapered roller bearing 94 Plug (only 900 B)
17 Output shaft 60 Screw 97 Filler tube
20 Inner gear 61 Screw 101 Screw
25 Brake housing 62 Plug (only 900 B) 102 O>ring
26 Lubrication cap 63 Screw 104 Screw
30 Piston 65 Lock washer 105 Drain valve
31 End ring 66 Lock washer 190 Oil Motor HMF or FMF
35 Ring 70 Snap ring 900 Repair kit / brakes
36 Inner disk 71 Snap ring 910 Gasket set / gear
37 Outer disk 73 Snap ring 960 Repair kit / brake disks
40 Disk carrier 77 Support ring
42 Spring
(not mounted on 900 B)

Notice the adjustment values and torques

A, B, C, D, E, F, H

See "Technical Data", ß 2.

09.10.08 12 / 2001


R 934 > R 944 5001Æ

A / R 900 B > A / R 904 6001Æ

09.10.09

Issue : 12 / 2001






























 6. Exploded view, parts list,
sectional view

2 Output shaft housing 42 Spring 73 Snap ring

5 Sun gear (not mounted on 900 B) 77 Support ring
6 Sun gear 43 Spring 82 O>ring
10 Planetary gear 44 Spring 83 O>ring
11 Planetary gear 45 Retainer 84 O>ring
13 Dipstick 46 Retainer 88 Groove ring
15 Planetary carrier 47 Grooved nut 89 Groove ring
16 Planetary carrier 49 Support ring 90 Shaft seal
17 Output shaft 57 Tapered roller bearing 91 Nilos ring
20 Inner gear 58 Tapered roller bearing 94 Plug (only 900 B)
25 Brake housing 60 Screw 97 Filler tube
26 Lubrication cap 61 Screw 101 Screw
30 Piston 62 Plug (only 900 B) 102 O>ring
31 End ring 63 Screw 104 Screw
35 Ring 65 Lock washer 105 Drain valve
36 Inner disk 66 Lock washer 190 Oil Motor HMF or FMF
37 Outer disk 70 Snap ring 900 Repair kit / brakes
40 Disk carrier 71 Snap ring 910 Gasket set / gear
960 Repair kit / brake disks

Notice the adjustment values and torques

A, B, C, D, E, F, H

See "Technical Data", ß 2.

09.10.10 12 / 2001


A / R 914 > A / R 924 6001Æ

09.10.11

Issue : 12 / 2001






















































































































































































































































































































































































































































A. Construction of the swing brake circuit
1. Disk brake, see fig. 1
The brake is integrated into the swing brake and acts on the
gear drive. It is a hydraulically vented, wet disk bake. The
brake disks 36/37 are pressed together mechanically by the
preload force of springs 42/43/44 and released by actuating
the piston 30 with servo pressure (on the opposite side of
the spring).

2. Solenoid valve Y7, see fig. 2

Solenoid valve Y7 is integrated in the control and regulating
oil unit 50.
In neutral position, the solenoid valve connects chamber "K"
with the tank (brake is applied).
In working position, it connects chamber "K" with servo
pressure (brake is released).

3. Circuit board A1001, see fig. 3

This circuit board controls the solenoid valve "Y7" via its
output stage "V4". If the circuit board receives the signal
"brake released" from the switching unit via the CAN>BUS 2,
the output stage makes alive the power output to solenoid
valve Y7.
Refer to the sub>group "Components of the electric system"
for the arrangement of the circuit board A1001.

3

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 09.20.01

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001


5

09.20.02

"Brake released"

"Brake applied"

The lighting diode is off

The lighting diode is on

of the swing motor

2. The operation of the brake

1. Elements for swing brake control

depressing the push botton S17.

automatic brake control, see next ß.

> Push button S17 > on the switching unit

brake is different (direct or semi>automatic).




















B. Control and function of the swing brake circuit

> Rocker switch S57* > in the handle of the right joystick

Y7 is alive

Brake applied

Brake is released







Y7 in rest position

12 / 2001




















> On machines with direct brake control (A / R 900 B up to A
> Impulse transmitter B53* > mounted to the connector plate

Depending on the machine type, the control of the swing

* B53 and S57 are mounted only on machines having semi>

/ R 924) the brake is alternately applied and released by



semi>

"Brake in

automatic"




























lights up.

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ

diode is off

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ

The lighting

"Brake applied"

The lighting diode is on

mounted to the right joystick lever:

tilted up

Rocker switch
tilted down

Rocker switch






































































uppercarriage speed gets lower than a limit value,

brake operating mode (brake applied or semi>automatic).

RPM >
RPM <

> with the rocker switch S57 tilted up, the brake remains released.

Uppercarriage
















Uppercarriage

Y7 is alive
brake applied

Y7 in rest position

brake is released

09.20.03

Issue: 12 / 2001
> On machines with semi>automatic brake control (R 934 and R 944) the push button S17 select the

> In the other position, the brake is in semi>automatic mode and is controlled via the rocker switch S57
> In one position the brake remains always applied. In this case the red control light in the button S17

> with the rocker switch S57 tilted down, the brake is appled, respectively it applies as soon as the





















































































































































































































































































3. Principle Schematic

A / R 900 B > A / R 924

Liaison
uniqt. sur
pelles A

A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01

A1001>H7 LED green / Input signal
A1001>H8 LED red / Default
A1001>H9 LED green / Output signal
A1001>V4 Amplifier / Swing brake
A1010 Plrintplate / Fuses (R>machines)
A1100 Plrintplate contol ESP02 (A>machines)
A1010>F8 Fuse
A1010>H8 LED / Output F8
A1100>F8 Fuse
A1100>H8 LED / Output F8
S17 Switch / swing brake
Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake

30 Hydraulic pump / Servo>control

50 Control and regulating oil unit
190 Swing motor
195 Swing brake
196 Swing gear

09.20.04 12 / 2001



























































































































































































































































































































































































































3. Principle Schematic

A / R 934 > R 944

A1001 Printplate > Control ESP01

A1001>H7 LED green / Input signal
A1001>H8 LED red / Default
A1001>H9 LED green / Output signal
A1001>V4 Amplifier / Swing brake
A1010 Plrintplate / Fuses
A1010>F8 Fuse
A1010>H8 LED / Output F8
B53 Impuls transmitter / swing
motor *
30 Hydraulic pump / Servo>control
S17 Switch / swing brake
50 Control and regulating oil unit S57 Switch / swing brake *
190 Swing motor Y7 Solenoid valve / swing brake
195 Swing brake
* Only on machines with semi>
196 Swing gear automatic brake control

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 09.20.05

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001






























































































































































































































































































































































































































C. Repair on the brake (sealing the brake and replacing the brake disks)

If a lot of noise can be heard in the brakes, the brake pads are worn. The outer disks should be replaced
immediately. The brake also has to be replaced if the braking action decreases.
Important !
Before repairing the brakes, make sure all appropriate safety procedures are for machine and personnel
are observed, as parking the machine on level ground, securing the machine if working on an incline,
relieving the brake pressure.
The brake can be repaired without removing the gear.
The following drawings are part of the complete gear section views in the subgroup "Swing gear SAT".

1. Removal of swing motor 190 and brake housing 25

Remove the necessary hydraulic lines to reach the gear.

Remove screws 101 and pull the oil motor 190 with connected
hydraulic lines from the gear. Remove the brake lines from the
gear.

Remove the screws 61 and brake housing 25 from inner gear

20.

2. Disassembly of brake housing 25

Important : The ring 31 and piston 30 are spring
loaded.
6
Push down piston 30 with special tool no. 20 > 23 >see
subgroup 2.07> and two screws M16¥120 or M16¥140.
Release snap ring 73, loosen the tool and remove it.
Remove piston 30, springs 42/43/44 and o>rings 82 / 86 and
grooved ring 88 from brake housing 25.

7

09.20.06 12 / 2001


















































































































































































































































































Push end ring 31 from piston 30 and pull off grooved ring 89.
Remove front ring 35, brake disks 36/37 and rear ring 35
from the inner gear 20.

3. Assembly of the brake housing 25

Important:
Carefully clean and check all parts for wear before
installation.
Set the rear ring 35 into the inner gear 20 and insert the
outer and inner disks 37/36 in order: Outer disk> inner disk >
outer disk etc.
Set the front ring 35 onto the last outer disk.
Insert the grooved ring 89 into the end ring 31 and grooved
ring 88 and o>rings into the brake housing 25.
Design of gear
housing 25
turned by 90∞
Note: Mount the support rings to the side opposite
the pressure side.
Lightly lubricate the grooved rings before installation.
Pull o>ring 82 onto the brake housing 25, lightly lubricate it
before installation.
Push end ring 31 into the piston 30. Insert springs 42/43/44
and push piston 30 onto the brake housing 25.
With tool no. 20, push the piston 30 down. Insert snap ring
73 (watch that it is seated correctly), remove the tool.

4. To reinstall brake housing 25 and swing motor 190

Replace o>rings 102 on the oil motor and 84 on the brake
housing; lubricate them lightly before installation.
Push the brake housing 25 into the inner gear 20 and mount 8
screws 61 with washer 66.
For torque values, see "Technical Data" in subgroup "Swing
Gear".
Push oil motor 190 into the sun gear 5 and brake housing 25
and mount with screws 101.
For torque values, see "Technical Data" in subgroup "Swing
Gear".
Connect brake lines to the gear.
Check the brake for function, see description of function.

9

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 09.20.07

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001
 SUB GROUP INDEX A / R 900 B > R 944

10.10. Swing Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B / 6001 Æ

A / R 904 / 6001 Æ
A / R 914 / 6001 Æ
A / R 924 / 6001 Æ
A / R 934 / 5001 Æ
R 944 / 5001 Æ

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 10.00.00

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001



























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Construction

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ

uppercarriage to turn in all directions, 360∞.

The swing ring is a single row, axial bearing race with a large diameter.

To turn, the swing gear meshes with the inner gear of the swing ring and moves the uppercarriage.

10.10.01

Issue: 12 / 2001





























































































The swing ring is used as a connector with gears between the upper and undercarriage and allows the





















































































































































































































































































Function of swing ring
When working, the excavatorπs uppercarriage has to absorb great stress and strain. These forces are transferred
by the outer ring 1, which is mounted on the uppercarriage and the balls 3, to the inner ring 2, which is mounted
to the undercarriage.

Two seals 4 and 5 prevent dirt and dust from entering the swing ring.

The swing ring is to be lubricated via a central lubrication line on the outer ring of the swing ring.
The gear of the inner ring and pinion are lubricated via a grease packing on the swing gear pinion, see also
section 9.

The swing ring and grease packing in the swing gear has to be replaced and checked at certain intervals, see
maintenance guide lines in section 3.

Note:
The swing ring must always be stored and transported in a horizontal position. Swing rings must be handled with
care: shocks, impacts and distortion must be avoided during installation and transportation.

The accident prevention regulations for excavators must be strictly observed when repairing the swing ring.

1 Outer ring
2 Inner ring
3 Ball
4 Upper seal
5 Lower seal
6 Grease fitting

10.10.02 12 / 2001






























































































































































































































































































































































































































1. Measuring the clearances
Max. clearance
To check the clearance, a gauge with magnetic stand is
needed for correct measurement.

Align the uppercarriage with the undercarriage. Attach

the gauge to the swing ring. as shown in fig. 1. Fill the
bucket, lift it and extend the attachment as far as possible.

Set the dial on the gauge to zero.

Lift the uppercarriage slightly with the attachment.

The difference between the two measurements is the play

of the swing ring. Additional measurements can and
should be taken using the same procedure at various swing
1 ring positions.

Measuring the backlash

To measure the backlash, a strip of lead approximately 10
mm wide (.8∫), 120 mm long (5∫) and 2 mm thick (.08∫) can
be used.

Park the machine on flat, level ground, release the swing

lock and swing brake. Extend the attachments and lift it
about 1 m (3π) off the ground.

Place lead strip or wire horizontally in the center on both

sides of one swing ring tooth.
Slowly rotate the uppercarriage by pushing against the

Check the tooth clearance between the extended attachment.

swing ring and swing gear teeth with a Remove the lead strip and measure as shown in example,
2 lead strip. see fig. 2.

Example : Tooth > side A 1,00 mm

Tooth > side B + 0,40 mm

Backlash 1,40 mm

Note: The backlash must be measured in the

middle of the teeth, see drawing.

10.10.04 12 / 2001






























































































































































































































































































































































































































2. Removing the swing ring
To replace the swing ring, the upper carriage has to be lifted off the undercarriage with a lift or crane.

Lifting and shoring material, such as chains, cables, slings, shackles and wood should be properly selected
(see weight of upper carriage on page 10.10.02).

Before lifting the uppercarriage with a crane, remove the attachment.

When lifting the uppercarriage with a lift cylinder or jacks, as described in the following paragraph, the
attachment is not removed from the machine.

Check the boom cylinder for leaks.

Caution : It is not permitted or necessary for any person to be under the jacked up uppercarriage
when the following procedure is followed !

2.1 Park the machine with the uppercarriage turned by 90∞ on flat, solid ground . Fully extend the
bucket or stick cylinder (retract the bucket or stick) and lower the attachment to the ground.
2.2 Mark and then plug and remove the lower air and hydraulic lines.
Catch the hydraulic oil in an appropriate container.
2.3 Mark and then plug and remove the upper hydraulic lines.
2.4 If necessary, disconnect the lube oil lines.
2.5 Remove mounting screws from the intermediate flange on the rotary connection to the
undercarriage and lift the rotary connection from the undercarriage, see section 7 > Rotary
Connection.
2.6 Remove all but two (front and rear) of the outer swing gear screws 15 from the swing ring to the
uppercarriage.
2.7 Erect a wooden platform 10 on both sides, position the hydraulic jacks under the counterweight.
Remove the two outer screws 15 which remained in the swing gear.
2.8 Lift the uppercarriage on the front with boom cylinder approximately 60 to 80 mm (2 to 3 ∫). Leave
the cab.
With hydraulic jacks 11, lift the uppercarriage evenly until the undercarriage is free, see fig. 4 and 5.
To prevent the uppercarriage from sinking, additional wooden blocks must be inserted.
2.9 Carefully pull the undercarriage out and remove the screws 15 from the undercarriage to the swing
ring.
Lift off the swing ring and set it down on a prepared surface.
Secure the uppercarriage with wooden blocks 17, see fig. 6.

A / R 900 B > A / R 924 6001Æ 10.10.05

A / R 934 > R 944 5001Æ Issue: 12 / 2001




















































































































































































































































































3. Installation, see fig. 1>6
To assure proper wear and operation, the mounting surface must be clean and level. Burrs, rust and uneven
spots must be carefully removed.
3.1 Set the swing ring 14 onto the undercarriage, make sure it is seated correctly, see fig. 3. Tighten the
mounting screws 15 with a torque wrench according to the torque chart on page 10.10.02 in a 90∞
tightening sequence. Check the swing ring for easy movement and lubricate the ball bearing via the
grease fitting.
3.2 Remove the wooden platform 17, pull the undercarriage carefully under the upper carriage and remove
the wooden blocks 13 on the hydraulic jacks 11. Lower the uppercarriage slowly and evenly with the
boom cylinders onto the swing ring.

Note : Turn the outer ring of the swing ring into the correct position, see fig. 3. The swing gear pinion has
to mesh with the gear and the mounting holes have to be lined up with the threads on the
uppercarriage.
3.3 Insert the two outer screws 14 > rear and front > remove the hydraulic jacks 11 and/or wooden platform
10.
3.4 Install the remaining screws 15 and turn them in a 90∞ sequence with a torque wrench, see chart for
torque values.
3.5 Set the rotary connection into the undercarriage and tighten screws.
3.6 Connect the air and hydraulic lines on top of the bottom of the rotary connection (check your marks to
assure correct hook up).
3.7 Connect the lubrication lines.
3.8 Start the Diesel engine, actuate all functions in the undercarriage and check the lines for leaks.
3.9 Replace the grease packing in the lubrication system on the swing gear pinion and lubricate the
uppercarriage by turning the gear.
Check lubrication.
Check the swing ring for function and clearances, (see page 10.10.02, and fig. 1 and 2).

Important !
When installing a new swing ring, the old grease on the cap on the swing ring pinion must be carefully
removed. The cap must initially be filled with MoS2 based grease. We suggest to use Mobiltac 81.

10.10.06 12 / 2001
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

11.51. Travel Gear > Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

11.67. Travel Gear Liebherr "FAT" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

11.71. Travel Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

11.75. Slipring Seal

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel Gear From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.50.00
 Chart of Travel Gears
R 900 B to R 924 Litronic / from Serial Number 6001
R 934 and R 944 Litronic / from Serial Number 5001

FAT 350 / FAT 350 / FAT 400 / FAT 400 /

Travel Gear
032 022 063 073

Description, see Sub Group 11.67 11.67 11.67 11.67

Gear Ratio 90.1 102 102 113.3

Mounted in Machines

900 B Std (664 / 6001Æ) X

904 Std (668 / 6001Æ) X

914 Std (641 / 6001Æ) X

914 HD>S (642 / 6001Æ) X

914 HD>SL (640 / 3001Æ) X

924 HD>SL (645 / 6001Æ) X

924 EW (646 / 6001Æ) X

934 HD>SL (648 / 5001Æ) X

934 HD>S (647 / 5001Æ) X

934 EW (649 / 5001Æ) X

944 HD>SL (651 / 5001Æ) X

944 HD>S (650 / 5001Æ) X

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel Gear From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Chart Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.51.01
1. CONSTRUCTION OF TRAVEL GEAR
The three stage planetary gear is driven by a FMV (R 900 B, R 904, R 914 and R 924 or FMF (R 934 and R 944)
hydraulic oil motor.
It moves the track chain via the sprocket wheel, which is connected to the gear. The integrated wet disc
brakes are directly applied to the gear. The brakes are spring applied brakes and are hydraulically vented,
i.e. if there is no brake pressure, the discs are pressed together by springs; the brake is held closed
mechanically.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel Gear FAT From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.67.01
Function and Power Flow, see diagram on page 11.67.07
The input torque is transferred from the oil motor 96 via the splined disc carrier 55 to the input shaft 35 at the
gear .
The input shaft 35 drives the sun gear 25 via planetary gear 32 and planetary carrier 30, with the oil motor speed
reduced by planetary stage I.
The sun gear 25 drives the sun gear 15 via planetary gear 22 and planetary carrier 20 with the speed reduced by
planetary stage II.
The sun gear 15 drives the inner gear 10 via planetary gear 5 with the speed reduced by planetary stage III.
The sprocket wheel, which is connected with the inner gear 10 turns the track chain and thus transfers the torque
of the gear to the chain.

Gear Maintenance

The gear has to be checked regularly, in intervals given on the maintenance guidelines in section 3. Check the oil
level, for leaks, the mounting tightness of the gear, the sprocket wheel and the oil motor. The gear oil has to be
replaced in given intervals.

Sealing and Repair of the gear

See the separately issued Repair Instructions "Travel gear FAT ...∫, concerned gear type.

11.67.02
2. GENERAL DATA

Gear Type FAT 350 / 032 FAT 350 / 022 FAT 400 / 063 FAT 400 / 073

Output RPM max permissible min>1 48 38 28.5 28.5

Output torque max permissible Nm 35000 35000 60000 60000
Gear ratio 90.1 102 102 113.3
Torque constant Nm / bar 1.20 1.20 1.60 1.60
(at max. oil volume of oil motor)
Weight Kg 180 180 305 305
Oil quantity in gear l. 5 5 6.5 6.5
Oil quality API > GL > 5
Oil vicosity SAE 90 or SAE 80 W 90
Brake Disk brake, hydr. vented
Brake torque static Nm 46800 53000 90000 90000
Venting pressure, min. bar 18 18 18 18

Axial play and torques values to be noted at installation :

A) Control measure for axial play, driving

side (top of sun gear 5 to mounting face
of hydraulic motor) mm 93.5+1 93.5+1 111.5+0,5 111.5+0,5

B) Control measure for axial play,

planetary gears side
(from end of diving shaft 35
to mounting face of cover 40) mm 3.5+1 3.5+1 3.5+1 3.5+1

C) Torque> Threaded pin 1.4 Nm 410 410 410 410

D) Torque> Screws 46 Nm 69 69 69 69

E) Torque > Screws 95 Nm 310 310 620 620

(Motor)
Torque > Screws 99 Nm 620 620 620 620
(Sprocket)

Torque > Screws 100 Nm 620 620 620 620

(Gear)

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel gear "FAT" From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.67.03
 3. REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION OF TRAVEL GEAR
CAUTION : Observe all safety guidelines before working
on the gear. Make sure the machine is parked on flat, solid
ground, or properly secured when working on an incline.
Relieve hydraulic and brake pressure.
3.1 Removal of Travel Gear
1. Park the machine on flat, solid ground.
Turn the gear so that one drain plug 48 points down to the
ground. Remove plug 48 and drain the gear oil into appro>
priate container. Reinsert plug 48.
2. Release the track and remove it, see description on sub >
group 12.62.
3. Remove screws 99 and take off sprocket wheel 105
4. Remove screws 98 and take off the protective cover 102.
5. Disconnect hydraulic lines 106, leak oil and servo lines 107
/ 108 on hydraulic motor.
Disconnect brake line 109 on gear.
Close off all connections.
6. Remove screws 112 and remove Brake valve 110 and
connector flange 111 from oil motor 96.
7. Remove oil motor 96 from gear.
8. Secure the gear with appropriate lift.
Remove screws 100 and complete gear 92 from gear
1 carrier/undercarriage.
Notice the mounting position of the gear (as an exemple
the position of the brake connection).

3.2 Installation of Travel Gear

1. Set gear 92 into the gear carrier/undercarriage (make sure
it is seated properly!) and install screws 100. z
2. Install the oil motor 96 and install screws 95. z
3. Install the brake valve 110 and connector flange 111.
4. Connect brake line 109 on gear and leckoil> servo> and
hydraulic oil lines 108/107/106 on oil motor 96.
5. Attach cover 102 and insert screws 98 with lock washers
101.
6. Check that one plug 48 points down to the ground.
Remove one plugs of the top (oil level and filler plug) and
add the prescribed gear oil (see ß 2.) until the oil level
reaches the lower edge of the bore hole.
7. Install sprocket weel on gear and install screws 99. z
8. Install the chain, see description on sub group 12.62.

z Note torque values on ß2 "Technical Data"!

11.67.04
4. TO SEAL THE GEAR
Important : Clean and check all parts carefully before
reinstallation.
4.1 Sealing in the area of hydraulic motor
Remove oil motor 96, see ß 3.1 (point 1 and 4 to 7).
Slightly lubricate a new o>ring 97 and install on oil
motor 96.
Seat oil motor 96 into the gear, see ß 3.2 (points!2!to!6).

4.2 Sealing in the area of the slipring seals

Remove snap ring 76.
Caution : Snap ring 76 and seal housing 75 are under
the axial preload of the slipring seals 70.
To remove the snap ring 76, the seal housing 75 must
first be pushed down using three devices (as three
sprocket mounting screws 105 underlayed with washer
or sockets) evenly positioned around the gear circum>
ference and fixed to the thread bores of the gear
carrier 1.
Remove the snap ring 76 and loosen the compression
devices.
Pull off the seal housing 75, the o>ring 71 and the
slipring seals 70.
Install new slipring seals 70 into the seal housing 75 and
the inner gear 10 (see instructions in sub group 11.75)
with the special mounting device.
Install a new o>ring 71 onto the gear carrier 1 (slightly
grease o>ring before installation).
Set the seal ring 75 with slipring seal onto the gear.
Set the seal housing 75 onto the gear.
Set the snap ring 76 around the gear carrier 1, attach
the compression devices and push the seal housing 75
down so that the snapring 76 can be inserted in its
grove.
Slowly and evenly loosen and remove the compression
devices.

4.3 Sealing in area of travel brake

See section 11.xx. for description of Travel brakes.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel gear "FAT" From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.67.05
 Travel Gear FAT with flanged cover and ball bearing

1 Gear carrier 41 Supporting ring

1.2 End plug 42 L > ring
1.3 Lock pin 45 O>ring
1.4 Threaded pin 46 Allen head bolt
2 Snap ring 48 Plug
3 Supporting ring 50 Pressure ring
5 Planetary gear 51 Inner disc
6 Snap ring 52 Outer disc
7 Plug 55 Disc carrier
10 Inner gear 56 Grooved ring
11 Steel ball 57 Grooved ring
15 Sun gear 60 Ring piston
20 Planetary carrier 61 Spring (large)
21 Supporting ring 62 Spring (small)
22 Planetary gear 63 End ring
23 Snap ring 64 Snap ring
25 Sun gear 70 Slipring seal
30 Planetary carrier 71 O>ring
31 Supporting ring 72 Lock pin
32 Planetary gear 75 Seal housing
33 Snap ring 76 Snap ring
35 Input shaft 95 Hex head or Allen head screw
36 Snap ring 96 Oil motor FMV or FMF
38 Ball retainer 97 O>ring
40 Cover

11.67.06
 NOTE ADJUSTMENTS AND TORQUES A, B, C, D and E !!

See "General Data" on page no. 11.67.03

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Travel gear "FAT" From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.67.07
1. CONSTRUCTION OF TRAVEL BRAKE
Disc brake
An hydraulically vented wet disc brake is integrated in each
travel gear and acts on the gear drive.
If chamber "C",connected to the brake control connection
is at tank pressure, the brake piston 60 presses the discs 51 /
52 together with the preload of the springs 61 / 62.
The resulting brake torque acts on the drive shaft of the
hydraulic motor 200 / 201 via the disc carrier 55 with inner
and outer teeth.
If control pressure is applied to chamber "C" the piston 60 is
pushed against the force of the springs 61 / 62 toward the
end ring 63. The axial preload on the discs is relieved and
the resulting brake torque is anuled. 1

Brake valves 205

A brake valve 205 is flanged to each travel motor 200 / 201.
Each valve brake 205 comprises :
> an hydraulic braking piston 206 preventing the travel
motor from overspeeding,
> the two ways check valve 207 and the pressure reducing
valve 208, which generate the necessary brake control
pressure to vent, via connection "Br" of brake valve,
pressure hose 109 and chamber "C" the mechanical multi
disc brake in the travel gears.

For description of the brake valve 205, refer to sub group

7.98.
2

3

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ 11.71.01

R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ Issue : 10 / 2001
2. FUNCTION OF THE TRAVEL BRAKE
The high pressure at connection "A" (respec "B") of a travel motor 200 / 201 builds up, via two way check
valve 207 and pressure reducing valve 208, at the port "Br" of the brake valve 205.
As a consequence the brake is relieved automatically as soon as the pressure appearing at connection "A"
(respec "B") at travel actuation becomes higher than the pressure necessary to vent the disc brake.
Due to the "A > B > T" connection at neutral position of the travel spool valves 103 and 105 (see sub group
"Hydraulic System") the pressure difference between connections "A" and "B" is relieved as soon as travel
pedals are returned to neutral.
The pressure at connection "b2", connected to tank via a restrictor decreases and the disc brake applies.

129 Sec. pressure relief valve / Travel left 207 up to w05>2001, see (h)
2>Ways check valve > brake control pressure
130 Sec. pressure relief valve / Travel left since w06>2001, see (h)
131 Sec. pressure relief valve / Travel right Commutation spool > brake control
pressure
132 Sec. pressure relief valve / Travel right
208 Pressure reducing valve > brake control
200 Travel motor left pressure
201 Travel motor right 209 Travel brake
202 Positioning piston 240a up to w07>2000, see (g)
203 Control piston / travel motor displacement orifice for travel motor oil discharge inside
the travel motors
205 Brake valve complete
240b since w08>2000, see (g)
206 Hydraulic brake piston orifice for travel motor oil discharge inside
the brake valves

250 Rotary connection

251 Rotary connection / Travel brake

g) modified since serial numbers,

see modification mark (g) in
subgroup 1.01

h) modified since serial numbers,

see modification mark (h) in
subgroup 1.01

11.71.02 Issue : 10 / 2001



R 934 > R 944 Li / 5001 Æ

R 900 B > 924 Li / 6001 Æ

11.71.03

Issue : 10 / 2001















 3. REPAIR OF TRAVEL BRAKE
(Sealing the brakes and replacing the brake discs)
If a lot of noise can be heard in the brakes, the brake pads are
worn. The outer discs should be replaced immediately. The
brake also has to be replaced if the braking action decreases.
Important !
Before repairing the brakes, make sure all appropriate safety
procedures for machine and personnel are observed, as
parking the machine on level ground, securing the machine if
working on an incline, relieving the brake pressure.
The brake can be repaired without removing the gear.

Disassembly
Drain gear oil and pull the oil motor 96 from the gear, see
page no 11.67.04, ß 3.1 (points 1 and 4 to 7).
Remove the disc carrier 55 from the input shaft 35.
Caution !
4
The end ring 63 and the ring piston 60 are under spring
pressure.
Press down the end ring 63 with special tool no. 129 and two
screws 95 (fastening screws for oil motor 96).
Release the snap ring 64, loosen the special tool and remove it.
Remove end ring 63 and ring piston 60 complete with springs
61 / 62 from brake housing and pull off grooved rings 56 / 57
(with support rings) from brake housing 1.
Pull off the front pressure ring 50, the inner / outer discs 51 / 52
and the rear pressure ring 50 from the inner gear of brake
housing 1.

Assembly
Important :
Before assembly, clean and check all parts carefully for wear.
Set the rear ring 50 into the inner gear 1 and install the outer
and inner discs 52 / 51 as follows: Outer disc > inner disc > outer
disc etc. Set the front ring 50 onto the last outer disc 52.
Set the grooved rings 56 and 57 with support rings into the
brake housing 1 .
Note :
Mount the support rings opposite the pressure side. Slightly
lubricate the grooved rings before installation.

11.71.04
 Mount the springs 61 / 62 and the ring piston complet 60
into the groove of brake housing 1.
Insert the disc carrier 55 into the toothing of the input shaft
35 and the discs.
Insert end ring 63 into piston 60 and push the it down with
special tool no. 30, 35 oder 36, see subgroup no. 2.07.
Insert snap ring 64 (watch that it is seated correctly), and
remove the tool.
Replace the o>ring 97 on oil motor 96; slightly lubricate the
o>ring before installation.
Push the oil motor 96, see page no. 11.67.04, ß 3.2
(points!2!to !6) and control the axial play "A".
Check for brake function, see description of function.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Treavel Brake From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.71.05
Handling and installation instructions for slipring seals
Slipring seals are precision components made out of chilled cast iron.
Therefore sharp knocks and blows should be avoided!

Installation instructions
1. Do not remove slipring seals from protective packing until
they are ready to be used.
Protect the polished seal faces 1 from damage and dirt.
New slipring seals should only be installed per pair, as wraped.

2. The seal housings 2 (receiver parts) must be clean and free of

burrs and machining residues. All edges in the housing bore
must be smooth and chamfered.

3. Install slipring seals with special installation tool 3 (fig. 2).

This consists of two half shells that are closed around the seal
ring. Pressure is applied evenly around the circumference of
the elastomeric part 4.
For easier assembly, moisten the bore in the housing and the
o>ring 4 with a 1:1 mixture of water and spirit.

1 Seal face (sliding surface)

2 Seal housing
3 Installation tool
4 O>ring (elastomer)
6 Seal ring

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B ... R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Slipring Seal From
Depuis
5001 / 6001
Edition
11.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 11.75.01
 Press the slipring seal into the housing.
Take care that afterwards the seal face lies
parallel with the housing surface.
To verify the correct installation, measure the
distance A at three points evenly positioned
around the slipring circumference (see fig. 3).

The o>rings must not sit wave>like in the

housing bore or bulge partially looped out of
the bore (fig. 4).

Note:
> Before assembly of both seal rings, wait for
complete evaporation of water>spirit
mixture. If necessary, blow out o>rings and
seal housings with pressure air.
> Slipring seals of greater size as employed in
travel gears FAT should not be installed
using a rope wound around the o>ring 4 as
described page 11.75.01.

4. Before assembling the slipring seals, apply a

thin oil film to the seal faces 1, using a soaked
chamois leather cloth.
Take special care to do not apply oil to the
elastomeric rings or to the housing bores.

3 4

11.75.02
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

12.51 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B / 6001 Æ

12.52 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 904 / 6001 Æ

12.53 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

12.54 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 / 5001 Æ

12.55 Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.56 Wear of track components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.60 Wear limits of track components B60 > D6C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 / 5001 Æ

12.61 Wear limits of track components D7 > D6HD > B6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.62 Removal and installation of track components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ
R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.65 Slipring seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.76 Idler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.81 Tension unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.91 Track roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.96 Carrier roller B60 Berco . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 / 5001 Æ

12.97 Carrier roller D7 Intertrac . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 12.50.00

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2001


Type
Type
Type
Type
Type

Form
Chain




























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine

Track Pad
Chain link

Thread Size

Track Roller
Wrench Size

Pin diameter

Carrier Roller

with track pads

R 904 / 6001 Æ

Number of links

Track Pads Bolts

Bushing diameter

Height of grousers

Tightening Torque

Height of chain link

Valid from Serial No.

Ground pressure in N/cm2

Number of rollers per chain

Number of rollers per chain

(mm)
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
mm

750 mm
600 mm
500 mm































































































































































Distance between two pins mm

2
8

3,5
4,2
4,9































































































































































6001

B60 L
B60 L

27 (* 30)
50 (* 44)

668 (STD)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

580 (* 650)

B60 (* D6C)
B60 L (* D6C)

105 (* 121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

M18¥1,5 (* 3/4 ")

R 904

2
7

27
28
60
38
46

3,7
4,5
5,4

580
105
190

B60
6001

B60 L
B60 L
B60 L

M18¥1,5

* The track components D6C are for use in very hard conditions































































































































































3 grousers
669 (HD>SL)

Technical Data> Tightening Torques

12.52.01
Issue : 12 / 2000

































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Type
Type
Type
Type
Type

Form

Chain




























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine

Track Pad
Chain link

Thread Size

Track Roller

Wrench Size

Pin diameter

Carrier Roller

with track pads

Number of links

Track Pads Bolts

Bushing diameter

Height of grousers

Tightening Torque

Height of chain link

Valid from Serial No.

R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

Ground pressure in N/cm2

Number of rollers per chain

Number of rollers per chain

(mm)
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
mm

750 mm
600 mm
500 mm
Distance between two pins mm

2
7

4,2
4,9
5,8

B60
B60































































































































































6001

27 (* 30)
46 (* 44)
641 (STD)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

580 (* 650)
B60 (* D6C)

B60 (* D6C)
105 (* 121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

2
8

>>>>

3,8
4,6

B60
B60































































































































































6001

R 914

27 (* 30)
50 (* 47)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

* The track components D6C are for use in very hard conditions

580 (* 650)
B60 (* D6C)
B60 (* D6C)
640 (HD>SL)

105 (* 121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

M18¥1,5 (* 3/4 ") M18¥1,5 (* 3/4 ")

Technical Data> Tightening Torques

2
7

30
44

>>>>
6,0
5,9

650

B60
B60
D6C
D6C

26,5
66,7
44,5

3/4"































































































































































6001

121,4
202,8

3 grousers
642 (HD>S)

2
9
>>>>

4,1
5,0

B60
B60































































































































































6001
R 924

27 (* 30)
51 (* 47)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

580 (* 650)

B60 (* D6C)
B60 (* D6C)
645 (HD>SL)

105 (* 121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

12.53.01
Issue : 12 / 2000






























































































































































































































































































































M18¥1,5 (* 3/4 ")



Type
Type
Type
Type
Type

Form

Chain




























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine

Track Pad
Chain link

Thread Size

Track Roller

Wrench Size

Pin diameter

Carrier Roller

with track pads

R 934 / 5001 Æ
Number of links

Track Pads Bolts

Bushing diameter

Height of grousers

Tightening Torque

Height of chain link

Valid from Serial No.

Ground pressure in N/cm2

Number of rollers per chain

Number of rollers per chain

(mm)
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
mm
Distance between two pins mm

750 mm
600 mm
500 mm

2
9































































































































































52

4,5
5,6
6,6

B60
B60































































































































































5001

27 (* 30)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

800 (* 650)

B60 (* D6C)
B60 (* D6C)
648 (HD>SL)

105 (*121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

M20¥1,5 (3/4")

2
9































































































































































52

4,5
5,6
6,6

B60
B60































































































































































5001

R 934

27 (* 30)































































































































































3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

* The track components D6C are for use in very hard conditions































































































































































647 (HD>S)

800 (* 650)
B60 (* D6C)
B60 (* D6C)

105 (*121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

M20¥1,5 (3/4")


























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Technical Data> Tightening Torques

2
9































































































































































52

4,5
5,6
6,6

B60
B60































































































































































5001

27 (* 30)
649 (EW)

3 grousers
28 (* 26,5)
60 (* 66,7)
38 (* 44,5)

800 (* 650)































































































































































B60 (* D6C)
B60 (* D6C)

105 (*121,4)
190 (* 202,8)

M20¥1,5 (3/4")

12.54.01
Issue : 12 / 2000

































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Type
Type
Type
Type










































































































































































Type

Form
Chain












































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Machine

Track Pad
Chain link

Thread Size

Track Roller
Wrench Size

Pin diameter

Carrier Roller

with track pads

R 944 / 5001 Æ

Number of links

Track Pads Bolts

Bushing diameter

Height of grousers

Tightening Torque

Height of chain link

Valid from Serial No.

Ground pressure in N/cm2

Number of rollers per chain

Number of rollers per chain

(mm)
(Nm)
mm
mm
mm
mm

D7
Distance between two pins mm

750 mm
600 mm
500 mm

2
9
30
51

B6

5,4
6,6
7,8

650
26,5
66,5
44,5

3/4"
5001

117,3
202,8

3 grousers

D7 & B6HD
D7 & B6HD
651 (HD>SL)

D7 / 5615338
D7 / 5611653

serial no. 5132 Æ

Æ serial no. 5131























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































R 944

2
9

30
51

B6
5,4
6,6
7,8

650
26,5
66,5
44,5

3/4"
5001

117,3
202,8

3 grousers
650 (HD>S)

D7 & B6HD
D7 & B6HD

D7 / 5615338
D7 / 5611653

Æ serial no. 5131

serial no. 5132 Æ

Technical Data> Tightening Torques

12.55.01
Issue : 12 / 2000















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Wear on Track Components
Wear on track components is caused by motion, load and contact.
Improper operation ( such as jerky turns, lopsided load distribution, and running over obstacles) will
accelerate normal wear and tear of track components.
To prevent abnormal and premature wear, the following basic rules must be observed:
1. Under normal forward travel conditions, the travel gears must be in the rear of the machine.
2. When working parallel to the track chains with a backhoe attachment (when digging a trench), the travel
gears should be in the rear and the idlers towards the attachment. Travel should then be backwards.
3. When working parallel to the track chain with a bucket, the travel gears should be in the front.
4. When laying pipes, the travel gears should be in the rear during travel.
5. When working with the bucket, or backhoe, make sure the machine is not lifted off the ground.
Worn travel components, such as links, track rollers, idlers, track pads) must be replaced as soon as the
maximum wear limit has been reached (refer to sub group "Wear Limit").
Wear on track pins and bushings
The chain is constructed in such a way, that the pin rotates inside the bushing as the excavator travels.
However, the contact between the two parts is make only on a small area. The result is wear on only half the
inside diameter of the bushing and half the outside diameter of the pin. As wear progresses, the pitch of the
chain (distance between two adjacent pin centers) increases. The outside surfaces of the bushing also wear as
a result of contact with the sprocket teeth.
The wear on bushings and pins can be reduced by turning the pins and bushings by 180∞. The correct time to
turn the pins and bushings is determined as follows:
1. Measure the distance from any point on one pin to the corresponding points on a pin at least 4 links
away. Divide the measurements by 4, the result represents the wear per pin and bushing. Up to a
maximum wear of 3 mm (.118∫), the pins and bushings can be turned. Once the maximum wear limit of 5
mm (.197™) is reached, the pins and bushings must be replaced.
2. Measure the bushings. The maximum external wear limit is 3 > 3,5 mm (.118∫ to .137∫).
Track components must be checked regularly and carefully to determine when a part needs to be replaced.

Note :Clean parts thoroughly before taking any measurements. Measurements should also be
made on several different points (sprocket/idler) or components (chain, links, and
bushings). Use the maximum wear limit.
To determine the wear, compare the actual measurement with the measurement of the
new component and the wear limit, see chart in sub group "Wear Limit".

Example : Hn = Height > dimension of new component = 126 mm

Hv = Maximum wear limit = 116 mm
H = Actuel measurement = 120 mm
126 > 120
Degre of wear = = 60 %
126 > 116

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
Ab
From
Datum Wear Depuis
Edition
09.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.56.01
Chain links
Measure the distance of the chain links between the chain
link travel surface and the track pad with a depth gauge or
tape.

Pin
Measure pin and bushing wear from any point on one
track pin to the corresponding point 4 links away, using a
tape. The track chain must be tight.

Bushing
Measure the external bushing wear with a sliding caliper at
the point, which shows the greatest wear.

12.56.02
 Wear of Track Components

Track pad
Measure the track pad wear with a depth gauge or tape.

Idler
Measure the wear on the running surface of the idler
with a depth gauge.

Track roller
Measure the wear on the running surface of the track
roller with a sliding caliper or outside caliper.

6

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 12.56.03

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000


Pins

Tooth new

Sproket

Bushing

Chain Link










































Tooth wear

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

Ln

Dn


Hn

762
105
New

58,7










































































































































































































































































































































mm (inch)

B60

Lv

47
97
Zv

Dv
Hv

773
limit

up to

mm (inch)

Max Wear

Wear Limits B60 & D6C

tip of tooth

Ln

66
Dn
Hn

813
New

121.4

mm (inch)

D6C

Lv

57
Zv

Dv
Hv

829
110

Issue : 12 / 2000
limit

up to

12.60.01





































































































































































mm (inch)
Max Wear

tip of tooth



Idler

Track pad

Track roller

Carrier roller

12.60.02

25
28

Dn
Dn
Hn
Hn

120
154
New

mm (inch)

B60

31

Dv
Dv
Hv
Hv

108
141
limit

12,5

mm (inch)
Max Wear
Wear Limits B60 & D6C

Dn
Dn
Hn
Hn

New

39,5

mm (inch)

D6C

14

Dv
Dv
Hv
Hv

limit

Issue : 12 / 2000



mm (inch)
Max Wear



42
41
40
39
38
7
6
5
4
3
1

2.6
2.5
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
























































































































































































































































































Cover
Cover

Chain link

Master pin








































Track chain
Track roller

Carrier roller

Locking plate

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

Hex head screw

the side frame.

Hydr. grease tensioner

Idler assembly, complete

Remove chain 40, see ß 4.

Reinstall the chain 40 , see ß 5.

1. To remove and to install carrier rollers

1.1 Release tension of track chain 40, see ß 4.2.

tensioner 3 is not described in this subgroup.

Separate the idler 37 and the grease tensioner 3 .

12.82. ß 1.1.2 to 1.1.6, prior to remove the chain, ß 2.1

See sub group 12.76 for idler disassembly and assembly.

2. To remove and to install the complete idler with grease tensioner

See sub group 12.46 for carrier roller disassembly and assembly.

See sub group 12.82 for grease tensioner disassembly and assembly.

1.2 Remove screws 56 and take away carrier rollers 39 from the side frame.

locked inside the side frame , as outlined in subgroup 12.82. ß 1.2.1 to 1.2.8.










































































































68
67
63
62
60
59

56
54
51
50
45
44
43

Insert a piece of wood between upper edge of side frame and chain to lift chain 40.

Pull the complete idler assembly 37 with grease tensioner 3 from the side frame 62.





















































Seal

carrier

Spacer

Bushing

Track pad

wood, align the carrier roller and torque screws. Tension the track chain as outlined in ß 5.4.
Travel gear
Square nut

Spring plate

Grease fitting

Tension spring

1.3 Lay carrier roller 39 on the threaded bores in the side frame and insert the screws 56. Remove the
Hex head screw
Hex head screw

Issue : 02 / 2002





















































Allen head screw

12.62.01





























































































































































































Side frame with gear

Should the tension spring be removed also, so its pretension must be released as noticed in subgroup

In the same way, during the reinstallation of the chain in ß 2.6, the spring must be tensioned and then
Removal and installation of the tension spring 67 mounted inside the side frame behind the grease

Reassemble the idler 2 and grease tensioner 3. Push the complete idler with grease tensioner 3 into






























































4. 4.

4.1

12.62.02

chambrage

Danger !

Axe final avec

and assembly.
the sideframe.

et des maillons
Forward travel direction

Position de la chenille

3.1 Remove chain 40, see ß 4.

moletage

Sens de montage de la chenille

Axe final avec

3.6 Reinstall the track chain, see ß 5.

3. To remove and to install the track rollers

To remove the complete track chain

third of the sprocket. Insert a wedge.

4.4
4.3

Note :

Warning :

immediately































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































3.4 Mount track roller 38 onto side frame 62 and tighten screws 54.

maintenance operation.

fitting counterclockwise.

pin by its chamfered edge.

reinstalled,






































































































































































































































































































3.2 Slightly raise the track chain, using the working attachment of the machine.

Remove the master pin, see ß 9.

high pressure and the chain will sag.

Remove the chain in travel direction.

during

in and out from either side of the chain.

3.5 Lift the undercarriage using the attachment and carefully pull out the wooden blocks.

the

Raise the machine and remove the track chain.

Grease is under high pressure and might squirt out.

pretension of the chain tensioning unit. The removal of the track chain and of the grease tensioner 3

Issue : 02 / 2002

Knurled master pins must be pressed (knocked) in from

(knocked) out from the inside of the chain toward the

the outside of the chain toward the inside and pressed

outside. Grooved master pins can be pressed (knocked )

When adjusting the chain tension, keep your head
only if the grease tensioner unit and the chain are both

clear of the access hole. The grease cylinder is under

grease cylinder by loosening and turning the grease
while pretension spring 67 is still mounted is allowed

The master pin can be differentiated from the regular

4.2 To release track tension, remove cover 4 from the side
frame and carefully release some grease from the
present
Safely support the lifted side by inserting wooden blocks between track chain and bottom edge of

Park the machine on flat and solid ground. Run the track until the master pin 42 is close to the lower

For safety reasons,never open and remove a track chain unless having previously totaly released the
3.3 Loosen the screws 54 and remove the track roller 38. See sub group 12.91 for track roller disassembly

5. To install the complete track chain
5.1 Position the machine on the track chain and insert a
wedge.
5.2 Pull the chain with a wire rope or with the
attachment, or another machine over the idler and
carrier rollers. Make sure the chain is installed in the
correct travel direction and the track pads are
positioned correctly.
5.3 Insert spacer rings 43, align track chain ends and
install master pin 42 from the outside towards the
inside, see ß 9.
5.4 Install fitting 59 on grease cylinder 65 and adjust chain
tension.
1
To tighten a track :
> Remove the access cover 4 on the side frame of the
undercarriage.
> Attach a special fitting 2 to grease gun.
Connect the grease gun to cylinder 3.
> Pump grease into cylinder 3 until the track chain is
properly tensioned.
The track chain tension is correct when the slack
between both carrier roller is about 0.6" to 0.8" (15 to
20 mm).
To check the chain slack :
> measure "X1" (fig. 2) , distance between running
surface of carrier roller and top of sideframe.
> measure "X2", distance between chain link and top
of sideframe.
> calculate chain slack= "X1 > X2".
2

6. To change damaged track pads

Bent or loose track pads can cause damage to other track
pads or the track chain. The track pads must be checked
periodically, at least every 100 operating hours, for damage
and tightness. Damaged pads must be replaced.
6.1 Remove track pad bolts 50 and lift off the damaged
track pads 45.
6.2 Clean the track chain mounting surface and install a
new track pad.
Install new track pad bolts 50 and torque (tightening
sequence : 1, 2, 3, 4) to specified value, see "Technical
Data > Torques"of track chain.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model See page no. 12.
Type
Ab
From
Datum Chain Depuis
Edition
09.98 Removal, Repair, Installation Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.62.03
7. Repair of defective chain
1 Chain link, complete
2 Chain link, complete
3 Bushing
4 Master pin torch cuts
break
5 Spacer ring
6 End segment

7.1 Remove the chain on torn chain link and lay it on the
ground.
Torch cut link, bushing and pin on the damaged chain
link segment. Remove the damaged parts.

7.2 Torch cut the bushing A1 and grind the surface

smooth.
Torch cut holes into the remains of the master pin 2B
and knock the pin ends out .
to be ground
point of chain support
during pin removal
torch cut holes
direction of as shovn
pin removal

7.3 Install two end segments 6 without bushing 3 and a

master pin 4 to chain link 2.
To press in the master pin, see ß 9.
Insatall the track chain
Fit the end segments 6 with two spacer rings 6 and
close the chain using a master pin.
direction
Mount track pad, see ß 6. of pin
installation

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
Ab
From
Datum Track chain Depuis
Edition
09.98 Repair Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.62.05
Handling and installation instructions for slipring seals
Slipring seals are precision components made out of chilled cast iron.
Therefore sharp knocks and blows should be avoided!

Installation instructions
1. Do not remove slipring seals from protective packing until
they are ready to be used.
Protect the polished seal faces 1 from damage and dirt.
New slipring seals should only be installed per pair, as wraped.

2. The seal housings 2 (receiver parts) must be clean and free of

burrs and machining residues. All edges in the housing bore
must be smooth and chamfered.

3. For easier assembly, moisten the bore in the housing and the
o>ring 4 with a 1:1 mixture of water and spirit.
Install slipring seals with special installation tool 3 or using a
thick string or a rope wound between o>ring 4 and seal ring 5
(fig. 2).
The installation tool consists of two half shells that are closed
around the seal ring. Pressure is applied evenly around the
circumference of the elastomeric part 4.

1 Seal face (sliding surface)

2 Seal housing
3 Installation tool
4 O>ring (elastomer)
5 Rope
6 Seal ring

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
Ab
From
Datum Slipring seal Depuis
Edition
09.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.65.01
 Press the slipring seal into the housing.
Take care that afterwards the seal face lies
parallel with the housing surface.
To verify the correct installation, measure the
distance A at three points evenly positioned
around the slipring circumference (see fig. 3).

The o>rings must not sit wave>like in the

housing bore or bulge partially looped out of
the bore (fig. 4).

Note :
> Before assembly of both seal rings, wait for
complete evaporation of water>spirit mix>
ture. If necessary, blow out o>rings and seal
housings with pressure air.

4. Before assembling the slipring seals, apply a

thin oil film to the seal faces 1, using a soaked
chamois leather cloth.
Take special care to do not apply oil to the
elastomeric rings or to the housing bores.

3 4

12.65.02
 Idler wheel

1. To disassemble the idler

1.1 Remove plug 2.7 and drain the oil into a suitable container.
Knock out the roll pins 2.4, remove guides 2.1 and seals 2.5 from shaft 2.2. Pull the shaft from idler 2 .
1.2 Remove the slipring seals 2.6 from guides 2.1 and idler wheel 2.
Remove bushings 2.3 from idler wheel.

2 Idler
2.1 Guide
2.2 Shaft
2.3 Bushing
2.4 Roll pin
2.5 O>ring
2.6 Slipring seal
2.7 Plug
2.8 O>ring

2. To assemble the idler

2.1 Press bushing 2.3 into the idler wheel 2. Install slipring seals 2.6 on idler wheel 2 and into guides 2.1.
Note : Slipring seals come as a matched set and may not be interchanged!
2.2 Install o>ring 2.5 and guide 2.1 on shaft 2.2 and secure with roll pin 2.4. Coat the shaft with oil and
slide through the idler wheel 2.
Install the remaining o>ring 2.5 and guide 2.1 on shaft 2.2.
Secure with roll pin 2.4 .

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

12.76.01
Issue : 12 / 2000


2

3.4
3.3
3.2
3.1

Type

Idler

2.2 Shaft

Berco B60

2.1 Guide

Idler wheel

Intertrac D7

12.76.02

2.4 Roll pin

2.3 Bushing

















































































































































3. To refill the idler

quantity is reached.

500 cm3
500 cm3

Oil quantity











































































































































































































the oil into the side chambers.

2.7 Plug

2.8 O>ring
2.5 O>ring


























































oil until the middle chamber is full.

2.6 Slipring seal

Oil quality
Install plug 2.7 and o>ring 2.8, using Loctite.

SAE 90 > API GL5
SAE 90 > API GL5

If necessary, continue to add oil until prescribed
Turn the idler until the oil filler hole is on top, add

Carefully pressurize the middle chamber to press

Idler wheel

Oil level

Issue : 12 / 2000












1. Removal and installation of the complete tension unit

When removing only the idler assembly 2 with grease tensioner 3 (tension spring 67 is not
removed), proceed as described in subgroup 12.62, ß3.

1.1 Removal
1.1.1 Remove the cover 4 from the side frame of the undercarriage.
1.1.2 Remove the cover 5 from the side frame.
1.1.3 Fit the grease gun with the special adapter hose and connect it to the grease fitting 59 of the
grease cylinder 3.
1.1.4 Pump grease into the cylinder 3 (overtension the chain) until the spring plate 68 is pushed
away from the locking plates 6.
1.1.5 Loosen the screws 7 and remove the locking plates 6.

Never loosen the screws 7 as long as the spring plate 68 stays on the locking plates 6.

1.1.6 Disconnect the grease gun from the fitting 59.

1.1.7 Release the track tension and remove the chain, refer to ß 4 in subgroup 12.62.
1.1.8 Pull the idler wheel assembly 2 complete with the grease tensioner 3, then the spring plate 68
and the tension spring 67 out of the side frame.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
Ab
From
Datum Tension unit Depuis
Edition
09.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.81.01
 1.2 Installation

1.2.1 Insert tension spring 67 into the side frame and push it onto the centering tube.
1.2.2 Slide the spring plate 68 into the side frame so that the springs lays on the centering shoulder of
the plate.
1.2.3 Push the idler assembly 2 complete with the grease tensioner 3 inside the side frame 62.
1.2.4 Install the chain and insert the master pin (see subgroup 12.62, ß5).
1.2.5 Pump grease into the cylinder 3 (overtension the chain) until the spring plate 68 passes beyond
the openings 5 and the locking plates 6 can be installed.
1.2.6 Install the locking plates and torque the screws 7. Mount the locking plates so that the machined
face (also marked with an arrow) shows in direction idler wheel.
1.2.7 Disconnect the grease gun from the fitting 59.
1.2.8 Unscrew the grease fitting 59 and let grease escape from the grease cylinder to adjust the correct
chain tension (see also ß 5 in subgroup 12.62).
2. To disassemble tension unit
Remove grease fitting 59 and pull piston 3.10 from cylinder 3.11.
Pull seal 3.1 from piston 3.10.
Remove wiper ring 3.3 from cylinder 3.11.
3. To assemble tension unit
Install new seal 3.1, new wiper ring 3.3, push complete piston 3.10 in cylinder 3.11 and install grease fitting
59 with new seal ring 60.

2 Idler assembly, complete 6 Locking plate

3 Hydr. grease tensioner 7 Hex head screw
3.1 Seal 59 Grease fitting
3.3 Wiper ring 60 Seal
3.10 Piston 62 Side frame with gear carrier
3.11 Housing 67 Tension spring
4 Cover 68 Spring plate
5 Cover

12.81.02
 Model e1 free lenght Pretensioned Pretension Spring travel eS
Type / Serial number (mm) L0 (mm) lenght L
1
(mm) force (kN) EL(mm) (mm)

R 900 B 6001 100 442 372 140 56 49

R 904 6001 100 442 372 140 56 49

R 914 6001 100 537 481 169 75 58

R 924 6001 100 537 481 169 75 58

R 934 5001 100 537 474 190 68 58

R 944 5001 100 537 464 220 58 58

Grease tensioner in welded execution

Grease tensioner as cast iron pat

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model
Type
Ab
From
Datum Tension Unit Depuis
Edition
09.98 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 12.81.03


3.4
3.3
3.2
3.1
2.4
2.3
2.2
2.1
1.3
1.2
1.1


















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































shaft.

Type

Berco B60

Track roller

Intertrac D7

is reached.

roller shaft.

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ

3. To refill the track roller

2. To assemble the track roller

secure with roll pins 8 .

600 cm3
390 cm3





















































































































1. To disassemble the track roller

Oil quantity

Install plug 5, using Loctite.

to check the roller for leaks .

the oil into the side chambers.

Press bushings 4 into the roller shell.

remove roll pins 8. Remove bushings 4.

SAE 40

Oil quality

oil, quality and quantity as per shedule below.

the filler hole at a 45∞ angle, pointing upwards.

L260 > Panolin Biotrac

Turn the idler until the oil filler hole is on top, add

On B60 rollers the correct quantity is reached with

Turn the track roller 1 until the prescribed quantity
Carefully pressurize the middle chamber to press





















































































































Track roller

Remove plug 5 and drain the oil into a suitable container.

Remove lifetime seals 9 from roller shell 1 and remove cover 7.

Oil level

12.91.01
Issue : 12 / 2000








































































































































Push the track roller shaft 10 into the roller shell and install O>rings 11 into the grooves on the track

Check the axial play and for easy movement. Apply about 6 bar (85 PSI) air pressure via the filler hole
Knock out roll pin 8 on both sides into track roller shaft 10 and remove cover 7 from track roller

Insert lifetime seals 9 into the roller shell and into cover 7. Install cover on track roller shaft 10 and
Remove seal 11 from the track roller shaft. Pull the track roller shaft 10 from the roller shell and



7
6
5
4
1

Plug

Cover

12.91.02

O>ring

Bushing

Roller shell
























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Track roller

11
10
9
8

O>ring


























Roll pin




























































































































































Slipring seal

Track roller shaft

Issue : 12 / 2000



































 Carrier roller B60 > Berco

1. To disassemble the carrier roller

1.1 Remove plug 3 and drain the oil into a suitable container.
1.2 Mount the complete carrier roller with end cover 8 up in a vice.
Release the snap ring 10 and pull off flange 9. Remove lifetime seals 8 from flange and roller shell 1.
1.3 Remove screws 11, cover 8 and o>ring 10 .
1.4 Remove screws 12 and disk 9 .
1.5 Pull the complete roller shell 1 from carrier roller shaft 3 . Pull the lifetime seal 5 from roller shaft 1
and from end cover 7. Press outer bushings 4 from roller shell 1.
The shaft 2 is pressed into the end cover 7 and cannot disassemble.

2. To assemble the carrier roller

2.1 Press the bushings 4 into roller shell 1. Install lifetime seals 5 in roller shell 1 and in cover 7.
2.2 Install roller shell 1 on carrier roller shaft 2.
2.3 Mount disk 9 with screws 12 on carrier roller shaft 2.
Insert cover 8 with o>ring 10 and tighten with screws 11.
Tightening torque for hex head screws 11=59 Nm,
Tightening torque for hex head screws 12=63 Nm.
Use Loctite no. 242.
2.4 Check the axial play and for easy movement and check for leaks.

3. To refill the carrier roller

3.1 With the filler hole up, add oil, quality and quantity as per shedule below.
3.2 Install plug 3, using Loctite and install in roller shell 1 .

Carrier roller Oil quantity

Oil quality
Type

Berco B60 225 cm3 202 cm3 Agip Rotra LSX 75W90
+ 23 cm3 Agip Rocol ASO R 90>140HT

R 900 B >R 924 / 6001 Æ 12.96.01

R 934 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2000


12.96.02




















































































































































































Carrier roller B60 > Berco

9 Disk
3 Plug

2 Shaft

8 Cover

10 O>ring

4 Bushing

7 End cover

1 Roller shell

5 Lifetime seal

12 Hex head screw
11 Hex head screw

* Oil Agip Rotra ....

Issue : 12 / 2000












A. Carrier roller D7 > Intertrac / 5615338
1. To disassemble the carrier roller
1.1 Remove the lower screw 11 and drain the oil into a suitable container.
1.2 Mount the complete carrier roller with end cover 8 up in a vice.
1.3 Remove screws 11, cover 8 and sealing ring 10 .
1.4 Remove screws 12 and disk 9 .
1.5 Pull the complete roller body 1 from carrier roller shaft 2. Pull the slipring seal 5 from roller body 1
and from end part 7.
Pressing out the bushings 4 from roller body 1 is generally very uneasy.
The shaft 2 is pressed into the end part 7 and cannot disassemble.

2. To assemble the carrier roller

2.1 To install the bushings 4 into roller body 1, cool them down in liquid nitrogen or use a press.
Notice : The bushing 4b must be pushed in to the top, i. e. the collar of the bushing must be in
contact with the roller body 1.
The bushing 4a must be pushed in so to be even with the bottom of the slipring seal
receptacle.
2.2 Install slipring seals 5 in roller body 1 and in end part 7.
For installation procedure, refer to sub group 12.65.
Install roller body 1 on carrier roller shaft 2.
2.3 Mount disk 9 with screws 12 on carrier roller shaft 2.
Insert cover 8 with sealing ring 10 and tighten with screws 11 (only install two screws).
Tightening torque for hex head screws 11=80 Nm,
Tightening torque for hex head screws 12=80 Nm.
Use Loctite no. 242 to install screws 11 and 12.
2.4 Check the axial play of the roller (easy movement).

3. To refill the carrier roller

3.1 With the filler hole up, add 0,6 l. SAE 90 > API GL5 via the bore of a screw 11.
3.2 Install the screw 11, using Loctite and tighten to prescribed torque.

4. To check the correct oil quantity in a roller

This check can be performed only while removing the roller and draining the oil from the roller into a
container.

R 944 / 5132 Æ
12.97.01
Issue : 12 / 2000
B. Carrier roller D7 > Intertrac / 5611653
Notice : This carrier roller is no more available.
When ordering spare parts, this roller may be replaced by the roller D7 / 5615338, see page no.
12.97.01.
1. To disassemble the carrier roller
1.1 Remove the lower screw 14 and drain the oil into a suitable container (cover 8 down).
1.2 Mount the complete carrier roller with end cover 8 up in a vice.
1.3 Release the snap ring 11, and pull off cover 8 and o>ring 10.
1.4 Remove screws 12 and disk 9 .
1.5 Pull the complete roller body 1 from carrier roller shaft 2. Pull the slipring seal 5 from roller body 1
and from end part 7.
Pressing out the bushings 4 from roller body 1 is generally not possible.
The shaft 2 is pressed into the end part 7 and cannot disassemble.

2. To assemble the carrier roller

2.1 To install the bushings 4 into roller body 1.
2.2 Install slipring seals 5 in roller body 1 and in end part 7.
For installation procedure, refer to sub group 12.65.
Install roller body 1 on carrier roller shaft 2.
2.3 Mount disk 9 with screws 12 on carrier roller shaft 2 (tightening torque of screws 12=80 Nm).
Install the o>ring 10 to the cover 8.
Install the cover in the carrier body and secure it with the snap ring 11.
2.4 Check the axial play of the roller (easy movement).

3. To refill the carrier roller

3.1 With the filler hole up, add 0,2 l. SAE 90 via the bore of a screw 14.
3.2 Install the screw 14, using Loctite.

4. To check the correct oil quantity in a roller

This check can be performed only while removing the roller and draining the oil from the roller into a
container.

R 944 / 5001 Æ 5131 12.97.03

Issue : 12 / 2000
 SUB GROUP INDEX R 900 B > R 944

16.02 Load check valve > "Oil Control"

mounted on boom cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > A / R 904 / 6001 Æ

16.03 Load check valve > "Beringer"

mounted on boom cylinders or stick cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

16.04 Load check valve > "Rexroth"

mounted on boom cylinders or stick cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.05 Load check valve > "Rexroth"

mounted on boom cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.06 Overload Warning Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > A / R 904 / 6001 Æ

16.07 Overload Warning Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 914 > A / R 924 / 6001 Æ

R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.14 Dispositif de changement rapide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900B > A / R 924 / 6001 Æ

A / R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.20 Flow Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900 B > A / R 924 / 6001 Æ

16.21 Flow Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.22 Hydraulic hammers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A / R 900B > A / R 924 / 6001 Æ

A / R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.70 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 904 / 6001 Æ

16.72 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 1" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

16.74 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 11" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 904 / 6001 Æ

16.76 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 11" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

16.78 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 11" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

16.80 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 12" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 900 B > R 904 / 6001 Æ

16.82 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 12" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 914 > R 924 / 6001 Æ

16.84 Hydraulic Installation Kit "AHS 12" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ

A/R 900 B >A/R 924 / 6001 Æ 16.00.00

A/R 934 > R 944 / 5001 Æ Issue : 12 / 2001
 " Beringer " > Load Check Valves

The load check valve is combined in a special attachment kit for each machine.
Included are the ESV 16 A or ESV 20 A check valves and the necessary hydraulic hoses with fittings and
mounting clips and brackets.
¡ Use
The load check valve is installed directly to the hydraulic connection of the boom cylinder (piston
bottom side), resp. of the stick cylinder (piston bottom and/or piston rod side) and, as an exception, also
to the bucket cylinder (piston rod side).
As an example the figure below shows two leak oil free load check valves mounted to the boom
cylinders having their bottom side fixed to the uppercarriage.
The load check valve consists of a brake piston .2 with leak oil free releasable load holding valve .23,
and a direct acting secondary pressure relief valve .5.
The valve prevents uncontrolled lowering of the attachment or load, in case a hydraulic line breaks. The
load check valve closes off the appropriate cylinder connection leak oil free if the control pressure
connection is without pressure.

A / R 914 > 924 Litronic 16.03>01

6001 Æ
Issue: 09 / 2001
¬ Function, see diagram on pages 16.03.04/05 and schematics on pages No. 16.03.07 and 09.
1. To "lift" attachments (= to extend cylinders > oil flows from A Æ B)
When a cylinder is lifted, the pump pressure is applied to the valve seat of the control spool 23 via
port A and causes the control spool 23 together with the pilot control spool 24 to open, against the
force of the weak spring 25.
Hydraulic oil flows from connection A via the opened spool 23 and actuates the cylinder via
connection B. After the lifting movement is completed, both spools 23 and 24 return to closed
position.
The return line is closed off, this means the load is held leak oil free.

2. To "lower" attachments (= to retract cylinders > oil flows BÆ A)

The opening piston 31 is forced against the springs 33 and 34 by the control pressure at port X. The
pilot control spool 24 in the control spool 23 is opened by means of the opening rod 32.
The load pressure behind the control spool is then reduced via the pilot control spool 24 and its
discharge notch towards pressure at port A. These progressive pre>opening characteristics enable
the lowering motion to begin without a jolt.
As the control pressure (X) increases, the pilot spool 3 is opened further and the control spool 23
opens automatically following the pilot control spool 24, since the load pressure which acts on the
resulting ring area of the control spool 23 forces the control spool out of its valve seat. As a result,the
cross>section in the pilot valve seat is reduced until the opening and closing pressures of the control
spool reach equilibrium (follow>up principle).
The opening cross>section of the control spool 23 and thus the rate of flow from B Æ A can therefore
be controlled by means of the control pressure at the pilot spool 3. Opening of the control spool 23 is
as good as independent of the return pressure "A".
The secondary pressure relief valve 5 is connected to cylinder port B. When the externally settable
pressure is reached, the relief valve poppet 55 opens and makes the connection to return port A. This
relief valve poppet is pressure>compensated, so that the forces that result f rom the return pressure
cancel each other out. This means that the opening of pressure relief valve is independent of return
pressure "A".

09 / 2001
16.03>02
√ Disassembly of load check valve for sealing and repair

Do not disconnect lines or hoses, or remove fittings, caps or covers before

> the attachment is lowered to the ground, the engine is turned off,
> the remaining pressures in the working circuit are released by actuating both joysticks,
with the ignition key in contact position
> the pressure in the hydraulic tank is released by unscrewing one turn the breather filter
on the tank.

Notice : The load check valve does not need to be removed from the hydraulic cylinder to achieve
the works described hereafter.
If necessary, the control pressure and tank lines must be previously disconnected or removed.
1. Disassembly of brake piston 2
Unscrew piston sleeve 22 complete with fitting 26 from housing 1.
Carefully block up the sleeve 22 in a vice and unscrew the fitting 26 with its O>rings.
Extract the spring 25 with control spool 23. Take the pilot control spool 24 out off control spool 23.
Remove allen head screws and cover 36 with its O>ring 37.
Take care to the pretension of the springs 34 and 35.
Remove the opening piston 31 and the springs 34 and 35. Take care to the adjustment washer 38.
2. Disassembly of pressure relief and check valve 5
Loosen the counternut 52 and unscrew the adjustment screw 51 with O>rings 56 and support>rings
57.
Remove the poppet 55 and the spring 53.
Unscrew the fitting 83, take the spring 81 and the spring plate 82 out off housing 1.

ƒ Assembly of load check valve after sealing and repair

Before assembly, check all parts if they can be reused.
Replace and lightly lubricate all seals before assembly.
1. Assembly of pressure relief valve 5
Introduce the poppet 55 with O>ring 58 and spring 53 into the bore of housing 1.
Screw in the adjustment screw 51 fitted with O>rings 56 and support>rings 57 and counternut 52
into the housing 1.
Set the spring plate 82 onto the end of the poppet 55, then install the spring 81 and retighten the
fitting 83.
2. Installation of brake piston 2
Insert the pilot control spool 24 and the spring 25 into control spool 23 and introduce spool
complete into piston sleeve 22.
Screw in the fitting 26 and the plug 29 into the sleeve 22.
Screw in the piston sleeve 22 complete into the housing 1.

Caution :
Avoid any deterioration of patrs during retightening of the fitting 26 onto the piston sleeve 22 .

Insert the piston 31 together with the adjustment washer 38 and the springs 34 and 35 into the
housing.
Pretension the springs 34 / 35 , install the cover 36 with O>ring 37 and lock it using the allen head
screws (consider the prescribed tightening torque).

Adjust the pressure relief valve 5 to prescribed value, if adjustment is possible.

A / R 914 > 924 Litronic 16.03>03

6001 Æ
Issue: 09 / 2001


6001 Æ

A / R 914 > 924 Litronic

6









































































































































































































Schematic for load check valves on boom cylinders ( piston bottom side )

16.03>07
Issue: 09 / 2001















 2. To "lower" attachments (Oil flow BÆ A)
The servo pressure to move the spool valves to lower the attachments is also applied to connection Pst of
the load check valve and acts onto the piston 31 of the pilot spool 3.
By means of the opening rod 32, the piston 31 first opens the poppet 42, this causing the load pressure
behind the control poppet 41 to be reduced to the pressure at port A, via the pilot control poppet 42.
The further displacement of the piston 31 will lift the poppet 41 (check valve) from its seat. The leak oil
free cut>off of check valve 4 is released.
The user pressure is now applied to the load holding valve 2.
If the piston 31 is moved some more, it allows the oil to flow to the front face of the piston 22. The piston
22 is moved against the force of spring 63 and releases the oil to flow to the connection A via the radial
bores 22a in the piston.
The oil flows from cylinder back to the tank (connection B Æ A of the load check valve).
The adjustable stop screw 61 of the stroke limiter 6 determines the possible stroke of the piston 22, and by
the way the lowering speed of the working attachment.
The direct acting secondary pressure relief valve 5 limits the pressure peaks which could appear at the
cylinder side.
√ Disassembly of load check valve for sealing and repair
Do not disconnect lines or hoses, or remove fittings, caps or covers before the attachment is lowered
to the ground, the engine is turned off, the remaining pressures in the working circuit are released
by actuating both joysticks, with the ignition key in contact position and before the pressure in the
hydraulic tank is released by unscrewing one turn the breather filter on the tank.
Notice : The load check valve does not need to be removed from the hydraulic cylinder to achieve the
works described hereafter.
If necessary, the control pressure and tank lines must be previously disconnected or removed.
1. Removal of brake piston 2
Remove cover 69 with adjustment screw 61, remove spring 63 and spring plate 65.
Remove plug 28 with o>ring and piston 22 from housing 1.
If necessary, carefully hold the piston 22 to remove fitting 26 and poppet 23 with spring 25.
2. Removal of pressure relief and check valve
Remove cap, counternut 52 and adjustment screw 51. Remove shim 59, spring 53, spring plate 54, and
poppet 55. Remove valve guide 58, pull off control poppet 41 and remove pilot control poppet 42 and
spring 43.
Remove cover 36, take piston 31 and opening rod 32 from housing.
ƒ Assembly of load check valve after sealing and repair
Before assembly, check all parts if they can be reused.
Replace and lightly lubricate all seals before assembly.
1. Installation of pressure relief and check valves
Push opening rod 32 and piston 31 into housing, insert cover 36 with o>ring and tighten to 60 Nm. Push
the control poppet 41 with pilot control poppet 42 and spring 43 on the valve guide 58 and attach the
valve guide with o>ring and supporting ring 56 to housing.
Insert poppet 55, spring plate 54, spring 53 and shim 59 into valve guide 58 and attach adjustment screw
51 with o>ring and lock nut 52.
Adjust the pressure relief valve 1 to correct setting, see adjustment procedure.
2. Installation of load holding and brake valve 2
Set poppet 23 and spring 25 into fitting 26 and attach fitting 26 to piston 22.
NOTE : Be careful no to damage the piston !
Push piston 22 into housing and attach plug 28 with o>ring to housing 1. Insert spring plate 65 and spring
63. Attach cover 69 with adjustment screw 61 into housing 1.
Adjust the attachment lowering speed on the adjustment screw 61, see adjustment procedure in ß ≈. 4.

16.04.02
 1 Housing 5 Secondary pressure relief valve
11 Bleeder screw 51 Adjustment screw
2 Load holding and brake valve 52 Counternut
22 Piston 53 Spring
22a Radial bore 54 Spring plate
23 Poppet 55 Poppet
25 Spring 56 O>ring
26 Fitting 57 O>ring
28 Plug 58 Valve guide
3 Pilot spool 59 Cap
31 Piston 6 Stroke limiter
32 Opening rod 61 Adjustment screw
35 Bleeder nozzle 62 Counternut
36 Cover 63 Spring
37 O>Ring 64 Shim
38 Guide sleeve 65 Spring plate
4 Check valve 67 Ball
41 Control poppet 68 O>ring
42 Pilot control poppet 69 Cover
43 Spring 70 O>ring
44 Valve guide

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Load check valve > Leak oil free From
Depuis
5001
Edition
05.99 Rexroth Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.04.03


5.2
5.1
4
2
1.2
1.1

4.3
4.2
4.1
3.4
3.3
3.2
3.1

side

Check valve

Brake piston

> piston rod side

> piston bottom side

4. Restrictor adjustment

the stick cylinder.

collected in the servo area.

22 to 400±20 bar.

piston bottom side.

(Oil temperature f50∞ C).

on the front page and the illustration below.

chart" on group "Hydraulic System".

Fully retract an then extend the stick.

check valve 1.2 on the piston rod side.

Load check valve, complete / piston bottom

Load check valve, complete / piston rod side

Secondary pressure relief valve / boom cylinder

Secondary pressure relief valve / boom cylinder
opening time and to improve the control behavior.

V Notes regarding correct function of load check valve

Adjust the Diesel engine to maximum speed.

To adjust the restrictor on the piston rod side

Attach 1/4" test fittings and 600 bar pressure gauges.

To adjust the restrictor on the piston bottom side

220
134
133
121
107
61
23

should not increase on the piston bottom side of

has to move evenly, without jerks, and the pressure

If necessary, adjust the stop screw 61 on the load

Fully extend the stick and then retract it. The stick
emerges without air bubbles, retighten the bleeder screw 11.

piston rod side and the primary pressure relief valve 121.

rod side)






























































































































































1. Lower attachment to the ground and remove caps from test points M.

Stop screw

bottom side)

Stick cylinder


























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Adjust the engine speed to mode L (oil temperature should be f50∞ C).

Load check valve

VI Adjustment procedure of load check valve on stick cylinder, see page No. 16.04.05

Primary relief valve

Spool valve / stick cylinder

2. The load check valve on the piston rod side replaces the standard resctrictor check valve.

The servo control is permanently vented through the installation of a nozzle 35 in the piston 31.

5. Remove the pressure gauges. Remove the test fittings and reinstall the caps on test points M.


























































































































































































































































































































































































































































































3. Adjustment of secondary pressure relief valve 5.1 (piston bottom side) and 5.2 (piston rod side)

Secondary relief valve / stick cylinder (piston

Secondary relief valve / stick cylinder (piston




























































































































































































































































































































If fine control still cannot be reached, despite a vented system, then the shim 64 can be removed to change the

The stick has to move evenly without jerks, and the pressure should not increase on the piston rod
Bleed the servo line by loosening this screw 11 and actuating the servo control at the same time. When oil

Raise the pressure for the secondary pressure relief valves 133 on the piston bottom side, 134 on the

16.04.04
side of the stick cylinder. If necessary, adjust the stop screw 61 on the load check valve 1.1 on the
Fully extend the stick cylinder. Adjust the pressure relief valves 5.1 or 5.2 on both adjustment screws
For that reason, a bleeder screw 11 has been integrated in the servo area of the load check valve, see diagram
If the attachment can no longer be controlled sensitively (jerky movements), then it is possible that air

Readjust the primary 121 and secondary pressure relief valves 133 and 134 again. See "Pressure

Schematic for load check valve for stick cylinder (both sides : piston bottom and piston rod side)

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 934 > R 944
Type
Ab
Datum Load check valve > Leak oil free From
Depuis
5001
Edition
05.99 Rexroth Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.04.05
 " Rexroth " > Load Check Valves

The load check valve is combined in a special attachment kit for each machine.
Included are the MHRB 32 NG check valves and the necessary hydraulic hoses with fittings and mounting
brackets.
¡ Use
The load check valve is installed directly on the hydraulic connection of the boom cylinder (piston
bottom side).
As an example the figure below shows two leak oil free load check valves mounted to the boom
cylinders having their bottom side fixed to the uppercarriage.
The load check valve consists of a brake piston 2 with load holding valve, an oppening piston 3 and a
direct acting secondary pressure relief valve 5.
The valve prevents uncontrolled lowering of the attachment or load, in case a hydraulic line breaks. The
load check valve closes off the appropriate cylinder connection leak oil free if the control pressure
connection is without pressure.

II Function, see diagram and schematics on pages no. 16.05.03, 05.

1. To "lift" attachments (Flow from A Æ C)
When a cylinder is lifted, the pump pressure is applied to the port A of the load check valve.
Hydraulic oil flows via the check valve integrated in the secondary relief valve 5 and actuates the
cylinder via connection C. After the lifting movement is completed, the check valve in the relief
valve 5 closes.
The return line is closed off, the load is hold leak oil free.

R 934 > 944 Litronic

5001 Æ
16.05>01
Issue: 09 / 2001
 2. To "lower" attachments (Oil flow CÆ A)
The control pressure to move the spool valves to lower the attachments is also applied to
connection "Pst" of the load check valve and acts onto the piston 31 which is displaced against the
force of the spring 29, and the poppet 28 opens.
This causes the load pressure behind the regulating piston 23 to drop down to the pressure at tank
connection "Dr", via the poppet 28.
The further increase of the control pressure Pst will move the piston 32 against the force of the
spring 25 and the connection "C > A" will open.
The opening cross>section of the control spool 23 and thus the rate of flow from C Æ A is
depending on the adjusted spring charachteristic and on the control pressure in "Pst". The flow is
therefore controlled by means of the control pressure. Opening of the control spool 23 is as good as
independent of the return pressure "A".
The secondary pressure relief valve 5 is connected to cylinder port "C". When the externally settable
pressure is reached, the relief valve poppet opens and makes the connection to return port "A". This
relief valve poppet is pressure>compensated, so that the forces that result from the return pressure
cancel each other out. This means that the opening of pressure relief valve is independent of return
pressure "A".
III Disassembly of load check valve for sealing and repair
Do not disconnect lines or hoses, or remove fittings, caps or covers before the attachment is
lowered to the ground, the engine is turned off, the remaining pressures in the working circuit
are released by actuating both joysticks, with the ignition key in contact position and before
the pressure in the hydraulic tank is released by unscrewing one turn the breather filter on the
tank.
Notice : The load check valve does not need to be removed from the hydraulic cylinder to achieve the
works described hereafter.
If necessary, the control pressure and tank lines must be previously disconnected or removed.
1. Removal of the load holding and brake valve 2
Remove the pressure line from connection "Pst". Unscrew the cover 36 and take it off complete with
piston 32 and o>ring 37. Take the complete control unit (piston 21, piston 23 with valve seat 22 and
spring 25) out of the valve housing 1.
Notice : The disassembly of the complete control unit is not necessary for the sealing works on the
load check valve.
Remove the opening piston 31 out of piston 21. Remove the o>rings 26 and retaining rings 26a and
replace with new rings.
2. Removal of the secondary relief valve 5
Unscrew the relief valve complete, remove the seal rings and replace by new one.

09 / 2001
16.05>02
IV Assembly of load check valve after sealing and repair
Before assembly, check all parts if they can be reused.
Replace and lightly lubricate all seals before assembly.
1. Installation of pressure relief valve 5
Attach the complete relief valve 5 to the housing and tighten with prescribed torque.
2. Installation of the holding and brake valve 2
Carefully insert the complete control unit 2 into the housing. Push the piston 31 into the piston 21.
Insert the piston 32 into the cover 36, fit the cover with a new o>ring 37 and screw it into the valve
housing while making sure the o>ring is seated correctly.
Tighten the cover with the prescribed tightening torque.
3. Adjust the pressure relief valve to correct setting , siehe adjustment pressure .

Tightenig torques :
Sec. pressure relief valve 5 . . . 150 Nm
Piston 21 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Nm
Cover 36 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 Nm

1 Housing 28 Poppet
2 Load holding and brake valve 29 Spring
21 Piston 3 Opening piston cpl.
22 Valve seat 31 Piston
23 Regulating piston 32 Piston
24 O>ring 36 Cover
25 Spring 37 O>ring
26 O>ring
5 Secondary pressure relief valve
26a Retaining ring
27 Sleeve 9 O>ring

R 934 > 944 Litronic 16.05>03

5001 Æ
Issue: 09 / 2001
 V Adjustment procedure of load check valve on boom cylinder, see
page no. 16.05.05
1. Adjustment of secondary pressure relief valves 5
Since the secondary pressure relief valves relieve the high
pressure to be limited at port C to port A,the adjusted relief
pressure of the valve cannot be checked while increasing the
high pressure in A (secondary pressure relief valves 5 will open
but no oil discharge is achieved).
By the fact, the relief pressure of the secondary valves 5 of the
Rexroth load check valves for boom cylinders R934>R944 cannot
be checked when the valves are mounted to the machine.
The setting of the secondary relief valves (420+20 bar) is higher
than the setting of the secondary pressure relief valve for boom
cylinder extension 126 which is mounted in the main control
valve block.

3. Adjustment of the lowering speed of the working attachment

The lowering speed of the attachment can not be adjusted at the
load check valves.
The lowering speed is influenced by the mounting of load check
valves, but it can be adjusted exclusively via the throttle check
valve 162 mounted to the main control valve 100 , see "Pressure
checks and adjustments" in the section Hydraulic Circuit.

16.05>04 09 / 2001


5001 Æ

R 934 > 944 Litronic

Schematic for load check valves installation on boom cylinders (piston bottom side)

2 Brake valve

163 Check valve

1 Brake piston

210 Boom cylinders

cylinders retract

cylinders extend

211 Distribution block

cylinders retraction

Issue: 09 / 2001
16.05>05





















































101 Spool valve / Boom cylinder

162 Throttle check valve / boom

120 Primary pressure relief valve

126 Secondary relief valve / boom
125 Secondary relief valve / boom

5 Secondary pressure relief valve

215 Line for pressure compensation





































































































































































 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer
Task
The hydraulic hammer is used in road and below ground construction during demolition and special work
and especially in quarries to compress, rip up, smash and reduce various materials in size.

Any Liebherr hydraulic excavator can be used as hammer and energy carrier. It must be ensured that the
required hydraulic power (pressure and oil quantity) to operate the hydraulic hammer does not exceed the
actual power of the excavator, see also corresponding data pages, No. 16.22>03 > 16.22>14.

Caution:
Especially in hydraulic hammer application, due to dusty working conditions, there is the danger that the
hydraulic oil in the excavator will be contaminated to a greater extent than normally. This can lead to
premature wear of hydraulic components, especially parts of the pump.
For that reason, Liebherr requires the following for all excavators, which are used for hydraulic hammer
operation:
> The hydraulic oil must be changed every 500 operating hours.
> The normal cartridge in the return filter / hydraulic tank (20 / 5 om) must be replaced with a 10 om filter
element
> This fine filter cartridge (10 om ) must be replaced every 100 ( 500 * ) operating hours.
> The bleeder filter / hydraulic tank ( 7 om ) must be replaced with a 2 om fine filter.
> This filter ( 2 om ) must be replaced every time the hydraulic oil is changed ( every 500 hrs. ) .
> When changing the hydraulic oil, the hydraulic tank must be cleaned and the oil must be drained from all
hydraulic cylinders.
> After refilling the system, a cleaning element ( 5 om ) should be used in the return filter, which should be
replaced after 50 operating hours with a fine filter element ( 10 om ) .
> The hydraulic oil must be checked regularly for contamination in a lab (oil analysis ) .
* valid from new filter models.

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>01

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
The following items are supplied by all manufacturers and are responsible for service, warranty, etc. .

Items supplied by the hammer manufacturer :

1. Hydraulic hammer
2. Tools
3. Retainer or excavator connector section

Items supplied by Liebherr:

1. Installation kit for hydraulic hammmer in basic machine
2. Lines for hydraulic hammer on basic boom or boom or gooseneck boom
3. Lines for hydraulic hammer on bucket stick

Function with schematic and pressure adjustment regulation for installation kit AHS 11 or AHS 12

The following charts list recommended hammer models, type and assignment to our excavator models.

16.22>02 05 / 2000
 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Atlas Copco

Tex 700 H Tex 900 H Tex 900 HS Tex 1400 HS Tex 1800 HS Tex 2000 HS

Weight 1 ) 715 860 925 1460 2125 2460

Oil requirement l / min 55 > 120 55 > 120 55 > 120 80 > 180 110 > 120 110 > 120

Operating pressure / 140 100 > 140 100 > 140 100 > 160 100 >160 100 >160
Hammerar

Adjustment pressure 160 160 160 180 180 180

of exavator, bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left

Can be installed on :

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d d d

A/R 914 Litronic d d d

A/R 924 Litronic d 5)

R 934 Litronic d 6) d 6)

R 944 Litronic d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from the operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>03

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Euroram
RM 115 RM 120 RM 130 RM 140 RM 145 RM 160

Weight 1 ) 975 1225 1475 1750 2250 2750

Oil requirement l / min 85 > 115 110 > 145 110 > 145 145 > 175 160 > 195 190 > 255

Operating pressure / Hammer 120 > 130 120 > 130 120 > 130 120 > 130 140 > 195 140 > 150

Adjustment pressure of 150 150 150 150 200 170

excavator, bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left

Can be installed on :

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d d 3)

A/R 914 Litronic d d

A/R 924 Litronic d d 5)

R 934 Litronic d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from the operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>04 05 / 2000
 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer
Type

FRD
HB 10 G HB 15 G HB 20 G HB 30 G

Weight 1 ) 815 1115 1625 2220

Oil requirement l / min 70 > 105 90 > 120 125 > 190 150 > 190

Operating pressure / Hammer 140 > 160 150 > 170 160 > 180 160 >180

Adjustment pressure of 180 190 200 200

excavator bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left

Can be installed on :

A/R 900 B Litronic d d

A/R 904 Litronic d d

A/R 914 Litronic d d

A/R 924 Litronic d

R 934 Litronic d 6)

R 944 Litronic d

Bemerkungen :
1) incl standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>05

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

INDECO
MES 1750 MES 2000 MES 2500 MES 3000 MES 3500 MES 5000

Weight 1 ) 950 1200 1500 1800 2200 2800

Oil requirement l / min 85 > 115 110 > 145 125 > 155 145 > 175 160 > 195 190 > 255

Operating pressure / 120 > 130 120 > 130 120 > 130 120 > 130 140 > 150 140 > 150
Hammer

Adjustment pressure of 150 150 150 150 170 170

excavator bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d d 3)

A/R 914 Litronic d d

A/R 924 Litronic d d 5)

R 934 Litronic d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>06 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Krupp
HM 560 HM 720 HM 780 HM 960 HM 1000 HM 1500

Weight 1 ) 830 1180 1200 1600 1700 2150

Oil requirement l / min 70 > 120 90 > 120 / 100 > 140 110 > 140 130 > 160 140 > 180
140 > 170 8) 130 > 170 8)

Operating pressure / Hammer 170 140 > 170 / 160 > 180 160 > 180 160 >180 160 >180
90 > 120 8) 120 > 140 8)

Adjustment pressure of 190 190 200 200 200 200

excavator bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) right right right right right right

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d 3) d 3)

A/R 914 Litronic d 4) d 4)

A/R 924 Litronic d d

R 934 Litronic d d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat 8) only in low pressure version
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>07

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type
Montabert
BRH 570
BRV 700 BRV 32 BRV 1200 BRV 1600 BRV 45 BRV 55
BRM 900

Weight 1 ) 955 1100 1380 1505 2150 2440 3170

Oil requirement l / min 100 > 140 110 > 145 125 > 155 140 > 170 200 > 230 180 > 265 240 > 320
100 > 150

Operating pressure/ 140 85 135 155 165 165 165

Hammer 125

Adjustment pressure of 160 110 160 180 190 190 190

excavator bar 150
see AHS 11. AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d d d 3)

A/R 914 Litronic d d d 4) d 4)

A/R 924 Litronic d d d 5)

R 934 Litronic d d d 6) d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>08 05 / 2000
 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer

Type
NPK
H7X H8XA H10XE E12X H12X E15X H16X

Weight 1 ) 1060 1250 1600 1850 2100 2500 2700

Oil requirement l / min 90 > 140 100 > 150 100 > 150 165 > 210 125 > 155 180 > 265 140 > 180
8) 170 > 210 175 > 225

Operating pressure / 120 > 140 130 > 150 130 > 150 160 > 180 160 > 180 170 > 190 160 > 180
Hammer 8) 120 > 140 130 > 150

Adjustment pressure of 160 170 170 200 200 200 200

excavator bar 160 170
see AHS 11. AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d

A/R 914 Litronic d

A/R 924 Litronic d d

R 934 Litronic d d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d d d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat 8) only for low pressure version
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>09

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Rammer
S29N/ E 64 / E 66 N / G 80NC/
S29C E 64 C E 66 C E 68 / C S 83 PRO S84

Weight 1 ) 540/820 1040 1330 1710 2260 2350 2900

Oil requirement l / min 60 > 135/ 70 > 130 100 > 170 120 > 200 160 > 230 160 > 230 210 > 310
60 > 120

Operating pressure / 175 / 190 / 135 > 145 135 > 145 130 > 140 140 > 150 135 > 145
Hammer 200 135 > 145 120 > 160

Adjustment pressure of 200 / 210 / 170 170 160 170 / 170

excavator bar 220 170 180
see AHS 11. AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d d

A/R 904 Litronic d d

A/R 914 Litronic d d

A/R 924 Litronic d d

R 934 Litronic d d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>10 05 / 2000
 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Stanley
MB 875 MB 1950 MB 1975 MB 2950 MB 2975 MB 3950

Weight 1 ) 495 1000 1100 1840 1910 2290

Oil requirement l / min 83 > 115 100 > 150 100 > 150 130 > 190 130 > 190 190 > 265

Operating pressure / Hammer 125 130 130 140 140 145

Adjustment pressure of 150 150 150 160 160 170

excavator bar
see ASH, AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d d d

A/R 914 Litronic d d d

A/R 924 Litronic d d 5)

R 934 Litronic d d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d d

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>11

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Tabe
AGB 1000 AGB 1300 AGB 1600 AGB 2000

Weight 1 ) 1000 1200 1600 2000

Oil requirement l / min 115 > 150 140 > 150 165 > 175 170 > 180

Operating pressure / Hammer 80 > 90 100 > 120 130 > 140 130 >140

Adjustment pressure of 110 140 160 160

excavator bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) no data no data no data no data

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d

A/R 914 Litronic d

A/R 924 Litronic d

R 934 Litronic d

R 944 Litronic d

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>12 05 / 2000
 Hydraulikhammer
Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Vibra > Ram

VRH 115 S VRH 135 S VRH 150 S

Weight 1 ) 1280 1510 2250

Oil requirement l / min 90 > 120 100 > 135 100 > 165
130 > 170 8) 130 > 170 8)

Operating pressure / Hammer 140 > 170 150 > 180 160 > 180
100 > 120 8) 120 > 180 8)

Adjustment pressure of 190 200 200

excavator bar 140 8) 200 8)
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left left left

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic

A/R 904 Litronic d 3)

A/R 914 Litronic d

A/R 924 Litronic d

R 934 Litronic d d 6)

R 944 Litronic d d

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat 8) only for low pressure version
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick2.10 m and 2.60 m

A / R 900 B > 924 Li from 6001 16.22>13

R 934 > 944 Li from 5001
Issue: 05 / 2000
 Hydraulic Hammer
Type

Wimmer
W > 550 W > 660 W > 770

Weight 1 ) 1050 1700 2250

Oil requirement l / min 70 > 120 120 > 160 160 > 230

Operating pressure / Hammer 120 > 165 120 > 165 120 > 165

Adjustment pressure of 180 180 180

excavator bar
see AHS 11, AHS 12

Return flow 2) left / right right right

Can be installed on:

A/R 900 B Litronic d

A/R 904 Litronic d

A/R 914 Litronic d

A/R 924 Litronic d

R 934 Litronic d 6)

R 944 Litronic d 7)

Notes :
1) incl. standard chisel and suspension
2) as seen from operator's seat
3) only with bucket stick 2.20 m and 2.70 m
4) only with bucket stick 2.40 m and 3.00 m
5) only with bucket stick 1.80 m and 2.40 m
6) only with bucket stick 2.00 m and 2.50 m
7) only with bucket stick 2.10 m and 2.60 m

16.22>14 05 / 2000
Task
For added attachments, which can be installed on the hydraulic excavator, various components, hydraulic lines
and hoses to control and drive the attachment are necessary. These items have been combined in a so>called
installation kit. Since these added attachment kits for excavators vary greatly, suitable installation kits have
been designed for certain attachments.
The following installation kit AS1 is necessary for the installation of the following added attachments on
excavators:
Hydraulic grapple rotary drive
Ditchcleaning bucket, w. hydraulic tilt
Hydraulically actuated quick change adapter *

Grapple rotary drive

with 1 or 2 oil Motors

Ditchcleaning
bucket

Quick change
adapter

* For description of design, function of

the quick change adapter and
schematics, refer to section 16.14

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Installation Kit AS1 From
Depuis
6001
Edition
07.99 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.70.01
Task and operation, see schematic and illustration on page 16.70.06 > 09
The AS1 makes it possible for the operator to turn the grapple to the left or right via the two buttons S5 or to
swing the bucket into the correct position.
For this purpose, the flow from the variable displacement pump 20 to the oil motor 550 for the grapple rotary
drive is controlled>via the added control spool 540>flanged onto the swing gear axle 120.

Switch S19
as preselection switch for the grapple rotary drive or swing
movement of the bucket
Switch S5
as control switch for rotary movement of the grapple or swing
movement of the ditch cleaning bucket
Function of installation kit AS1
1. Neutral position
The solenoids Y22 / Y23 are not energized, which means
the pressure to the control spool 540 is shut off and the
control lines are relieved to the tank. The variable
displacement double pump 20 is in stand>by position or is
available for other users.

2. Control of oil motor 550 for grapple rotary drive or cylinders 560 for rotating bucket
The electrical system for the installation kit is turned on with push button S19> located on the right hand side
in the control panel. The integrated LED in the button S19 lights up.
lf the left or right switch S5 > integrated in the joystick of the left pilot control unit 80 > solenoid Y22 or Y23
for the added control axle is energized and the control spool 540 is moved to working position with
maximum servo pressure.
The pump 20 supplies oil according to the quantity set on the control spool 540 and the oil flows now from
control valve block 100 via the swing gear axle 120 and the added control axle 540 connection "A02" for
movement to the right or connection "B02" for movement to the left to the oil motor 550 of the grapple
rotary drive. The oil motor 550 turns the installed grapple via a swing ring to the right or left.
lf a rotating bucket is installed, the oil flows from connection "A02" for movement to the right or "B02" for
movement to the left via the dual check valve 561, connection "C > A" or "D > B " and restrictor 562 to cylinder
560 piston bottom or piston rod side.
Pressure builds up which opens the hydraulically releasabel dual check valve 561 to the return side. The
cylinder 560 moves in or out and turns the bucket via a corresponding kinematic to the desired horizontal
position.
The return oil from oil motor 550 or cylinder 560 flows via connection "B02 or A02" of the added control axle
540, swing gear axle 120, back to the control valve block 100. lf a rotating bucket is installed, the oil flows also
via the dual check valve 561, connection "B>D" or "A>C".
The dual acting pressure relief valve 551 secures the oil motor 550 on the primary side. lf the solenoid valves
Y22 / Y23 of the added control axle 540 are switched to neutral position during a rotating movement, then
the oil motor acts as a pump. The created overpressure in L or R is relieved by the pressure relief valve 551.
The pressure relief valves 541 / 542 which are integrated in the add control axle 540 act as secondary pressure
relief valves > for the installation of a rotating bucket as primary relief valves.
In addition, for this bucket installation, pressure relief is provided by the secondary pressure relief valves 562
/ 563 in the dual check valve 561.
To increase the turning momentum on the grapple rotary drive, a second oil motor 550 is installed, see also
schematic on page 16.70.09.

16.70.02
GENERAL DATA

Adjustment values, which must be observed at installation of AS 1

Attachments Pressure relief

and corresponding PR valves Primary side Secondary side

Secondary PR valve 541 / 542 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 +10 bar

(This valve limits the"LS" and therfore the working
pressure on test point 45)
in the added control axle 540

Primary PR valves 551 / 552 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 +10 bar

(Primary relief for oil motor 550 / grapple rotary drive)

Secondary PR valves 562 / 563 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ±20 bar

(Secondary relief for cylinder 560 / rotating bucket )

Torque value of Allen head screws on block 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Nm

Max flow on control valve block 540 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 l/min

(via limitation of piston stroke)

Stroke limitation of control spool

Spool 540 Dimension "Y" of stop screw 540.1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm
Dimension "Y" of stop screw 540.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 mm

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Installation Kit AS1 From
Depuis
6001
Edition
07.99 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.70.03
 Pressure check ancl adjustment of pressure relief valves for
hydraulic installation kits AS1
1. Important :
1.1 The pressure must be adjusted with the hydraulic oil at
operating temperature and the engine running in mode L
( ca. 1500 min>1 ).
1.2 To adjust the pressure, use only glycerine filled pressure
gauges with a reading accuracy of ± 1 %
1.3 Only authorized LIEBHERR personnel may work on and /
or adjust the valves during the warranty period.
1.4 All PR valves must be secured with a lead seal or caps after
adjustment to deter access by unqualified personnel.
1

2. Pressure check and adjustment of primary pressure relief

valves 541 / 542 on added control valve 540 , see fig. 1 and 2
2.1 Remove the cap and install a pressure gauge to test
point45.
2.2 For grapple rotary drive, disconnect the line from
connection A02 / B02 to the oil motor 550, close it off and
actuate the rotary drive for a moment.
2.3 Compare the pressure on the pressure gauge with the
given pressure, see page no.16.70.03.
lf necessary, correct the pressure on adjustment screw of
the corresponding PR valve 541 / 542.
To do so, loosen the lock nut and turn the adjustment
screw with SW 6 socket wrench:
Turn the screw in = to increase pressure
Turn the screw out = to decrease pressure
2
2.4 After correct adiustment, tighten the lock nut.
2.5 Remove the pressure gauge and close off the test point 45

16.70.04
3. Check the dual sided primary pressure relief valve 551 / 552
(see fig. 3)
> This ß is not for installation kit AS1 for rotating bucket
3.1 Remove the cap on test point 45 and connect a
pressure gauge,seefig. 1.
3.2 Block the grapple rotary drive and actuate the
solenoid Y22/Y23 on both sides. Compare the pressure
on the pressure gauge with the given pressure, see
page no. 16.70.03.
The adjustment can only be changed by inserting or
removing shims between the spring and the plug in PR
valve 551 / 552, see fig. 3.
3.3 Remove the pressure gauge and close off the test
point 45.
3

4. Check the secondary PR valves 562 / 563 , (see fig. 4)

> This ß is only for installation kit AS1 for rotating bucket.
4.1 The two secondary pressure relief valves 562 / 563
have been adjusted at the factory and cannot be
checked easily.
4.2 The inspection is limited to the condition of the
springs in the PR valve 562 / 563 ( check seating or if
spring is broken ).
4.3 Remove the screws and the plates to check the spring.
Caution : The springs are pretensioned to a high
degree! Also pay attention to the inserted
spacers.

4
5. Flow adjustment for Control Valve 540 (grapple rotating
speed )
5.1 The grappel rotating speed is determined by the
maximum flow through the control piston 540.
This value is set at the factory via the stroke limiation 540.1
or 540.2, see fig. 5, and should not be changed.
5.2 In certain cases, the flow and the rotating speed of the
grapple can be changed by turning the stop screw in
or out:
Turn stroke limitation out = to increase the speed
Turn stroke limitation in = to decrease the speed
5.3 After the speed adjustment, counter the stop screws.

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Installation Kit AS1 From
Depuis
6001
Edition
12.01 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.70.05
 Location of components

Variable displacement pump 20

with servo oil pump 30

Control valve block 100

Added control valve with integrated control spool 540, flanged
onto the swing gear axle 120
Solenoid valves Y22 / Y23
Primary pressure relief valves 541 / 542 screwed into 540

R 900 B / 6001 R 900 B / 6135

R 904 / 6001 R 904 / 6370 Button S19, located in the control panel
The symbol assigned to button S19 has been changed during
series:
> first symbol "rotatable grapple"
> now symbol "rotating device"
See modification mark "e" in subgroup 1.01.
Notice: In both cases the function of S19 is to make alive the push
buttons S5 which are situated at top of the left joystick
handle and control the solenoid valves Y22 and Y23 of
the additional attachment AS1.

16.70.06
Switch S5L / S5R, located in the left joystick 80

Oil motor 550 with integrated primary pressure relief valves

551 / 552 on grapple rotary drive

Dual check valve 561 with hydr. release with secondary

pressure relief valves 562 / 563

Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Installation Kit AS1 From
Depuis
6001
Edition
07.99 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.70.07
 1 to hydraulic tank For the grapple rotary drive
6 to oil cooler 550 Hydraulic motor / grapple rotary drive
20 from the main pump 551 Prim. press. relief valve / grapple drive right
23 to the pump regulator 552 Prim. press. relief valve / grapple drive left
41 Test point / pump pressure
45 Test point / LS pressure For the ditchcleaning bucket, w. hydraulic tilt
50 from servo oil unit 560 Hydr. cylinder / tilt bucket
88 Distributor block 561 Dual check valve
100 Control valve block 562 Sec. press. relief valve / piston rod side
120 Spool valve / swing 563 Sec. press. relief valve / piston bottom side
160 Spool valve / travel 564 Throttle valve
260 Spool valve / bucket *
540 Spool valve / grapple rotary drive For the hydraulically actuated quick change adapter
541 Sec. press. relief valve / swing right 570 Locking cylinder
542 Sec. press. relief valve / swing left 571 Valve
544 Compensator 572 Filter
S5L/R Switch / grapple rotary drive f Y28>1 Solenoid valve / valve 571
S19 Switch / grapple drive f Y28>2 Solenoid valve / valve 571
Y22 Solenoid valve / grapple drive left
Y23 Solenoid valve / grapple drive right * See Hydraulic System, group 6.
f See Electrical System, group 8.

16.70.08
 Benennung/Description/D±nomination Typ
Model R 900 B & R 904
Type
Ab
Datum Installation Kit AS1 From
Depuis
6001
Edition
07.99 Blatt
Date Page
Feuille 16.70.09
Task
For added attachments, which can be installed on the hydraulic excavator, various components, hydraulic lines
and hoses to control and drive the attachment are necessary. These items have been combined in a so>called
installation kit. Since these added attachment kits for excavators vary greatly, suitable installation kits have
been designed for certain attachments.
The following installation kit AS1 is necessary for the installation of the following added attachments on
excavators:
Hydraulic grapple rotary drive
Ditchcleaning bucket, w. hydraulic tilt
Hydraulically actuated quick change adapter *

Grapple rotary drive

with 1 or 2 oil Motors

Ditchcleaning
bucket

Quick change
adapter

* For description of design, function of

the quick change adapter and
schematics, refer to section 16.14

R 914 >R 924 / 6001 Æ 16.72.01

Issue : 12 / 2001
Task and operation, see also schematic and illustration on pages no. 16.72.07 to 13
Installation kit AS1 allows the operator, via both switches S5 at top of the joystick handle, to rotate the grapple
left or right, to swivel the rotating bucket into the correct position, .....
When the spool of the added control valve 540 is displaced, the oil flow of variable displacement double pump
20 / 21 is drawn to the hydraulic actuator of the installation kit AS1 (oil motor 550 for grapple drive, cylinder
560 for inclination of ditchcleaning bucket, cylinder 570 for quick change coupling, ......

The switch S19 is used for pre>selection of (i. e. to make alive)

the push buttons S5.

The switches S5L / S5R control, when S19 is preselected, the

solenoid valves Y22 andY23 which displace the spool valve
controlling the hydraulic motor or cylinder.

Switch S85
The purpose of the switch S85 is to adapt the answer of the LS
regulator of the working pump to the driven accessory.
>Since R914 / SN 6852 and R 924 / SN 6400, the switch S85 is
integrated in the control unit (symbol grapple). It must be
actuated when the installation kit AS1 is used to control a
rotatable grapple.
>At beginning of series, S85 was a push button integrated in
the rear control desk and which had to be actuated each
time the installation kit AS1 was used to control any user
but a rotatable grapple.
See also description page no. 16.72.04.

16.72.02 Issue : 12 / 2001



16.72.04

no. 16.72.11.








































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































1. Neutral position

handling materials.
installation kit AS1.

max. control pressure.

disposal of other users.

by pressure relief valve 551.

Function of the installation kit AS1

(see shematic on page no. 16.72.13).

560, piston bottom or piston rod side.

for the circuit of the ditch cleaning bucket.

The integrated diode in switch S19 lights up.

rotating bucket is installed, as a primary relief valve.

flows via dual check valve 561 (connections "B > D" or "A > C").

3. Solenoid valve 78 for suppression of signal "LS > closing grapple"

Hydraulic motor 550 turns the grapple via a swing gear to the left or the right.

Cylinder 560 extends or retacts and turns the bucket to the desired horizontal position.

control valve 540 connection "A6", for left roation or connection "B6", for right rotation.

The two stage pressure relief valve 551 provides primary protection for hydraulic motor 550.

be turned on to cut off the supply of the solenoid valve Y78 (see shematic on page no. 16.72.12).
thetouch S19, together with the switches S5 which control the valves Y22 and Y23 of the kit AS1.




































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































Actuate the installation kit via switch S19 > located in the display panel to the right of the operator's seat.

Issue : 12 / 2001